Re wa
ἢ ue τ Ἧι
ἈΥΠΎ {᾿ς 4 ia τ ἜΘΟΣ ἡ ΤῸ A ὯΝ Mate Re OMe Κα τον
τ τὰς - * - =. ταις = Saar = Sn κοτε τα tin een eres Seen pen Sees =
ieee weenie ene
Seo
es oe rea eae
; δ ἢ {
ah ay
i ee ἢ
BORG IO Gai ες DAREN Coa LAN \ ¥ renee a He tf
Hie
ee
See rin aemacrata
ee
᾿ a Ms oe | Ἢ ἐν
Pair ne
ἣν Hee
> 4, a aoe) aan χὴν s
στα ΟΝ =
Sper SOS - a ¥)
op wp rg oI, ὅτ ἢ
ORATIONS OF LYSIAS.
WITH
INTRODUCTIONS AND EXPLANATORY NOTES,
BY
WILLIAM ARNOLD STEVENS,
PROFESSOR OF NEW TESTAMENT EXEGESIS IN ROCHESTER THEOLOGICAL SEMINARY.
λόγῳ δὲ πεῖσαι. Funeral Oration, 19
NINTH. EDITION.
CHICAGO:
S. C. GRIGGS AND COMPANY. 1893.
CopyrIGHT, 1876. By S. C. GRIGGS & CO.
University Press: Joun Witson & Son, CAMBRIDGE.
SRLFE URL
pe./ {1701
J
To my Father,
REV. JOHN STEVENS, D.D.,
AS A PUBLIC ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF HIS INVALUABLE COUNSEL AND ENCOURAGEMENT, ESPECIALLY DURING MY COLLEGIATE AND POST-GRADUATE STUDIES,
THIS VOLUME
IS GRATEFULLY AND AFFECTIONATELY INSCRIBED.
Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2007 with funding from Microsoft Corporation
https://archive.org/details/selectorationsof0Olysiiala
PREFACE,
Tue use of the orations of Lysias with different classes during the past thirteen years has more than confirmed my first impression of their great value in a course of Greek instruction. An edition of the ora- tions contained in this volume was completed two years ago last winter, but the manuscript was destroyed while on its way to the printer by the burning of an express- car. It had been begun at the suggestion of the late Professor Hadley, and a portion of the work had received the benefit of his critical revision, —one of the last of those unheralded services which that noble-hearted scholar, too humble and too great to covet fame, and setting all too low an estimate on. his exhaustless stores of learning, was ever so generously rendering on every hand. The completion of my task for the second time —fulfilling but tardily the promise made to the pub- lishers — has been delayed until the present by other imperative duties.
The work is especially designed as a reading-book in Attic prose, to follow the Axabasis. The fitness of Lysias’ orations for this purpose will be better under- stood from the account given in the Introductory Sketch. In preparing the Notes it has been my chief aim to guide the student to a reasoned translation. It seems hardly
vi PREFACE.
to be questioned that the value of translation as a mental discipline will depend mainly on the student’s being able to give an intelligent account of his work, — to furnish not only the correct rendering, but the reasons for it. 1 have therefore made numerous grammatical references, particularly in the notes on the twelfth and the thirteenth orations, and on the twenty-second. The latter oration, and the narrative portions of the two former, will be found the most suitable for the use of younger classes, Advanced classes may profitably read the twelfth and thirteenth entire, not only for their historical value, but as specimens of argumentative composition in the foren- sic branch.
Some references have been made to larger grammars, and to works not accessible to the majority of students. Those teachers who read beyond their text-books will not object to these, nor to the occasional mention of parallel passages in orations not found in this volume.
Matters of fact and history have been explained to some extent, but not, it is believed, at so great a length as to interfere with the main purpose of the Notes. The Classical Dictionary and the Dictionary of Antiquities have been constantly referred to, and their use by the student is taken for granted throughout.
The text adopted is that of Scheibe (Teubner’s edi- tion). The few instances in which I have departed from it, in language or punctuation, are mentioned in the Notes. As regards the division of syllables, I have fol- lowed the rule of dividing compound words into the ele- ments out of which they are formed; 6. δ΄. πολεμ-άρχῳ, παρ- εἶναι. This method has reason as well as the authority of Curtius and many other modern grammarians in its favor.
PREFACE: vil
Use has been made of all the best authorities to which I could procure access. Of the most service have been Reiske (the fifth and sixth volumes of his Ovatorum Gre- corum, Lipsi@, 1772); Rauchenstein (Ausgewahlie Reden des Lysias, Sechste verbesserte Auflage) ; and Frohberger, (Ausgewahlte Reden des Lysias, both the larger work in three volumes, and the abridged edition, which appeared last year). Frohberger’s annotations, especially, have been a constant and indispensable help. Other com- mentators are mentioned in the Notes.
The elucidation of the chronology and history of the events referred to in the twelfth and thirteenth orations has been greatly aided by Scheibe’s Dze oligarchische Umwalzung zu Athen am Ende des peloponnesischen Krie- ges; Leipzig, 1841. The principal historical references in the notes are to the histories of Grote and Curtius.
In the preparation of the introductions, among other authorities, I have found of great value Friedrich Blass’s Attische Beredsamkeit. While rewriting my Introduc- tory Sketch Professor R. C. Jebb’s two volumes on the _ Attic Orators from Antiphon to Is@os came to hand, bringing much fresh and stimulating suggestion. I am glad to call the attention of any who may read these pages to that work as one of the most useful contri- butions to the history of Greek literature that English scholarship has for many years produced. An interesting monograph on the style of Lysias is Des Caractéres de l’Attictsme dans l’ Eloquence de Lysias, by Jules Girard, Paris, 1854.
My thanks are due Professor J. R. Boise, of the Uni- versity of Chicago, for various timely suggestions. For information on certain legal technicalities and points of contrast between the ancient and modern codes, I am
Vill PREFACE.
indebted to Samuel J. Thompson, Esq., of Cincinnati, a gentleman who in spite of the demands of an exacting profession has kept fresh his interest in classical studies and the problems of the higher education. Especially do I desire to make full acknowledgment of the help I have received from my colleague in instruction, Mr. Charles Chandler. He has aided me in the revision of the larger part of the manuscript, and also in the proof- reading. His accurate scholarship, combined with rare taste and judgment, has made his heartily rendered assistance of very great value, adding not a little to the service which I trust this book may render to classical students and the cause of sound learning.
GRANVILLE, OHIO, April 26, 1876.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
Page PREFACE . - + 3 ς x s 3 - F : Vv INTRODUCTORY SKETCH OF LYSIAS AND HIS WRITINGS:
I. The Life of Lysias Ξ : ᾿ . ὃ A A xi Il. His Style. - a : 2 : é ; : SS: III. His Genius and Character . : 2 5 ζ ΣΕ Ὁ ΩΥ IV. His Writings . A Wee 3 : ῇ é ; xxvii
ORATIONS.
XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES : Introduction 2 : = - : ; : p 3 Text = ἃ : ; ᾿ > ᾿ 2 πω" XIII. » AGAINST AGORATUS: Introduction é Ξ d x 4 ς ; F 34 Text P ; . ᾿ : ὲ ‘ - ΩΝ VII. CONCERNING THE SACRED OLIVE-TREE: Introduction " : : ὦ 4 : 5 ᾿ 64 Text A ε: ° F - : Ξ 3 δ 67 XXII. AGAINST THE GRAIN-DEALERS: Introduction ἡ : A ; > 5 ὰ : 78 Text 4 F 2 : P ὰ Ν Ἑ a . 80 II. FUNERAL ORATION :
Introduction - ; Α 2 ς : ‘ ; 87 Text 4 ; ᾿ ἢ 4 ᾿ ᾿ ; ᾿ «(QE
Χ TABLE
Notes ON ORATION XII. “e “ec ce XIII. ΓΖ “ce ce VIL
ce {« ςς XXIL
ee {ς {ς Il.
CHRONOLOGICAL TABLE .
OF: CONTENTS.
NOTES.
115
moh. te Sm
162
. 170
175
. 191
INTRODUCTORY SKETCH
OF
LYSIAS AND HIS WRITINGS.
I. THE LIFE OF LYSIAS.
LysIAS, a native, though not a citizen of Athens, was a Sicilian Greek by descent, a son of Cephalus of Syracuse. The year of his birth is altogether uncertain. In the “Lives of the Ten Orators,” a work formerly attributed to Plutarch, 459 B. c. is the date assigned, but there are reasons for believing it to be merely an unfounded inference on the part of the writer. The year 444 B.C. is the date fixed upon by K. F. Hermann after an exhaustive inves- tigation of the chronology of the subject, and the greater number of modern critics are inclined to adopt his view. Others, as Wester- mann, fix the year so late as 432. Rauchenstein, and more recently Jebb, lean to the ancient opinion. On the whole, the correctness of the year 444 as an approximate date is strongly favored by the fact that it best explains the few historical statements that have come down to us concerning Lysias and his father, and the relation in which they stood to their contemporaries. It is known that he lived to the age of eighty, — from 444 to 364, if the date here assumed be the true one.
Cephalus, the father, was a man of wealth and culture who had been induced by Pericles to take up his residence in Athens. There four children were born to him, — three sons, Polemarchus, Lysias, and Euthydemus, and one daughter. His dwelling in the Pirzeus was the abode of hospitality ; Socrates and his friends often met at _
Xil INTRODUCTORY SKETCH.
the table of the genial old man. There Plato has laid the opening scene of the greatest of his works, the Republic, and Cephalus is honored with a worthy part in the conversation. In this home of luxury, culture, and rare discourse, Lysias remained till his fifteenth year, enjoying along with the youth of the most distinguished fam- ilies the best education that Athens could afford.
The next seventeen or eighteen years were passed in Thurii, a flourishing Greek colony of Lower Italy, whither he had gone with his brother Polemarchus after their father’s death. Of the extent and character of their business operations in that city we are not informed. Lysias gave himself chiefly to learned pursuits, his stud- ies taking a rhetorical direction under Tisias, the famous rhetor of Syracuse. Rhetoric, the art of discourse, then embraced a wide range of topics; with the Sicilians it was, in a special sense, the art of beautiful diction (edémera). The studies comprehended under the name of rhetoric formed no small part of the intellectual movement of the age. Lysias threw himself with ardor into these studies, and soon became a proficient in the highly artificial and ornate style of the school in which he was trained. If we were to judge solely from Plato’s representations in the Phaedrus, his earlier productions must have displayed the defects quite as strikingly as the merits of this school. But the grounds are slender for taking the com- position given in that dialogue as a specimen of the art of Lysias. It is more than likely that Plato’s contempt for the sham rhetoric that filled the ears of the multitude with sounding phrases led him to do injustice to Lysias, who was reputed at the time of the com- position of that dialogue to be the leading rhetor in Athens, and was therefore in Plato’s view one of the chief promoters of a demor- alizing tendency in literature and education.
The overthrow of the Athenian party in Thurii, after the destruc- tion of the Sicilian Expedition, brought the two brothers back to Athens. This was in 411. Their lives seem hitherto to have been led in close intimacy, and they now continued their partnership, carrying on a large shield manufactory which employed a hundred and twenty slaves. It stood adjoining the residence of Lysias, in the Pirzus. Polemarchus resided in the upper city. They also had real estate in Athens (three dwelling-houses are mentioned in the Oration Against Eratosthenes), funds that had been invested abroad, besides (in the year 404) a large sum of gold and silver coin
INTRODUCTORY SKETCH. ΧΗ
kept in Lysias’s own house. But business was not allowed to ab- sorb their attention. We find Lysias soon taking rank as the fore- most rhetorician and speech-composer (λογογράφος) in the city. It was a profession exposed to a certain degree of unpopularity, be- cause, among other reasons, it was with many a money-making employment. In Lysias’s case, however, it was during this period merely the employment of his scholarly leisure, being indeed about the only avenue to distinction open to a foreigner of his tastes and inclinations.
How his prospects were changed by the Year of Anarchy, how his brother was seized for summary execution by the tyrants, and all their property within reach confiscated, while he himself barely escaped by secret flight, —is best learned from the orator’s own account in the Oration Against Eratosthenes. During the exile he proved his attachment to his native city, and his devotion to the cause of freedom. He rendered various services to the exiled democrats, and it is especially mentioned that he furnished to Thrasybulus while at Phyle two thousand drachmas, two hundred shields, and a reinforcement of three hundred hired troops. His services were not forgotten by Thrasybulus after the restoration; a decree was passed admitting him to full citizenship. But imme- diately afterwards, on account of some technical irregularity, it was reconsidered and rejected as illegal at the instance of a jealous opponent of Thrasybulus. Lysias remained therefore in his pre- vious status as an igoreAns, a resident possessed of special civic privileges, but without suffrage or eligibility to office.
The year of exile over, he set himself first of all, after the re— establishment of the old order of government, to bring to justice the man most directly concerned in the murder of his brother. This was Eratosthenes, who was still in the city. It was a custom of ancient sanction that the nearest kinsmen of a murdered man should be his avengers, taking the necessary legal measures to secure the conviction and execution of the murderer. In order to accomplish this Lysias would be obliged to appear in person before a court of Athenian citizens, and that at a time when it was peculiarly difficult to gain an impartial hearing. Party spirit was never more rife; the civil war was over, but its clashing feuds and passions remained. For such business as was now in hand the training that Lysias had received was not the best. In an Athenian dicastery, and above
XIV INTRODUCTORY SKETCH.
all at a time like this, the studied elegances and the well-turned phrases and periods of the Sicilian manner were ineffective weap- ons. The contests in the courts were like hand-to-hand fights, where every moment counted, and each stroke must be made to tell. In many classes of actions the law restricted each speaker to a cer- tain time. There were also other more or less distinctly defined traditionary requirements as to the topics, the classes of arguments and their order, and the methods of appeal, while at the same time it was necessary to meet the demand of an Athenian audience for artistic excellence. But how well Lysias discerned the exigencies of the occasion as he prepared himself for this celebrated prosecu- tion, and how he so mastered the situation, as, if not to gain his case, yet to create a new style of forensic oratory, and thereby, as Otfried Miiller declares, to inaugurate a new era in the history of Attic prose, — this is to be learned from the Oration Against Eratos- thenes, the first given in this volume. It is historically the begin- ning of the school of oratory that reached its most perfect develop- ment in Demosthenes. From the time of this oration a new style of discourse began to be heard from the Athenian bema, —an elo- quence founded on nature and truth, but aiming at ideal excellence under the conscious guidance of art.
Whether he obtained a verdict, we are not informed. But from that day he was the first advocate in Athens, the recognized master in forensic oratory. The courts during the years immediately fol- lowing were crowded with cases. It was difficult for the most peaceably inclined to avoid litigation. In the humorous complaint that Lysias puts into the mouth of a wealthy client, matters had come to such a pass that even the unborn children of Athenians shuddered to think of the litigation in prospect for them when they should come into the world. Now the average man might not care to trust to his own legal or rhetorical skill, and the services of an able speech-writer would be in demand. An advocate could render better service to his client by writing a speech for him to deliver, than by personally appearing in court to assist in the conduct of the case. Lysias, therefore, deprived of his fortune, became a profes- sional logographer, and during the remainder of his long life was so successful in his practice, that, out of all the cases intrusted to him, he lost, we are told, but two.
Little is known of his subsequent career. Cicero relates, but the
INTRODUCTORY SKETCH. XV
story is not well authenticated, that when Socrates was awaiting his trial, Lysias brought him a carefully written plea for his defence, which, however, the philosopher declined to use. It has been sup- posed that he took a more prominent part in political affairs after his reputation in practical oratory had become established, but as to this we have no certain information. A passage in Oration XIX. speaks of his having been member of an embassy to Syracuse, to the court of Dionysius the Elder, but the reading is disputed. Once he becomes a conspicuous figure to all Greeks, and this is his last appearance on the page of the historian. It was in 388 B. Ὁ. (ac- cording to Diodorus), at Olympia. Dionysius the tyrant of Syra- cuse had sent a magnificently equipped legation to represent him at the Olympic games, — four-horse chariots to contend in the race- course, distinguished rhapsodists to recite his praises, tents richly adorned with purple and gold,—a spectacle of dazzling splendor such as the festival for many years had not witnessed. But patriotic Greeks could not forget the oppressions exercised upon their coun- trymen, and the conquests over Greeks by which Dionysius had aug- mented his power. Lysias gave expression to the popular indigna- tion in one of the patriotic orations that had come to be a part of the quadrennial celebration. In this discourse, of which a frag- ment only remains, he denounced the Sicilian tyrant and the Persian king as the two great enemies of the Hellenic world. As Diodorus relates (see the fuller narration given by Grote, Vol. XI. pp. 29-34), the multitude were powerfully wrought upon by the speaker, and at once carried away by the impulse of the hour, made a violent assault upon the tents of the legation. At all events the legation proved, so far as its political design was concerned, a complete failure.
IJ. HIS STYLE.
The style of Lysias is peculiarly difficult to describe, or to illus- trate by quotation of detached passages. Each of his orations must be read as a whole in order to appreciate its character as a work of art,—such a work of art as goes far to satisfy Plato’s _ requirement in a discourse, that it should possess a sculpturesque beauty like that of the idealized human form. The writings of
Xvi INTRODUCTORY SKETCH.
Lysias have for us a twofold significance: besides being the prod- ucts of a rare literary genius, a collection unique in forensic oratory, they constitute an epochal creation in Attic prose, marking a new stage of advance in the literary development of Greece. I shall here only enumerate briefly the leading characteristics of his style as compared with that of other writers, and thereby attempt to reach a statement of the fundamental principles of that department of art in which he was in that age a creator, and still remains an acknowledged model.
In regard to the diction and composition of Lysias, modern crit- ics, to the extent that they find themselves competent, have but confirmed the judgment of the ancients, particularly Dionysius of Halicarnassus. The latter made his style the subject of a special treatise. He pronounces Lysias the standard of Atticism, particu- larly of the so-called “plain” style (ἰσχνόν, Lat. senue*), as distin- guished from the “ grand.”
His diction is the purest Attic, not the old Attic, Dionysius tells us, which Plato and Thucydides sought to retain, but the cur- rent idiom of his own day. He uses the best vernacular of con- temporaneous Athens. Though he was of Sicilian parentage, and had lived a number of years in Italy, he is, in respect to the choice of words, an Athenian of the Athenians. It is Quintilian whose cutting criticism exposes the fatal defect of the Asiatic school of oratory as contrasted with the Attic; the former fails, he says, in finding the proper word. Now Lysias has the con- spicuous merit of always having at his command right words (κύρια ὀνόματα), the nearest and best understood words to express the things meant. Thus he selects the concrete rather than the abstract, the specific rather than the general, and avails himself of the ma- terials of current speech in preference to those drawn from poetry and the grandiloquent, semi-poetic diction of the then prevailing oratory. It is to be remembered that prose was not yet freed from the trammels of poetry; it was an almost unheard-of thing that the literary artist could abandon metre, and mould his creations from
ἘΠῚ According to Cicero the chief marks of the ‘genus tenue’ are these : —
“1, ‘In regard to composition, a free structure of clauses and sentences, not strain- ing after a rhythmical period. 2, In regard to diction, (4) purity, (δ) clearness, (c) propriety. 3. Abstemious use of rhetorical figures.’ ”
Jesp’s Aétic Orators, Vol. I. p. 162.
INTRODUCTORY SKETCH. Xvi
the clay of common speech. The success of Lysias in this direc- tion drew admiration even in the times of Dionysius. The latter says: “He seems to talk like the uneducated, but yet in a manner superior to them. He is a master composer in the unmetrical style, having found a peculiar harmony, by which his diction avoids clum- siness and vulgarity, and becomes elegant and graceful.”
In regard to composition his style stands in marked contrast with that of Isocrates. The elaborate periods of the latter are famous. His long and flowing sentences, framed with symmetrical com- pleteness, and obeying with the nicest care the rules of euphony and rhythm, were the delight of many of the ancient rhetoricians. Lysias adopted a looser, freer structure, more like the language of conversation, yet not without an artistic finish and rhythmical move- ment of its own.
In general it may be said that his style is characterized by the primal merits of perspicuity, force, and beauty. Its simplicity and terse directness contribute in a marked degree to its perspicuity. Absence of embellishment is a noticeable feature; there are few rhetorical figures. The orator seems unwilling to have the atten- tion diverted for an instant from the clear, sharp outlines of his narrative or argument. He presses on certo agmine, “with unerr- ing march,” — to use a phrase of Virgil’s, — wasting no words and never losing sight of his main end. His sentences are condensed without being harsh or obscure. Dionysius declares that he sur- passes Thucydides, and even Demosthenes, in the respect that he scarcely ever leaves the reader in doubt as to his exact meaning. Force, the next of the leading qualities named above, is not so ob- viously characteristic of single passages, though, as Cicero remarks, “In Lysia saepe sunt etiam /acer?z, sic ut fieri nihil possit valen- tius”; you do not feel a succession of blows, but a sustained energy, imparting vigor and rapidity to the entire discourse.
It is in narration that Lysias appears to the greatest advantage. His power is shown not so much in cogent logic, as in clear graphic statement. Apparently forgetting the occasion for argument, he proceeds to present the facts as he views them, making the listener an eye-witness or a participant, and awakening him insensibly to an interest in the persons and the transaction. With a construc- tive faculty singularly felicitous and rapid in its working, he brings to view the circumstances of the case, together with the various
XVill INTRODUCTORY SKETCH.
machinery of cause, motive, and incident, until the fabric he has reproduced stands like a present reality before the mind of the hearer. When the statement of the case is complete, argument seems unnecessary. As examples of this effective narration, two passages may be cited: one in Oration ΧΙ]. (§§ 4--- 24), placed first in the present volume, and the other in the Oration on the M/ur- der of Evatosthenes (§§ 5-28), in which Euphiletus, an Athenian citizen, defends himself for having slain the deceased, taken in adultery with his wife,—a picture of manners not surpassed for vividness in Greek literature.
His success as a writer of speeches for clients was due largely to a rare power of personation, the so-called e‘hopoeia. With the art of the dramatic poet or the novelist he divests himself of his own personality, and composes a speech in a style and tone befitting the client by whom it is to be delivered. Says Selden, in his Table- Talk, “‘ He that is to make a speech for the Lord Mayor, must take the measure of his Lordship’s mouth.” Lysias was not only the first among advocates to recognize this principle, but he carried it into practice with admirable success. The speaker, whether a pau- per asking for a continuance of his pension from the public treasury, or a wealthy land-owner repelling the charge of sacrilegious trespass on temple properties, pleads his cause with the skill of a practised advocate, but in forms of thought and speech natural to himself. Each oration was thus, in a new sense, a work of literary art, having an individuality of form corresponding to its inward idea, yet com- plying with the requirements of that exquisite taste for structural proportion that belongs to the best period of Greek art. The chief defect observable in respect to rhetorical form is in arrangement of argumentative topics ; in some of the orations a stricter logical order would seem better adapted to strengthen the effect of the whole. Even here, however, there may have been a deliberate choice of a careless and apparently unstudied arrangement.
On another point I cannot do better than quote the following paragraph from Professor Jebb’s admirable chapter on the Style of Lysias :—
«Tt remains to say a few words on the peculiar and crowning excellence of Lysias in the province of expression, —his famous but inexplicable ‘charm.’ It is noticeable that while the Roman critics merely praise his elegance and polish, regarding it as a simple result of his art, the finer
INTRODUCTORY SKETCH. ΧΙΧ
sense of his Greek critic apprehends a certain nameless grace or charm, which cannot be directly traced to art, which cannot be analyzed or accounted for ; it is something peculiar to him, of which all that can be said is that it is there. What, asks Dionysius, is the freshness of a beauti- ful face? What is fine harmony in the movements and windings of music? What is rhythm in the measurement of times? As these things baffle defi- nition, so does the charm of Lysias. It cannot be taken to pieces by rea- soning ; it must be seized by a cultivated instinct. It is the final criterion of his genuine work. ‘When I am puzzled about one of the speeches as- cribed to him, and when it is hard for me to find the truth by other marks, I have recourse to this excellence, as to the last piece on the board. Then, if the Graces of Speech seem to me to make the writing fair, I count it to be of the soul of Lysias ; and I care not to look further into it. But if the stamp of the language has no winningness, no loveliness, I am chagrined, and I suspect that after all the speech is not by Lysias ; and I do no more violence to my instinct, even though in all else the speech seems to me clever and well finished ; believing that to write well, in special styles other than this, is given to many men; but that to write winningly, gracefully, with loveliness, is the gift of Lysias.’”
It remains briefly to answer the question hinted at in the begin- ning of this section, What are the fundamental principles of the Lysian oratory, considered, namely, as prose composition?
Without assuming to have made an exhaustive analysis, I con- sider that there are three or four that are entitled to special consid- eration.
I. Truthfulness. The general historical accuracy of Lysias I shall have occasion to mention afterwards. The point to be noted here is that truthfulness is a determining element in his style. The clearest possible exhibition of fact as the groundwork of all persuasion, — this idea is a ruling one in his work. He begins no argument without having first attained a clear, coherent conception of the case, so thoroughly elaborated in all its parts and relations that he is able to transfer it to the minds of others with a distinct- ness extraordinarily impressive. The success of his method is of course largely due to an imagination of unusual power; with that, however, there was the still rarer faculty or quality, whether we , consider it native or acquired, of intellectual honesty. This is habitually regulative of his imagination. He is intent on the mas-
‘tery of the facts, and furthermore does not rest satisfied short of
ΧΧ INTRODUCTORY SKETCH.
the utmost possible clearness and precision in the expression of his conceptions.
In general, his work bears the impress of an open, truthful nature; he is a man who sees facts and believes in their reality and their power, who is averse to exaggeration, and who will not strain after effect. A later rhetorician quotes him as saying that “it is not by the style that one’s thought is made great or small; the thought is great that contains much, and small that contains little.” He says plain things in a plain way. For common things he uses common words. Thus it was not alone purity of diction that charmed his critics, but the peculiar harmony of thought and expression. Hence his free- dom from mannerism, and his perpetual freshness: hence an art so admirable that it impresses every reader, but eludes analysis, and defies imitation.
2. His style recognizes the insufficiency of the decorative prin- ciple in literary art. This topic is closely connected with the pre- ceding, and is indeed derivable from it, yet deserves separate mention. The Sicilian school aimed at beautiful expression; the Asiatic school strove to be ornately dignified and grand. Both clung to the form irrespective of the thought, and sought to make oratory impressive by its externals. Atticism, the school which, as has been observed, has Lysias as its most conspicuous representa- tive, constantly demanded that discourse should express thought ; it was not so much to adorn, enrich, ennoble thought, as to express it. Lysias perceived that embellishment could not be made the leading motive. The thought, — and by this we are to understand not merely the facts and their relations, but the emotion, the purpose and convic- tion of the orator, all that in his soul which he would transfer to the mind of the hearer, — this must give form and mould to the discourse.
3. It aims at the control of the will primarily through the intel- lect. Reliance on intellectual conviction as most certain in the end to influence the will is everywhere characteristic of the method of Lysias. We cannot therefore wholly accept the statement of Pro- fessor Jebb, that “the broadest characteristic of modern oratory as compared with the ancient, is the predominance of a sustained ap- peal to the understanding.” It is true that modern oratory, far more than the ancient, goes back to fundamental principles, linking and riveting its conclusions to them by long chains of logic, while the latter relies on personal motives and prejudices, uses a great variety
INTRODUCTORY SKETCH. ΧΧΙ
of precedents and examples, and employs obvious arguments drawn from the circumstances of the case. But it is eminently character- istic of Lysias that he adheres to the principle of effecting persua- sion through the intellect rather than the feelings, and that, not alone by working upon the imagination, but by means of reasoning, A minute analysis of any of his principal forensic discourses will show how all the available resources of argument are drawn upon in sup- port of his position. He depends little on impassioned appeal, or on the impulse communicated from speaker to hearer in the trans- port of the moment. There is manifest a deliberate, self-contained confidence that, if he can make his hearers understand the facts as he does, his purpose is accomplished. Thus the oratory of Lysias, while not in any large sense an appeal to principles, is emi- nently an appeal to the understanding, whether we use this word as referring to the logical faculty merely, or to the intellectual nature as distinguished from the emotional. He finds his way to the feel- ings by a cool, clear statement of facts and reasons, rather than by any exhibition of emotional fervor, or by force of the personal mag- netism of the orator.
4. Economy of the recipient’s attention. There is no need to enlarge upon this point here. That this fundamental principle of effective composition, so clearly unfolded in Herbert Spencer’s well- known essay, is generally regarded in the writings of Lysias, appears from what has been said above in the paragraphs treating of his diction and composition. Indeed, he was forced into compliance with this principle, so far as the economy of time is concerned, by a method not ordinarily applied in modern forensic practice. The laws of the Athenians in some cases, and their custom in others, restricted the pleader to a limited time, and thus necessitated selec- tion and compression of material. He is generally felicitous in the arrangement of words in a sentence, so that the thought is easily taken up as he advances. It should be said, also, that it is under this head we find his most marked defects. A more frequent use of figures would enliven his style, at once quickening the imagination and aiding attention. A structure oftener alternating between the loose and periodic forms would have afforded an agreeable contrast. Demosthenes in this respect improved upon his predecessor, some- times, however, sacrificing perspicuity in detail in his determination to hold the unflagging attention of the audience to his main theme.
xxil INTRODUCTORY SKETCH.
Ill. HIS GENIUS AND CHARACTER. .
To obtain even in faintest outline a conception of Lysias as a man, is far from being an easy task. We are hindered not only by the remoteness of his age, but by the fact that his life was mainly spent in private, and was devoted to scholarly and professional pursuits. Only a few works from his pen remain to us, and but the slightest contemporaneous notices. We have caught a glimpse of him in considering his style, —it being true of him as of every writer pos- sessed of force and originality of mind, that “the style zs the man.” There are, however, some additional points of view from which we may contemplate his career with a livelier and more intelligent interest.
To his contemporaries he was known as Lysias the sophist, — the rhetor, — the λογογράφος, or advocate. The reader of Grecian his- tory and literature will have become more or less familiar with the import of these several designations. The latter technically and more specifically described his profession. The λογογράφος (in the forensic signification of the word) was an advocate who composed speeches for clients that were to plead their own cause in court. There were frequent cases then —afterwards they became still more frequent — where advocates served their clients or friends by per- sonally appearing in court to speak in their behalf, and to aid in the conduct of the case. But it was ordinarily expected in Athens that a citizen should plead his own cause; and if a professional advocate came in person to his assistance, the fact of its being a paid service was usually studiously concealed. Lysias confined himself to writ- ing pleas for his clients to deliver. At the beginning of the fourth century before the Christian era he was by far the most distin- guished legal adviser and advocate of this class in Athens. His broad and generous culture had long given him rank among the foremost of the sophists, not devoted to speculative research as were Protagoras and Plato, but to studies of the rhetorical sort. How prominent a place he occupied may easily be perceived from the Phedrus of Plato, as well as from the manner in which the great philosopher elsewhere singles him out for hostile criticism.
Of his personal appearance we have no historical record. The language of Aristides the sophist (about A. Ὁ, 175), “I saw” (ina
INTRODUCTORY SKETCH. XXill
dream) “Lysias the orator as a comely young man” (νεανίσκον οὐκ ἄχαριν), may have been founded on tradition, or on the representa- tion of him in then existing statues. In private it is probable that his morals were not above those of the average Athenian of his time. His religious attitude can only be negatively inferred; there is little to indicate what were his positive opinions concerning the prevalent religious system, or his temper and convictions regarding the great truths of natural religion, which underlay the popular mythology. In this respect his orations stand in marked contrast with those of Lycurgus, whose reverent tone, to say nothing of the subject-matter of his arguments, reveals a mind deeply imbued with the religious beliefs and traditions of his country.
The most striking trait in the character of Lysias, morally con- sidered, has been alluded to in the previous discussion. I mean his habitual truthfulness. The student who inquires into the historical bearings of his orations will be impressed with their general ac- curacy, and the evident tone of fairness pervading them. With scarcely an exception, so far as I have observed, his historical statements vindicate themselves, when confronted with others that apparently or really contradict them. In the note on § 17 of the Oration Against Agoratus, 1 have remarked on one of these in- stances; compare also the note on § 72 of the same oration. His merit in this regard is not absolute; but it must be remembered that if at times we find exaggeration, sophistical reasoning, and par- tial representation of the facts, we are not to expect in an advocate, and in that age, the impartiality of a historian or a judge.
A noticeable feature is his modesty. That characteristic of his art which led to a withdrawal from view of his own personality, is to be found in the man as well as in the artist. His patriotism and public spirit had been abundantly shown in the contest for the lib- eration of Athens from the misrule of the tyrants. It would not have been unsuitable, therefore, when he came to plead before one of her tribunals against the murderer of his brother, to allude to his known services in the cause of his adopted country. But about the only allusion to his own part in the work done by the men of Phyle is found in the single word ἤλθομεν, we came.
His remarkable vigor and industry are shown by the number of his orations, and by the length and success of his professional career, although it was begun at so late a period in life. His tact
XXiV INTRODUCTORY SKETCH.
in dealing with men, founded on a penetrating insight into motives and character, has already been assumed in the discussion of the ethopoetic element in his style. That he had humor, we can readily make out. The plea for the pensioned Invalid, Oration XXIV., is especially in the humorous vein. Occasionally he is sarcastic; in- veighing against the profligate licentiousness of the younger Alci- biades, he remarks that the young man had evidently despaired of attaining the greatness of his ancestors, except by being vicious in youth as they had been before him.
In a fragment preserved by Atheneus he has this to say of the Socratic Aéschines, an incorrigible shirk: “ Moreover, gentlemen of the jury, I am not the only person he treats thus, —it is the same with every one else who has anything to do with him. Have not the neighboring store-keepers, to whom he refuses to pay what he has obtained on credit, shut up their stores and gone to law with him? Are not his neighbors so annoyed that they are abandoning their houses, and renting others farther off? .... And so many crowd about his door at daybreak to collect their dues, that the passers-by think it to be his funeral. Also the merchants in the Pirzeus have come to the conclusion that it is less hazardous to take a cargo into the Adriatic than to lend money to him.”
The reader is probably familiar with his reply to the client who came back dissatisfied with the speech that had been written for him. “When I read it for the first time,” said he, “it seemed an admirable discourse; but after the second and third rehearsal it appeared tame and feeble.” ‘ You must remember,” replied Lysias, “that the judges are to hear it but once.”
He is sparing of aphorisms. “Laws will be no better than the law-makers,” he says in XXX. 28. “Time is the most convincing test of the truth,” XIX. 61. In Oration XX. (of doubtful genuine- ness, however) it is finely said of the defendant: “ When he might have concealed his property, and thus have avoided rendering as- sistance, he preferred to have you know his circumstances, 2722 order that, if in any event he should wish to do wrong, he might not be able.” The reader will recall a similar thought in Rousseau’s Con- Sessions.
More is known to us about him through Plato than through any other contemporaneous writer. But to no contemporary is Plato more unjust than to Lysias. The theory of rhetoric that he attributes
INTRODUCTORY SKETCH. _XXV
to him, however justly it may or may not be assigned to Corax or to Gorgias, was not that of Lysias. Some time before the Phedrus could have been written, he had begun to compose speeches on principles diametrically opposite to those condemned by Plato. The latter ex- plains his own conception of a true rhetoric, as the art of implanting one’s convictions in the soul of another ; the votary of this art must therefore from its very nature possess himself of truth, and he must likewise know the souls of men. On this latter point he says :—
“ Oratory is the art of enchanting the soul, and therefore he who would be an orator has to learn the differences of human souls, — they are so many and of such a nature, and from them come the differences between man and man; he will then proceed to divide speeches into their different classes. Such and such persons, he will say, are affected by this or that kind of speech in this or that way, and he will tell you why; he must have a theoretical notion of them first, and then he must see them in action, and be able to fol- low them with all his senses about him, or he will never get beyond the precepts of his masters. But when he is able to say what per- sons are persuaded by what arguments, and recognize the individual about whom he used to theorize as actually present to him, and say. to himself, ‘This is he, and this is the sort of man who ought to have that argument applied to him in order to convince him of this’; when he has attained the knowledge of all this, and knows also when he should speak and when he should abstain from speaking, and when he should make use of pithy sayings, pathetic appeals, aggravated effects, and all the other figures of speech, —when, I say, he knows the times and seasons of all these things, then, and not till then, he is perfect and a consummate master of his art.” *
No one had realized this ideal so successfully, we may say so marvellously, as Lysias. In the forensic branch he was wellnigh “the consummate master of his art.” His success was-not by a mere knack, nor was it the result alone of practice. It is evident that he had rightly discerned and estimated the conditions of suc- | cess in his profession, and had theorized upon them. He knew not only “what” was to be said, but, as Plato required, the “to whom” and the “when” and the “how much.” We can discern in him the true Socratic of his age in the domain of rhetoric. How far he may
* Pheedrus, 271 ; Jowett’s Translation.
XXvi INTRODUCTORY SKETCH.
have been stimulated or helped by Socrates in his discovery of the true theory of forensic and practical eloquence it is impossible to determine, but it is certain that the success of his method rests on the same essential principles as the Socratic theory of education.
The defects of his mind are plainly to be seen in his works. We miss the suggestive variety of a more productive imagination, the warmth of a more emotional, sympathetic nature, and in certain pas- sages the sublimity that would have been imparted by a loftier moral enthusiasm. He had an understanding of extraordinary vigor, clear perceptions, large common-sense, keen insight into men, but his nature was not of the largest mould. On the bema his oratory could scarcely have swayed the most powerful natures. He lacked the deep, intense convictions which kept the thunderbolts of Demos- thenes at a white heat, and which seem in his greatest moments to have inspired him with transcendent energy. Yet the eloquence of Lysias, if not of the very highest order, was almost perfect in its kind. Addressed to audiences accustomed to be wrought upon by all manner of appeals, it is clear, dispassionate, mainly directed to the “intellect. It chooses its means with unerring adaptation, but does not display them. It is the product of an art whose single aim is πεῖσαι λόγῳ, to effect persuasion by discourse. In this species of eloquence, which is careless of applause, acts indirectly upon the emotions, and is only intent upon carrying its point, —hence study- ing its audience, and the conditioning circumstances of the occasion, no less than its theme, — in eloquence of this kind, if we are to judge from the verdict of antiquity together with the confirmatory criticism of modern times, Lysias has never been excelled. He seems at the very outset of his professional career to have conceived with singular clearness the nature of his task, and he labored with long-continued and successful industry towards the realization of his ideal in its accomplishment. His best qualities passed over into his work. He did much toward bringing a noble art to the greatest perfection it ever attained. Though not to be ranked in mental or moral stature with his older and greater contemporary, Sophocles, we may nevertheless justly apply to him as a composer of oratorical prose the words of Professor Plumptre concerning the great dramatist: his character- istic and surpassing excellence is to be found in “the self-control and consummate art with which all his powers are devoted.to work- ing out a perfection deliberately foreseen and aimed.”
INTRODUCTORY SKETCH. XXVI1
IV. HIS WRITINGS.
There were current in ancient times 425 orations bearing the name of Lysias, but not more than 250 were accounted genuine, — accord- ing to Dionysius only 233. Out of this whole number there are 170 of which the titles have been preserved, or of which some fragments remain. Four of these belong to the class of “ Epideictic” orations (λόγοι ἐπιδεικτικοί), addresses delivered on special public and festive occasions; two of these are extant, one the O/ymfiac mentioned in the account of his life, the other the “eral Oration given in this vol- ume. In the class of Deliberative or Political orations (λόγοι συμ- βουλευτικοῦ there is but one,—a fragment forming No. XXXIV. in the existing collections. It was written for delivery in the Ecclesia immediately after the restoration of the democracy, and is probably the earliest production that we have from his pen.
Of the Forensic orations (λόγοι δικανικοί) there are 30 extant (22 entire), but not all accounted genuine. The whole number of Foren- sic orations in the list of titles and fragments is 159. They relate to a great variety of cases, civil and criminal; impeachments for treason and official misconduct; actions for violation of contracts, and for damage received to property and character ; indictments for murder, sacrilege, and for the crime, likewise capital, of unlawful speculation in breadstuffs; among the pleaders, heirs-at-law, wards and guardians, injured husbands, deserters, archons elect and admirals, —scarcely a phase of Athenian public or private life that does not come into view. A sufficient portion of the original collection has been preserved to show what must have been the historical value of the whole. The courts of Athens more than its political and festal assemblies, per- haps even more than its stage, bring to our view the actual every-day life of its citizens, as well as many transactions of political moment that do not appear on the page of the historian.
Thus with all their merits in point of style and language, the pleas of the great Athenian advocate have a still stronger claim upon the attention of the modern reader. They are rich with information con- cerning the inner history of their age. It may be questioned whether any contemporary historical documents of greater value have come down to us out of Greek antiquity. They relate toa generation about which we are greatly concerned to know, — more, perhaps, than about
XXVili INTRODUCTORY SKETCH.
any other during the whole sway of the Hellenic civilization, were it only for the reason that then Socrates lived, and philosophy began. Loss of empire did not dim the lustre of the Attic mind. On the contrary, it was in this generation that the Periclean Athens began to bear its ripest and best fruit. The Athens that saw the beginning of the fourth century before the Christian era is an “intensely luminous point” on the dim background of antiquity. It has a microcosmic history, and its points of contact with the civilization of a free peo- ple in the nineteenth century of the Christian era are vastly more numerous than those of any other pagan age. Into this Athens, its streets and markets, its dwellings, its sanctuaries and temples, into its Pirzeus harbor and along its wharves, the orations of Lysias lead the reader. No Greek can be put into the hands of the elementary student which throws such a strong side light upon the history with which in his subsequent studies he will need to be most familiar. While studying the language of these orations, their narratives and their arguments, he is brought into the midst of the restless enter- prise and the strifes of “that fierce democratie” of Athens, and unconsciously he begins to reconstruct its history. An ecclesi- astical historian has spoken of the importance of every student’s setting foot on the original ground of historic investigation. ‘ How- ever well told by modern compilers, there is almost sure to be some- thing in the original records which we should have overlooked.” These orations are not history, but they contain its materials, and how important for its elucidation they have proved, any one may estimate by observing the frequent reference to them in the works of Grote, and in the volume by Boeckh on the Public Economy of the Athenians. Nor is the lover of Greek literature to forget, as he turns these pages, that without Lysias, such was his acknowledged influence-on Attic prose and oratory, we should not have had De- mosthenes. Along with Thucydides he forms the best introduction. to the study of the greatest of orators. Scarcely less a service is it that he leads us into the very court, before the very judges, as it were, in whose presence the greatest of all the pagan world gave utterance to that sublime vindication which Plato has reproduced in the Apology of Socrates.
ΚΎΣΤΑΣ.
INTRODUCTION
TO THE
ORATION AGAINST ERATOSTHENES.
‘Tae occasion and subject of this oration, and its sig- nificance as beginning a new era in Attic prose, have already been adverted to in the introductory sketch of Lysias and his writings. It is, moreover, the only extant oration known to have been spoken by the orator himself. His brother Pole- marchus had been arrested and put to death the previous year by order of the Thirty; the oration is a masterly plea for justice against Eratosthenes as his murderer, the accused having been a member of that body, and also having taken an active part in the arrest.
The nature of the crime charged, and the official relations of the defendant, lead the speaker beyond the mere accusa- tion of a single criminal ; in the latter and larger part of his speech he sets forth the true character of the oligarchic revo- lution, arraigning its leaders with statesmanlike dignity and eloquence for their murderous and treasonable conspiracy against the Athenian people. Thus, although classed as a judicial oration, it is in many respects, as Blass remarks, the discourse of a statesman, and worthy to be named with the celebrated oration of Demosthenes On the Crown.
The administration of the Thirty Tyrants, as they came to be called, lasted about eight months, from June or July, B.C. 404, into the following February. They were to draft
4 XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES.
a new code in harmony with the aims of the oligarchic party, and for the time being the government of the city was placed in their hands. Their appointment took place a little less than a year after the loss of the Athenian fleet at A®gos- potami, August, 405. It had been a year of unparalleled suffering in the city. The blockade brought starvation to ‘its doors, and the dilatory negotiations of the treacherous Theramenes had but deferred hope and prolonged misery. Still, with their wonted hopefulness and courage the people’ clung to the existing constitution, struggling to maintain their own freedom against foes within the city, while defending their national independence against foes without. But a change of government became inevitable after the surrender of Athens to Lysander, towards the end of March, 404. ‘The exiled aristocrats returned in the wake of the victorious Spartan army; the leaders of the popular party were put out of the way in the manner described in Oration XIIJ.; then followed the appointment of thirty* of the oligarchic leaders, charged with the legislative and executive duties above mentioned. Their leading spirit was Critias, — resolute, energetic, and with an ambition unchecked by fear or scruple. The Mod- erates were represented by Theramenes and nine others who had been nominated by him.
The deeds that made this administration a veritable reign of terror, and soon rendered the name of the Thirty Tyrants odious throughout the Grecian world, are sufficiently familiar to the readers of history. Not less than 1500 persons were put to death. Large amounts of private property were con- fiscated, and even the treasuries and revenues of the temples were not spared. The higher schools were closed, the public teachers silenced, save Socrates, who could not be.t ‘The
* Their names are given by Xenophon, /eédlenica, II. 3, 2. + See Grote’s History of Greece, Vol. VIII. p. 257 seg.
XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 5
regular courts, including the Areopagus, were suspended, and denunciations from the most infamous informers were re- ceived and acted upon without even the form of a trial. Finally, as if to complete their own and their country’s degra- dation, the usurpers introduced a Spartan garrison into the Acropolis, to be maintained at the cost of the city.
Lysias and Polemarchus, being metics, belonged to a class peculiarly exposed to the rapacity of the Tyrants. It was a class for the most part engaged in commerce, democratic in its sympathies, and containing many men of wealth. The Tyrants were in pressing need of money. ‘They governed an impoverished city, and that with the costly arm of a foreign garrison. Lysias and his brother were placed on the list of the ten who were first proscribed. In language simple but graphic the orator describes the whole proceeding, — the visit of the officers, their brutal violence and greed of plunder, the details of his own escape, and the arrest of his brother by Eratosthenes, followed by a summary execution without trial and without even being charged with a crime.
Of Eratosthenes little is known except through this accusa- tion of Lysias. He is mentioned by no other writer of the time except Xenophon. During the administration of the Four Hundred (8. c. 411), he had been one of the secret emis- saries to the coast of Asia Minor to disseminate oligarchic sentiments among the Athenian troops. Frustrated in his attempts, he seems to have returned to Athens, and to have remained till after the battle of AXgospotami. He then becomes a member of the “ Ephors,” a sort of central executive com- mittee of five appointed by the clubs and secret political societies, — the so-called ἑταιρίαι and συνωμοσίαι, ---- which were intriguing in favor of Sparta and an aristocratic polity. He is next heard of as a member of the Thirty.
The career and character of Theramenes come under search- ing review in the course of the oration. He had stood forward
6 XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES.
to advocate a moderate policy, and to oppose the useless violence of Critias, —a step which cost him his life. His fol- lowers were now demanding his enrolment among the martyrs for liberty, and claiming for themselves the benefit of whatso- ever popularity might accrue to his memory. Lysias effectually disposes of these pretensions, and exposes him as a cautious, but dishonest and thoroughly selfish politician, who deserved but too well, though it was by unexpected hands, the reward of his faithlessness to the people and his treason to the con- stitution.
The trial is supposed to have been held between Sept. 21, 403,— the day of the return into the city of the patriots under Thrasybulus, — and the close of that year. Jurisdic- tion in murder cases properly devolved on the Areopagus; but that tribunal, it may be, had not yet been reorganized. The present case appears to have been tried before a dicas- tery presided over by the King Archon (ἄρχων βασιλεύς), and probably holding its sessions in the Delphinion. In the opinion of Grote* it was on the occasion of a trial of accountability («d@vva:), which he supposes Eratosthenes and his colleague Phidon to have returned to stand, that this indictment was preferred. We are inclined, however, to believe with Scheibe and Frohberger that the case was simply a trial for murder (γραφὴ φόνου).
The following brief analysis will aid the student in under- standing the oration as a whole:
I. Exordium, $$ 1-3.
II. Argument on the specific charge contained in the indictment.
(1) Statement of facts, 88 4-24. (2) Examination of the defendant, $$ 25, 26.
(3) Answer to the defence that he had acted on compulsion and was therefore not responsible, §§ 27 — 36.
* History of Greece, Vol. VILL. p. 295. The question is discussed by Blass, Geschichte der Att. Beredsamkeit, Ch. ΧΤΠ,
XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 7
III. Argument extra causam, arraigning the defendant as particeps criminis with the Thirty. (1) Examination of his record, — whether he had rendered such services to the state as to offset the crimes of himself and his colleagues, $$ 37-61. (2) Concerning Theramenes, §§ 62 -- 80. (3) Contrast between the present trial and those under the Thirty, and denunciation of the advocates and witnesses for the defence, §§ 81-91. IV. Appeal to the judges, 88 92-98. V. Peroration, §§ 99, 100.
ΧΙ].
KATA ΕΡΑΤΟΣΘΕΝΟΥ͂Σ
TOY TENOMENOY TON TPIAKONTA, ON ΑΥ̓ΤῸΣ EINE AY2IAz.
4. Kerk Οὐκ ἄρξασθαί μοι δοκεῖ ἄπορον εἶναι, bf ἄνδρες δικασταί, τῆς κατηγορίας; ἀλλὰ παύσα- σθαι λέγομει Se τοιαῦτα αὐτοῖς͵ τὸ μέγεθαρ καὶ
Wut othPrvry-
τοσαῦτα TO πλῆθος εἴργασται, pa μήτ᾽ ἂν pone “opera, δεψότερα τῶν ὑπαρχόητων ioe /ophgab μήτε τἀληθῆ ϑλυνάμενον. εἰ τὰ ἅπαντα δύνασθαι, ἀλλ᾽ ἀνάγκη ἢ τ τὸν κατήγορον ἀπειπεῖν ἢ τὸν xpo- 2 νον ἐπιλιπεῖν. τοὐναντίον δέ μοι δοκοῦμεν πείσε- σθαι ἣ ἢ ἐν Fi i τοῦ χρόνῳ. πρότερον μὲν γὰρ ἔδει τὴν ἐχθραν τοὺς κατηγοροῦντας ἐπιδεῖξαι, ἥτις εἴη πρὸς τοὺς φεύγοντας ᾿ νυνὶ δὲ παρὰ τῶν φευγόντων χρὴ wetter Oia ὁ ἥτις ἦν αὐτοῖς πρὸς τὴν πόλιν ἔχθρα, ἀνθ᾽. ὅτου τοιαῦτα ἐτόλμησαν εἰς αὐτὴν ἐξαμαρτάνειν. οὐ μέντοϊ ὡς οὐκ ἔχων οἰκείας ἔχθρας καὶ συμφορὰς το λόγους ποιοῦ- μαι, ἀλλλιὼς. ἅπασι πολλῆς πες ὃ οὔσης ὑπὲρ 3 τῶν ἰδίων ἢ ἢ ὑπὲρ τῶν δημοσίων ὀργίζεσθαι. . © ἐγὼ μὲν οὖν, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, οὔτ᾽ ἐμαυτοῦ πώποτε
Ὁ,
i
XII, AGAINST ERATOSTHENES.
J
th pee ee
¥ 4 4 , “A > , OUTE ἀλλότρια πράγματα mpagas νυν ig Sena a
"pf? γεχενημένοι 8 κατηγορεῖν, ὥστε πο λλάκις͵ « εἰς πολλὴν ἀθυμίαν α κατέστην, μὴ διὰ PNA gr AAA,
τὴν ἀπειρίαν por καὶ ἀδυνάτως ὑπὲρ τοῦ adeh-
φοῦ καὶ ἐμφντοῦς τῆι sed puede sips, ok
Aye By owt
ι'δ:
ὅμως͵ δὲ ᾿ἀειηδσομᾶι ὑμᾶς ἐξ ἀρχῆς ὡς ἂν δύνωμαι δι ἔλαχίστων διδάξαι. posrusd
Ovpos πατὴρ ἐὰν ες μτὸν ἐπείσθ μὲν ὑπὸ eps 4 κλέους εἰς ταύτην τὴν γὴν % ικέσθαι, € Seg Foude εἰς 7 ὴν γῆ ἰφικε er δὲ Zp
κοντα ᾧκησε," Kal οὐδενὶ πώποτε οὔτε ἡμεῖς οὔτε
> a ‘a ¥ > 4, 3» 3 4
ἐκεῖνος δίκην οὔτε rose οὔτε ἐῤύψωμεν,
ἀλλ᾽ οὕτως @KOU ἥμενοι ὥστε μήτε ng ee
εἰς τοὺς ἄλλους ἐξαμαρτο τάνειν ΩΝ ὑπὸ τῶν ἄλλων
“ἀδικεῖσθαι. ἐπειδὴ δ᾽ οἱ Τρεδκαντά πονηροὶ, μὲν 5
καὶ συκοφάνται ὄντες εἰς τὴν ἀρχὴν. κα δα ΤΉ ΘΝΝ, a PS mi δὲ ἰδ aX QOKOVTES δὲ ι τῶν ἀδίκων κἄθα͵ ἂν ποιῆσαι 3 χρῆναι τ 1 Deine P "ῇ τὴν κ᾿ Ἀόχο καὶ τοὺς λοιποὺς π ἴτας ἐπ᾽ ἀρετὴν καὶ δίκαιοσύνην Tp πέσθαι, τοιαῦτα Beare ov τοι-
αντα οἰεῖν sit ute ὡς ye ree TOV ἐμαυτοῦ
FELRAVUE
TOV εἰπὼν καὶ περὶ τῶν ὑ ετέρων ἀναμνῆσαι
πειράσομαι. Vv Sens yap καὶ Πείσων ἔλεγον ἐν 6
Ag awd
ait πολιτείᾳ. ἀχθομενοι καλλίστην οὖν εἶναι Be er ἐλ ΔΑ,
σιν τιμωρεῖσθαι μὲν δοκεῖν, τῷ δ᾽ ἔργῳ χρηματῖ- ζεσθαι: πάντως δὲ τὴν μὲν κυ πένεσθαι, τὴν
iar τ᾿ fry
TOU τὰ ἰάκοντα περὶ τῶν μετοίκων, ὡς εἶέν τινες τῇ
ὡς ἔπειθον: ἀποκτιννύναι μὲν γὰρ ἀν-
οὐ X θρώπους περὶ οὐδενὸς ἡγοῦντο, λαμβάνειν δὲ
rr nA
δ᾽ ἀπ ρίσθαι χρημά ΠΩΣ oe TOUS ἀκούοντας 7
Ο ba AL
Urry
10 XII. KATA EPATOSOENOY®S.
ara περὶ πολλοῦ ἐποιοῦντο. ἔδοξεν οὖν αὐ- χρήμ ρ οὐ ξεν, τοῖς δέκα ee Touraye? δὲ δύο" πένητας, ἵνα αὐτοῖς ἢ πρὸς τοὺς ay pe ta, ὡς Ve 2. meee jue he Y ara mp των ἑνέκα ταῦτ i ol cena, ἰλλὰ δυμῷ “Pou, ᾳ τῇ, μ γλ πολιτείᾳ γεγένηται, ὥσπερ τι τῶν ἄλλων εὐλόγως 8 πεποιηκότες. διαλαβόντες δὲ τὰς οἰκίας ἐβάδιζον. >. τὰς Ν , ε 5 , ἃ 3 λ , καὶ ἐμὲ μὲν ξένους ἑστιωντα κα κἀξέλάβον; ovs ἐξελά- βρῶ 2 Πείσωνί με πἀραδιδόασι. ; οἱ ὁ δὲ ag o's εἰς, τὸ ἐὀγαστή ον ἐλθόντες τὰ ἀνδ nano ἀπεγραά- _govto. ἐγὼ δὲ Πείσωνα pee ἠρώτων ei βούλοιτό με σῶσαι χρήματα λαβών ὁ «δ᾽ ἔφασκεν, εἰ πολ- φ. l iy »τλ 9 ha εἴη. εἶπον οὖν ὅτι ee ἀῤγυρίου € cin is νὰ εἴην Sdovas+ δ θὲ ὡμολόγησε ταῦτα ποιήσειν. i as μὲν οὖν ὅτι οὔτε “θεοὺς ovr’ ἀνθρώπους — Ῥομῦζοο, © ΟΝ δ᾽ ἐκ τῶν παρόντων. ἐδόκει one. “To καιό: ατον εἶν πίστιν παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ λαβεῖν. δὴ igs εν ν p Reto: Keene δὲ ὦμοσεν é ὦλειαν ἑ ἑαυτῷ καὶ τοῖς παισὶν δι ς ec Gas. λαβὼν τὸ tad WT ἦν δε opera εἰσ ελθῶν, εἰς
ὡΡῸΣ ΨΟΝ γον
τὸ δῳμάτιον τὴν κιβωτὸν cs ai Πείσων
>
rua Le:
αἰσθόμενος εἰανρῤνετῶι, καὶ ἰδὼν τὰ ἐνόντα κάλει
τῶν ὑπηρεχῶν δύο, καὶ τὰ ἐν τῇ κιβωτῷ sie 11 ἐκέλευσεν. ἐπεὶ δὲ οὐχ ὅσον ὡμολύψησῷ εἶχεν, ὦ
ἄν Opes δικασταί, ἀλλὰ ape rears ἀργυρίου καὶ τετρβοσίους κυζικηοὺ Us καὶ ἑκατὸν δάβεοκρὺς καὶ, φὶάλας ἀ ἀργυρίου To CLs ἐδεόμην αὐτοῦ ἐφόδιά ἡ μοι δοῦναι, ὁ δὶ, ιἀγᾳπήσειν με ἐφάσκεῦ, εἰ τὸ 12 σῶμα. Wooo. ἐξιοῦσι δ᾽ ἐμοὶ καὶ Πείσωνι ἐπι-
τυγχάνει Μηλόβιός τε καὶ Μνησιθείδης ἐκ τοῦ
XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. II
ἀρ παρε
ἐργαστηρῖου ἀπιόντες, καὶ yeas ιν, άνουσι,͵ τρὸς
αν - Y
δ
ἜΝ οι ταῖς θύραις, καὶ ἐρωτῶσιν ὅ omy) βαδίζ 2 per ᾽
c
ὁ ὃ apace εἰς so ἀδελφοῦ τοῦ ἐμοῦ, ἵνα καὶ τὰ σα mL ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ οἰκίᾳ i παρ ύρΝ ἐκεῖνον μὲν ο οὖν ἐκέ- λευον βαδίζειν, ἐμὲ δὲ μεθ᾽ αὑτῶν ἀκολουδεῖν ἰς UU - AA: Crk
pe ca ae Πείσων͵ δι peers. σιγᾶν (μοι 13 παρεκελεύετο καὶ θαρρεῖν, ὡς SOM, ἐ ἐκεῖσε. κατα- ama δὲ αὐτόθι ye oe €T ἐροιϑμίμλότον- νὰ τα" ᾧ παραδόντες ἐμὲ πάλιν @XO ἐν τριούτἤιῳό -᾿ δ᾽ ὄντι μοι κυιδυνεύεωνκἐβόκε ἐδόκει, ὡς τοῦ γε Sr obavd ὑπάρχοντος Bu Ane
he αὐτὸν τάδε, ‘ ἐπιτήδειος μέν oy ot τυγχάνεις
Moras δὲ Te ic nee 14
ya δ᾽ εἰς τὴν σὴν οἰκίαν, oes οὐδέν, χῤημᾶάτων δ᾽ ἕνεκα sched en σὺ οὖν ταῦτα πάσ᾽ οντί, μοι ἐρόθυμαν 1 BRET XO τὴν σεαυτοῦ ἕξ τὰ υναμιν εἰς τὴν ἐμὴν σωτηριαψῃ ὁ ὁ δ᾽ ὑπέσχετο. στ Ἂν ταῦτα ποιήσειν. ἐδόκει δ᾽ «αὐτῷ βέλτιον εἶναι πρὸς es ee pono vas: Sorte yap ἅπαν ποιή- σειν αὐτόν, εἴ τις ἀργύριον διδοίη. ἐκείνου δὲ 15 διαλεγομένου sae ig (ἔμπειρος γὰρ ἃ ὧν ἐτύγχα- νον τῆς οἰκίας, καὶ ἤδειν ὅτι ᾿ἀμφίϑυρος εἴ ΣᾺ ἐδόκει poe ταϑ θὰ πειρᾶσθαι σωγηνδι, ἐνθυμουμένῳ ὅτι, ἐὰν μὲ λάθω, ey ϑόμος ἐὰν δὲ ληφθωξῇ ἡγούμην μέν, εἰ 2 Saud pth. εἴη memes pees os ὑπὸ τοῦ eo που χρήματα λαβεῖν, οὐδὲν ἧττον ᾿ἀφεθήσεσι at, obs μή, ὁμοίως ἀποθαρεισ θαι, rik bea διανοηθεὶς τό ε νοῦς ἐκείνων ἐπὶ τῇ avec θύρᾳ δὴν φυλακὴν
ποιουμένων " τριῶν δὲ θυρῶν οὐσῶν, ἃς ἔδει με
~~ yy
I2
17
XII. KATA EPATOS@ENOYS.
διελθεῖν, ἅπασαι ἀνεῳγμέναι ἔτυχον. ἀφικόμενος δὲ εἰς ᾿Αρχένεω τοῦ ναυκλήρου ἐκεῖνον πέμπω εἰς ᾿Ξ, , : A ~ 5 ~ 9 A ἄστυ, πευσόμενον περὶ TOU ga ἥκων δὲ ἔλεγεν ὅτι Eparoctiage αὐτὸν τῇ ὁδῷ λαβὼν εἰς τὸ δεσμωτήριον ἀπαγάγοι. ὼ ποιαῦτα ἷς τὸ δεσμωτήρ γάγ Leh ee πεπυσμέπος τῆς ἐπιούσης νυκτὸς ὀιέπλευδα Μέγα:
ry o- ράδε. ὀλεμάρχῳ δὲ ἀρήγγευναν οἵ τ ἰάκουτα
τὸ UT ἀκείνων εἰθισμένον π παβάγγεχαα, πίνειν Koz (μὰ cast πρὶν τὴν αἰτίαν ents w δι ἥντινα, ager ,
ἀποβανεῖσ αι; οὕτω πολλοῦ ἐδέησε κ τθὴν
A
18 Oe καὶ ἐπειδὴ. ἀπε ἐκ τοῦ es g
pra τηρίου, χεθνεώς, Py gos 2 ἡμῖν οἰκιῶν, Ἢ οὐσῶν. εμιᾶς εἴάσαν ἐξε ἐξγεχθῆναι, ἄλλὰ κλίσιον μισθω: yd
σάμενοι, προῦυ ar αὐτόν. καὶ πολλῶν 6 ὄντων ἐὰν τίων αἰτοῦσιν οὐδὲν ἔδοσαν εἰς τὴν ταφή! πιὰ
τῶν φίλων ὃ μὲν ἱμάτιον ὁ “δὲ προῦ χεφάλαιον ὁ ὁ δὲ Loan p4rw ae
ὅ τι ἕκαστος ἔτυχεν ὁ 2 ney εἰς ay ἐκείνου ταφή Vv. Ἴνν-
5, Ὑ:9 καὶ exouTes μὲν ἑπτακοσίας ἀσπί 4 TOV mpere-
“
᾿ « Ἀ νΝ
i
2
ay} “SS ἔχοντες δὲ ᾿εὐόμο, "Sk χρυσίον, τοσοῦτον,
χαχκὸν δὲ καὶ κόσμον καὶ ἔπιπλα καὶ ἱμάτια Ye
ben ὅσα β θεσώποτε, ᾧοντο ἀτήσσααὶ y καὶ
4 » 0 ἀνδράποδα εἴκοσι καὶ ἑκατόν, ὧν. τὰ μὲν Beater
ἔλαβον, τὰ δὲ λομπὰ εἰς τὸ δημόσιον ἀπέδοσαν
εἰς τοσαύτην ἀπληστιᾶν | καὶ αἰσχροκε εἰαν ἀφ ἔων
KOVTO καὶ τοῦ τρόπου τοῦ αὑτῶν ἀπόδειξιν ἐποιή-
σαντο Phd τῆς γὰρ ᾿ολεμάβχου i fe ies * Χρυσοῦς
AA & “a
2.» ἑλικτῆρας, ov3 ἐχουσὰ erivpnes OTE TO Ἐρωτὸν 2b"
ἦλθεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν Μηλόβιος, ἐκ τῶν ὥτων
fw
ov
XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 13 @ yak y at G and ᾿- ἊΨ μή 5 4 A > A A A > δ ,΄ ΄ ἐξεθλέγο, poset οὐδὲ κατὰ TO ἐλάχιστον μέρος τῆς 20 οὐσίας ἐλ wap αὐτῶν ἐτυγχάνομεν. ἀλλ᾽ οὕτως
εἰς ἡρδῃκδ διὰ τὰ χρήματα ἐξημά wee bets ὥσπερ οὐκ ἂν ἕτεροι μ ιἐγάλων. ἀδικημάτι ὀργὴν ἔχοντες, οὐ
Mint &
τούτων ἀξίους YE. ὄντας TH πόλει, ἀλλὰ, πάσας τὰς
ὌΝ 3 (ete ees
χορηγίας χόρηγήφαντας, πολλὰς δ᾽ εἰσφορὰς εἰσει ει T χε ξγκῦντας, Κοσμίους, δ᾽ ἡμᾶς αὐτοὺς παρέχοντας ἐχθρὸν δ᾽
“VA th ur Kal πᾶμ TO ,τῤοσταττόμενον ποιοῦντας, οὐδένα ἘΠ tee κτημένους, πολλοὺς δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίων ἐ ἐκ, τῶν
SAG ες Ἄλλα
πολεμίων λυσαμένους" μ. ον αμέ υς" τοιούτων ἠξίωσαν ovX Cin:
ν᾽
ὁμοίοις τας ὥσπερ αὐτοὶ ἐπολϊτεὔοντο.. ἐν ae οὗτοι γ᾽ ὰρ 7 πολλοὺς μὲν τῶν gone eis T ops. pohe- phe pious Peace πολλοὺς δ᾽ ἀδίκως ἀποιζτεΐναντες.
ἀτάφους ἐποίησαν, ὺς δ᾽ "ἐπιτίμους ὄντας >t ἀτίμους τῆς Sass Se eS <n δὲ θυγα- προ τέράς. μελλούσας φηγδίδοσθαι ἐκώλυσαν. Καὶ εἰς 22 τοσοῦτόν εἰσι τόλμης ἀφιγμένοι ὥσθ᾽ ἥκουσιν
amon όμενοι, - καὶ οὐδ᾽ argh ἄργασ ς μην ἂν αὐτοὺς a ἰχηθῇ λέγειν" Me “γὰρ, ἂν καὶ
ἐμοὶ τούτου τἀγαθοῦ οὐκ ἐλάχιστον REPOS: νῦν 23
δὲ οὔτε πρὸς τὴν πόλιν αὐτοῖς τοιαῦτα ὑπάρχει ¥ Ν > / Ν > Ν 4 9 ‘ οὔτε πρὸς ἐμέ: τὸν ἀδελφὸν yap μου, ὥσπερ καὶ πρότερον εἶπον, “Ἐρατοσθένης. ἀπέκτεινεν, οὔτε αὐτὸς ἰδίᾳ ἀδικούμενος οὔτε εἰς τὴν πόλιν ὁρῶν .." nh Omer 3 ἐξαμαρτάνοντα, ἀλλὰ τῇ ἑαυτοῦ wapavople | 'προθύ- pes ἐξυπηρετῶν. ἀναβιβασάμενος δ᾽ αὐτὸν βού- 24
λομαι ἐρέσθαι, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί. τοιαύτην γὰρ
.
μ τὶ
14
25
26
τ
27
XII. KATA ἘΡΑΤΟΣΘΕΝΟΥ͂Σ.
7 », Ὡς X it ’, 5 ’ Ν Ν satis “Χῶ * ἔπι μὲν TH τούτου gina και ἘΣ βπέρὴν περὶ τούτου διαλέγεσθαι, ἀσεβὲς εἶναι νομί-
R fone ἐπὶ δὲ τῇ, τούτου βλάβη καὶ PRs αὐτὸν τοῦτον
BA. hs igi » νυ» ὅσιον καὶ εὐσεβές. ay ava 7) υ οὖν μοι καὶ ἀπόκρι-
ναι, ὅ τι ἄν σε ἐρωτῶ. ᾿Απήγαγες Πολέμαρχον ἢ ov; Τὰ ὑπὸ τῶν ἀρ- wr MOM ¢ Gen χύστων προσταχθέντα δεδιὼς ἐποίου. "Hobe ὃ συν ἐν τῷ Boerne ὅτε ob ἐδ ἐγίϑοντος περὶ “ ἡμῶν; Vel ale exe σύνηγόρευες τοῖς Kehevou-
σιν ἀπόκτειναι ἢ ἀντέλεγες ; ᾿Αντέλεγον. Mier μὴ a, ; RL wk ἀποθάνητε. eet νος mpas ἄδικα πάσχειν ἢ δίκαια; ἴἔλδικα. οὐ
Εἶτ᾽, ὦ σχετλιώτατε πάντων, ἀντένεψες μὲν ἵνα σώσειας, ἀκρίδος ὁ δὲ ἵνα ἀποκτείναις ; καὶ ὅτε μὲν͵ τὸ πλῆθος ἦν ὑμῶν κύριον. τῆς σώτηρζας τῆς ἡμετέρας, ἀντιλέγειν φὴς τοῖς βούλόβοναν a nfokeeta, ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἐπὶ σοὶ μόνῳ. 8 en Kal σῶσαι soAcucoxee καὶ μή, εἰς τὸ δεσμωτήριον
es; εἶθ᾽ ὅτι μέν, ὡς φής, ἀντειπὼν οὐδὲν ee ἀξιοῖς χρηστὸς νομίζεσθαι, ὅτι δὲ συλ- λαβὼν ἀπέκτεινας, οὐκ οἴει ἐμοὶ καὶ τουτοισὶ δοῦ- \/ ναι δίξην ; tage
Kai μὴν οὐδὲ τοῦτο εἰκὸς αὐτῷ πιστεύειν, εἴπερ. ἀληθῆ λέγει φάσκων ἀντειπεῖν, ὡς αὐτῷ προστα
Gi ι, ere AK, ετάχθη. ov yap δή που ἐν Tot eran. yap δή ἐν τοῖς μετοίκοις πίστοι. Tap αὐτοῦ ὁλάμβανονι ει, ἐπεί τοι τῷ ἧττον εἰκὸς | ἦν MPO ONE ἤναι: ἢ δονρς ἀυτευνών γε ἐτύγχανε
καὶ [ἐδαντίαν γνώμην ἀποδεδειγμένος ; τίνα γὰρ
XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 15 re]
εἰκὸς 1 ἧττον ταῦτα ὑπηρετῆσαι ἢ τὸν ἀντει- πόντα οἷς ἐκεῖνοι ἐβούλοντο 7 αχθῆναι ; ; "Ere δὲ 28. -τ τοῖς ue ἄλλοις ᾿Αθηναίους ari Μοὶ ᾿δοκεῖ mpd φασις εἶναι τῶν i ad aa εἰς TOUS τριάκοντα ὀπρβέρειν τὴν αἰτίαν - αὐτοὺς δὲ τοὺς ate: oe av iS/.Ebas αὐτοὺς ἀναφέρωσι," ΓΒ ὑμᾶς εἰκὸς ᾿
ἔχεσθαι ; εἰ qt γάρ τις ἦν ἐν τῇ πόλει 29.
ὉΝ ἀρχὴ ἰσχυροτέρα αὐτῆς, ὑφ᾽ ἧς αὐτ iGascorenty Tero πορὲ τὸ δίκαιον ἀνθρώπους ἀπὸ ι, ἴσως ἂν etx εἰκότως αὐτῷ συγγνώμην εἴχετε" xt δὲ ὶ παρὰ Tov πότε καὶ ried Be ἢ δίκην, εἴπερ τω τοῖς Je τριάκοντα λέγειν. ὅ ὅτι τὰ ὑπὸ τῶν τριάκοντ; προσ-᾿ ταχθέντα ἐποίουν; Καὶ μὲν δὴ οὐκ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ 30 > > 5» “ ε bite 4 52> Ν ‘ 4 ἀλλ᾽ ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ σάζειν τε αὐτὸν καὶ τὰ τούτοις ἐψηφισμένα παρόν, oy Mal ὼν ἀπήγαγεν; if ὑμεῖς ᾿δὲ πάντες ὀργίι cobe, ὅσοι εἰς τὰς οἰκίας ἦλθο ν τὰς ὑμετέρας ζήτησιν εἶν βοιούμενοι ἢ ἣ ὑμῶν ἢ τῶν ὑμετέ- pov τινός. Καίτοι αἰ, κἰ χρὴ τοῖς διὰ τὴν ἑαυτῶν σω- 3:
τηρίαν eee ᾿ἀπολέ . συγγνώμην ἔχειν, ἐκεί- νοις ἂν δικαιότε ov ieee pa γὰρ πεμφθεῖσι μὴ ἐ ΕΥ̓ ΚΝ καὶ καταλαβοῦσι» ἐξάρ οἷς ; ὑ γοιέφθαι. τῷ δὲ᾽ Ἐρατοσθ aes ἐξῆν εἴπει» ὅτι οὐκ εἶ
aga σεν, ἔπειτα. ὅτι οὐκ ταῦτα γὰρ οὔτ᾽ ¥ pAw haw
OV οὔτε aoavor . εἶ εν», € δ᾽ ume τῶν Χο ὅσης μὴ I
ἐχ pay amen ides οἷόν ἔν: εἶναι ἐξελεγχθῆναι. | χρὴν δέσε, ὦ ‘EpardaGeves, εἴπερ ἦσθα χρηστός, 32 πρλὴ μᾶλλον τοῖς δῦναι ἀδίκως ἀποθάᾶνεῖσθαι
A we teerv
μηνυτὴν γενέσθαι ἢ τοὺς ἀδίκως ἀπολουμένους
16 XII. KATA EPATOSOENOYS. MOV (Aw συλλαμβάνειν. νῦν δέ σου τὰ ἔργα ᾧ ἐρὰ(γεγέ-
νηται ὀνχ ὡς ἀνιωμένου ἀλλ᾽ ὡς ἡ ἀμεμαν τοῖς
ε
ιγνομένοις, ὥστε τούσδε ἐκ τῶν ἔργων αλ-
33 yy ‘apna ee PY χρὴ hy <r λον ἢ ἐκ τῶν a ai τὴν ψῆ ον έρ ιν, ἃ ἴσασι γεγενημένα τῶν τότε λεγομένων τεκμήρια λαμβά-
5. ι νοντας, ἐπειδὴ μάρτυβας “περὶ αὐτῶν οὗχ, οἷόν τε magne xer dar You ep μόνον ἡμῖν παβεῖνοι οὐκ Cag ἐξῆν, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲ παρ Pe αὑτοῖς εἶναι, ὥστ᾽ ἐπὶ τούτοις ς-- AU ἐν x
ἐστὶ πάντα τὰ κακὰ εἰργασμένδις τὴν πόλιν πάντα
34 τἀγᾳθὰ περὶ αὑτῶν -λέγειν. τοῦτο ΟΣ ΤΩ: οὐ ᾿φεύγω, ἀλλ᾽ ὁμολογῶ σοι, εἰ βούλει, ἀντειπεῖψ.
φ γάλα... ϑαυμάζω δὲ τί ἄν ποτε ἐποίησας συνειπών, ὁπότε ᾿ ἀντειπεῖν φάσκων ἀπέκτεινας Πολέμαρχον. φέρε δή, τί ἂν εἰ καὶ ἀδελφοὶ ὄντες ἐτύχετε αὐτοῦ ἢ καὶ A , > » υἱεῖς; ἀπεψηφίσασθε; δεῖ γάρ, ὦ ἄνδρες δικα-
σύ
σταί, Ἐρατοσθένην δυοῖν θάτερον ἀποδεῖξαι, ἢ ἢ ὡς οὐκ ἀπήγ γεν αὐτόν, ἢ ὡς δικαίως τοῦτ᾽ es οὗτος δὲ ὁμολό γῆκεν, Fa NEY ὦ ὥστε ῥᾳ: δίαν ὑμῖν τὴν διαψήφισιν περὶ αὑτοῦ πεποίη ε." 35 Καὶ μὲν δὴ πολλοὶ καὶ τῶν ἀστῶν καὶ τῶν ξένῳ» “ον ἥκουσιν εἰσόμενοι τίνα γνώμην περὶ τούτων ἕξετε. ὧν οἱ μὲν ὑμέτεροι ὄντες πολῖται μα ὄντες ἀπίασιν ὅτι ἢ δίκην ᾿δϑουσὸ ὦ ὧν ἂν ἐ αμάρτωσιν, ἣ apa aVTES rage ὧν ἐφίεν αι τύραννοι τῆς πόλεως ἔσον-
sus a AAs tae
Tal, δυστυχήσαντες δὲ TO ἴσον ὑμῖν ἕξουσιν" ὅσοι
δὲ ξένοι ἐπιδημοῦσιν, εἴσονται πότερον ἀδίκως τοὺς = λ
τριάκοντα ἐκκηρύττουσιν ἐκ τῶν πόλεων ἢ δικαίως.
εἰ γὰρ δὴ αὐτοὶ οἱ κακῶς πεπονθότες λαβόντες
dA
XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 17 j Pores, joes has Th ew i cin ἢ που σφᾶς αὐτοὺς ἡγήσονται πεέρίδρι. yous ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν τιβορούμένόυς. / οὐκ οὖν δεινὸν “δ εἰ τοὺς μὲν, τρρατηγούς, οἱ ἐνίκων ναυμαχοῦντες, ὅτε διὰ χειμῶνα οὐχ, οἷοί 7 ἐφασαν vas TO, t ἐκ . τῆς nS) «θαλάττης ἀνελέσθαι, θάνάτῳ͵ ἐζημιώφατεν. ἡγούμενοι χρῆναι τῇ τῶν rebuedieau ἀρετῇ παρ ἐκείνων δίκην λαβεῖν, RS he dé, οἱ ieee a, μὲν ὄντες καθ᾽ ὅσον ἐδύναντο ἐποίησαν. ἡττηθῆναι i ναυμαχοῦντας, ἐπειδὴ δὲ εἰς τὴν ἀρχὴν κατέστητ᾽ σαν, ὅμο es yi ἑκόντ. πολλοὺς τῶν πολιτῶν ἀκρίτους ἀποκτιννύναι, οὐκ ἄρα χρὴ αὐτοὺς καὶ Le "τοὺς παῖδας ὑφ᾽ ὑμῶν ταῖς ἐσχάταις τρῶν KONG "τ ἵεσθαι; τ Ἔγὼ τοίνυν, ὦ ἄνδρες, δι agra, ngewe ἱκανὰ 37 εἶναι τὰ κατηγορημένα ᾿ μέχρι γὰρ τούτου νομίζω χρῆναι κατηγορεῖν ἕως ἂν θανάτου δόξῃ τῷ; φεύ- γοντι ἄξια εἰργάφθαι ., ταύτην ve. ἐσχάτην δίκην δυνάμεθα παρ᾽ αὐτῶν λαβεῖν. ὥστ᾽ οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ὅ τι δεῖ πολλὰ κατηγορεῖν τοιούτων ἀνδρῶν, οἱ οὐδ᾽ ὑπὲρ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου τῶν Πεπβαγμένων δὶς ἀποθα- VOVTES Shep δοῦναι δύναιντ᾽ av. οὐ γὰρ δὴ οὐδὲ 38 τοῦτο αὐτῷ προσήκει ποιῆσαι, ὅπερ ἐν τῇδε τῇ πόλει Raion ἐν" ἐστί, πρὸς μὲν τὰ κατηγορημένα, 7} μηδὲν ἀπολογεῖσθαι, περὶ δὲ σφῶν αὐτῶν ἕτερα. λέγοντες ἐνίοτε ἐξαπατῶσιν, ὑμῖν ἀποδεικνύντες ὡς στρατιῶται ἀγαθοί εἰσιν, 7) ὡς πολλὰς τῶν πολε- μίων ναῦς ἔλαβον τριηραρχήσαντες, ἢ πόλεις πο- λεμίας οὔσας φίλας ἐποίησαν i eit κελεύετε αὐτὸν 39
2
18
40
41
42
ΔΑ
43
XII. KATA ἘΡΑΤΟΣΘΕΝΟΥΣ.
fn vrk 4 pA (ASK
ἀποδεῖξαι 6 O7TOU τοσούτους πον poner ἀπέκτει-
ναν ὅσους τῶν πολιτῶν, ἢ ναὺυς οπου τοσαύτας (ny
ἔλαβον ὅσας αὐτοὶ πὰρέδοσαν, ἢ πόλιν nv TWO rw Pe
νων hw OS U)4 A Beet προσεκτήσαντο οἵαν τὴν ὑ ετέραν κατε-
᾿δουλώσαντο. ἀλλὰ γὰρ ὅπλα τῶν Rl aggre Bs ἐσκύ- eas μιν" λευσαν τοσαῦτα ὅσα τεῦ: ὑμῶν ἀφεί τυ ἀλλὰ
τείχη τοιαῦτα then ota τῆς ἑαυτῶν ἀτρὲ ΡΝ dry
σκαψαν; res Kal τὰ weeny. ἜΤΗ ρον. ρια es, καὶ ὑμῖν ἐδηλοσαν ὅτι οὐδὲ τὸν Ἱεειραιᾶ Νακεδαιμονίων εαἰἀλοῤῤνούφνον ν᾿ frpperrons ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι ἑαυτοῖς THY ἀρχὴν οὕτω βέβαιοτέραν ἐ ἐνό- μιζον εἶναι.
Πολλάκις οὖν ἐθαύμασ LT τῆς 7 τόλμης TOV λεγόν- των ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν, “πλὴν. ὅταν ἐν pe ὅτι. τῶν αὐτῶν ἐστιν αὐτούς avrg τὰ κακὰ ἐργάζεσθαι " καὶ τοὺς τ ιούτους ht ὧν «οὐ Bice νῦν πρῶτον,
. th yA A tLe τὸ “TO jf
ἱετέρῳ πλήθει τὰ δίαρμα α ἔπραξεν, ἀλλὰ καὶ εὐ My ae
Chew Ὁ 2) ἐπὶ τῶν, Πετρακοσίων ἐν τῷ στρατοπέδῳ ὁ va. χίαν καθιστὰς. Heges ἐξ Ἕλλησσιθον Tpiy- |
papxos, κἀταλίπὼν gE ναῦν, μετὰ ᾿Ιατροκλέους Anak
καὶ «ἑτέρων, ὧν τὰ, ὁν nat ee οὐδὲν δέομαι λέγειν.
οκρατίαν εἶναι ἔπραττε. καὶ τούτων μάρτυρας ὑμῖν παρέξομαι. : ἫΝ
j
MAPTYPES.
Tov μὲν τοίνυν μεταξὺ βίου αὐτοῦ παρήσω' ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἡ ναυμαχία καὶ ἡ συμφορὰ τῇ πόλει
bud evos δὲ δεῦρο αντία τοῖς βουλομέν ὅτι τὰν δέν μέρας
ψ. Bil es
ἘῪ
"ἢ
XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 19 her ng Ao (tee 4 τ Εγένετο, δημοκρατίας δεούσης, ἃ ν τῆς; στάσεως ἦρξαν, eat ἄνδρες ἔφοροι. κατέσ σαν ὑπὸ τῶν καλουμένὰν ἑταίρων, συναγωγεῖς ee σῶν πολιτῶν, fe
ε ΚΡ
ἄρχοντες € τῶν Po A ἐναντία δὲ τῷ ier τέρῳ πλήθει. πράττοντες" ὧν Ἐρατοσθένης καὶ Κριτίας ἦσαν. οὗτοι δὲ φυλάρχαυς τᾷ ἐπὶ ὶ τὰς 44 φυλακὰς κ πόστυσαν, καὶ ὅ τι δέοι χειβοτόνεισθαι καὶ ὀὕστινας. χρείη ἄρχειν. ΡΥ ῥέεν καὶ εἴ τι ἄλλο πράττειν βούλοιντο, κα κύριοι ἦσαν * οὕτως οὐχ ὑπὸ τῶν πολεμίων μόνον. ἀλλὰ καὶ ὑπὸ τούτων πολιτῶν ὄντων ἐπεββυκούδοϑε ὅπω Fee ἀγαβὸν, δεν μηδὲν wn ψηφισαισ ες Ὁ πολλῶν τε ἐνδεεῖς ἔσεσθε. τοῦτο γὰρ καὶ ἠπίσταντο, ὅτι ἄλλως μὲν pi οἷοί 45
t
TE peer dh Seba κακῶς δὲ i She ed ~ Tea εις L \
“δυνήσονται Ξ καὶ ὑμᾶς ἡγοῦντο TOV πἰὰρόντων' κὰ- αν κῶν ἐπιθυμοῦντας ἀταλχάγῆναι ἘΠΕ τῶν μελλόνξ των οὐκ ἐνθυμήσεσθαι. ὡς τοίνυν τῶν a = ἐγένετο, μάρτυρας aed io, gees ov TOUS τότε" ipinpenrortas: (ov eh ἂν δυναίμην), ἀλλὰ perches prey
ΡΥ, αὐτοῦ "Ep Ὁ pee ἀκούσαντας. καίτοι εἰ ἐσω- 47 δε
Apr UM “Y
povouv ede: ουν ἂν αὐτῶν, καὶ τοὺς διδα-
sag MHA One. ΤΌ ΕΙΣ ΗΝ υς τῶν σφετέρων ἀβμαρτημόλων σφόδ p “ἂν BE. καὶ τοὺς ὅρκους, εἰ CORED, οὐκ ἂν * ἐπὶ μὲν τοῖς τῶν πολιτῶν κακοῖς πὶ ra suelo, an * én δὲ τοῖς τὴς πόλεως ἀγαθοῖς ῥᾳδίωξ παρέβαι: γον. πρὸς μὲν οὖν τούτους τοσαῦτα λέ «λέγω, τοὺς δὲ μάρτυράς μοι κάλει. Καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀνάβητε.
peed » =
MAPTYPES. / Ve
20 XII. KATA ἘΡΑΤΟΣΘΕΝΟΥΣ.
f put AM A
Ν Ν -“ 48 Τῶν μὲν Hope ὕρων ἀκηκβαῇ ε. τὸ δὲ Saks yas ἐμ εἰς τὴν ἀρχὴν καταστὰς ἀγαθὸν μὲν οὐδενὸς ΜΕΝ :
oxev, ἄλλων δὲ πολλῶν. καίτοι εἴπεῃ ἦν, ἀκὴρ τ σθόν, ἐχρῆν. ἂν πρῶτ TOY μὲν μὴ Φαρανθμώς ἁ τὰ χειν, ἔπειτα τῇ βουχῇ μηνυτὴν Ry hes Hep TOV Sey Oe ἁπασῶν, OTL at οβς Sera | Βάτρα- χος καὶ Αἰσχυλίδης οὐ τἀληθῆ | μηνύουσιν, ἀλλὰ ia ὑπὸ τῶν Ce als πλασθῶτα εἰσαγγέλλουσι, 49 συγκείμενα ἐπὶ τῇ τῶν πολίων Ὑ καὶ μὲν δή, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, ὅσοι κακόθοι ἦσαν τῷ Uae τέρῳ skate οὐδὲν ἔλαττον εἶχον σιωπῶντες ἕτε- fot γὰρ hg gy οἱ heyonnes καὶ πράττοντες ὧν Ὅν οἷόν τ᾽ ἣ» helo κακὰ γενέσθαι τῇ πόλει. ὁπόσοι “δ᾽ εὖνοί parry νοις εἶναι, πῶς οὐκ ἐνταῦθα ἔδειξαν, αὐὖ- τοί τε τὰ Boots λέγοντες Kat τοὺς ἐξαμαρτά- νοντας Peer perovees ὁ Tne ure eee 50 Ἴσως δ᾽ ἂν ἔχοι βάν» ὅτι ἐδεδοίκει, καὶ Hes
uy A τοῦτο ἐνίοις ἱκανὸν ἔσται. ὅπως τοίνυν whi AA ρ σεται ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τοῖς peers ἃ ἐνα iia i εἰ δὲ μή, ἐνταυθοῖ δῆλος ὃ ἔσται ὅτι he TE αὐτῷ Avo
ee’ nperke, καὶ ὦ AEN ἐδ ἐδύνατο ὥστε ἐναντιούμενος μηδὲν κακὸν παθεῖν ὑπ᾿ ἀἀὐτῶν, χρῆν. δ᾽ αὐτὸν ὑπὲρ 77s ὑμετέρας σωτηρίάς ταύτην τὴν ΤΡᾺ υ- μίαν ἔχειν, ἀλλὰ μὴ ὑπὲρ Θηραμένους, ὃς εἰς ὑμᾶς 51 πολλὰ ἐξήμαρτεν. YaAN οὗτος τὴν μὲν “πόλιν
ah TT > ‘ > ε ΄ > ‘ ἐχθρὰν ἐνόμιζεν εἶναι, τοὺς δ᾽ ὑμετέρους ἐχθροὺς
’ ε > / Lal > Ν a ΄ φίλους, ὡς ἀμφότερα ταῦτα ἐγὼ πολλοῖς τεκμηρί-
’ Ν ‘ Ν > / Ν ols παραστήσω, καὶ τὰς πρὸς ἀλλήλους διαφορὰς
XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES.
5 ε A e “A 5 5 ε A ε “ 4 ε ’ οὐχ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἀλλ᾽ ὑπὲρ ἑαυτῶν γιγνομένας, ὅὃπό- τεροι ταῦτα πράξουσι καὶ τῆς πόλεως ἄρξουσι. εἰ γὰρ ὑπὲρ τῶν ἀδικουμένων ἐστασίαζον, ποῦ κάλλιον ἂν ἣν ἀνδρὶ ἄρχοντι, ἣ Θρασυβούλου Φυ- λὴν κατειληφότος, τότ᾽ ἐπιδείξασθαι τὴν αὑτοῦ
" ε ἄς π᾿ ΄, ΄ Δ ἮΝ εὔνοιαν ; ὁ δ᾽ ἀντὶ τοῦ ἐπαγγείλασθαί τι 7 πρᾶ-
» A A A 5 A Led > A A “~ Ear ἀγαθὸν πρὸς τοὺς ἐπὶ Φυλῇ, ἐλθὼν μετὰ τῶν , 5 Lad » We: | al , συναρχόντων εἰς Σαλαμῖνα Kat Ἐλευσῖνάδε τρια- κοσίους τῶν πολιτῶν ἀπήγαγεν εἰς τὸ δεσμωτή- A “~ , 5 »“ ε 4 7 ριον, καὶ μιᾷ ψήφῳ αὐτῶν ἁπάντων θάνατον Kate ’ 5 ‘ \ > Ν ΠΣ Ἀ ψηφίσατο. ἐπειδὴ δὲ εἰς τὸν Πειραιᾶ ἤλθομεν καὶ ai ταραχαὶ γεγενημέναι ἦσαν καὶ περὶ τῶν διαλλα-
“ ε "4 > rs ἈΝ ε 4 > 4 γῶν ot λόγοι ἐγίνοντο, πολλὰς ἑκάτεροι ἐλπίδας
»¥ Ν 5 4 »Ἢ ε 5 7 5 ’ εἰχομεν πρὸς ἀλλήλους ἔσεσθαι ὡς ἀμφότεροι ἐδεί- Eapev. οἱ μὲν γὰρ ἐκ Πειραιῶς κρείττους ὄντες
2 5» A 5 al ε Ν > ἈΝ 3᾿ 5 , εἴασαν αὐτοὺς ἀπελθεῖν - οἱ δὲ εἰς TO ἄστυ ἐλθόν- τες τοὺς μὲν τριάκοντα ἐξέβαλον πλὴν Φείδωνος
Ἀ» ,ὕ » Ν 4 5 ’ > , καὶ ᾽᾿Ἐρατοσθένους, ἄρχοντας δὲ τοὺς ἐκείνοις ἐχθέ στους εἵλοντο, ἡγούμενοι δικαίως ἂν ὑπὸ τῶν αὐ- τῶν τούς τε τριάκοντα μισεῖσθαι καὶ τοὺς ἐν Πειραιεῖ φιλεῖσθαι. γ΄ τούτων τοίνυν Φείδων ὁ τῶν τριάκοντα γενόμενος καὶ ἹἹπποκλῆς καὶ ᾿Επιχάρης ὁ Λαμπτρεὺς καὶ ἕτεροι οἱ δοκοῦντες εἶναι ἐναντιώ- “ ~ Ν ’ Ν “59 ’, ε ’,ὔ τατοι Χαρικλεῖ καὶ Κριτίᾳ καὶ τῇ ἐκείνων ἑταιρείᾳ,
ἐπειδὴ αὐτοὶ εἰς τὴν ἀρχὴν κατέστησαν, πολὺ μεί- ζω στάσιν καὶ πόλεμον ἐπὶ τοὺς ἐν Πειραιεῖ τοῖς 5 » > 4 es ‘\ A > 4 ἐξ ἄστεος ἐποίησαν - οἷς καὶ φανερῶς ἐπεδείξαντο ν 5» ε A ~ > “ 5 Ψψ' δ A “a 5 ’ ὅτι οὐχ ὑπὲρ τῶν ἐν Πειραιεῖ οὐδ᾽ ὑπὲρ τῶν ἀδίκως
21
52
54
55
56
22 XII. KATA EPATOS@ENOYS.
5 ’ tL ’ 50.» ε “ 3 ‘ ἀπολλυμένων ἐστασίαζον, οὐδ᾽ οἱ τεθνεῶτες αὐτοὺς ἐλύπουν, οὐδ᾽ οἱ μέλλοντες ἀποθανεῖσθαι, ἀλλ᾽ οἱ 57 μεῖζον δυνάμενοι καὶ θᾶσσον πλουτοῦντες. λα- Υ Ἦν Ν 3 Ἂς Χ Ν , > ’, βόντες γὰρ τὰς ἀρχὰς καὶ τὴν πόλιν ἀμφοτέροις ἐπολέμουν, τοῖς τε τριάκοντα πάντα κακὰ εἰργα- σμένοις καὶ ὑμῖν πάντα κακὰ πεπονθόσι. καίτοι A a lal > 4 > Ν > Pre 50 τοῦτο πᾶσι δῆλον ἦν, ὅτι εἰ μὲν ἐκεῖνοι ἀδίκως » ε a , 4. Qo ὁ a 207 ε , ἔφευγον, ὑμεῖς δικαίως, εἰ δ᾽ ὑμεῖς ἀδίκως, οἱ τριά- ’ 5» ‘ Ἀ δι Ὁ » ψ κοντα δικαίως: οὐ γὰρ δὴ ἑτέρων ἔργων αἰτίαν λαβόντες ἐκ τῆς πόλεως ἐξέπεσον, ἀλλὰ τούτων. 58 ὥστε σφόδρα χρὴ ὀργίζεσθαι, ὅτι Φείδων αἱρεθεὶς “ ~ ἀν » ὑμᾶς διαλλάξαι Kal καταγαγεῖν, τῶν αὐτῶν ἔργων 5 , Lal ἈΝ il > a“ ’ Ν \ Ἐρατοσθένει μετεῖχε καὶ TH αὐτῇ γνώμῃ τοὺς μὲν ΄σ an “ - ΩΣ > κρείττους αὑτῶν Ov ὑμᾶς κακῶς ποιεῖν ἕτοιμος ἦν, ec; = Ὄπ 397 7 > > / > “ ὑμῖν δὲ ἀδίκως φεύγουσιν οὐκ ἠθέλησεν ἀποδοῦναι τὴν πόλιν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐλθὼν εἰς Λακεδαίμονα ἔπειθεν αὐ- Ν τοὺς στρατεύεσθαι, διαβάλλων ὅτι Βοιωτῶν ἡ πόλις ¥ Acar , ao » , , ἔσται, Kat ἄλλα λέγων οἷς wero πείσειν μάλιστα. , Ν - ~ lal 59 ov δυνάμενος δὲ τούτων τυχεῖν, εἴτε Kal τῶν ἱερῶν » δὰ ¥ » Ν » lal > lA ἐμποδὼν ὄντων εἴτε Kal αὐτῶν ov βουλομένων, ε Ν , > , ν » 3 ΄ ἑκατὸν τάλαντα ἐδανείσατο, ἵνα ἔχοι ἐπικούρους Cal ‘ , » > , μισθοῦσθαι. | καὶ Λύσανδρον ἄρχοντα ἠτήσατο, > 4 ~ εὐνούστατον μὲν ὄντα TH ὀλιγαρχίᾳ, κακονούστα- δὲ ~ / “~ δὲ / Ἁ 5 τον δὲ τῇ πόλει, μισοῦντα δὲ μάλιστα τοὺς «ἐν 60 Πειραιεῖ. μισθωσάμενοι δὲ πάντας ἀνθρώπους } Po ee 4 A / \ ’ > ’ Ν ἐπ᾿ ὀλέθρῳ τῆς πόλεως, καὶ πόλεις ἐπάγοντες, καὶ τελευτῶντες Λακεδαιμονίους καὶ τῶν συμμάχων ὁπόσους ἐδύναντο πεῖσαι, οὐ διαλλάξαι ἀλλ᾽ ἀπο-
AIF. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 23
, Ud Ν / > Ν > » λέσαι παρεσκευάζοντο τὴν πόλιν εἰ μὴ SV ἄνδρας > , Shige tel ΄ x A 9 A ἀγαθούς, οἷς ὑμεῖς δηλώσατε παρὰ τῶν ἐχθρῶν.
’ / 9 Ν » / 4 > rs δίκην λαβόντες, ὅτι Kal ἐκείνοις χάριν ἀποδώσετε.
Be A ἘΠῚ, Ν Ν > , Ν 039 ὦ 5 ταῦτα δὲ ἐπίστασθε μὲν καὶ αὐτοί, καὶ οἶδ᾽ ὅτι οὐ 61 δεῖ μάρτυρας παρασχέσθαι. ὅμως δέ: ἐγώ τε
Ν x > , ε ~ > > ee | ν ε γὰρ δέομαι ἀναπαύσασθαι, ὑμῶν τ᾽ ἐνίοις ἥδιον ὡς
πλείστων τοὺς αὐτοὺς λόγους ἀκούειν. ΜΑΡΤΎΡΕΣ.
Ν Ν ἈΝ Φέρε δὴ καὶ περὶ Θηραμένους ὡς ἂν δύνωμαι 62 ὃ ἊΣ ΄, ὃ ὃ ΄ δέ Pe κα 3 A ia βραχυτάτων διδάξω. δέομαι δ᾽ ὑμῶν ἀκοῦσαι > A lal “ ὑπέρ T ἐμαυτοῦ καὶ τῆς πόλεως. καὶ μηδενὶ τοῦτο παραστῇ, ὡς ᾿Ερατοσθένους κινδυνεύοντος Θηρα- μένους κατηγορῶ" πυνθάνομαι γὰρ ταῦτα ἀπολο- ΄ as 4 > ΄ , να Ν A γήσεσθαι αὐτόν, ὅτι ἐκείνῳ φίλος Hv καὶ τῶν > ~ » ἴω 4 , > + 5 Ν αὐτῶν ἔργων μετεῖχε. καίτοι σφόδρ᾽ ἂν αὐτὸν 63 οἶμαι μετὰ Θεμιστοκλέους πολιτευόμενον προσποι- Ν [4 εἶσθαι πράττειν ὅπως οἰκοδομηθήσεται τὰ τείχη, Ld ὁπότε Kal μετὰ Θηραμένους ὅπως καθαιρεθήσεται. -“ A ε οὐ γάρ μοι δοκοῦσιν ἴσου ἄξιοι γεγενῆσθαι: ὃ 5 / > μὲν yap Λακεδαιμονίων ἀκόντων φκοδόμησεν αὐ- τά, οὗτος δὲ τοὺς πολίτας ἐξαπατήσας καθεῖλε. ~~ r YER Ty oe PR περιέστηκεν οὖν TH πόλει τοὐναντίον ἢ ὡς εἰκὸς 64 τς ¥ \ Ν Ν Ν ΄ Ν ΄, ἣν. ἄξιον μὲν γὰρ καὶ τοὺς φίλους τοὺς Θηραμέ- ’ νους προσαπολωλέναι, πλὴν εἴ τις ἐτύγχανεν ἐκεί- lal “ 3 νῳ τἀναντία πράττων: νῦν δὲ ὁρῶ τάς τε ἀπο- λογίας εἰς ἐκεῖνον ἀναφερομένας, τοὺς T ἐκείνῳ
24 XII. KATA ἘΡΑΤΟΣΘΕΝΟΥΣ.
συνόντας τιμᾶσθαι πειρωμένους, ὥσπερ πολλῶν > a > 7 2\\>? > , A τ ἀγαθῶν αἰτίου ἀλλ᾽ οὐ μεγάλων κακῶν γεγενημέ-
65 vov. ὃς πρῶτον μὲν τῆς προτέρας ὀλιγαρχίας αἰτιώτατος ἐγένετο, πείσας ὑμᾶς τὴν ἐπὶ τῶν
, » ε / ee Ν Ν τετρακοσίων πολιτείαν ἑλέσθαι. καὶ ὁ μὲν πατὴρ αὐτοῦ τῶν προβούλων ὧν ταῦτ᾽ ἔπραττεν, αὐτὸς δὲ δοκῶν εὐνούστατος εἶναι τοῖς πράγμασι στρα-
86 as ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν ἠρέθη. καὶ ἕως μὲν ἐτιμᾶτο, πιστὸν ἑαυτὸν παρεῖχεν" ἐπειδὴ δὲ Πείσανδρον μὲν καὶ Κάλλαισχρον καὶ ἑτέρους ἑώρα προτέρους αὑτοῦ γινομένους, τὸ δὲ ὑμέτερον πλῆθος οὐκέτι
’, Ps 5 ἴω 43 ¥ , βουλόμενον τούτων ἀκροᾶσθαι, τότ᾽ ἤδη διά τε Ν Ν > / 4 Ἁ Ν 3 ε ~~ , ‘Tov πρὸς ἐκείνους φθόνον καὶ τὸ παρ᾽ ὑμῶν δέος 4 lal > 4 » ’, 67 μετέσχε τῶν Ἀριστοκράτους ἐργων. γβουλόμενος Ν τὴν ΄ ᾽,ὔ “ Ν > > δὲ τῷ ὑμετέρῳ πλήθει δοκεῖν πιστὸς εἶναι ᾽Αντι- “A Ge ΄ / + ε a φῶντα καὶ ᾿Αρχεπτόλεμον φιλτάτους ὄντας αὑτῷ κατηγορῶν ἀπέκτεινεν, εἰς τοσοῦτον δὲ κακίας ἣλ- θεν, ὥστε ἅμα μὲν διὰ τὴν πρὸς ἐκείνους πίστιν ε ἴω ’ὔ x Ν ‘ Ν ε -“ ‘ ὑμᾶς κατεδουλώσατο, διὰ δὲ τὴν πρὸς ὑμᾶς τοὺς ’ > ’ , Ἀ Ν ~ /
68 φίλους ἀπώλεσε. "τιμώμενος δὲ καὶ TOV μεγίστων ἀξιόύμενος, αὐτὸς" ἐπαγγειλάμενος σώσειν τὴν πό- λιν αὐτὸς ἀπώλεσε, ῥάσκρν. πρᾶγμα εὑρηκέναι μέγα καὶ πολλοῦ ἄξιον. ὑπέσχετο δὲ εἰρήνην ποιήσειν μήτε ὅμηρα δοὺς μήτε τὰ τείχη καθελὼν μήτε τὰς ναῦς παραδούς ταῦτα δὲ εἰπεῖν μὲν οὐ-
69 devi ἠθέλησεν, ἐκέλευσε δὲ αὑτῷ πιστεύειν. ὑμεῖς
δὰ ae ᾽ A 4 ‘ a > δέ, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, πραττούσης μὲν τῆς ἐν ᾿Αρείῳ πάγῳ βουλῆς σωτήρια, ἀντιλεγόντων δὲ ρείῳ πάγς ἧς σωτήρια, γόντων δὲ
a
\
XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES.
σ΄ » Ε πολλῶν Θηραμένει, εἰδότες δὲ ὅτι οἱ μὲν ἄλλοι av- θρωποι τῶν πολεμίων ἕνεκεν τἀπόρρητα ποιοῦνται, > S > > lal ε “ / > > ΄ ἐκεῖνος δ᾽ ἐν τοῖς αὑτοῦ πολίταις οὐκ ἠθέλησεν
25
εἰπεῖν ταῦτα ἃ πρὸς τοὺς πολεμίους ἐβξλλῶν ἐρεῖν,
Ὡν» ὅμως ἐπετρέψατε αὐτῷ πατρίδα καὶ παῖδας καὶ
γυναῖκας καὶ ὑμᾶς αὐτούς. ὁ δὲ ὧν μὲν ὑπέσχετο 9 Ν ¥ 4 Ν > ’ ε Ν οὐδὲν ἔπραξεν, οὕτως δὲ ἐνετεθύμητο. ὡς χρὴ Ν Ase ial ’ \ / ν ἈΝ μικρὰν καὶ ἀσθενῆ γενέσθαι τὴν πόλιν, ὥστε περὶ e > Ν ua 3, x ’, > / x ὧν οὐδεὶς πώποτε οὔτε τῶν πολεμίων ἐμνήσθη οὔτε τῶν πολιτῶν ἤλπισε, ταῦθ᾽ ὑμᾶς ἔπεισε πρᾶξαι, 3 ε Ν ’, 5 / > > 92% ovx ὑπὸ Λακεδαιμονίων ἀϑᾳχκαζομενοξ: ἀλλ᾽ αὐτὸς ἐκείνοις ἐπαγγελλάμαμῃς,, τοῦ τε Πειραιῶς τὰ τείχη ἘῸΝ δέριαλεα καὶ τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν πολιτείαν καταλῦ- σαι, εὖ εἰδὼς ὅτι, εἰ Pe πασῶν τῶν ἐλπίδων ἀπο-
Ζτερηθήδδωρβε,. τρηζεῦι» παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ τὴν τιμωρίαν ᾿Κομιεῖσθε. καὶ τὸ τελευταῖον, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί,
οὐ πρότερον εἴασε τὴν ἐκκλησίαν γενέσθαι, ἕως ὁ λεγόμενος ὑπ᾽ ἐκείνων Καιρὸς ἐπιμελῶς ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἐτηρήθη, καὶ μετεπέμψατο μὲν τὰς pees. Λυσάν- δρὸβ ναῦς ἐκ iden Μεννλήκηός δὲ τὸ τῶν πολε- μίων στρατόπεδον. ἡ τότε δὲ τούτων ὑπαρχόντων, καὶ παρόντων Λυσάνδρου καὶ Φιλοχάρους καὶ Μιλ- τιάδου, περὶ τῆς πολιτείας τὴν ἐκκλησίαν ἐποίουν, ἵνα μήτε ῥήτωρ αὐτοῖς μηδεὶς ἐναντιοῖτο μηδὲ ἀπειλοῖ, ὑμεῖς τε μὴ τὰ τῇ πόλει συμφέροντα ἕλοι- , ὑμεῖς τε μὴ τὰ τῇ μφέρ ἕλου σθε, ἀλλὰ τἀκείνοις δοκοῦντα ψηφίσαισθε. ἀνα- ‘ Ν 4 Css ε “A , στὰς δὲ Θηραμένης ἐκέλευσεν ὑμᾶς τριάκοντα ἀνὸ ΄ > / Ν aN Ν A λ ΄ ράσιν ἐπιτρέψαι τὴν πόλιν, καὶ τῇ πολιτείᾳ
70
7I
73
26 XII. KATA EPATOS@ENOYS.
χρῆσθαι ἣν Δρακοντίδης ἀπέφαινεν. ὑμεῖς δ᾽ 4 A 4 4 5 “a ε 3 ’ ὅμως καὶ οὕτω διακείμενοι ἐθορυβεῖτε ὡς οὐ ποιή- σοντες ταῦτα" ἐγιγνώσκετε γὰρ ὅτι περὶ δουλείας Ν > lA > 5 ,ὕ ἡ , 5 ΄ καὶ ἐλευθερίας ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐξεκλησιάζετε. as , 9S ᾿Ξ, ’ Ν Μ 4 74 Θηραμένης δέ, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, (καὶ Τούτων ε la > ἈΝ , s > 9 ὑδὲ ὑμᾶς αὐτοὺς μάρτυρας παρέξομαι) εἶπεν ὅτι οὐδὲν > “ aN i, €. , θ 8 5 δὴ Ar Ν αὐτῷ μέλοι τοῦ ὑμετέρου θορύβου, ἐπειδὴ πολλοὺς A > 4 > 4 A Ν 7 ’ὕ μὲν ᾿Αθηναίων εἰδείη τοὺς τὰ ὅμοια πράττοντας αὑτῷ, δοκοῦντα δὲ Λυσάνδρῳ καὶ Λακεδαιμονίοις λέγοι. μετ᾽ ἐκεῖνον δὲ Λύσανδρος ἀναστὰς ἄλλα Ν > εὐ τυ ς ’ὔ μα υδαΝ » τε πολλὰ εἶπε καὶ OTL παρασπόνδους ὑμᾶς ἔχοι, ; an > A 4 1 Peer 2) » 3 Ν \ καὶ OTL OV περὶ πολιτείας ὑμῖν ἔσται ἀλλὰ περὶ 4 > A , > a , , σωτηρίας, εἰ μὴ ποιήσεθ᾽ ἃ Θηραμένης κελεύει. , “ 8’ 5 ~ 93 λ , 9 ” ὃ 5 θ Sa 75 τῶν δ᾽ ἐν TH ἐκκλησίᾳ ὅσοι ἄνδρες ἀγαθοὶ ἦσαν, γνόντες τὴν παρασκευὴν καὶ τὴν ἀνάγκην, οἱ μὲν > al 4 ἃς ε 4 5 3 Ν » > 4 αὐτοῦ μένοντες ἡσυχίαν ἦγον, οἱ δὲ ἤᾧχοντο ἀπιόν- nw nw 4 »ὉΝ τες, τοῦτο γοῦν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς συνειδότες, ὅτι οὐ- δὲν κακὸν τῇ πόλει ἐψηφίσαντο : ὀλίγοι δέ τινες καὶ πονηροὶ καὶ κακῶς βουλευόμενοι τὰ προστα- 76 χθέντα ἐχειροτόνησαν. παρηγγέλλετο γὰρ αὐτοῖς δέκα μὲν οὺς Θηραμένης ἀπέδειξε χειροτονῆσαι, ,ὔὕ A A ε ’ »¥ ’ δέκα δὲ οὺς οἱ καθεστηκότες ἔφοροι κελεύοιεν, δέκα δ᾽ ἐκ τῶν παρόντων: οὕτω γὰρ τὴν ὑμετέραν » ,ὔ ee Ἀ A ε “ 7 5 / ἀσθένειαν ἑώρων καὶ τὴν αὑτῶν δύναμιν ἠπί- σταντο, ὥστε πρότερον ἤδεσαν τὰ μέλλοντα ἐν τῇ 77 ἐκκλησίᾳ πραχθήσεσθαι. ταῦτα δὲ οὐκ ἐμοὶ δεῖ cr 5» Ν 5 ’ ’ ‘A A ε » > nA πιστεῦσαι, ἀλλὰ ἐκείνῳ: πάντα yap τὰ UT ἐμοῦ » ,ὔ > gig ba > , »Ἤ εἰρημένα ἐν TH βουλῃ ἀπολογούμενος ἔλεγεν,
XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES.
a Angry
9 \7 x a , “ WS eet BRS “a ὀνειδίζων μὲν Tots φεύγουσιν, ὅτι Sv αὐτὸν κατέλ- θοιεν, οὐδὲν φροντιζόντων Λακεδαιμονίων, ὀνειδί- ζων δὲ τοῖς τῆς πολιτείας μετέχουσιν ὅτι πάντων τῶν πεπραγμένων τοῖς εἰρημένοις τρόποις ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦ GAA αὐτὸς αἴτιος γεγενημένος τοιούτων τυγχάνοι, πολ- λὰς πίστεις a δεδωκὼς καὶ Tap ἐκείνων $i ty ἢ a ὅρκους εἰχηφῶς. καὶ τοσούτων καὶ ἑτέρων κακῶν καὶ αἰσχρῶν καὶ πάλαι καὶ νεωστὶ καὶ μικρῶν καὶ μεγάλων αἰτίου γεγενημένου τολμήσουσιν αὑτοὺς lA »¥ > / > ε Ν ε “ > φίλους ὄντας ἀποφαίνειν, οὐχ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἀποθα- ’ id > >, δ Ν “A ε A , vovTos Θηραμένους add ὑπὲρ τῆς αὑτοῦ πονηρίας, καὶ δικαίως μὲν ἐν ὀλιγαρχίᾳ δίκην δόντος (ἤδη id YEPX "9 7 5. (ἢ Ν 3 Ν [4 ’ » ἃ 5 γὰρ αὐτὴν κατέλυσε), δικαίως δ᾽ ἂν ἐν δημοκρα- τίᾳ: δὶς γὰρ ὑμᾶς κατεδουλώσατο, τῶν μὲν παρόν- των καταφρονῶν, τῶν δὲ ἀπόντων ἐπιθυμῶν, καὶ ΄“ ’ 5» ’ ’ ’ ¥ τῷ καλλίστῳ ὀνόματι χρώμενος δεινοτάτων ἔργων 4 διδάσκαλος καταστάς. ;
Περὶ μὲν τοίνυν Θηραμένου: ἱκανά μοί ἐστι τὰ κατηγορημένα" ἥκει δ᾽ ὑμῖν ἐκεῖνος ὁ καιρός, ἐν ᾧ δεῖ συγγνώμην καὶ ἔλεον μὴ εἶναι ἐν ταῖς ὑμετέραις
, > Ν . > ΄ ΝΣ 2 » γνώμαις, ἀλλὰ παρὰ ᾽᾿Ἐρατοσθένους καὶ τῶν τουτουὶ συναρχόντων δίκην λαβεῖν, μηδὲ μαχομένους [μὲν]
ex > A ΄ , , 9 κρείττους εἶναι τῶν πολεμίων, ψηφιζομένους δὲ ἥτ- τους τῶν ἐχθρῶν. μηδ᾽ ὧν φασι μέλλειν πράξειν
΄ , 3 Fy. a > 7 > ΄΄ πλείω χάριν αὐτοῖς ἴστε, ἢ ὧν ἐποίησαν ὀργίζεσθε" μηδ᾽ ἀποῦσι μὲν τοῖς τριάκοντα ἐπιβουλεύετε, παρ- hin AP A ὄντας δ᾽ ἀφῆτε: μηδὲ τῆς τύχης, ἣ τούτους παρέ- δωκε τῇ πόλει, κάκιον ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς βοηθήσητε.
27
as |
J\A/ we
\
78
79
28 XII. KATA EPATOS@ENOYS.
, : Ν 97 - ΄ aa: ; 8% Κατηγόρηται δὴ ᾿Εῤῥατοσθένους καὶ τῶν τούτου - N > ΄ > ͵΄ N Ὁ ἌΡΗΝ φίλων, οἷς τὰς ἀπολογίας ἀνοίσει καὶ μεθ᾽ ὧν ees “ ,ὕ ε ,ὕ 3 Ν 5 ϑιἣῬ αὐτῷ ταῦτα πέπρακται. ὁ μέντοι ἀγὼν οὐκ ἐξ » “ / ts Neb id “' Ν Ν. ἴσον τῇ πόλει καὶ ᾿Ερατοσθένει: οὗτος μὲν γὰρ κατήγορος καὶ δικαστὴς αὐτὸς HY τῶν κρινομένων, ἡμεῖς δὲ vybi εἰς κατηγορίαν καὶ ἀπολογίαν καθέ- 82 σταμεν. γ΄ καὶ οὗτοι μὲν τοὺς οὐδὲν ἀδικοῦντας ἀκρίτους ἀπέκτειναν, ὑμεῖς δὲ τοὺς ἀπολέσαντας τὴν πόλιν κατὰ τὸν νόμον ἀξιοῦτε κρίνειν, παρ᾽ ὧν οὐδ᾽ ἂν παρανόμως βουλόμενοι δίκην λαμβάνειν » “7 A > , a N , > , ἀξίαν Tov ἀδικημάτων ὧν τὴν πόλιν ἠδικήκασι ’ 7 Ν , λάβοιτε. τί γὰρ ἂν παθόντες δίκην τὴν ἀξίαν ¥ aA » ΄ , > > N 83 εἴησαν τῶν ἔργων δεδωκότες ; πότερον εἰ αὐτοὺς ἀποκτείνοιτε καὶ τοὺς παῖδας αὐτῶν, ἱκανὴν ἂν τοῦ ’ὔ ld ’ὔ - Ὁ Ld Ν 4. ἡ φόνου δίκην λάβοιμεν, ὧν οὗτοι πατέρας καὶ υἱεῖς Res ταν Soe ἊΣ ἈΝ ye 2\\ \ Ne > καὶ ἀδελφοὺς ἀκρίτους ἀπέκτειναν ; ἀλλὰ yap εἰ Ν la ‘ Ν ’ : lal “Ὁ » τὰ χρήματα τὰ φανερὰ δημεύσαιτε, καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι al o Ὅ μν Ν a ἢ τῇ πόλει, ἧς οὗτοι πολλὰ εἰλήφασιν, ἢ Tots ἰδιώ- a > + > , 3 \ , , 84 ταις, ὧν οἰκίας ἐξεπόρθησαν ; ἐπειδὴ τοίνυν πάν- wn 5 Qn Ta ποιοῦντες δίκην Tap αὐτῶν οὐκ av δύναισθε λαβεῖν, πῶς οὐκ αἰσχρὸν ὑμῖν καὶ ἡντινοῦν ἀπολι- “Ὁ 9 4 4 Ν ’ , πεῖν, ἡντινά τις βούλοιτο Tapa τούτων λαμβάνειν; “ > Ἀν “ lal πᾶν δ᾽ av μοι δοκεῖ τολμῆσαι, ὅστις νυνὶ οὐχ Ere » An A A “- A pov ὄντων τῶν δικαστῶν ἀλλ᾽ αὐτῶν τῶν κακῶς πεπονθότων, ἥκει ἀπολογησόμενος πρὸς αὐτοὺς τοὺς μάρτυρας τῆς τούτου πονηρίας" τοσοῦτον ἣ 85 ὑμῶν καταπεφρόνηκεν ἢ ἑτέροις πεπίστευκεν. ὧν » / ” > inl > id ν ἀμφοτέρων ἄξιον ἐπιμεληθῆναι, ἐνθυμουμένους ὅτι
XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES.
A a beet, EET our ἂν ἐκεῖνα ἐδύναντο ποιεῖν μὴ ἑτέρων συμπρατ- / ἊΨ» 3 ἃ “A > / > 0 “a Ἂν Ue Ν A τόντων OUT ἂν νῦν ἐπεχείρησαν ἐλθεῖν μὴ ὑπὸ τῶν
29
> “~ ΕΣ , ἃ > , 9 αυτῶν οἰομένου σωθήσεσθαι, Ol OV τουτοις ἥκουσι,
\ » βοηθήσοντες, ἀλλὰ ἡγούμενοι πολλὴν ἄδειαν σφί- σιν ἔσεσθαι τῶν [τε] πεπραγμένων καὶ τοῦ λοιποῦ ποιεῖν ὅ τι ἂν βούλωνται, εἰ τοὺς μεγίστων κακῶν
> ἢ ’ὔ 3 ’ αἰτίους λαβόντες ἀφήσετε. ᾿Αλλὰ καὶ τῶν ξυνερούντων αὐτοῖς ἄξιον θαυμά- ζειν, πότερον ὡς καλοὶ κἀγαθοὶ αἰτήσονται, τὴν ε a“ > Ἁ ’, 5 4 5 ’ a αὑτῶν ἀρετὴν πλείονος ἀξίαν ἀποφαίνοντες τῆς ΄ , > , 29K > \ Ψ τούτων πονηρίας" ἐβουλόμην μέντ᾽ ἂν αὐτοὺς οὕτω ΄ = , N , σ a προθύμους εἶναι σώζειν τὴν πόλιν, ὥσπερ οὗτοι > ’ ἄν Ὁ \ , > , Ν ἀπολλύναι" ἢ ws δεινοὶ λέγειν ἀπολογήσονται καὶ τὰ τούτων ἔργα πολλοῦ ἄξια ἀποφανοῦσιν. ἀλλ᾽ 5 ε Ν ε “Ὁ 5» Ν > A > Ν ἊΝ 4 7 οὐχ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν οὐδεὶς αὐτῶν οὐδὲ τὰ δίκαια πώ-
5 ’ > Lal TT OTE ETTEXELPNOEV ELTTELV. Ait
᾿Αλλὰ τοὺς μάρτυρας ἄξιον ἰδεῖν, οἱ τούτοις μαρ-͵
87
hs αὑτῶν ἐβκηγοροθαι σφόδῥᾳ ἐπίλησβο:
νας καὶ εὐήθεις νομίζοντες ὑμᾷς εἶναι, εἰ διὰ μὲν
ν
τοῦ ὑμεγέρου πλήθους ἀδεῶς ἡγοῦνται τοὺς τριά- κοντα σώσειν, διὰ δὲ ᾿ΕἘρατοσθένην καὶ τοὺς συν- ἄρχοντας αὐτοῦ δεινὸν ἦν καὶ τῶν τεθνεώτων ἐπ᾽ ἐκφορὰν ἐ ἐλθεῖν. καίτοι οὗτοι μὲν σωθέντες πάλιν ἂν Svvawro τὴν πόλιν ἀπολέσαι ἐκεῖνοι δέ, ods οὗτοι ἀπώλεσαν, τελευτήσαντες τὸν βίον bia ἔχουσι τῆς παρὰ τῶν ἐχθρῶν τιμωρίας. οὐκ οὖν δεινὸν εἰ τῶν μὲν ἀδίκως τεθνεώτων οἱ φίλοι συν- απώλλυντο, αὐτοῖς δὲ τοῖς τὴν πόλιν ἀπολέσασιν
20 XII. KATA ἘΡΑΤΟΣΘΕΝΟΥΣ.
89
heir i t. > Ϊ re hy
ΔΉ δήπου ἐπ᾽ ἐκφορὰν πολλοὶ ἥξουσιν, ὁπότε βοηθεῖν A δας, Χ X \ a τοσοῦτοι παρασκευάζονται; Kal μὲν δὴ πολλῷ
AY
ia) Xx κυ e > . πεῖν, ἢ ὑπὲρ ὧν οὗτοι πεποιήκασιν ἀπολογήσα-
go
"
9
4 ’,’ e > ’ὔ 5 ’ σθαι. καίτοι λέγουσιν ὡς Ἐρατοσθένει ἐλάχιστα an Cant ( LA £ an TOY τριάκοντα κακὰ εἴῤγασται, καὶ διὰ τοῦτο av- τὸν ἀξιοῦσι σωθῆναι: ὅτι δὲ τῶν ἄλλων “Ἑλλήνων “~ » ε “ 5 ’ὕ > » nw πλεῖστα εἰς ὑμᾶς ἐξημάρτηκεν, οὐκ οἴρμται χρῆναι ae, > 4 ε ~ Ἂν ’ ν ’ αὐτὸν ἀπολέσθαι. ὑμεῖς δὲ δείξατε ἦν τινα γνώ- μὴν ἔχετε περὶ τῶν πραγμάτων. εἰ μὲν γὰρ τού- yah ἤχει » ε > , tov καταψηφιεῖσθε, δῆλοι ἔσεσθε ὡς ὀργιζόμενοι
f= OH“ LL ἵ
A v oR. LV τοῖς πεπραγμένοις - εἰ δὲ ἀποψηφίεισθε, ὀφθήσε- Β APY 7D
!
/
He:
ms > Φ' ΟΝ e Ne tele ape Licey oY δὶ retaet Sate: poeov ηγουμαι ειναυ ὑπέρ WY πυμεις ἐπάσχετε αντει-
ow.
“ WE ¥ > ey: Ν 4 >” Ὑ σθε των ͵αὐυτων εργων» επισυμήῆται τουτοις OVTES,
ν᾿ 5 *¢ ͵ Ψ ὙΦ Ν A , και οὐχ ἕξετε λέγειν OTL TA VITO τῶν τριάκοντα ᾽ν ἜΝ > A \ \ Ν ΤΣ “he ASS προ ταν EVTO ETOLELTE* VUVL μεν yap ουόεις UMS ~~ ee : (
ae "ΑΛ,
> ὦ ἣν Ν ε ΄ ’ 4- ΛΠ Ὁ , ἀναγκάζει παρὰ τὴν ὑμετέραν γνώμην ἀποψηφί- ν ’ Ν , » ζεσθαι. ὥστε συμβουλεύω μὴ τούτων ἀποψηφι- σαμένους yoy αὐτῶν καταψηφίσασθαι, - μηδ᾽ Ky myer =k APL ΝΥ Bye - A «ὦ 4 .ᾷ + οἴεσθε κρύβδην εἶναι τὴν ψῆφον - φανέρὰν γὰρ τῇ πόλει τὴν ὑμετέραν γνώμην ποιήσετε. Βούλομαι δὲ ὀλίγα ἑκατέρους ἀναμνήσας κατα- way" \ a“ βαίνειν, τούς τε ἐξ ἀστεὸς Kal τοὺ: ἐκ Πειραιῶς, 9 Ν ε ~ Ν ’ td A iva τὰς ὑμῖν διὰ τούτων ενημένας συμφορὰς ὑμῖν διὰ τούτων γεγενημένας συμφορὰς παραδείγματα ἔχοντες τὴν ψῆφον φέρητε. καὶ A ee.” Ψ 3 ᾿ , 3 / 9 πρῶτον μὲν ὅσοι ἐξ ἄστεός ἐστε, σκέψασθε ὅτι eo. , ” ΄ ¥ ’ 9 A ὑπὸ τούτων οὕτω σφόδρα ἤρχεσιθε, ὥστε ἀδελφοῖς δι 2 \ , > a NYY Pe A καὶ υἱέσι Kal πολίταις ἠναγκάζέσθε πολεμεῖν Tor- val - a οὔτον πόλεμον, ἐν ᾧ ἡττηθέντες μὲν τοῖς νικήσασι
ro?)
XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES.
bs Ωἂε| » 4, δ᾽ x 4, ὃ λ ’ὔ
τὸ ἴσον ἔχετε, νικήσαντες δ᾽ ἂν τούτοις ἐδουλεύετε. Ν Ν 297 κά & ἈΝ “Δ > A
καὶ τοὺς ἰδίους οἴκους οὗτοι μὲν [ἂν] ἐκ τῶν πρα- , , > , ςε on δὲ ὃ Ν Ν Ν
γμάτων μεγάλους ἐκτήσαντο, ὑμεῖς δὲ διὰ τὸν πρὸς
ἀλλήλους πόλεμον ἐλάττους ἔχετε: συνωφελεῖσθαι
μὲν γὰρ ὑμᾶς οὐκ ἠξίουν, συνδιαβάλλεσθαι δ᾽
5 ,ὔ 3 Le ε ’, > ’ ν
ἠνάγκαζον, εἰς τοσοῦτον ὑπεροψίας ἐλθόντες ὥστε
οὐ τῶν ἀγαθῶν κοινούμενοι πιστοὺς ὑμῶν ἐκτῶντο,
> Ἂς A > 35
ἀλλὰ τῶν ὄνει
ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ὑμεῖς νῦν ἐν τῷ θαῤῥραλέφιδ ὄντες, καθ᾽ ὅσον
SWacbe, καὶ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν καὶ ὑπὲρ τῶν ἐκ
Πειραιῶς τιμωρήσασθε, ἐνθυμηθέντες μὲν ὅτι ὑπὸ
τούτων πονηροτάτων ὄντων ἤρχεσθε, ἐνθυμηθέντες
Ν ν 3 > A aA > 4 Ν δὲ ὅτι μετ᾽ ἀνδρῶν νῦν ἀρίστων πολιτεύεσθε καὶ
hand ’ Ud A ‘ »“» / τοῖς πολεμίοις μάχεσθε καὶ περὶ τῆς πόλεως Bov- λεύεσθε, ἀναμνησθέντες δὲ τῶν ἐπικούρων, οὗς οὗ- τοι φύλακας τῆς σφετέρας ἀρχῆς καὶ τῆς ὑμετέρας δουλείας εἰς τὴν ἀκρόπολιν κατέστησαν. καὶ πρὸς ε κα ‘ ΕἾ a ΕΣ > A an , ὑμᾶς μὲν ETL πολλῶν ὄντων εἰπεῖν τοσαῦτα λέγω. ν ee = > > \ A Ψ ὅσοι δ᾽ ἐκ Πειραιῶς ἐστε, πρῶτον. μὲν τῶν ὅπλων δναμνᾷν δητε; ὅτι “πολλὰς μάχας ἐν τῇ ne
ι οὐ ὑπὸ μὴ ν πολεμίων ἀλλ᾽ τ
paxerr dyer χ᾽ UK ὧι ἐμ pmo; we των εἰρήνης δόσις ἀφῃρέθητε, τὰ ὅπλα, ἔπειθ᾽ ὅτι ἐξεκηρύχθητε μὲν ἐκ τῆς πόλεως, ἣν ὑμῖν οἱ πατέ- ρες παρέδοσαν, φεύγοντας δὲ ὑμᾶς ἐκ τῶν πόλεων ἐξῃτοῦντο. \/ ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ὀργίσθητε μὲν ὥσπερ ὅτ᾽ > ΄ > , \ ‘ A » a ἐφεύγετε, ἀναμνήσθητε δὲ Kat τῶν ἄλλων κακῶν ἃ πεπόνθατε ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν" ot τοὺς μὲν ἐκ τῆς ἀγο- ρᾶς τοὺς δ᾽ ἐκ τῶν ἱερῶν συναρπάζοντες βιαίως
31
ν μεταδιδόντες εὔνους @OVTO εἶναι. -
94
95
96
re
32 XII. KATA EPATOS@ENOYS.
> , Ν Ἀ 3 Ν ’, Ἀ , Ν ἀπέκτειναν, τοὺς δὲ ἀπὸ τέκνων καὶ γονέων καὶ γυναικῶν ἀφέλκοντες φονέας αὑτῶν ἠνάγκασαν Ὰ ,ὔ Ν 5 Ἀ -“ an , »” γενέσθαι καὶ οὐδὲ ταφῆς τῆς νομιζομένης εἴασαν τυχεῖν, ἡγούμενοι τὴν αὑτῶν ἀρχὴν βεβαιοτέραν 97 εἶναι τῆς παρὰ τῶν θεῶν τιμωρίας. ὅσοι δὲ τὸν ΝΑ, τὶ a θάνατον διέφυγον, πολλαχοῦ κινδυνεύσαντες καὶ εἰς πολλὰς πόλεις πλανηθέντες καὶ “πανταχόθεν vat MUL VERT I EY ἐκκηρυττόμενοι, ἐνδεεῖς ὄντες τῶν ἐπιτηδείων, οἱ Ν 3 ’, »" (ὃ Ν τὸ ’ μὲν ἐν πολεμίᾳ τῇ πατρίδι τοὺς παῖδας καταλιπόν- ε Φ 45 , lal lal > , » τες, οἱ δ᾽ ἐν ξένῃ γῇ, πολλῶν ἐναντιουμένων ἤλθετε > Ν lal “ Ν Ἁ 4 4 eis τὸν Πειραιᾶ. πολλῶν δὲ καὶ μεγάλων κινδύνων J ’ >” > ‘ ’ Ἀ Ν ὑπαρξάντων ἄνδρες ἀγαθοὶ γενόμενοι τοὺς μὲν > 4 Ν > > Ἁ 7 , ἠλευθερώσατε, τοὺς δ᾽ eis THY πατρίδα κατηγάγετε. 3 δὲ 25 ΄ Ν 4 ε , : 3 Ν 98 εἰ δὲ ἐδυστυχήσατε καὶ τούτων ἡμόρπετέ, cron νι ἃ § ΄ 3 ΄ Ν 2 Σ a 4 μὲν ἂν δείσαντες ἐφεύγετε μὴ πάθητε τοιαῦτα οἷα \ ‘ ἃ: eee UR Re ear (Cig κα καὶ πρότερον, καὶ οὔτ᾽ ἂν ἱερὰ οὔτε βωμοὶ ὑμᾶς LO 4 ὃ Ἂν, Ἁ 4 , 5 ’ ἀδικουμένους διὰ τοὺς τούτων τρόπους ὠφέλησαν. Δ 4 al nw nw ἃ καὶ τοῖς ἀδικοῦσι σωτήρια γίνεται" ot δὲ παῖ- ὃ en ψ \ > 0 (ὃ > eee , x» ες upwv, ὅσοι μὲν ἐνθάδε ἦσαν, ὑπὸ τούτων ἂν ε ’ ε » a vBpilovro, οἱ δ᾽ ἐπὶ ξένης μικρῶν ἂν ἕνεκα συμ- , , σφι gh own ᾿ βολαίων ἐδούλευον ἐρημίᾳ τῶν ἐπικουρησόντων. 3 Ν Ν 9) ᾿Αλλὰ γὰρ οὐ τὰ μέλλοντα ἔσεσθαι βούλομαι ,ὔ Ν λέγειν, τὰ πραχθέντα ὑπὸ τούτων οὐ δυνάμενος 3 Ὅς > δὲ Ν eX / > δὲ ὃ aS ἂν εἰπεῖν" οὐδὲ γὰρ ἑνὸς κατηγόρου οὐδὲ δυοῖν ἔργον > ’ fal an ~ ἐστίν, ἀλλὰ πολλῶν. ὅμως δὲ τῆς ἐμῆς προθυμίας [οὐδὲν] ἐλλέλειπται, ὑπέρ τε τῶν ἱερῶν, ἃ οὗτοι τὰ 5 \ > “ὃ Ν δ᾽ > , συ ε / “A μὲν ἀπέδοντο τὰ δ᾽ εἰσιόντες ἐμίαινον, ὑπέρ TE τῆς , a “ πόλεως, ἣν μικρὰν ἐποίουν, ὑπέρ τε τῶν νεωρίων,
XII. AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 33
a ~ Ν ε Ἁ “ ’ «- ε Lal ἃ καθεῖλον, καὶ ὑπὲρ τῶν τεθνεώτων, οἷς ὑμεῖς, > ‘ “~ > “~ > > 4 > Lal ἐπειδὴ ζῶσιν ἐπαμῦναι οὐκ ἠδύνασθε, ἀποθανοῦσι βοηθήσατε. οἶμαι δ᾽ αὐτοὺς ἡμῶν τε ἀκροᾶσθαι τοο
ἈΝ ε “Ὁ ” Ν “ ΄ ε ’ καὶ ὑμᾶς εἴσεσθαι τὴν ψῆφον φέροντας, ἡγουμέ-
Φ \ “ἡ , > ’ » A
vous, ὅσοι μὲν ἂν τούτων ἀποψηφίσησθε, αὐτῶν
/ Vad ν 5. *# Ν ’ θάνατον καταψηφιεῖσθαι, ὅσοι δ᾽ ἂν παρὰ τούτων δίκην λάβωσιν, ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν τὰς τιμωρίας πεποιη- μένους.
Παύσομαι κατηγορῶν. ἀκηκόατε, ἑωράκατε,
’ »» Ud
πεπόνθατε, ἔχετε. δικάζετε.
INTRODUCTION
TO THE
ORATION AGAINST AGORATUS.
Tus oration, like the preceding, derives its chief value from its historical contents. It is an accusation of Agoratus for his share in the death of Dionysodorus, who with other leaders of the popular party had fallen a victim to the revolu- tion that brought the Thirty into power. It relates some of the nefarious transactions that enabled the oligarchy to suc- ceed in their plans, and to subvert for the second time the ancient republican constitution.
Theramenes, determined to break the spirit of the obstinate Demos, after waiting for three months of famine to do their work, and for Cleophon to be put to death, had at last returned from his second embassy with the terms of peace. Their acceptance was strenuously opposed by the democratic leaders. Among them were Strombichides, Eucrates, — brother to the Nicias who commanded the ill-fated Sicilian expedition, — Calliades, and Dionysodorus. Now in order that the oligarchy might carry their scheme into effect, these men too must be removed, as Cleophon had been; Agoratus, a man of ignoble birth and antecedents, was selected as a fit instrument for the purpose. He had years before managed to secure a reward from the state on the claim of having been accessory to the assassination of Phrynichus. Afterwards he had somehow procured the enrolment of his name as a
XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS. 35
citizen ; at the time of the events here related he was pre- tending to identify himself actively with the movements of the popular party. By order of the Senate, which was at the time of the deliberations on the peace with Sparta strongly oligarchic, he was arrested and induced to make a confession implicating the leaders above named, as well as many others, in a conspiracy against the state. ‘They were arrested and thrown into prison. The peace was then made. Within three months the Thirty were placed in power. One of their first acts was to institute a trial of the imprisoned leaders and sentence them to death. ‘The description of this mock-trial and of the parting scene in the prison forms a noteworthy passage of the oration.
Of Dionysodorus we have no other information than what is here given. He appears to have been one of the taxiarchs for that year. His brother Dionysius, and a brother-in-law whose name does not appear, come forward as prosecutors, the latter delivering the principal accusing speech, one Ga the unquestioned compositions of Lysias.
The manner of the indictment deserves notice. Instead of the usual indictment for murder (γραφὴ φόνου), the prosecutors avail themselves of the so-called process of Apagogé (ἀπαγωγή). This process was preferred, it is supposed, in order to avoid the more numerous legal forms and the intervening delays of the other, especially since these would allow the escape of the accused before trial. The Apagogé was a more direct procedure, placing the accused under immediate arrest, and providing for a speedy trial under the conduct of the Eleven before a Heliastic court. ‘The only requisite preliminary was that the accused should be brought before the Eleven, the charges being made out in a bill or indictment which also bore the name Apagogé. In its original form this indictment could only be preferred when the person charged with crime had been taken in the very act (ἐπ᾿ αὐτοφώρῳ, in flagranti), but
26 XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS.
practice had allowed its application to be extended to any well-known or notorious offences. In the present case, the argument to justify resorting to this process ($$ 823 -- 87) is evidently the most difficult part of the speaker's task, and is skilfully thrown, as indeed it well deserves, into the back-
ground. The date is uncertain, but probably not earlier than B. C. 400.
Blass conjectures 398, or even later. The following is a brief analysis :
I. Exordium, $$ 1-4. II. Statement of facts, originally attested by witnesses and documents, with a résumé of the calamities for which Agoratus is in part responsible, $$ 5 -- 48. III. Refutation of the anticipated argument for the defence. The accuser maintains : (1) A denial of the charge is impossible in the face of the evidence, §§ 49, 50. (2) Justification of the act impossible, ὃ 51. (3) The plea of compulsion of no avail, $$ 52 - 54. (4) The chief guilt not to be thrown upon Menestratus, δὲ 55-57: IV. Considerations bearing on the character of the accused : (1) His conduct compared with that of Aristophanes of Col- leidze, $$ 58-61. (2) The valuable citizens lost to the state compared with their murderer Agoratus, a slave and the brother of three notorious criminals, $$ 62-69. (3) Exposure of the fraud of his claim to have served the state in the assassination of Phrynichus, and thereby to have gained citizenship, $$ 70 -- 76. (4) Not, as claimed, one of ‘* the men of Phyle,” 8ξ 77 -- 82. V. The validity of the indictment defended, 88 83 -- 87. VI. Denial of the defendant’s claim to the benefit of the amnesty, §§ 88-91. VII. Peroration, §§ 92-97.
XIII.
KATA ΑΓΟΡΑΤΟΥ [ENAEIZEQS].
I] POSHKEI μέν, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, πᾶσιν ὑμῖν τιμωρεῖν ὑπὲρ τῶν ἀνδρῶν οἱ ἀπέθανον εὖνοι " tad , ne , , \ > \ ὄντες TH πλήθει τῷ ὑμετέρῳ, προσήκει δὲ κἀμοὶ
σ΄ > οὐχ ἥκιστα: κηδεστὴς γάρ μοι ἣν Διονυσόδωρος
Ν 3 , , > > ote SN » καὶ ἀνεψιός. τυγχάνει οὖν ἐμοὶ ἡ αὐτὴ ἔχθρα
Ν 3 ΄ Ν \ ΟΝ ΄ A €¢€ / πρὸς Aydpatov τουτονὶ καὶ τῷ πλήθει TO ὑμετέρῳ ὡς...» ¥ ‘ ae A 5 jek et 9 ὑπάρχουσα: ἔπραξε yap οὗτος τοιαῦτα, dv ἃ UT ἐμοῦ νυνὶ εἰκότως μισεῖται, ὑπό τε ὑμῶν, ἂν θεὸς θέλῃ, δικαί θή Διονυσόδ ὰ
n, δικαίως τιμωρηθήσεται. νυσόδωρον γὰρ \ κι κ eet, ee ear , a τὸν κηδεστὴν τὸν ἐμὸν Kal ἑτέρους πολλούς, ὧν
Ἁ Ν 5 Ye! > 7 ¥ 3, > Ν δὴ τὰ ὀνόματα ἀκούσεσθε, ἄνδρας ὄντας ἀγαθοὺς περὶ τὸ πλῆθος τὸ ὑμέτερον, ἐπὶ τῶν τριάκοντα ἀπέκτεινε, μηνυτὴς κατ᾽ ἐκείνων γενόμενος. ποιή- σας δὲ ταῦτα ἐμὲ μὲν ἰδίᾳ καὶ ἕκαστον τῶν προσ-
΄, ΄ > , Ν \ 4 rs ἠκόντων μεγάλα ἐζημίωσε, τὴν δὲ πόλιν κοινῇ
“ ἴω 7 πᾶσαν τοιούτων ἀνδρῶν ἀποστερήσας οὐ μικρά, ὡς ἐγὼ νομίζω, ἔβλαψεν. ἐγὼ οὖν, ἄνδρες δικα- otal, δίκαιον καὶ ὅσιον ἡγοῦμαι εἶναι καὶ ἐμοὶ καὶ
2
38 XIII. KATA ATOPATOY.
en [2 Cal a: ν ’
ὑμῖν ἅπασι τιμωρεῖσθαι καθ᾽ ὅσον ἕκαστος δύνα- ται: καὶ ποιοῦσι ταῦτα νομίζω ἡμῖν καὶ παρὰ θεῶν καὶ παρ᾽ ἀνθρώπων ἄμεινον ἂν γίγνεσθαι.
4 δεῖ δ᾽ ὑμᾶς, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ἐξ ἀρχῆς τῶν πραγμάτων ἁπάντων ἀκοῦσαι, W εἰδῆτε πρῶτον
\ ἮΝ , ass ε ὃ , ΄ A253 μὲν ᾧ τρόπῳ ὑμῖν ἡ δημοκρατία κατελύθη Kal ὑφ Ψ + Φ , a 4 ξ΄». ὦ , ὅτου, ἔπειτα ᾧ τρόπῳ οἱ ἄνδρες ὑπ᾽ ᾿Αγοράτου 9. ly ie. Neer 3 , , ἀπέθανον, καὶ δὴ ὃ τι ἀποθνήσκειν μέλλοντες ἐπέσκηψαν: ἅπαντα γὰρ ταῦτα ἀκριβῶς ἂν μα-
, Ν» θόντες ἥδιον καὶ ὁσιώτερον ᾿Αγοράτου τουτουὶ καταψηφίζοισθε. ὅθεν οὖν ἡμεῖς τε ῥᾷστα διδά- >» es ἢ ‘al ’ὔ > lal cn ΕἿΣ ἕξομεν καὶ ὑμεῖς μαθήσεσθε, ἐντεῦθεν ὑμῖν ἄρξομαι διηγεῖσθαι.
5 Ἐπειδὴ γὰρ αἱ νῆες at ὑμέτεραι διεφθάρησαν καὶ τὰ πράγματα ἐν τῇ πόλει ἀσθενέστερα ἐγεγέ- UNTO, οὐ πολλῷ χρόνῳ ὕστερον αἵ τε νῆες al Λακε- δαιμονίων ἐπὶ τὸν Πειραιᾷ ἀφικνοῦνται, καὶ ἅμα
Ν lal λόγοι πρὸς Λακεδαιμονίους περὶ τῆς εἰρήνης ἐγίγ- Ὕ A 6 νοντο. ἐν δὲ τῷ χρόνῳ τούτῳ οἱ βουλόμενοι νεώ- ld lal τερα πράγματα ev TH πόλει γίγνεσθαι ἐπεβού- λευον, νομίζοντες κάλλιστον καιρὸν εἰληφέναι καὶ μάλιστα ἐν τῷ τότε χρόνῳ τὰ πράγματα, ὡς αὐτοὶ
7 ἠβούλοντο, καταστήσασθαι. ἡγοῦντο δὲ οὐδὲν ἄλλο σφίσιν ἐμποδὼν εἶναι ἢ τοὺς τοῦ δήμου προεστηκότας καὶ τοὺς στρατηγοῦντας καὶ ταξι- apxovvtas. τούτους οὖν ἐβούλοντο ἀμωσγέπως ἐκποδὼν ποιήσασθαι, ἵνα ῥᾳδίως ἃ βούλοιντο δια-
, ” ‘ > r on ΠΣ 6 : πράττοιντο. πρῶτον μὲν οὖν Κλεοφῶντι ἐπέθεντο
XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS.
ἐκ τρόπου τοιούτου. OTE yap ἡ πρώτη ἐκκλησία περὶ τῆς εἰρήνης ἐγίγνετο, καὶ οἱ παρὰ Λακεδαι- 4 ν » > > - ν > . μονίων ἥκοντες ἔλεγον ἐφ᾽ οἷς ἕτοιμοι εἶεν τὴν 5 a ~ , 5 a εἰρήνην ποιεῖσθαι Λακεδαιμόνιοι, εἰ κατασκαφείη τῶν τειχῶν τῶν μακρῶν ἐπὶ δέκα στάδια ἑκατέρου, , ε a > » > a > > + τότε ὑμεῖς TE, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, οὐκ ἠνέσχεσθε ἀκούσαντες περὶ τῶν τειχῶν τῆς κατασκαφῆς, Κλεοφῶν τε ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν πάντων ἀναστὰς ἀντεῖπειν o 4 » nw ὡς οὐδενὶ τρόπῳ οἷόν TE εἴη ποιεῖν ταῦτα. μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα Θηραμένης, ἐπιβουλεύων τῷ πλήθει τῷ ηραμενῆς, a 1) ef ε , > Ἀ ’ὔ ν 5Ν φίστα ν Ἁ ὑμετέρῳ, ἀναστὰς λέγει OTL, ἐὰν αὐτὸν ἕλησθε περὶ τῆς εἰρήνης πρεσβευτὴν. αὐτοκράτορα, ποιήσειν Ψ , - A a , ¥ N ΄ ὥστε μήτε τῶν τειχων διελεῖν μήτε ἀλλο τὴν πόλιν ἐλαττῶσαι μηδέν. οἴοιτο δὲ καὶ ἄλλο τι ἀγαθὸν Ν dl Lal / ε 4 παρὰ Λακεδαιμονίων τῇ πόλει εὑρήσεσθαι. πει- 4 . ε “ 9 > ”~ Ν > σθέντες δὲ ὑμεῖς εἵλεσθε ἐκεῖνον πρεσβευτὴν αὐτο- κράτορα, ὃν τῷ προτέρῳ ἔτει στρατηγὸν χειροτο- νηθέντα ἀπεδοκιμάσατε, οὐ νομίζοντες εὔνουν εἶναι “ ᾽ὕὔ ““ε , > a Ν > > Ν > τῷ πλήθει τῷ ὑμετέρῳ. ἐκεῖνος μὲν οὖν ἐλθὼν εἰς c c c nr 7 Λακεδαίμονα ἔμεινεν ἐκεῖ πολὺν χρόνον, καταλι- πὼν ὑμᾶς πολιορκουμένους, εἰδὼς τὸ ὑμέτερον πλῆ- 5» >. , > / A Ν Ἀ ’ὔ QA fos ἐν ἀπορίᾳ ἐχόμενον καὶ διὰ τὸν πόλεμον καὶ A Ν ἈΝ ἈΝ ΄“ 5 ’ > A τὰ κακὰ τοὺς πολλοὺς τῶν ἐπιτηδείων ἐνδεεῖς 2 , 5 a ε na 5 , 4 ὄντας, νομίζων, εἰ διαθείη ὑμᾶς ἀπόρως ὥσπερ ’,᾿ > 4 ε lal > A ΕΝ > , διέθηκεν, ἀσμένως ὁποιαντινοῦν ἐθελῆσαι ἂν εἰρή- ὕὔ ε 5 5 , ε 4 A vyv ποιήσασθαι. οἱ δ᾽ ἐνθάδε ὑπομένοντες καὶ 5 ’ ἴω A 4 3 ἐπιβουλεύοντες καταλῦσαι τὴν δημοκρατίαν εἰς > n nm A , Ν ν ἀγῶνα Κλεοφῶντα καθιστᾶσι, πρόφασιν μὲν ὅτι
39
Io
40 XIII. KATA ΑΤΟΡΑΤΟΥ.
13
14
15
16
οὐκ ἦλθεν εἰς τὰ ὅπλα ἀναπαυσόμενος, τὸ δ᾽ ἀλη- θὲς ὅτι ἀντεῖπεν ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν μὴ καθαιρεῖν τὰ τείχῃ. ἐκείνῳ μὲν οὖν δικαστήριον παρασκευάσαντες καὶ 5 , ε me 2 5 ’ 4 εἰσελθόντες ot βουλόμενοι ὀλιγαρχίαν καταστήσα- σθαι ἀπέκτειναν ἐν τῇ προφάσει ταύτῃ. Θηρα- 4 A ν 5 Ὁ“ 5 ’ὕ μένης δὲ ὕστερον ἀφικνεῖται ἐκ Λακεδαίμονος. προσιόντες δ᾽ αὐτῷ τῶν τε στρατηγῶν τινες καὶ ~ , @ > ’ ἈΝ / τῶν ταξιάρχων, ὧν ἦν Στρομβιχίδης καὶ Διονυσό- δωρος, καὶ ἄλλοι τινὲς τῶν πολιτῶν εὐνοοῦντες ε Lal ν 5 5 ᾽’, σ 5 , 7 ὑμῖν, ὥς γ᾽ ἐδήλωσαν ὕστερον, ἠγανάκτουν σφό- > Ν , > , , ἃ ε nw Spa. ἦλθε yap φέρων εἰρήνην τοιαύτην, ἣν ἡμεῖς ἔργῳ μαθόντες ἔγνωμεν: πολλοὺς γὰρ τῶν πολι- τῶν καὶ ἀγαθοὺς ἀπωλέσαμεν, καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑπὸ τῶν , a , > \ > \ Ν ret es τριάκοντα ἐξηλάθημεν. ἢν yap ἀντὶ μὲν τοῦ ἐπὶ δέκα στάδια τῶν μακρῶν τειχῶν διελεῖν ὅλα τὰ A ,ὔ ’ὔ 5 A δὲ ἴω 2 > μακρὰ τείχη κατασκάψαι, ἀντὶ O€ TOV ἀλλο TL ἀγα- θὸν τῇ πόλει εὑρέσθαι τάς τε ναῦς παραδοῦναι τοῖς / Ν Ν \ Ν - na ~ Λακεδαιμονίοις καὶ τὸ περὶ τὸν Πειραιᾶ τεῖχος περιελεῖν. ὁρῶντες δὲ οὗτοι οἱ ἄνδρες ὀνόματι μὲν εἰρήνην γενομένην, τῷ δ᾽ ἔργῳ τὴν δημοκρα- τίαν καταλυομένην, οὐκ ἔφασαν ἐπιτρέψαι ταῦτα ’,ὕ > > “a > ὟΝ > ἴω Ν γενέσθαι, οὐκ ἐλεοῦντες, ὦ ἄνδρες Αθηναῖοι, τὰ τείχη, εἰ πεσεῖται, οὐδὲ κηδόμενοι τῶν νεῶν, εἰ Λακεδαιμονίοις παραδοθήσονται (οὐδὲν γὰρ αὐτοῖς 4 “~ aA ε ἴω ε ’ Lal 5 » τούτων πλειον ἢ ὑμῶν ἑκάστῳ προσῆκεν), ἀλλ αἰσθόμενοι ἐκ τοῦ τρόπου τούτου τὸ ὑμέτερον πλῆ- , 5 5 ν 4 5 θος καταλυθησόμενον, οὐδ᾽ (ὥς φασί τινες) οὐκ 5 “Ὁ » ,ὔ’ ,ὔ Ε] A , ἐπιθυμοῦντες εἰρήνην γίγνεσθαι, ἀλλὰ βουλόμενοι
XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS. 41
’ὔ 4 > 4 “~ 4 Bo. > ’ βελτίω ταύτης εἰρήνην τῷ δήμῳ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ta > / Ν 4 Ν 4 ποιήσασθαι. ἐνόμιζον δὲ δυνήσεσθαι, καὶ ἔπρα-
a A > ah Me fee , Liss ον €av ἂν ταῦτα, εἰ μὴ ὑπ᾽ ᾿Αγοράτου τουτουὶ ἀπώ- Ν. Ν lal y Ν ε >” hovro. γνοὺς δὲ ταῦτα Θηραμένης καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι ε > 4 ε ἴω ν 3 ’ ἃ ’ οἱ ἐπιβουλεύοντες ὑμῖν, OTL εἰσί τινες OL κωλύ- σουσι τὸν δῆμον καταλυθῆναι καὶ ἐναντιώσονται ἈΝ al 5 ’ὔ ν Ν Ν 5 ’ περὶ τῆς ἐλευθερίας, εἵλοντο, πρὶν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τὴν περὶ τῆς εἰρήνης γενέσθαι, τούτους πρῶτον εἰς διαβολὰς καὶ κινδύνους καταστῆσαι, ἵνα μηδεὶς 5» nm ¢€ \ “A ε , la 5 4 > ἐκεῖ ὑπὲρ TOU ὑμετέρου πλήθους ἀντιλέγοι. ἐπι- Ν > 4 5 4 4 βουλὴν οὖν τοιαύτην ἐπιβουλεύουσι. πείθουσι γὰρ ᾿Αγόρατον τουτονὶ μηνυτὴν κατὰ τῶν στρατη- γῶν καὶ τῶν ταξιάρχων γενέσθαι, οὐ ξυνειδότα ἐκείνοις, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, οὐδέν (οὐ γὰρ δήπου “τς Y τ. > , » σ᾽ \ ἐκεῖνοι οὕτως ἀνόητοι ἦσαν καὶ ἄφιλοι, ὥστε περὶ τηλικούτων ἂν πραγμάτων πράττοντες ᾿Αγόρατον ε ἈΝ ἈΝ + A“ Ν 5 ’ 3, ὡς πιστὸν καὶ εὔνουν, δοῦλον καὶ ἐκ δούλων ὄντα, ’ 5 5 5 ’ὔ » ~ - » rd παρεκάλεσαν), ---- ahd ἐδόκει αὐτοῖς οὗτος ἐπιτή- > 4 > 4 > »¥ nw δειος εἶναι μηνυτής. ἐβούλοντο οὖν ἄκοντα δοκεῖν αὐτὸν καὶ μὴ ἑκόντα μηνύειν, ὅπως πιστότερα ὑμῖν ε is ε Se Ν 5 4 Ν ε Ὁ“ > ὑποφαίνοιτο. ὡς δὲ ἑκὼν ἐμήνυσε, Kal ὑμᾶς οἶμαι τῶν πεπραγμένων αἰσθήσεσθαι. εἰσπέμπουσι Ν Ψ Ἀ ἈΝ Ν Ν A“ 4 yap εἰς τὴν βουλὴν [τὴν πρὸ τῶν τριάκοντα Bov- λεύουσαν] Θεόκριτον τὸν τοῦ ᾿Ελαφοστίκτου κα- λούμενον: 6 δὲ Θεόκριτος οὗτος ἑταῖρος ἣν τῷ Ἂν Ὁ ’ ἈΝ 5 "ὃ ε δὲ β λ ‘\ ε Ἀ “~ γοράτῳ καὶ ἐπιτήδειος. ἡ δὲ βουλὴ ἡ πρὸ τῶν 4 4 4 Ν > ’ τριάκοντα βουλεύουσα διέφθαρτο καὶ ὀλιγαρχίας 5 / ε » 4 4 ’,ὕ ε ἐπεθύμει, ὡς ἴστε, μάλιστα. τεκμήριον δέ: οἱ
19
20
42 XIII. KATA ATOPATOY.
Ν Ν ¢: 9 > ’ “Ὁ ig Ἀ «ε ’ γὰρ πολλοὶ οἱ ἐξ ἐκείνης τῆς βουλῆς τὴν ὑστέραν Ἀ ‘ t pk * , > , A > βουλὴν τὴν ἐπὶ τῶν τριάκοντα ἐβούλευον. τοῦ ὃ . cal , uA 7 3 50. ἡ ν Ν ’ ἕνεκα ταῦτα λέγω ὑμῖν; ἵν᾽ εἰδῆτε ὅτι τὰ ψηφ΄- x ἐξ ἐκείνης τῆς βουλῆς οὐκ ἐπ᾽ εὐνοίᾳ TH σματα τὰ ἐξ ἐκείνης τῆς n 1 τῇ ὑμετέρᾳ GAN ἐπὶ καταλύσει τοῦ δήμου Tod ὑμετέ- μετέρῳ ye μ at ..& ns > n pov ἅπαντα ἐλέγετο, καὶ ὡς τοιούτοις οὖσιν αὐτοῖς Ν lal , > Ν ἈΝ 5 ’ὔ Ν 21 τὸν νοῦν προσέχητε. εἰσελθὼν δὲ εἰς ταύτην τὴν \ > > 4 / 4 7 ia βουλὴν ἐν ἀπορρήτῳ Θεόκριτος μηνύει ote συλλέ- γονταί τινες ἐναντιωσόμενοι τοῖς τότε καθιστα- 4 ’ Ν Ν > 5 ’, > » μένοις πράγμασι. τὰ μὲν οὖν ὀνόματα οὐκ ἔφη “- A 9 αὐτῶν ἐρεῖν καθ᾽ ἕκαστον" ὅρκους TE yap ὀμω- μοκέναι τοὺς αὐτοὺς ἐκείνοις, καὶ εἶναι ἑτέρου: οἵ A » lal ἐροῦσι Ta ὀνόματα, αὐτὸς δὲ οὐκ ἄν ποτε ποιῆσαι 22 ταῦτα. καίτοι εἰ μὴ ἐκ παρασκευῆς ἐμηνύετο, πῶς. 3 x 5 ’ ε Ν 5 Ὁ 4° > , ’ οὐκ ἂν ἠνάγκασεν ἡ βουλὴ εἰπεῖν τὰ ὀνόματα Θεό- Ν Ν κριτον καὶ μὴ ἀνώνυμον τὴν μήνυσιν ποιήσασθαι; Ν Ν “ Ν νυνὶ δὲ τοῦτο τὸ ψήφισμα ψηφίζεται.
ΨΗΦΙΣΜΑ.
2. ᾿Ἐπειδὴ τοίνυν τοῦτο τὸ ψήφισμα ἐψηφίσθη, ,ὕ 5 . Ἂς > , 5» Ν wn ε κατέρχονται ἐπὶ τὸν ᾿Αγόρατον εἰς τὸν Πειραιᾶ οἱ αἱρεθέντες τών βουλευτῶν, καὶ περιτυχόντες αὐτῷ > > ὩΣ Ὶ , »” , de , ἐν ἀγορᾷ ἐζήτουν ἄγειν. παραγενόμενος δὲ Νικίας A , A Ν , ε “~ A ’ καὶ Νικομένης καὶ ἀλλοι τινές, ὁρωντες τὰ πρᾶ- γματα οὐχ οἷα βέλτιστα ἐν τῇ πόλει ὄντα, ἄγειν μὲν τὸν ᾿Αγόρατον οὐκ ἔφασαν προήσεσθαι, ἀφῃ- ροῦντο δὲ καὶ ἠγγνῶντο καὶ ὡμολόγουν παράξειν
XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS. 43
εἰς τὴν βουλήν. γραψάμενοι δὲ οἱ βουλευταὶ τὰ ὀνόματα τῶν ἐγγυωμένων καὶ κωλυόντων, ἀπιόντες ᾿», 3 3, ε δὲ A , Ν δον Ν ᾧχοντο εἰς ἄστυ. ὁ δὲ ᾿Αγόρατος καὶ οἱ ἐγγυηταὶ καθίζουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν βωμὸν Μουνυχίασιν - ἐπειδὴ A > oe > 4 ΄ Ἁ bs 50. ἡ δὲ ἐκεῖ ἦσαν, ἐβουλεύοντο τί χρὴ ποιεῖν. ἐδόκει > » δᾷχ: ΣΦ a Ν in) ὦ ν 3 Ν οὖν τοῖς ἐγγυηταῖς καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ἅπασιν ἐκποδὼν > ¢ . ποιήσασθαι τὸν ᾿Αγόρατον ws τάχιστα, Kal παρ- ’ὔ ’ ~ 4 > la > a ορμίσαντες δύο πλοῖα Μουνυχίασιν ἐδέοντο αὐτοῦ Ν -“ παντὶ τρόπῳ ἀπελθεῖν ᾿Αθήνηθεν, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἔφα- σαν συνεκπλευσεῖσθαι, ἕως τὰ πράγματα κατα- ’ td 4 > ’ 3 ν 4, σταίη, λέγοντες ὅτι, εἰ κομισθείη εἰς τὴν βουλήν, » : βασανιζόμενος ἴσως ἀναγκασθήσεται ὀνόματα εἰ- πεῖν ᾿Αθηναίων ὧν ἂν ὑποβάλωσιν οἱ βουλόμενοι κακόν τι ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐργάζεσθαι. ταῦτα ἐκείνων ’ nw nw δεομένων, καὶ παρασκευασάντων πλοῖα, καὶ αὐτῶν ε ’ κι “~ > > 4, ’ ἑτοίμων ὄντων συνεκπλεῖν, οὐκ ἠθέλησε πείθεσθαι 5 = > ’, ε ’ ’ 5s 9 ’ὔ > αὕτοις Ayopatos ovTool. KaiTol, ὦ Ayoparte, εἰ 5 4 Ν ’ μή τί σοι ἣν παρεσκευασμένον καὶ ἐπίστευες μη- “ a » Ν δὲν κακὸν πείσεσθαι, πῶς οὐκ ἂν ῴχου καὶ πλοίων A“ A 4 4” παρεσκευασμένων καὶ TOV ἐγγυητῶν ἑτοίμων ὄντων lal “ ‘ » σοι συνεκπλεῖν ; ἔτι γὰρ οἷόν τέ σοι ἦν, καὶ οὕπω
ἡ βουλή σου ἐκράτει. ἀλλὰ μὲν δὴ οὐχ ὅμοιά γε
24
25
27
Ν Ν 3 ’ ε “ lal ἈΝ ‘ > σοὶ Kal ἐκείνοις ὑπῆρχε. πρῶτον μὲν yap ᾿Αθη-.
ναῖοι ἦσαν ὥστε οὐκ ἐδεδίεσαν βασανισθῆναι" ἔπειτα πατρίδα σφετέραν αὐτῶν καταλιπόντες ἕτοι- μοι ἦσαν συνεκπλεῖν μετὰ σοῦ, ἡγησάμενοι ταῦτα μᾶλλον λυσιτελεῖν ἢ τῶν πολιτῶν πολλοὺς καὶ ἀγα- θοὺς ὑπὸ σοῦ ἀδίκως ἀπολέσθαι. σοὶ δὲ πρῶτον
44 XIII, KATA ATOPATOY.
\ ’ > “ ε ΄ »»Ἤ μὲν κίνδυνος ἦν βασανισθῆναι ὑπομείναντι, ἔπειτα 3 ig δ ΄ 4 9 > > Ν 28 οὐ πατρίδα ἂν σαυτοῦ κατέλιπες" ὥστ᾽ ἐκ παντὸς 4 Ν »" x > ’ 3 A , τρόπου σοὶ μᾶλλον ἢ ἐκείνοις ἐκπλεῦσαι συνέ- φερεν, εἰ μή τι ἦν ᾧ ἐπίστευνες. νῦν δὲ ἄκων μὲν προσποιῇ, ἑκὼν δὲ πολλοὺς καὶ ἀγαθοὺς ᾿Αθηναίων 3 ΄ ε Ν ΄ 9 δ 5» " ἀπέκτεινας. ὡς δὲ παρεσκευάσθη ἅπαντα ἃ ἐγὼ 3 Ν lal λέγω, Kal μάρτυρές εἰσι καὶ αὐτὸ TO ψήφισμα σοῦ τὸ τῆς βουλῆς καταμαρτυρήσει.
ΨΗΦΙΣΜΑ.
22 Ἐπειδὴ τοίνυν τοῦτο τὸ ψήφισμα ἐψηφίσθη καὶ ἦλθον οἱ ἐκ τῆς βουλῆς Μουνυχίαζε, ἑκὼν ἀνέστη > / > Ν “ “ ,ὕ “ , Αγόρατος ἀπὸ τοῦ Bwpov: καίτοι νῦν ye Bia φησὶν ἀφαιρεθῆναι. ἐπειδὴ δὲ εἰς τὴν βουλὴν 5 ᾽’ὔ 3 ’ 3 ’, “Ὁ Α͂,, 30 ἐκομίσθησαν, ἀπογράφει ᾿Αγόρατος πρῶτον μὲν τῶν αὑτοῦ ἐγγυητῶν τὰ ὀνόματα, ἔπειτα τῶν στρα- ἴω » a] / » Ν Ν » τηγῶν καὶ τῶν ταξιάρχων, ἔπειτα δὲ Kal ἄλλων τινῶν πολιτῶν. ἡ δὲ ἀρχὴ αὕτη τοῦ παντὸς κακοῦ ιν ε δὲ 3 ΄ » et Been > Ν ἐγένετο. ὡς δὲ ἀπέγραψε τὰ ὀνόματα, οἶμαι μὲν Ν 3.4% ε ’ 3 \ 4 8... > 4 καὶ αὐτὸν ὁμολογήσειν" εἰ δὲ μή, ἐπ᾽ αὐτοφώρῳ ἐγὼ αὐτὸν ἐξελέγξω. ᾿Απόκριναι δή μοι.
ἘΡΩΤΗΣΙΣ.
31 ᾿Ἐβούλοντο τοίνυν, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, ἔτι πλει- ld 5» “Ὁ Ν > 4 > 4, 4 ,ὔ ὄνων αὐτῶν τὰ ὀνόματα ἀπογράψαι ---- οὕτω σφό-
»¥ ε \ , > , Ν Spa ἔρρωτο ἡ βουλὴ κακόν τι ἐργάζεσθα .--- καὶ
XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS. 45
: > > , > Ὁ ν > “ αὐτὸς οὐκ ἐδόκει αὐτοῖς ἅπαντα τἀληθῆ πω κατη- γορηκέναι. τούτους μὲν οὖν ἅπαντας ἑκὼν ἀπο- 4 > Ὁ“ 3 2, | 4 : ¥ ‘ Ν Lal γράφει, οὐδεμιᾶς αὐτῷ ἀνάγκης οὔσης. [pera Tod- το προσαπογράφει ἑτέρους τῶν πολιτῶν.] ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἡ ἐκκλησία Μο ΐ ἐν τῷ θεά ἐγί- é€ ἡ ἐκκλησία Μουνυχίασιν ἐν τῷ θεάτρῳ ἐγί
ὃ
A ὃ Ν > ΄»“»- Ψ Ν γνετο, οὕτω σφοδρα τινὲς ἐπεμελοῦντο ὅπως καὶ
ἐν τῷ δήμῳ περὶ τῶν στρατηγῶν καὶ τῶν ταξι- ’ 4 4 ‘ Ν ~ 3, > 4
άρχων μήνυσις γένοιτο (περὶ δὲ τῶν ἄλλων ἀπέχρη ἡ ἐν τῇ βουλῇ [μήνυσις] γεγενημένη), ὥστε καὶ ἐκεῖ παράγουσιν εἰς τὸν δῆμον. Καί μοι ἀπόκρι- ναι, ὦ ᾿Αγόρατε". ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ οἶμαί σε ἔξαρνον ἂν
΄ a's , > , ce ὦ ἃ 3 ,ὕ γενέσθαι ἃ ἐναντίον ᾿Αθηναίων ἁπάντων ἐποίησας.
ἘΡΩΤΗΣΙΣ.
a ‘ Ν Ὁμολογεῖ μὲν καὶ αὐτός, ὅμως δὲ καὶ τὰ ψηφί- σματα ὑμῖν τοῦ δήμου ἀναγνώσεται.
ΨΗΦΙΣΜΑΤΑ.
, ε Ν a 3 Ὅτι μὲν ἀπέγραψεν ᾿Αγόρατος οὑτοσὶ των ἀν- ὃ a > , gk Ge Ν Xie hy λῃ Ν ρῶν ἐκείνων τὰ ὀνόματα, καὶ τὰ ἐν TH βουλῇ καὶ ὰ ἐν τῷ δή ὶ ἔστι φονεὺς ἐκείνων, σχεδόν τι τα ἐν TW Οοήμῳ, και εστι φονεὺς ε » TX > A ε ΄ es οἶμαι ὑμᾶς ἐπίστασθαι: ὡς τοίνυν ἁπάντων των “ + “~ , > , \ ὑδ᾽ “ὙΦ. i 8 κακῶν αἴτιος TH πόλει ἐγένετο καὶ οὐδ᾽ ὑφ᾽ ἑνὸς + ΚΝ 4 > lal > ἈΝ > « Lal 3 αὐτὸν προσήκει ἐλεεῖσθαι, ἐγὼ οἶμαι ὑμῖν ἐν κεφα- Lal 7 λαίοις ἀποδείξειν. ἐπειδὴ yap ἐκεῖνοι συλληφθέν- > ‘\ τες ἐδέθησαν, τότε καὶ ὁ Λύσανδρος εἰς τοὺς
33
34
46 XIII. KATA ATOPATOY.
Ἀ A λιμένας τοὺς ὑμετέρους εἰσέπλευσε, καὶ αἱ νῆες at ε ’, ’, 2 Ν Ἂς ὑμέτεραι Λακεδαιμονίοις παρεδόθησαν, καὶ τὰ τείχη κατεσκάφη, καὶ οἵ τριάκοντα κατέστησαν,
lal lal Ὁ Ν
35 καὶ τί οὐ τῶν δεινῶν τῇ πόλει ἐγένετο; ἐπειδὴ
4
τοίνυν οἱ τριάκοντα κατεστάθησαν, εὐθέως κρίσιν
ts ἀνδρά 7 ἐποίουν ἐν τῇ βουλῃ, ὁ δὲ τοῖς ἀνδράσι τούτοις τῇ ῇ; Lal > “~ ’ 5 ’ 5 ’
δῆμος ἐν τῷ δικαστηρίῳ ἐν δισχιλίοις ἐψηφίσατο.
Καί μοι ἀνάγνωθι τὸ ψήφισμα.
WHOISMA.
36 = Bi μὲν οὖν ἐν τῷ δικαστηρίῳ ἐκρίνοντο, ῥᾳδίως Ἅ 3 , . Ν no > , > a av ἐσώζοντο" ἅπαντες yap ἤδη ἐγνωκότες ἦτε οὗ ἣν κακοῦ ἡ πόλις, ἐν ᾧ οὐδὲν ἔτι ὠφελεῖν ἐδύνα-
“ 3 > Ν \ > Ν ν, 3 % “A σθε: νῦν δ᾽ eis τὴν βουλὴν αὐτοὺς τὴν ἐπὶ τῶν τριάκοντα εἰσάγουσιν. ἡ δὲ κρίσις τοιαύτη ἐγί-
ν x ε “Ὁ 3 ἈΝ - eee ε Ν
37 γνετο, οἵαν καὶ ὑμεῖς αὐτοὶ ἐπίστασθε. οἱ μὲν
Ν ΄, νι τὴν ee. A , ἊΝ ae, yap τριάκοντα ἐκάθηντο ἐπὶ τῶν βάθρων, οὗ νῦν ε ’ ’ 4, \ , 3 ΜᾺ ot πρυτάνεις καθέζονται: δύο δὲ τράπεζαι ἐν τῷ πρόσθεν τῶν τριάκοντα ἐκείσθην τὴν δὲ ψῆφον
> > ’ > Ν Ν ιν Ν ’
οὐκ εἰς καδίσκους ἀλλὰ φανερὰν ἐπὶ τὰς τραπέζας 4 »» ’ Ἁ A lal > π ταύτας ἔδει τίθεσθαι, THY μὲν καθαιροῦσαν ἐπὶ \ ε ld 9 > 4 "g » / τὴν ὑστέραν ...." ὥστε EK τίνος τρόπου ἔμελλέ > ~ , ey Ν / 4 > ,
38 τις αὐτῶν σωθήσεσθαι; ἑνὶ δὲ λόγῳ, ὅσοι εἰς τὸ
’ : (Ὁ. A ’ > Lal βουλευτήριον ἐπὶ τῶν τριάκοντα εἰσῆλθον κριθη- σόμενοι, ἁπάντων θάνατος κατεγινώσκετο καὶ οὐ-
ν > , \ > , Ah δενὸς ἀπεψηφίσαντο, πλὴν ᾿Αγοράτου τουτουΐ" τοῦτον δὲ ἀφεῖσαν ὡς εὐεργέτην ὄντα" ἵνα δὲ
XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS. 47
εἰδῆτε ws πολλοὶ ὑπὸ τούτου τεθνᾶσι, βούλομαι
ὑμῖν τὰ ὀνόματα αὐτῶν ἀναγνῶναι. ΟΝΟΜΑΤΑ.
ἈΝ > 3, ’, , ᾿Επειδὴ τοίνυν, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, θάνατος av- a) , ‘ r+.) 3 Ν > / τῶν κατεγνώσθη Kat ἔδει αὐτοὺς ἀποθνήσκειν, 4 > \ ’ ε A > , μεταπέμπονται εἰς TO δεσμωτήριον ὁ μὲν ἀδελφήν, ε δὲ ’, ε δὲ a ε δ᾽ ν > ε , ὁ δὲ μητέρα, ὁ δὲ γυναῖκα, ὁ δ᾽ ἥ τις ἦν ἑκάστῳ 3 “A 7 ν αὐτῶν προσήκουσα, ἵνα τὰ ὕστατα ἀσπασάμενοι Ν eh Ψ Ν ’ ’ Ν Ἂν τοὺς αὑτῶν οὕτω τὸν βίον τελευτήσειαν. καὶ δὴ ‘\ / / Ν 5 Ν \ καὶ Διονυσόδωρος μεταπέμπεται THY ἀδελφὴν τὴν Ὅσο % “ lal > ἐμὴν eis TO δεσμωτήριον, γυναῖκα ἑαυτοῦ οὖσαν. ’ > > / > La) 4 ε , πυθομένη δ᾽ ἐκείνη ἀφικνεῖται, μέλαν τε ἱμάτιον > , ε ys > oh A 3 N 2 κα ἠμφιεσμένη, .... WS εἰκὸς ἦν ἐπὶ τῷ ἀνδρὶ αὐτῆς “ , Ν “A τοιαύτῃ συμφορᾷ κεχρημένῳ. ἐναντίον δὲ τῆς 3 ~ A 3959 A / / 3 A x ἀδελφῆς τῆς ἐμῆς Διονυσόδωρος τά TE οἰκεῖα τὰ ε a / 7 > Lae > / Ν ὌΝ αὑτοῦ διέθετο ὅπως αὐτῷ ἐδόκει, καὶ περὶ ᾽Αγο- , ἂψ Ψ ¥ > A , ράτου τουτουὶ ἔλεγεν ὅτι αἴτιος ἦν τοῦ θανάτου, Ν Ν Ν , oh τ καὶ ἐπέσκηπτεν ἐμοὶ καὶ Διονυσίῳ τουτωΐ, τῷ ἀδελφῷ τῷ αὑτοῦ, καὶ τοῖς φίλ ᾶ ϊ ω τῷ αὕτου, καὶ τοῖς φίλοις πᾶσι τιμωρεῖν ε Ν ε a 3 / Ν “A ‘\ a ε “ ὑπὲρ αὑτοῦ Ayopatov: καὶ τῇ γυναικὶ τῇ αὑτοῦ “A ε lal Ν ἐπέσκηπτε, νομίζων αὐτὴν κυεῖν ἐξ αὑτοῦ, ἐὰν A An ΠῚ γένηται αὐτῇ παιδίον, φράζειν τῷ γενομένῳ ὅτι a> τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ ᾿Αγόρατος ἀπέκτεινε, καὶ κελεύ- a ee. ε a 54 > EW τιμωρεῖν ὑπὲρ αὑτοῦ ὡς φονέα ὄντα. ὡς οὖν
ἀληθῆ λέγω, μάρτυρας τούτων παρέξομαι.
MAPTYPES.
39
40
41
42
48
43
44
45
46
XIII. KATA ATOPATOY.
Οὗτοι μὲν τοίνυν, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ὑπ᾽ *Ayo- 4, 5 4 > 4 > ἈΝ Ν 4 ράτου ἀπογραφέντες ἀπέθανον: ἐπεὶ δὲ τούτους ἐκποδὼν ἐποιήσαντο οἱ τριάκοντα, σχεδὸν οἶμαι ε “A > 4 ε Ν A Ν Ν lol ὑμᾶς ἐπίστασθαι ὡς πολλὰ καὶ δεινὰ μετὰ ταῦτα τῇ πόλει ἐγένετο" ὧν οὗτος ἁπάντων αἴτιός ἐστιν, ἀποκτείνας ἐκείνους. ἀνιῶμαι μὲν οὖν ὑπομιμνή- σκων τὰς γεγενημένας συμφορὰς TH πόλει, ἀνάγκη δ᾽ ἐστίν, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, ἐν τῷ παρόντι καιρῷ, σ » 5 -“ ε / e “ > “ , 5 ’ iv εἰδῆτε ὡς σφόδρα ὑμῖν ἐλεεῖν προσήκει ᾿Αγό- ρατον. ἴστε μὲν γὰρ τοὺς ἐκ Σαλαμῖνος τῶν πο- λιτῶν κομισθέντας, οἷοι ἦσαν καὶ ὅσοι, καὶ οἵῳ 5 ΄,΄ ε Ν al , > , » \ ὀλέθρῳ ὑπὸ τῶν τριάκοντα ἀπώλοντο' LOTE δὲ Ν 3 3 ial ε Ν ’ὔ ΄Ὁ απο τοὺς ἐξ ᾿Ελευσῖνος, ὡς πολλοὶ ταύτῃ TH συμφορᾳ > 4 4 ἈΝ ἈΝ Ἶ > 4 Ν Ν ἐχρήσαντο: μέμνησθε δὲ καὶ τοὺς ἐνθάδε διὰ τὰς 307 3, 5 ὕ > Ν ld ἃ ἰδίας ἔχθρας ἀπαγομένους εἰς τὸ δεσμωτήριον " ot οὐδὲν κακὸν τὴν πόλιν ποιήσαντες ἠναγκάζοντο » 4 A 5 4 5 4 5» ’ὔ ε αἰσχίστῳ καὶ ἀκλεεστάτῳ ὀλέθρῳ ἀπόλλυσθαι, οἵ μὲν γονέας [σφετέρους αὐτῶν] πρεσβύτας κατα- ’ Δ Ἂ ε Ν lal , > A λείποντες, ot ἤλπιζον ὑπὸ τῶν σφετέρων αὐτῶν 4 / > A ’ A παίδων γηροτροφηθέντες, ἐπειδὴ τελευτήσειαν τὸν βίον, ταφήσεσθαι, οἱ δὲ ἀδελφὰς ἀνεκδότους, οἱ δὲ τὸ ‘\ Lal 4 ’ ’ὔὕ € παῖδας μικροὺς πολλῆς ἔτι θεραπείας δεομένους Y > Ὁ ΄, , \ ¥ , οὕς, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, ποίαν Twa οἴεσθε γνώμην Ν , ¥ a» ,ὔ AL ~ , περὶ τούτου ἔχειν, ἢ ποίαν Twa av ψῆφον θέσθαι, εἰ ἐπ᾿ ἐκείνοις γένοιτο, ἀποστερηθέντας διὰ τοῦτον “~ ε ’ὔ ” Ἀ Ν ’ ε ’ ΝῚ τῶν ἡδίστων ; ἔτι δὲ τὰ τείχη ὡς κατεσκάφη, καὶ at νῆες τοῖς πολεμίοις παρεδόθησαν, καὶ τὰ νεώρια ,’ A ,ὔ A 5» ’ὔ ε Lal καθῃρέθη, καὶ Λακεδαιμόνιοι THY ἀκρόπολιν ὑμῶν
XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS. 49
> US 8 , ν “ , λ 50 εἶχον, Kal ἡ δύναμις ἅπασα τῆς πόλεως παρελύθη, ν Ν , lal > / 4 ‘\ ὥστε μηδὲν διαφέρειν τῆς ἐλαχίστης πόλεως τὴν
΄ x \ , ‘ 207 > + > , πόλιν. πρὸς δὲ τούτοις Tas ἰδίας οὐσίας ἀπωλέ-
Ν Ν ” ΄ bid Rinks wate, Kal TO τελευταῖον συλλήβδην ἅπαντες ὑπὸ τῶν τριάκοντα ἐκ τῆς πατρίδος ἐξηλάθητε. ταῦτα > - ε 3 Ν » 3 / > ¥ ἐκεῖνοι οἱ ἀγαθοὶ ἄνδρες αἰσθόμενοι οὐκ ἔφασαν » 4 Ν 3 4 > + 7 4 ἐπιτρέψαι τὴν εἰρήνην, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταΐ, ποιή-
a hi Se / ΄ 3 , σασθαι" ods σύ, “Aydpate, βουλομένους ἀγαθόν τι πρᾶξαι τῇ πόλει ἀπέκτεινας, μηνύσας αὐτοὺς τῇ πόλει ἐπιβουλεύειν [τῷ πλήθει τῷ ὑμετέρῳ], καὶ αἴτιος εἶ ἁπάντων τῇ πόλει τῶν κακῶν τῶν γεγενη- μένων. νῦν οὖν μνησθέντες καὶ τῶν ἰδίων ἕκαστος δυστυχημάτων καὶ τῶν κοινῶν τῆς πόλεως, τιμω- ρεῖσθε τὸν αἴτιον τούτων.
Θαυμάζω δ᾽ ἔγωγε, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, ὅ τί ποτε τολμήσει πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἀπολογεῖσθαι" δεῖ γὰρ αὐτὸν ἀποδεῖξαι ὡς οὐ κατεμήνυσε τῶν ἀνδρῶν
, 50» » 3 ἊΨ > “A ΄ a > τούτων οὐδ᾽ αἴτιος αὐτοῖς ἐστι τοῦ θανάτου, ὃ οὐκ ἂν δύναιτο οὐδέποτε [ἀποδεῖξαι]. πρῶτον μὲν γὰρ τὰ ψηφίσματα αὐτοῦ τὰ ἐκ τῆς βουλῆς καὶ τοῦ δήμου καταμαρτυρεῖ, διαρρήδην ἀγορεύοντα περὶ ὧν ᾿Αγόρατος κατείρηκεν - ἔπειτα ἡ κρίσις, ἃ 3 ,ὕ Φι ῷ ἴω ’ὔ XN > ’ ,ὕ ἣν ἐκρίθη ἐπὶ τῶν τριάκοντα καὶ ἀφείθη, διαρρή- ς
δὴν λέγει, “ διότι φησίν “ ἔδοξε τἀληθῆ εἰσαγ-
yethar.” Καί μοι ἀνάγνωθι.
ΨΗΦΙΣΜΑΤΑ. TNOSIS. ΤΡΑΦΑΙ.
47
48
49
50 XIII. KATA ATOPATOY.
51
52
53
54
ε \ > > nee > N , , Ὡς μὲν οὖν οὐκ ἀπέγραψεν, οὐδενὶ τρόπῳ δύ. > ἃ > ~ “A , ἃ Se Ὁ ε ’, ναιτ᾽ ἂν ἀποδεῖξαι: δεῖ τοίνυν αὐτὸν ὡς δικαίως ἐμήνυσε ταῦτα ἀποφαίνειν, ὁρῶν αὐτοὺς πονηρὰ καὶ οὐκ ἐπιτήδεια τῷ δήμῳ τῷ ὑμετέρῳ πράτ- » 3 3 >) ἃ ~ > Ν 5 nw TovTas. οἴομαι δ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ἂν τοῦτο αὐτὸν ἐπιχειρῆ- > κ ¥ σαι ἀποδεικνύναι. οὐ yap δήπου, εἴ TL κακὸν TOV lal lal ’ > /, c 4, δῆμον τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων εἰργάσαντο, οἱ τριάκοντα, ’, is! 0 ’ “Ὁ ε δῆ an δεδιότες μὴ καταλυθείη ἂν ὁ δῆμος, τιμωροῦντες er r8 aA , Δ - N ἜΡΟΝ, 3 ἃ αὐ πῆς ὑπὲρ τοῦ δήμου ἂν αὐτοὺς ἀπέκτειναν, ἀλλ᾽ οἶμαι πολὺ τοὐναντίον τούτου. 3 3» "3 ἃ, “ Ν 3 4 ANN ἴσως φήσει ἄκων τοσαῦτα κακὰ ἐργάσα- > 5S ” , > σθαι. ἐγὼ δ᾽ οὐκ οἶμαι, ὦ avdpes δικασταί, οὐδ 57 ε “ ε 4, » ’ Ν 3 , ἐάν τις ὑμᾶς ὡς μάλιστα ἄκων μεγάλα κακὰ ἐργά- & ‘\ er , > Ν ε ΄ σηται, ὧν μὴ οἷόν τε γενέσθαι ἐστὶν ὑπερβολήν, 3 4 A > ~ ε ΄“ > ’ὔ > Ν οὐ τούτου ἕνεκα οὐ δεῖν ὑμᾶς ἀμύνεσθαι. εἶτα δὲ Ν > , / [2 eA > , hk καὶ ἐκείνων μέμνησθε, ὅτι ἐξῆν ᾿Αγοράτῳ τουτωΐ, Ἀ 5 Ν A n~ 7” > : pele, * ἴων πρὶν εἰς τὴν βουλὴν κομισθῆναι, ὅτ᾽ ἐπὶ τοῦ a 5 ’ἢ , ἴω \ A βωμοῦ ἐκάθητο Μουνυχίασι, σωθῆναι: Kal yap val , πλοῖα παρεσκεύαστο Kal οἱ ἐγγνηταὶ ἕτοιμοι ἦσαν ’ 7 > > ’ 5 , Ν > ’ συναπιέναι. καίτοι εἰ ἐκείνοις ἐπίθου καὶ ἠθέ- aA 3 , φ δ ¥ Anoas ἐκπλεῦσαι μετ᾽ ἐκείνων, οὔτ᾽ ἂν ἑκὼν οὔτε » , > , i ee A \ ἄκων τοσούτους ᾿Αθηναίων ἀπέκτεινας" νῦν δὲ \ ey? @® s > , > A a πεισθεὶς ὑφ᾽ ὧν τότε ἐπείσθης, εἰ τῶν στρατηγῶν Ν ~ , Ν , » καὶ τῶν ταξιάρχων τὰ ὀνόματα μόνον εἴποις, μέγα Ν > an τι @ov Tap αὐτῶν διαπράξασθαι. οὔκουν τούτου 9 ~ > wn a ἕνεκα δεῖ σε Tap ἡμῶν συγγνώμης τινὸς τυχεῖν, Ἁ Ν ΄“ Ν a a » ἃ ἐπεὶ οὐδὲ ἐκεῖνοι παρὰ σοῦ οὐδεμιᾶς ἔτυχον, ods Ν > / a) © ’ Ν ε ᾿ ‘\ σὺ ἀπέκτεινας. Kat Ἱππίας μὲν ὁ Θάσιος καὶ
XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS.
= Le} ε Κ ὃ a Ar 8% a Pt > ς ΄ Ξενοφῶν ὁ Καριδεύς, ot ἐπὶ TH AUTH αἰτίᾳ τούτῳ ae “ aA. , e \ > ΄ ὑπὸ τῆς βουλῆς μετεπέμφθησαν, οὗτοι μὲν ἀπέ- θανον, ὁ μὲν στρεβλωθείς, Ἐενοφῶν, ὃ δὲ Ἱππίας - ’ > » > ’ = Ud οὕτω ...., διότι οὐκ ἄξιοι ἐδόκουν τοῖς τριάκοντα σωτηρίας εἶναι (οὐδένα γὰρ ᾿Αθηναίων ἀπώλλυ- σαν)" ᾿Αγόρατος δὲ ἀφείθη, διότι ἐδόκει ἐκείνοις τὰ ἥδιστα πεποιηκέναι. 3 4 > 20 8 Ἀ > ’ > 4 Ακούω δ᾽ αὐτὸν καὶ εἰς Μενέστρατον ἀναφέρειν ἈΝ “a Len ΄ Ν ἈΝ ΄“ ’ τι περὶ τῶν γραφῶν τούτων. τὸ δὲ τοῦ Μενεστρά- του πρᾶγμα τοιοῦτον ἐγένετο. ὁ Μενέστρατος a > , en. κα an > , \ οὗτος ἀπεγράφη ὑπὸ τοῦ ᾿Αγοράτου καὶ συλλη- φθεὶς ἐδέδετο- ᾿Αγνόδωρος δ᾽ ἢν ᾿Αμφιτροπαιεύς, δημότης τοῦ Μενεστράτου, Κριτίου κηδεστὴς τοῦ A , - > 9 ε » ΄ τῶν τριάκοντα. οὗτος οὖν, ὅτε ἡ ἐκκλησία Μου- , 5 “ , thee a4 \ / νυχίασιν ἐν τῷ θεάτρῳ ἐγίνετο, ἅμα μὲν Bovdo- Ν / “A 7 δὲ ε ΄ μενος τὸν Μενέστρατον σωθῆναι, ἅμα δὲ ὡς πλεί- στους ἀπογραφέντας ἀπολέσθαι, παράγει αὐτὸν » ‘ “a Ἀ ε , > ~ Ν Ν ’ εἰς τὸν δῆμον, καὶ εὑρίσκονται αὐτῷ κατὰ τὸ ψή- φισμα τουτὶ ἄδειαν.
ΨΗΦΙΣΜΑ.
᾿Ἐπειδὴ δὲ τοῦτο τὸ ψήφισμα ἐγένετο, μηνύει
ὁ Μενέστρατος καὶ προσαπογράφει ἑτέρους τῶν
πολιτῶν. τοῦτον μέντοι οἱ μὲν τριάκοντα ἀφεῖσαν nd > Ld , ’ > “A >
ὥσπερ ᾿Αγόρατον τουτονί, δόξαντα τἀληθῆ εἰσαγ-
γεῖλαι, ὑμεῖς δὲ πολλῷ χρόνῳ ὕστερον λαβόν- > ὃ ’ ε > ὃ , 3, θ ’ὔ
τες ἐν δικαστηρίῳ ὡς ἀνδροφόνον ὄντα, θάνατον
51
55
56
52
57
58
59
60
XIII. KATA ATOPATOY.
ὃ κ tw τ ψ φ , “ ὃ , ὃ Ν ικαίως καταψηφισάμενοι, τῷ δημίῳ παρέδοτε, καὶ ἀπετυμπανίσθη. καίτοι εἰ ἐκεῖνος ἀπέθανεν, ἢ > ’ / ’ > A 9 , που ᾿Αγόρατός ye δικαίως ἀποθανεῖται, ὅς ye τόν ’ 3 4 » > 4 > Ν τε Μενέστρατον ἀπογράψας αἴτιος ἐκείνῳ ἐστὶ ἴω ‘4 “ Tov θανάτου, καὶ τοῖς ὑπὸ Μενεστράτου ἀπογρα- φεῖσι τίς αἰτιώτερος ἢ ὁ εἰς τοιαύτην ἀνάγκην ἐκεῖνον καταστήσας ; ᾿Ανόμοιος δέ μοι δοκεῖ ᾿Αριστοφάνει γενέσθαι ᾧ Χολλείδῃ, ὃς ἐγγνητὴς τότε τούτου ἐγένετο καὶ ἐς ey ee ST ae Y A > Ta πλοῖα παρασκευάσας Μουνυχίασιν ἕτοιμως ἢν A“ Ν ω συνεκπλεῖν μετὰ τούτου. καὶ TO γε ἐπ᾽ ἐκεῖνον > 3 , Ν yo HK > , 2»Qz > , εἶναι ἐσώθης, Kai οὔτ᾽ ἂν ᾿Αθηναίων οὐδένα ἀπώ- λεσας οὔτ᾽ ἂν αὐτὸς σὺ εἰς τοιούτους κινδύνους la “~ Ν ~ κατέστης" νῦν δὲ καὶ τὸν σωτῆρα τὸν σαυτοῦ οι 14 > “4 Ν 5 , > 4 ἐτόλμησας ἀπογράψαι, καὶ ἀπογράψας ἀπέκτεινας al 4 an“ καὶ ἐκεῖνον καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους ἐγγυητάς. τοῦτον ld ε 5 ~*~ > Lal ¥ > 4 , μέντοι ὡς ov καθαρῶς ᾿Αθηναῖον ὄντα ἐβούλοντό “ Ν Ν Ν τινες βασανισθῆναι, καὶ τουτὶ τὸ ψήφισμα τὸν lal / δῆμον ἀναπείθουσι ψηφίζεσθαι.
ΨΗΦΙΣΜΑ.
4 nw ’ ’ὔ A> , Mera τοῦτο τοίνυν προσιόντες τῷ ᾿Αριστοφάνει οἱ πράττοντες τότε τὰ πράγματα ἐδέοντο αὐτοῦ κατειπεῖν καὶ σώζεσθαι, καὶ μὴ κινδυνεύειν ἀγω- νισάμενον τῆς ξενίας τὰ ἔσχατα παθεῖν. ὁ δὲ » Ὁ» » 4 9 Ν Ν Ν οὐκ ἔφη οὐδέποτε: οὕτω χρηστὸς ἣν καὶ περὶ
A ld ‘ ἈΝ Ν ΄“ Ν > , τοὺς δεδεμένους Kal περὶ τὸν δῆμον τὸν ᾿Αθηναίων,
XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS.
ν ν ἴω 5 a. “ἡ “ 4 ὥστε εἵλετο μᾶλλον ἀποθανεῖν ἢ κατειπεῖν καὶ » ’ A 5 ’ 5 “a Ν 4 . ἀδίκως τινὰς ἀπολέσαι. ἐκεῖνος μὲν τοίνυν Kal ε A nw > 4 Ν > 4 — ὑπὸ σοῦ ἀπολλύμενος τοιουτοσὶ ἐγένετο [καὶ Eevo- dav ὁ στρεβλωθεὶς καὶ Ἱππίας ὁ Θάσιος]: σὺ δ᾽ 50 5 Pe Sy , ars , \ \ οὐδὲν τοῖς ἀνδράσιν ἐκείνοις συνειδώς, πεισθεὶς δὲ ε 4 “ἡ 5 “ 5 7 , Lal , ὡς σύ γε, ἂν ἐκεῖνοι ἀπόλωνται, μεθέξεις τῆς τότε πολιτείας καθισταμένης, ἀπέγραφες καὶ ἀπέκτεινας ᾿Αθηναίων πολλοὺς καὶ ἀγαθούς. Βούλομαι δ᾽ ὑμῖν, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, ἐπιδεῖξαι ν > »“ 9 εν ,’ 5 4 > A οἵων ἀνδρῶν ὑπὶ ᾿Αγοράτου ἀπεστερήθητε. εἰ μὲν > a \ θ᾽ μ4 “ἡ Ν δ΄ νὰ 5 , ov πολλοὶ ἦσαν, καθ᾽ ἕκαστον ἂν περὶ αὐτῶν ἠκού- nw 4 , A , ε A Ν ετε, νῦν δὲ συλλήβδην περὶ πάντων. οἱ μὲν γὰρ, στρατηγήσαντες ὑμῖν πολλάκις, μείζω τὴν πόλιν τοῖς διαδεχομένοις στρατηγοῖς παρεδίδοσαν " οἱ δ᾽ » ἑτέρας μεγάλας ἀρχὰς ἀρξαντες καὶ τριηραρχίας Ν 4 > ὕ ε 5 ε “ 5» πολλὰς τριηραρχήσαντες οὐδεπώποτε ὑφ᾽ ὑμῶν οὐ- δεμίαν αἰτίαν αἰσχρὰν ἔσχον. οἱ δ᾽ αὐτῶν περι- γενόμενοι καὶ σωθέντες, ods οὗτος μὲν ἀπέκτεινεν 5 “~ A , 5 ΄“ ’ ε ἈΝ ’ ὠμῶς καὶ θάνατος αὐτῶν κατεγνώσθη, ἡ δὲ τύχη A ε 4 ’ ’ Ν > 4 ὃ καὶ ὁ δαίμων περιεποίησε" φυγόντες γὰρ ἐνθένδε A 5 4 > Ν ε ,ὔ A καὶ ov συλληφθέντες γε οὐδὲ ὑπομείναντες τὴν 4 ’ 5 ἈΝ ~ - ε > ε ~ κρίσιν, κατελθόντες ἀπὸ Φυλῆς τιμῶνται ὑφ᾽ ὑμῶν ε 3, 5 Wh. ς ὡς ἄνδρες ἀγαθοὶ ὄντες. ,’ 4, 7 »Ὰ 5 , . Τούτους μέντοι τοιούτους ὄντας ᾿Αγόρατος τοὺς Ἀ ΓΑ ν ν δὲ 5 > a θ > , μὲν ἀπέκτεινε, τοὺς δὲ φυγάδας ἐντεῦθεν ἐποίησε, ’, ΕΣ 3 ¢ ~ Ν Cog ee 559. 7 4 “ Ν τίς ὧν αὐτός ; δεῖ γὰρ ὑμᾶς εἰδέναι ὅτι δοῦλος καὶ 5 4 5» ,ὕ 7 > > ~ a a ε nw > , ἐκ δούλων ἐστίν, ἵν εἰδῆτε οἷος ὧν ὑμᾶς ἐλυμαί- Ν > 4 νετο. τούτῳ μὲν yap πατὴρ ἣν Evpapys, ἐγένετο
53
61
63
64
54 XIII. KATA ATOPATOY.
δὲ ὁ Εὐμάρης οὗτος Νικοκλέους καὶ ᾿Αντικλέους. Καί μοι ἀνάβητε μάρτυρες.
ΜΑΡΤΎΡΕΣ.
65ς [Πολλὰ τοίνυν, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, ὅσα κακὰ Ν 3 Ν Ν ’ Ν ~ , > cs καὶ αἰσχρὰ καὶ τούτῳ Kal τοῖς τούτου ἀδελφοῖς > ΄ ἣν", ἊΝ, ἊΨ. ¥ ΄ Ν Ν ἐπιτετήδευται, πολὺ ἂν εἴη ἔργον λέγειν. περὶ δὲ ΄ ν 2 Xx ΄ 297 συκοφαντίας, ὅσας οὗτος ἢ δίκας ἰδίας συκοφαν- “ 5 U4 x» ‘ ν 9 ’, “Δ 3 τῶν ἐδικάζετο ἢ γραφὰς ὅσας ἐγράφετο ἢ ἀπο- Ν 3 ’ > 4 Ὁ > 4 γραφὰς ἀπέγραφεν, οὐδέν pe Set καθ᾽ ἕκαστον λέγειν: συλλήβδην γὰρ ὑμεῖς ἅπαντες καὶ ἐν τῷ δήμῳ καὶ ἐν τῷ δικαστηρίῳ συκοφαντίας αὐτοῦ κατέγνωτε καὶ ὥφλησεν ὑμῖν μυρίας δραχμάς, 66 ὥστε τοῦτο μὲν ἱκανῶς ὑπὸ ὑμῶν ἁπάντων μεμαρ- τύρηται. γυναῖκας τοίνυν τῶν πολιτῶν τοιοῦτος “ἃ ͵ὔ Ν ὃ 0 la 3 7 > ld ὧν μοιχεύειν καὶ διαφθείρειν ἐλευθέρας ἐπεχεί- Ν > ‘4 , Ἀ ’ ’ὔ ε ρῆσε, καὶ ἐλήφθη μοιχός: καὶ τούτου θάνατος ἡ ζημία ἐστίν. ‘Os δὲ ἀληθῆ λέγω, μάρτυρας κάλει.
MAPTYPES. |
67 Ἦσαν τοίνυν οὗτοι, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, τέττα- ρες ἀδελφοί. τούτων εἷς μὲν ὁ πρεσβύτερος ἐν Σικελίᾳ παραφρυκτωρευόμενος τοῖς πολεμίοις λη-
Ἀ ε Ν , 3 , ε δος φθεὶς ὑπὸ Λαμάχου ἀπετυμπανίσθη. ὁ δὲ ἕτερος εἰς Κόρινθον μὲν ἐντευθενὶ ἀνδράποδον ἐξήγαγεν, > A 4 , > a > \ ¢\ 7 ἐκεῖθεν δὲ παιδίσκην ἀστῆς ἐξαγαγὼν ἁλίσκεται,
XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS. 55
καὶ ἐν τῷ δεσμωτηρίῳ δεδεμένος ἀπέθανε τὸν δὲ 68 τρίτον Φαινιππίδης ἐνθάδε λωποδύτην ἀπήγαγε, καὶ ὑμεῖς κρίναντες αὐτὸν ἐν τῷ δικαστηρίῳ καὶ καταγνόντες αὐτοῦ θάνατον ἀποτυμπανίσαι παρέ δοτε. ὡς δὲ ἀληθῆ λέγω, καὶ αὐτὸν οἶμαι ὁμολο- γήσειν τοῦτον καὶ μάρτυρας παρεξόμεθα.
ΜΑΡΤΥΡΕΣ.
Πῶς οὖν οὐχ ἅπασι προσήκει ὑμῖν τούτου κατα- 69 ’ > ‘ , 4 5 A ε 4, ψηφίζεσθαι; εἰ yap τούτων ἕκαστος δι᾿ ἕν ἁμάρ- τημα θανάτου ἠξιώθη, ἦ που τοῦ γε πολλὰ ἐξη-
’ Ν ’ > ‘ , 5, ote > μαρτηκότος καὶ δημοσίᾳ eis THY πόλιν Kal ἰδίᾳ εἰς ἕκαστον ὑμῶν, ὧν ἑκάστου ἁμαρτήματος ἐν τοῖς
’ὔ’ Μ᾿ ε a > ’ »Ὁ ε al , νόμοις θάνατος ἡ ζημία ἐστί, δεῖ ὑμᾶς σφόδρα θάνατον αὐτοῦ καταψηφίσασθαι.
ΕἾ A
Λέξει δέ, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, καὶ ἐξαπατῆσαι 70 ὑμᾶς πειράσεται, ὡς ἐπὶ τῶν τετρακοσίων Φρύνι-
3 ΄ ἈΠ. 5 ‘ , z \ ΒΤ Ἂν 3 χον ἀπέκτεινε, καὶ ἀντὶ τούτου φησὶν αὐτὸν ᾿Αθη-
a N A , , > » ναῖον τὸν δῆμον ποιήσασθαι, ψευδόμενος, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί: οὔτε γὰρ Φρύνιχον ἀπέκτεινεν, οὔτε 3 “ Ἢ ὧς ε Lal > id , A@nvaiov αὐτὸν ὁ δῆμος ἐποιήσατο. Φρυνίχῳ 71
’ > » ’ “A 4 4 ε γάρ, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταΐ, κοινῇ Θρασύβουλός τε 6 Καλυδώνιος καὶ ᾿Απολλόδωρος ὃ Μεγαρεὺς ἐπεβού- λευσαν: ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἐπετυχέτην αὐτῷ βαδίζοντι, ὁ
Ν 4 ’ Ν , ἈΝ μὲν Θρασύβουλος τύπτει τὸν Φρύνιχον καὶ κατα- βάλλει πατάξας, ὁ δὲ ᾿Απολλόδωρος οὐχ ἡψατο᾽ ἅμα τούτῳ κραυγὴ γίνεται καὶ ῴᾧχοντο φεύγοντες.
56 XIII. KATA ΑΤΟΡΑΤΟΥ.
> , κ᾿ ε N ¥ , ¥ Αγόρατος δὲ οὑτοσὶ οὔτε παρεκλήθη οὔτε Tape ,ὕ + 75 “~ ’ὔ ὃ ,ὕ ε A γένετο οὔτε οἶδε τοῦ πράγματος οὐδέν. ὡς δὲ ἀληθῆ λέγω, αὐτὸ ὑμῖν τὸ ψήφισμα δηλώσει.
ΨΗΦΙΣΜΑ.
72 “Ore μὲν οὐκ ἀπέκτεινε Φρύνιχον, ἐξ αὐτοῦ τοῦ , ol 5 A /, > > , ψηφίσματος δῆλον - οὐδαμοῦ γάρ ἐστιν ᾿Αγόρατον ᾿Αθηναῖον εἶναι ὥσπερ Θρασύβουλον καὶ ᾿Απολλό- δωρον" καίτοι εἴπερ ἀπέκτεινε Φρύνιχον, ἔδει αὐ- ἈΝ > nw 5 “ , 9 Ξ 4 A τὸν ἐν TH αὐτῇ στήλῃ, Wa περ Θρασύβουλον Kat ᾿Απολλόδωρον, ᾿Αθηναῖον πεποιημένον .... τὰ μέντοι ὀνόματα διαπράττονται τὰ σφῶν αὐτῶν, δόντες ἀργύριον τῷ ῥήτορι, προσγραφῆνγαι εἰς τὴν 4 ε » 4 »¥ A ε >. nw 4 στήλην ὡς εὐεργέτας ὄντας. Kal ὡς ἀληθῆ λέγω,
τοῦτο τὸ ψήφισμα ἐλέγξει.
ΨΗΦΙΣΜΑ.
3 Οὕτω μέντοι οὗτος πολὺ ὑμῶν καταφρονεῖ, ὥστε οὐκ ὧν ᾿Αθηναῖος καὶ ἐδίκαζε καὶ ἐξεκλησίαζε καὶ ‘ ‘ > > ’ > , > , γραφὰς τὰς ἐξ ἀνθρώπων ἐγράφετο, ἐπιγραφό’ μενος ᾿Αναγυράσιος εἶναι. ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ ἕτερον / ’ ε > 5 ’ , 9 aA μέγα τεκμήριον ὡς οὐκ ἀπέκτεινε Φρύνιχον, Sv ὃ 3 “s,s nw ε ’ Ν by Αθηναῖός φησι γεγενῆσθαι. ὃ Φρύνιχος yap οὗ- τος τοὺς τετρακοσίους κατέστησεν" ἐπειδὴ δ᾽
> κα ἀν του ε ‘ val , ¥ ἐκεῖνος ἀπέθανεν, οἱ πολλοὶ τῶν τετρακοσίων ἔφυ- 74 γον. πότερον οὖν δοκοῦσιν ὑμῖν οἱ τριάκοντα καὶ ε Ἀ ΜΝ ΗΝ Ὁ ΄“ ’ 4 a > Ν ἡ βουλὴ ἡ ἐπὶ τῶν τριάκοντα βουλεύουσα, Ot αὐτοὶ
XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS.
ἦσαν ἅπαντες τῶν τετρακοσίων τῶν φυγόντων, 9 A Δ , N , 3 ΄ ἀφεῖναι ἂν λαβόντες τὸν Φρύνιχον ἀποκτείναντα, x la ε Ν ’, Ν lal a - ἢ τιμωρήσασθαι ὑπὲρ Φρυνίχου καὶ τῆς φυγῆς ἧς αὐτοὶ ἔφυγον; ἐγὼ μὲν οἶμαι τιμωρεῖσθαι ἄν. εἰ μὲν οὖν μὴ ἀποκτείνας προσποιεῖται, ἀδικεῖ, ὡς ἐγώ φημι" εἰ δὲ ἀμφισβητεῖς καὶ φὴς Φρύνιχον > a A Ψ ΄ Ν A δῷ «τῇ ἀποκτεῖναι, δῆλον ὅτι μείζω τὸν δῆμον τῶν ᾿Αθη- ναίων κακὰ ποιήσας τὴν ὑπὲρ Φρυνίχου αἰτίαν πρὸς τοὺς τριάκοντα ἀπελύσω - οὐδέποτε γὰρ πεί- > 4 > 4 ε uA > / σεις οὐδένα ἀνθρώπων ws Φρύνιχον ἀποκτείνας > , ἣν δὰ an , 3 N , ‘ ἀφείθης ἂν ὑπὸ τῶν τριάκοντα, εἰ μὴ μεγάλα τὸν δῆμον τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων καὶ ἀνήκεστα κακὰ εἰργάσω. ΕΣ Ἁ > , , > “A 4 ἐὰν μὲν οὖν φάσκῃ Φρύνιχον ἀποκτεῖναι, τούτων μέμνησθε, καὶ τοῦτον τιμωρεῖσθε ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ἐποίη- 5Ν > > , » : δ. 2 ¢ Ἀ σεν" ἐὰν δ᾽ οὐ φάσκῃ, ἔρεσθε αὐτὸν δι᾽ 6 τι φησὶν “Ὁ -“ >” nw ᾿Αθηναῖος ποιηθῆναι. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἔχῃ ἀποδεῖξαι, ~ HTM 9 Ἀ 50. . Ν > ’ τιμωρεῖσθε αὐτὸν ὅτι καὶ ἐδίκαζε καὶ ἐξεκλησιάζε A ¥ καὶ ἐσυκοφάντει πολλοὺς ws ᾿Αθηναῖος τοὔνομα ἐπιγραφόμενος. ᾿Ακούω δ᾽ αὐτὸν παρασκευάζεσθαι ἀπολογεῖσθαι ὡς ἐπὶ Φυλήν τε ῴχετο καὶ συγκατῆλθε ἀπὸ Φυ- λῆς, καὶ τοῦτο μέγιστον ἀγώνισμα εἶναι. ἐγένετο δὲ τοιοῦτον. ἦλθεν οὗτος ἐπὶ Φυλήν - καίτοι πῶς ΕΝ 4 ἊΝ ’ ν 3 Ν ν ἂν γένοιτο ἄνθρωπος μιαρώτερος, ὅστις εἰδὼς ὅτι εἰσί τινες ἐπὶ Φυλῇ τῶν ὑπὸ τούτου ἐκπεπτωκότων ἐτόλμησεν ἐλθεῖν ὡς τούτους ; ἐπειδὴ δὲ εἶδον αὐ- x , / » » e τὸν τάχιστα, συλλαβόντες ἄγουσιν ἄντικρυς ὡς > A a δ ἀν" ὧν 4 κὰν ἀποκτενοῦντεές, οὗπερ καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους ἀπέσφαττον,
57
75
76
78
58 XIII. KATA ATOPATOY.
79
80
81
" ἄγον κὰς a , εἴ τινα λῃστὴν ἢ κακοῦργον συλλάβοιεν. στρα- τηγῶν δὲ “Avutos [ἐπὶ Φυλὴν] οὐκ ἔφη χρῆναι ποιεῖν αὐτοὺς ταῦτα, λέγων ὅτι οὐχ οὕτω διακέ- ” A , a 5 A > \ owTo, ὥστε τιμωρεῖσθαί τινας τῶν ἐχθρῶν, ἀλλὰ νῦν μὲν δεῖν αὐτοὺς ἡσυχίαν ἔχειν, εἰ δέ ποτε οἴκαδε κατέλθοιεν, τότε καὶ τιμωρήσοιντο τοὺς ἀδικοῦντας. ταῦτα λέγων αἴτιος ἐγένετο τοῦ ἀπο- φυγεῖν τοῦτον ἐπὶ Φυλῇ - ἀνάγκη δὲ ἦν στρατη- “A 3 ὃ Ν > “ 4 » dr θ 4, you ἀνδρὸς ἀκροᾶσθαι, εἴπερ ἔμελλον σωθήσε- > » Pk. 3, Ν / , σθαι. ἀλλ᾽ ἕτερον: οὔτε yap συσσιτήσας τούτῳ ΕΝ οὐδεὶς φανήσεται οὔτε σύσκηνος γενόμενος, οὔτε ε ,ὔ 3 Ν \ , 5 > ¢ ὁ ταξίαρχος εἰς τὴν φυλὴν κατατάξας, ἀλλ᾽ ὥσπερ ἀλιτηρίῳ οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων αὐτῷ διελέγετο. Καί μοι κάλει τὸν ταξίαρχον.
MAPTY3.
᾿Επειδὴ δὲ ai διαλλάγαι πρὸς ἀλλήλους ἐγένοντο +. Ὁ ἫΝ , ε a > , Ν \ καὶ ἔπεμψαν οἱ πολῖται ἐκ Πειραιώς τὴν πομπὴν > / c “Ὁ A ¥ “ nw a εἰς πόλιν, ἡγεῖτο μὲν Αἴσιμος τῶν πολιτῶν, οὗτος \ 9 ‘\ \ > eee 4 , δὲ οὕτω τολμηρὸς Kal ἐκεῖ ἐγένετο: συνηκολούθει Ν \ ‘ 9 Ν , Ν \ yap λαβὼν τὰ ὅπλα Kal συνέπεμπε THY πομπὴν A a a Ν Ν Ἂ > Ν \ Ν μετὰ τῶν πολιτῶν πρὸς τὸ ἄστυ. ἐπειδὴ δὲ πρὸς A , > . ¥ A Ae \ > ταῖς πύλαις ἦσαν Kal ἔθεντο τὰ ὅπλα, πρὶν εἰσι- ’ 5 ‘A Ἂ ε Ν Ἂν > 4 \ έναι εἰς TO ἄστυ, ὁ μὲν Αἴσιμος αἰσθάνεται Kal προσελθὼν τήν τε ἀσπίδα αὐτοῦ λαβὼν ἔρριψε, καὶ ἀπιέναι ἐκέλευσεν ἐς κόρακας ἐκ τῶν πολι- “ > ‘ » ~ > / a~$ »” τῶν: ov yap ἔφη δεῖν ἀνδροφόνον αὐτὸν ὄντα
XIII. AGAINST AGORATUS. 59
συμπέμπειν τὴν πομπὴν TH AOnva. τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ ὑπὸ Αἰσίμου ἀπηλάθη. Ὥς δ᾽ ἀληθῆ λέγω, κάλει μοι τοὺς μάρτυρας.
ΜΑΡΤΥΡΕΣ.
’ σὰ ’ > »” ὃ ὃ / Ν Φι Ἂς Τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, καὶ ἐπὶ » Ἀ ~ Φυλῇ καὶ ἐν Πειραιεῖ πρὸς τοὺς πολίτας διέκειτο " οὐδεὶς γὰρ αὐτῷ διελέγετο ὡς ἀνδροφόνῳ 6 v yap αὐτᾷ Ύετο ws ἀνδροφόνῳ ὄντι, TOD Ν δ 9 μον. οὟἮὟῇ be δ 8: να + 2 τε μὴ ἀποθανεῖν “Avutos ἐγένετο αὐτῷ αἴτιος. ἐὰν s “Ὃς α΄ κ Ν AN: ΄, A ε οὖν τῇ ἐπὶ Φυλὴν ὁδῷ ἀπολογίᾳ χρῆται, ὑπολαμ- ’ Ν >» ΄“ » βάνειν χρὴ εἰ “Avutos αὐτῷ ἐγένετο αἴτιος μὴ ἀπο- “- , ΕΝ “- θανεῖν ἑτοίμων ὄντων τιμωρεῖσθαι, καὶ ἔρριψεν tists ¥ X > , ‘ > ¥ Ν A αὐτοῦ Αἴσιμος τὴν ἀσπίδα Kal οὐκ εἴα μετὰ TOV lal Ν ¥” Ν πολιτῶν πέμπειν τὴν πομπήν, καὶ εἴ τις αὐτὸν ," > ’ ‘ / ταξίαρχος εἰς τάξιν τινὰ κατέταξε. , > A 3 a6 , , Δ Μήτε οὖν ταῦτα αὐτοῦ ἀποδέχεσθε, μήτε ἂν ’, ν ἰδὲ ’ wa ’ > λέγῃ ὅτι πολλῷ χρόνῳ ὕστερον τιμωρούμεθα. οὐ γὰρ οἶμαι οὐδεμίαν τῶν τοιούτων ἀδικημάτων προ- , > > τὰν Ὁ Ν 3 » > ὑθὺ » θεσμίαν εἶναι, ἀλλ᾽ ἐγὼ μὲν οἶμαι, ett εὐθὺς εἴτε cal nA “A > χρόνῳ Tis τιμωρεῖται, τοῦτον δεῖν ἀποδεικνύναι ὡς - e οὐ πεποίηκε περὶ ὧν ἐστιν ἡ αἰτία. οὗτος τοίνυν lal > ,ὕ ΕἸ ε > 7 , > / x τοῦτο ἀποφαινέτω, ἢ WS οὐκ ἀπέκτεινεν ἐκείνους ἢ ’ “ -“ A ὡς δικαίως, κακόν τι ποιοῦντας τὸν δῆμον τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων. εἰ δὲ πάλαι δέον τιμωρεῖσθαι ὕστερον ε A , Ν ’ ’, ὰ » > ἡμεῖς τιμωρούμεθα, τὸν χρόνον κερδαίνει ὃν ἔζη οὐ »-»" » “Ὁ ε Ν + ε Ν ’ 3 Ν προσῆκον αὐτῷ, οἱ δὲ ἄνδρες ὑπὸ τούτου οὐδὲν
ΑΝ : , ἧττον τεθνήκασιν.
82
83
60
85
86
87
XIII. KATA ATOPATOY.
᾿Ακούω δ᾽ αὐτὸν καὶ διισχυρίζεσθαι, ὅτι ἐπ᾽ αὐτοφώρῳ τῇ ἀπαγωγῇ ἐπιγέγραπται: ὃ πάντων ἐγὼ οἶμαι εὐηθέστατον: ὡς εἰ μὲν τὸ ἐπ᾽ αὐὖτο- φώρῳ μὴ προσεγέγραπτο, ἔνοχος ὧν τῇ ἀπαγωγῇ " 4 Ν ~ vA ε ’ Ν διότι δὲ τοῦτο προσγέγραπται, ῥᾳστώνην τινὰ ¥ eee. A κ᾿ 3 \ » » οἴεται αὑτῷ εἶναι. τοῦτο δὲ οὐδενὶ ἄλλῳ ἔοικεν ἂν, a 3 A eS > ΄ , \ ἢ ὁμολογεῖν ἀποκτεῖναι, μὴ ἐπ αὐτοφώρῳ δέ, Kai Ν , 4 ν > Ἁ me, > περὶ τούτου διισχυρίζεσθαι, ὥσπερ, εἰ μὴ ἐπ᾽ av- a 4 5» ,ὔ’ 4 7 4 7 5 Ν ’ τοφώρῳ μέν, ἀπέκτεινε δέ, τούτου ἕνεκα δέον αὐτὸν ’ mn 3. ἃν ε ν ε σώζεσθαι. δοκοῦσι δ᾽ ἔμοιγε οἱ ἕνδεκα οἱ παρα- δεξάμενοι τὴν ἀπαγωγὴν ταύτην, οὐκ οἰόμενοι > 4 4 , Ν , Αγοράτῳ συμπράττειν τότε Kal διισχυριζόμενοι σφόδρα ὀρθῶς ποιῆσαι Διονύσιον, τὴν ἀπαγωγὴν / ἀπάγειν ἀναγκάζοντες, προσγράψασθαι τότε ἐπὶ αὐτοφώρῳ, ἢ ὅπου ἂν ἢ" πρῶτον μὲν ἐναντίον , > A & Ls , > ΄ πεντακοσίων ἐν τῇ βουλῃ, εἶτα πάλιν ἐναντίον "AGO: 4 ε 4 > “Ὁ ὃ ’ 3 ’ὔ Ν ναίων ἁπάντων ἐν τῷ δήμῳ ἀπογράψας τινὰς ἀποκτείνειε καὶ αἴτιος γένοιτο τοῦ θανάτου. οὐ ‘ ὃ ΄ “ , ¥ ee 3 , 27 yap δήπου τοῦτο μόνον οἴεται ἐπ᾿ αὐτοφώρῳ, ἐάν 7 “Δ ,ὔ ’ ’ > Ν » τις ξύλῳ ἢ μαχαίρᾳ πατάξας καταβάλῃ, ἐπεὶ ἔκ γε Tov σοῦ λόγου οὐδεὶς φανήσεται ἀποκτείνας Ν 3, ὃ a \ > ,ὔ 4 Ν > 4 TOVS avopas οὺς σὺ ἀπέγραψας" οὔτε yap ἐπά- ταξεν αὐτοὺς οὐδεὶς οὔτ᾽ ἀπέσφαξεν, ἀλλ᾽ ἀναγκα- ’ ε Ν al Cal » A 5» , > σθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς σῆς ἀπογραφῆς ἀπέθανον. οὐκ εὐ ε ¥ lal , e .: > , οὖν ὁ αἴτιος τοῦ θανάτου, οὗτος ἐπ᾿ αὐτοφώρῳ > 4 4 > » » a» Ν 3 4 ἐστί; τίς οὖν ἄλλος αἴτιος ἢ σὺ ἀπογράψας ; ΄ ry > > > > , Ν > ε 3 ὥστε πῶς οὐκ ἐπ᾽ αὐτοφώρῳ σὺ εἶ ὁ ἀπο-
κτείνας ;
XIII]. AGAINST AGORATUS. 61
’ > a. S, Ν ‘ A 7 Ν Πυνθάνομαι δ᾽ αὐτὸν καὶ περὶ τῶν ὅρκων καὶ \ a “-“ , / ε Ν 5. περὶ τῶν συνθηκῶν μέλλειν λέγειν, ὡς Tapa τοὺς ν Ν Ν 4 5 ’ A / ὅρκους καὶ Tas συνθήκας ἀγωνίζεται ἃς συνεθέ- Ν Ν 3 Ἂν ε » A“ “ μεθα πρὸς τοὺς ἐν ἄστει οἱ ἐν [τῷ] Πειραιεῖ. σχεδὸν μὲν οὖν τούτοις ἰσχυριζόμενος ὁμολογεῖ > , > 3 Ν a a gY x ἀνδροφόνος εἶναι: ἐμποδὼν γοῦν ἢ ὅρκους ἢ συν- θήκας ἢ χρόνον ἢ ἐπ᾽ αὐτοφώρῳ τι ποιεῖται, αὐτῷ δὲ τῷ πράγματι οὔ τι πιστεύει καλῶς ἀγωνιεῖσθαι. ca , > » , > ͵ Ν 4, ὑμῖν δέ, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, οὐ προσήκει περὶ τού- των ἀποδέχεσθαι: ἀλλ᾽ ὡς οὐκ ἀπέγραψεν οὐδὲ ε »” lal ‘\ 4 7 ee" οἱ ἄνδρες τεθνᾶσι, περὶ τούτων κελεύετε αὐτὸν ἀπολογεῖσθαι. ἔπειτα τοὺς ὅρκους καὶ τὰς συν- θήκας οὐδὲν ἡγοῦμαι προσήκειν ἡμῖν πρὸς τοῦτον. οἱ γὰρ ὅρκοι τοῖς ἐν ἄστει πρὸς τοὺς ἐν Πειραιεῖ γεγένηνται. εἶ μὲν οὖν οὗτος μὲν ἐν ἄστει ἡμεῖς δ᾽ ἐν Πειραιεῖ ἦμεν, εἶχον ἄν τινα λόγον αὐτῷ αἱ - a Ν Ν Ὁ > rip Ν συνθῆκαι: νῦν δὲ καὶ οὗτος ἐν Πειραιεῖ ἦν καὶ ἐγὼ καὶ Διονύσιος καὶ οὗτοι ἅπαντες οἱ τοῦτον τιμωρούμενοι, ὥστε οὐκ ἔστιν ἡμῖν ἐμποδὼν οὐ- id > 4 Ν 7 ε > “Ὁ om > δέν - οὐδένα yap ὅρκον οἱ ἐν Πειραιεῖ τοῖς ἐν Πει- ραιεῖ ὦὥμοσαν. 3 ἈΝ δὲ ’ » ὃ “ > eS Ex παντὸς δὲ τρόπου ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ οὐχ ἑνὸς , ¥ = Ψ x Η͂ δ. Ἂς A , θανάτου ἄξιος εἶναι, ὅστις φησὶ μὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ δή- Ν Ν a a OR ΄ μου ...., τὸν δὲ δῆμον, ὃν αὐτός φησι πατέρα ε an 4 ΄ , \ > ‘ ἈΝ αὑτοῦ εἶναι, φαίνεται κακώσας, καὶ ἀφεὶς καὶ προ- δοὺς ἐξ ὧν ἐκεῖνος μείζων καὶ ἰσχυρότερος ἐγί- γνετο. ὅστις οὖν τόν τε γόνῳ πατέρα τὸν αὑτοῦ
»» τ 3 Ν ~ ~ > ’ ’ €TUTTE και οὐδὲν πάρεχε τῶν ἐπιτηδείων, TOV TE
88
90
ΟΙ
62
93
94
XIII. KATA ATOPATOY.
Ν , 3 , a »> ε , 3 , ποιητὸν πατέρα ἀφείλετο ἃ ἦν ὑπάρχοντα ἐκείνῳ ἀγαθά, πῶς οὐ καὶ διὰ τοῦτο κατὰ τὸν τῆς κακώ-
’ ¥ / > , lal σεως νόμον ἄξιός ἐστι θανάτῳ ζημιωθῆναι ; , 5. 26. τῶν a> , 9 Προσήκει ὃ υμιν, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, ἅπασι τιμωρεῖν ὑπὲρ ἐκείνων τῶν ἀνδρῶν ὁμοίως ὥσπερ ἡμῶν ἑνὶ ἑκάστῳ. ἀποθνήσκοντες γὰρ ἡμῖν ἐπέ- aA Q A ΕἾ Ψ “ σκηψαν καὶ ὑμῖν καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ἅπασι τιμωρεῖν ε \ “ | eed ed > 4 Ν ε , ὑπὲρ σφῶν αὐτῶν ᾿Αγόρατον τουτονὶ ὡς φονέα ΕΝ \ ~ a pee. cee x » ὄντα, Kal κακῶς ποιεῖν καθ᾽ ὅσον ἂν ἔμβραχυ ἕκαστος δύνηται. εἶ τοίνυν τι ἐκεῖνοι ἀγαθὸν τὴν ’ “ἡ Ν a Ν ε id ’ὔ > πόλιν ἢ τὸ πλῆθος TO ὑμέτερον φανεροί εἰσι TE Ν a ε “A > 4, ποιηκότες, ἃ Kal αὐτοὶ ὑμεῖς ὁμολογεῖτε, ἀνάγκη ε "-“ 5 , > ’ ’ Ἁ > ’ ὑμᾶς ἐστι πάντας ἐκείνοις φίλους καὶ ἐπιτηδείους > 9 2O\ A ε κα x eS εν εἶναι, ὥστε οὐδὲν μᾶλλον ἡμῖν ἢ καὶ ὑμῶν ἑνὶ ε / > , 4 » ν 4 / ἑκάστῳ ἐπέσκηψαν. οὔκουν οὔτε ὅσιον οὔτε νόμι- “a > / μον ὑμῖν ἐστιν ἀνεῖναι ᾿Αγόρατον τουτονί. ὑμεῖς , we) > A \ ϑέντ τὰ DO a τοίνυν, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, νυνὶ δή, ἐπεὶ ἐν TO ’ / > \ a 9 ~ > 6 5» 4“. » τότε χρόνῳ, ἐν ᾧ ἐκεῖνοι ἀπέθνησκον, οὐχ οἷοί τε ἐκείνοις ἐπαρκέσαι γεγόνατε διὰ τὰ πράγματα τὰ ® περιεστηκότα, νυνί, ἐν ᾧ δύνασθε, τιμωρήσατε Ν ’ wn τὸν ἐκείνων φονέα. ἐνθυμεῖσθε δ᾽, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθη- a ν ἈΝ , ¥ ναῖοι, ὅπως μὴ πάντων ἔργον σχετλιώτατον ἐργά- 3 Ἀ A > A σησθε. εἰ yap ἀποψηφιεῖσθε ᾿Αγοράτου τουτουΐ, > ‘ ‘al , > Ν Ν 3 ’ οὐ μόνον τοῦτο διαπράττεσθε, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐκείνων lal “Ὁ lal A > a τῶν ἀνδρῶν, os ὁμολογεῖτε ὑμῖν εὔνους εἶναι, TH αὐτῇ ψήφῳ ταύτῃ θάνατον καταψηφίζεσθε: ἀπο- » “ λύοντες yap τὸν αἴτιον ὄντα ἐκείνοις τοῦ θανάτου > A »” 4 a» > 4 ’ ε Ν. οὐδὲν ἄλλο γινώσκετε ἢ ἐκείνους δικαίως ὑπὸ
XIII. AGAINST .-AGORATUS.
΄ ΄, Ν ι x , ΄ τούτου τεθνηκέναι. καὶ οὕτως ἂν δεινότατα πάν- , > e > ΄ > ~ ε , των πάθοιεν, εἰ οἷς ἐπέσκηπτον ἐκεῖνοι ws φίλοις > A en ε κα ae woe > οὖσι τιμωρεῖν ὑπὲρ αὑτῶν, οὗτοι ὁμόψηφοι κατ ἐκείνων τῶν ἀνδρῶν τοῖς τριάκοντα γενήσονται. μηδαμῶς, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, πρὸς θεῶν ᾿Ολυμ- πίων, μήτε τέχνῃ μήτε μηχανῇ μηδεμιᾷ θάνατον 3 ΄ “ > ~~ ΄ a Ν ἐκείνων τῶν ἀνδρῶν καταψηφίσησθε, οἱ πολλὰ κἀγαθὰ ὑμᾶς ποιήσαντες διὰ ταῦτα ὑπὸ τῶν τριά- δι κοντα καὶ ᾿Αγοράτου τουτουὶ ἀπέθανον. ἀναμνη- σθέντες οὖν ἁπάντων τῶν δεινῶν, καὶ τῶν κοινῶν Lal , A A“ 7Q7 7 ε ’ 3 ’ 5 τῇ πόλει καὶ τῶν ἰδίων, ὅσα ἑκάστῳ ἐγένοντο ἐπει- ΄- + δὴ ἐκεῖνοι οἱ ἄνδρες ἐτελεύτησαν, τιμωρήσατε TOV ¥” , > ΄, 7. eA 9 \ αἴτιον τούτων. ἀποδέδεικται δ᾽ ὑμῖν [ἅπαντα] καὶ 5 “ / ΦΥῊΝ “ > ~ % TS ἐκ τῶν ψηφισμάτων καὶ ἐκ τῶν ἀπογραφῶν καὶ ἐκ A ¥ os > , X > A ¥ Tov ἄλλων ἁπάντων Ayopatos ὧν αὐτοῖς αἴτιος A 4 »» Ν Ν ’ aa, > ’ τοῦ θανάτου. ἔτι δὲ καὶ προσήκει ὑμῖν ἐναντία a ’ὔ ’, - Ν ’ 3.5 “δὲ τοῖς τριάκοντα ψηφίζεσθαι. ὧν μὲν τοίνυν ἐκεῖνοι , , ε 3 ΄ - 3 θάνατον κατέγνωσαν, ὑμεῖς ἀποψηφίσασθε: ὧν ὃ ἐκεῖνοι θάνατον οὐ κατέγνωσαν, ὑμεῖς καταγινώ- σκετε. οἱ τριάκοντα τοίνυν τῶν μὲν ἀνδρῶν τού- a > ©: # , , ΄ὕ των, Ol ἦσαν ὑμέτεροι φίλοι, θάνατον κατέγνωσαν, n~ nw > ὧν Set ὑμᾶς ἀποψηφίζεσθαι- ᾿Αγοράτου δὲ ἀπεψη- ’ / > 4 4 4 > 4 φίσαντο, διότι ἐδόκει προθύμος τούτους ἀπολλύναι" φΦ ld ΄, 38 > ὌΝ , . οὗ προσήκει καταψηφίζεσθαι. ἐὰν οὖν τὰ ἐναντία lal 4 4 wm A 3 ε , τοῖς τριάκοντα ψηφίζησθε, πρῶτον μὲν οὐχ ὁμόψη- φοι γίγνεσθε, ἔπειτα τοῖς ὑμετέροις αὐτῶν φίλοις τετιμωρηκότες ἔσεσθε, ἔπειτα τοῖς πᾶσιν ἀνθρώ- ποις δόξετε δίκαια καὶ ὅσια ψηφίσασθαι.
63
95
96
97
INTRODUCTION
TO THE
ORATION CONCERNING THE SACRED OLIVE-TREE. |
An Athenian land-owner, name unknown, is charged by a certain Nicomachus with having a number of years before extirpated one of the sacred olive-trees of the state. The trial is before the Areopagus. ‘The charge, if sustained, will bring upon the offender the penalty of perpetual banishment and the confiscation of his entire property.
A glance at some facts derived from this oration and other ancient references to the subject reveals a peculiar phase of the Athenian state system, and explains the sternness of the Athenian code regarding this offence.
The olive-trees and groves of Attica formed then, as now, a marked feature in the landscape, and the oil was an impor- tant staple of commerce. As in the case of the grain trade, there was a rigid official supervision of the oil product and of the trees themselves. Provision was made by law against any diminution in the number of fruit-bearing trees ; ‘a land- owner was not allowed to cut down more than two a year from his estate, unless by special permission. Especial care was taken of the sacred trees dedicated to Athené, the pro- tecting goddess of the state. The culture of the olive had been, from the earliest times, closely connected with the
~
VII. CONCERNING THE SACRED OLIVE-TREE. 65
religious legends and institutions of the country. Grafts and shoots from the sacred olive-tree that stood on the Acropolis, and had sprung from the rock at the bidding of Athené in her contest with Poseidon, had become fruit-bearing trees in various parts of the country; not only in the precincts of temples, but also on private estates. These were the so- called μορίαι, the sacred trees whose produce was forever devoted to maintaining the worship of the goddess, and to the support of her priests. The penalty for the extirpation of one of these, even an old stump or decaying trunk, has been already mentioned.
Crimes of impiety in general fell within the jurisdiction of the Areopagus, and all matters pertaining to the care of the sacred olives were especially committed to them. They appointed from their own number curators and inspectors (ἐπιμεληταί, γνώμονες), to whom was intrusted this department of the public business, including the revision of the inven- tories, the disposition of the produce to contractors, and other like duties.
Before this Council, doubtless seated on the same rock- hewn steps where Paul four centuries later addressed the debating philosophers of Athens, Nicomachus — of whom we only know that he was “a young man” — has brought the defendant, a wealthy citizen in advanced life, but with- out wife or children. An estate formerly belonging to Pi- sander, who had been prominent in the oligarchy of the Four Hundred, had come into his possession by purchase. It is supposed to have been situated in the deme Acharne, to the northward of the city, that being the deme to which Pisander had belonged. It is charged that the defendant has dug up the stump of a sacred olive that had formerly stood on it, — one of the blackened stumps, it may be, which the fires of foraging parties had left as traces of the recent war. The defendant proceeds to show that since the
5
66 VII. CONCERNING THE SACRED OLIVE-TREE.
purchase of the land from Anticles, in the spring of 403 8. ¢., it had been leased successively to Callistratus, Demetrius, Alcias, and Proteas ; the lease of the latter having probably expired shortly before the date (397 -- 6) of the alleged crime ; and he proves by the testimony of several of these that there had been no olive-tree at all upon the estate.
Inasmuch as the prosecution is not supported by the testi- mony of any eye-witnesses, the remaining arguments of the defendant, comprising the larger part of the oration, might seem to be a work of supererogation. They seem, however, partly designed to expose the malicious and mercenary pur- pose of the accuser. Should four-fifths of the judges vote for acquittal, he would not only lose his case, but would be subjected to a fine.
The following is a brief analysis :
I. Exordium, ξξ 1-3. II. Statement of the case, 88 4-8. III. Refutation of the charge by positive evidence, 88 g-11. IV. Refutation of the charge on the ground of its @ priori improbability and the absence of any assignable motive. Maintained from
(1) The reputation of the defendant, $§ 12-14.
(2) The inevitable publicity of the act charged, 88 15-19; in con- nection with which a strong argument is made from the neglect of the accuser to produce witnesses, or lodge com- plaint at the time, $$ 20-23.
(3) The circumstances of the alleged place, $$ 24-26.
(4) The circumstances of the alleged ime, ὃ 27.
(5) The difficulty of escaping the known vigilance of the authori- ties, $$ 28, 29.
(6) The defendant’s course of life hitherto as an upright and patriotic citizen, §§ 30-33.
V. Finally, the refusal of the accuser to take the testimony of the slaves when offered, in contrast with the course of the defendant in the case, affords a convincing argument that not only is the charge without foundation, but it is brought from mercenary and malicious motives, $$ 34-41.
VI. Peroration, recapitulating the leading points in the defence, 88 42, 43.
’
VII.
APEOIJIATITIKOS
ΠΕΡῚ TOY ZHKOY AITIOAOTLIA.
3 - IT POTEPON μέν, ὦ βουλή, ἐνόμιζον ἐξεῖναι a B λ , ε ’, » / OL ” ᾿ τῷ βουλομένῳ, ἡσυχίαν ἄγοντι, μήτε δίκας ἔχειν 5 | μήτε πράγματα: νυνὶ δὲ οὕτως ἀπροσδοκήτοις αἰτίαις καὶ πονηροῖς συκοφάνταις περιπέπτωκα, ὥστ᾽ εἴ πως οἷόν τε, δοκεῖ μοι δεῖν καὶ τοὺς μὴ , ΕΣ ΄ \ A , » γεγονότας ἤδη δεδιέναι περὶ τῶν μελλόντων ἔσε- σθαι: διὰ γὰρ τοὺς τοιούτους οἱ κίνδυνοι κοινοὶ ’ Ν mn δὲ iO “ Ν ΄“" Ν γίγνονται καὶ τοῖς μηδὲν ἀδικοῦσι καὶ τοῖς πολλὰ ε ’ 9 > »” ε 3 ’ ’, ἡμαρτηκόσιν. οὕτω δ᾽ ἄπορος ὁ ἀγών μοι καθέ- 2 στηκεν, ὥστε ἀπεγράφην. τὸ μὲν πρῶσον ἐλαίαν ἐκ τῆς γῆ ἀφανίζειν, καὶ πρὸς τοὺς eh cat τοὺς καρποὺς τῶν i, ees πυνθανόμενοι προσή- εσαν" ay Racy δ᾽ ἐκ τούτου τοῦ upc ἀδικοῦντά με οὐδὲν ween ἐδυνήθησαν, νυνί με σηνόν φασῳ
ὑξςειν ενοι ἐ οἱ ὲν ταύτ V THV αἰτίαν a τοὶ , 7D μ oh μὲν ταύτην τὴ πρηῤόρβὴζαοι εἶναι ἀπε ἔγξαι, αὗτο ts δὲ ἐξεῖναι
scape ὅ τι ἂν βούλωνται λέγειν. καὶ δεῖ με, 3 περὶ ὧν οὗτος ἐπιβεβουλευκὼς ἥκει, ἅμ᾽ ὑμῖν τοῖς
68 VII. ΠΕΡῚ TOY SHKOY.
ltteer διαγνώσομένοις περὶ τοῦ Apa rer ἀκούσαντα, we
Kal περὶ Τῆς πατρίδος καὶ περὶ τῆς οὐσίας ἀγωνί- σασθαι. ὅμως δὲ πειράσομαι ἐξ ἀρχῆς ὑμᾶς διδάξαι. 1 - \ Ν a , Ν , 4 Ἢν μὲν γὰρ τοῦτο Πεισάνδρου τὸ χωρίον, δη- QZ μὰ ¥ > > ’ > 4 ε μευθέντων τῶν. ὄντων δ᾽. ἐκείνου Ἀπολλόδωρος ὁ Μεγαρεὺς ὦ δωρεὰν Tope Tov δήμου λαβὼν τὸν μὲν. ἄλλον χρόνον ἐγεώβῤγεις ὀλίγῳ δὲ τ τῶν τριά-᾿ / κοντα eres map αὐτοῦ CPO ebepi- ω σθωσεν'. ἐγὼ δὲ παρ᾽ ᾿Αντικλέους εἰρήνης, eR 5 ἐωνούμην. ἡγοῦμαι τοίνυν, ὦ βουλή, ἐμὸν pyr ἀποδεῖξαι ὡς, er eid τὸ μκωρίον ἐ τησάμην, οὔτ᾽ ἐλαία οὔτε σηκὸς anid ἐν αὐτῷ. νομίζω yap τοῦ μὲν προτέρου χρόνου, οὐδ᾽ εἰ πάλαι ἐνῆσαν μυ- / 3 a 4 aA > Ν Ἀ > pia, οὐκ ἂν δικαίως ζημιοῦσθαι" εἰ yap pr δὲ ἡμᾶς εἰσιν᾽ ἡφακσανναν οὐδὲν προσήκει περὶ τῶν πλασηρίων ἁμαρτημάτων ὡς ἀδικοῦντας κιν- bApeth ht 6 duvevew. πάντες γὰρ ἐπίστασθε ὅτι ὁ πόλεμος, καὶ ἄλλων πολλῶν αἴτιος κακῶν Lhe beh καὶ τὰ μεν. Toppe ὑπὸ Λακεδαιμονίων pea are δ᾽ ἐγγὺς ὑπὸ τῶν φίλων διηρπάζετο" ὥστε πῶς ἂν δικαίως ὑπὲρ τῶν τῇ πόλει γεγενημένων συμ- μὴν: 3 ‘ ‘\ di. ὃ ὃ ’ ¥ Ν Φφορὼν ὦ νυνὶ δίκην. διδοίην ; ἄλλως τε καὶ τοῦτο τὸ ΚΟΡΗ. ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ δημευθὲν a ἀὐ μα ίον. 7 ἣν πλεῖον ἢ τρία ἔτη. οὐ ϑαυμαστὸν δ᾽ εἰ τότε ᾧ οὐδὲ τὰ ἡμέτερ᾽ αὐτῶν
φυλάττειν ἠδυνάμεθα. ἐπίστασθε δέ, ὦ βουλή,
> “A Ν 5 ὅσοι μάλιστα τῶν τοιούτων ἐπιμελεῖσθε, πολλὰ ἐν
τὰς μορίας ἐξέκοπτον, ἐ εν ω
VII. CONCERNING THE SACRED OLIVE-TREE. 69
᾿νε" IO Me
ἐκείνῳ τῷ χρόνῳ δασέα ὄντα Bias | καὶ μορξαις (ἐλαίαις, ὧν νῦν τὰ πολλὰ ἐκκέκοπται καὶ 7 i. εἶ ψιλὴ γεγένηται: καὶ τῶν αὐτῶν καὶ ἐν “Τῇ, εἰρήνῃ. ὶ καὶ ἐν FR, πολέμῳ κεκτημένων οὐκ ἀξιοῦτε, pias
αὐτῶν, ἑξέρων ἐκκοψάνεων, δίκην λαμβάνειν. καί- 8
τοι εἰ τοὺς διὰ παντὸς TOU χρόνου: Veep pias HbA
τῆς αἰτίας ἀφίετε, ἢ ἦ που χρὴ τούς γ᾽ ἐν τῇ εἰρήνῃ πριαμένους ἀφ᾽ ὑμῶν ἀζημίους γεβέσθοι. ¥
᾿Αλλὰ γάρ, ὦ βουλή, περὶ μὲν τῶν πρότερον 9 γήμνυμένων πολλὰ ἔχων εἰπεῖν ἱκανὰ μομέξαι τὰ εἰρημένα: ἐπειδὴ δ᾽ ἐγὼ παρέλαβον τὸ χωρίον, πρὶν ἡμέρας πέντε γεῤάτθαι, ἀπέμίόϑωσα Καλ- λιστράτῳ, ἐπὶ Πυθοδώρου ἄρχοντος - ὃς δύο ἔτη τὸ ἐγεώργησεν, οὔτε ἰδίαν ἐλαίαν οὔτε μορίαν ᾿οὔτε said παραλαβών. τρίτῴ δὲ ἔτει Δημήτριῶς οὗ- τοσὶ εἰργάσατο ἐνιαυτόν - τῷ, δὲ ξετάρτῳ ᾿Αλκίᾳ ᾿Αντισθένους ἀπελευθέρῳ ἀμίσθώσα, ὃς τέθνηκε ταῦτα τρία ἔτη. ὁμοίως καὶ Πρωτέας ἐμισθώ τς σατο. Καί μοι δεῦρο ἴτε μάρτυρες.
ΜΑΡΤΥΡΕΣ.
Ἐπειδὴ τοίνυν 6 χρόνος οὗτος ἐξήκει, αὐτὸς 11 n Ν δὲ ε ΄ τ τὰ (ὃ γε ργῷ. φησὶ cP τζαπήγοβοὸς ᾿ ἐπὶ Σουνιάδου ἄρχοντος σήκὰν ὑπ᾽ aioe ἐξκεκόφθαις ὑμῖν δὲ βεναρτυρήεασιν οἱ πρότερον͵ ἐργαζόμενοι καὶ πολλὰ ἔ ery παρ᾿ ἐμοῦ μεμισθωμένοι μὴ εἶναι͵ on- Ww KOV ἐν τῷ χωρίῳ. καίτοι πῶς av τις φανέρωτέρως
eae ae
70 VII. ΠΕΡῚ TOY SHKOY.
ἐξελέγξειε ψευδόμενον τὸν κατήγορον; οὐ yap οἷόν τε, ἃ πρότερον μὴ ἦν, ταῦτα τὸν ὕστερον φρνθλόμεμον egies 12 "Ey τοίνυν, ὦ βουλή, ἐν μὲν τῷ, τέω χρόνῳ, ὅσοι ἊΣ φάσζοιεν (δειμὸν εἶ εἶναι καὶ ΓΆΡ καὶ ¢ οὐ- δὲν ἃ a ἰκῇ, καὶ Bie ἴσξος πούαθ τα ἠγανάκτουν ἄν, αἱρούμενος cmd λέγεσθαι ὥς μοὶ Ἡροσῆκε: νῦν δὲ πάντας ἂν baie βουλοίμην περὶ ἐμοῦ ταύ- τὴν τὴν Prone? Exel, be Tviger ae σκοπεῖν a εἴπερ τοιούτοις épyous ἐπεχείρουν, καὶ ὅ τι κέρ- | δος ἐγένετο τῷ whats 0h Kal ἥτις he TO
aia αν ἐπ}: τί ἂν λαθὼν διεπραξάμην καὶ τί
vr (Ak 13 ἂν φανερὸς γενόμενήα, ὑφ᾽ ὑμῶν ἔτασ ον. mies if "| V yap ἄνθρωποι τὰ τοιαῦτα οὐ x. ὕβρεως BOF SP hoa
Sous 4 ενεκα οιοῦσι καὶ ὑμᾶς Trost οὕτω σ σκοπεῖν,
καὶ τοὺς ἂντιδίκονς. ἐ ἐκ τούτων τὰς υϑορῦ ἐδ ν᾿ δἢ : ΑΚ AAA
ποιεῖσθαι, dstocamtooeas ἥτις OPEN τοῖς ἀδι-
14 κήσασιν ae \/ οὗτος gorse οὐκ ἂν͵ ἔχοι ἀπο- VAG, Ath 71 ἤ δεῖξαι ο ὕθ᾽ ὡς ὑπὸ πενίας ἠναγκάσθην᾽ τοιούτοις
ἔργοις ἐπιχειρεῖν, οὔθ᾽ ὡς τὸ ΧΟΡΙΟΝ μοι Sua
ἢ φθείρεται τοῦ σηκοῦ ὄντος, οὔθ᾽ ὡς ἀμπενοῖς anv 3"
. ποδὰ ἦν, οὔθ᾽ ὡς οἰκίας ἐγγύς, οὔθ᾽ ὡς ἐγὼ fey
wate of τῶν Tap ὑμῖν κινδύνων. εἴ TL τούτων ἔπραττον. ἐννν πολλὰς ἂν καὶ peyton ἐμαρτῷ 15 ζημίας γενομέναν ἐπλφύήναλμυ" ὃς Jain μὲν μεθ᾽ ἡμέρα ἐξέκοπτον τὸν σηκόν, ὥσπερ οὐ πάν- τας λαθεῖι, éov, δ; ἄντας ᾿Αθηναίους εἰδόαΐ
(he rv ὶ καὶ εἰ μὲν αἰσχρὸν ἣν a TO πρᾶγμα, ἴσως av
i
ge"
aw ἢ
“VII. CONCERNING THE 9 OLIVE-TREE. 71
A. +e. o-t Tis TOV παριόντων: ἠμέλησε a νῦν δ᾽ οὐ περὶ aioe
νης ἀλλὰ τ 7s μεγίστης δι μίας ὀκινδύνευον: πῶς τό
δ᾽ οὐκ ἂν ἦν ἀθλιώτατος ἀνθρώπ PI" εἰ er gence ee. ΩΣ For τοὺς ἐμαυτοῦ Oe ντας μηκέτι δούχους ἔμελλον ~~ a os ig Manns Ly
ἕξειν ἀλλὰ δεσπότας τὸν λοιπὸν βίον, Τ᾿ Τοιοῦτον
spyor δυγειδότας τῶστε εἰ καὶ τὰ μέγιστα εἰς
ἐμὲ ἐξημάρτανον, οὐκ ἂν οἷόν τε ἦν δίκην με map αὐτῶν Sa oncateail εὖ yap, ἂν εἰ biter ἐπ᾽ ἐκεί- νοις ἣν καὶ ἐμὲ τιμῶρηήδασθαι καὶ αὐτοῖς eRe σασιν, ἐλεμθέροις γενέσθαι. Ve ἔτι τοίνυν, εἰ τῶν τ
AAS *
οἰκετῶν παρέστη μοι μηδὲν φροντίζειν, πῶς ἂν ἐτόλμησα pore alle 2%; ἁπάντων τ
AA Gtr a Gr 6. συνει ότων ἀφανίσαι τον σηκον ραχέος μὲν κέρΞ
δους €1 ενεκα, πῤοδεσμίας δὲ οὐδεμιᾶς οὔσης τῷ ἐκλύων δύγῳ 1 τοῖς eipyan payers ἅπασι τὸ χώριαν ὁμοίως προσ ηνον εἶναι ΘΟΘΕ τὸν σ oi KOD, ἵν εἴ τις αὐτοὺς δ Und 4 Pea. qraro, bs a ἀνενεγκεῖν hee rapeggray, υἱνῦν δὲ AN % Kal ἐμὲ ἐς πρλύσαντες φαίνονται, καὶ σφᾶς αὐτούς, 5 as ba κα cine ψεύδονται, μετόχου: τῆς, αἰτίας καθιστάντες. τα ἐλ
εἰ τοίνυν καὶ Ταῦτα; “παῤεσκευασάμην, πῶς ἂν οἷός 18 ard Ae ea T ἣν πάντας πεῖσαι [τοὺς παριόντας, ἢ] τοὺς yee wg hha οὐ Amen ‘TOvas,. | οἱ οὐ A β νον. ἀλλήλαν ταῦτ᾽ ἰσασιν ἃ πᾶσιν ALL “- ὁρᾷν ἔξεστω, ἀλλὰ καὶ περὶ ὧν ἀποκρυπτόμενοι
Bika" μηδένα τς πρθρῇ καὶ περὶ ἐκούνων, “seated epTae j See τοίνυν τούτων οἱ μὲν sch οἱ δὲ "διάφοροι περὶ τῶν ἐμῶν By νου ὄντες.λ οὕς το ἐχρῆν τοῦτον παρασχέσθαι μάρτυρας, καὶ μὴ μό- νον οὕτως τολμηρὰς κατηγορίας ποιεῖσθαι" ὅς
72
20
21
22
23
VII. TEPI TOY SHKOY.
e > Ἀ A 4 e > 5 , φησιν ὡς ἐγὼ μὲν παρειστήκειν, ot δ᾽ οἰκέται 5 4 \ 4 5 ,ὔ A ε ’ ἐξέτεμνον τὰ πρέμνα, ἀναθέμενος δὲ ὁ βοηλάτης » 5 , Ἀ ξύλ 4 > N / ὥχετο ἀπάγων τὰ ξύλα. καίτοι, ὦ Νικόμαχε, χρὴν σε τότε καὶ παρακαλεῖν τοὺς παριόντας μάρ- τυρας, καὶ φανερὸν ποιεῖν τὸ πρᾶγμα: καὶ ἐμοὶ
A > 4 “ἡ 5 ’ ε ’ 5 A 4 μὲν οὐδεμίαν ἂν ἀπολογίαν ὑπέλιπες, αὐτὸς δέ, 5 ͵ὔ 5 θ A > > ’ὔὕ Ὁ“ 4 > θ εἰ μέν σοι ἐχθρὸς ἦν, ἐν τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ ἦσθα ἄν με τετιμωρημένος, εἰ δὲ τῆς πόλεως ἕνεκα ¥ 9 > , > “Ἁ 280 > ETPATTES, οὕτως ἐξελέγξας οὐκ ἂν ἐδόκεις εἶναι συκοφάντης, εἰ δὲ κερδαίνειν ἐβούλου, τότ᾽ ἂν πλεῖστον ἔλαβες: φανεροῦ γὰρ ὄντος τοῦ πρά- > ,ὕ ” fe , “Ἅ > /
γματος οὐδεμίαν ἄλλην ἡγούμην ἂν εἶναί μοι σω- τηρίαν ἢ σὲ πεῖσαι. τούτων τοίνυν οὐδὲν ποιήσας ὃ Ν ‘ N , > an “4 ἢ , nt \ ιὰ τοὺς σοὺς λόγους ἀξιοῖς με ἀπολέσθαι, καὶ κατηγορεῖς ὡς ὑπὸ τῆς ἐμῆς δυνάμεως καὶ τῶν ἐμῶν χρημάτων οὐδεὶς ἐθέλει σοι μαρτυρεῖν.
, 5 4 ΠῚ »“" A , 5 / καίτοι εἰ φήσας p ἰδεῖν τὴν μορίαν ἀφανίζοντα τοὺς ἐννέα ἄρχοντας ἐπήγαγες ἢ ἄλλους τινὰς τῶν sy? , , + Δ ¢ es ¥ , ἐξ ᾿Αρείου πάγου, οὐκ ἂν ἑτέρων ἔδει σοι μαρτύ-
[2 ‘A » 4 > “~ 4 ρων" οὕτω yap av σοι συνήδεσαν ἀληθὴ λέγοντι, 4 » οἵπερ καὶ διαγιγνώσκειν ἔμελλον περὶ τοῦ πρά- γματος. δεινότατα οὖν πάσχω: ὃς εἰ μὲν παρέ- σχετο μάρτυρας, τούτοις ἂν ἠξίου πιστεύειν, > A A 5 5 Ἀ » A > \ x 4 Ἀ ἐπειδὴ δὲ οὐκ εἰσὶν αὐτῷ, ἐμοὶ καὶ ταύτην τὴν ζημίαν οἴεται χρῆναι γενέσθαι. καὶ τούτου μὲν » ,ὔ » A , “~ 9 ov θαυμάζω. οὐ γὰρ δήπου συκοφαντῶν ἅμα τοιούτων γε λόγων ἀπορήσει καὶ μαρτύρων: ὑμᾶς δ᾽ οὐκ ἀξιῶ τὴν αὐτὴν τούτῳ γνώμην ἔχειν.
ἀλλ᾽ ὡς τῷ βουλομένῳ τότε μᾶλλον ἐξῆν ἀδικεῖν ANT
VII. CONCERNING THE SACRED OLIVE-TREE. 73
emiag gods. γὰρ ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ πολλὰς βϑρίας οὔσας 24 καὶ πυρκαϊὰς ἐν τοῖς ἄλλοις τοῖς ; ἐμοῖς χωρίοις, ἄς, Nite εἶπερ ἐπεθύμουν. πολὺ ἣν ἀφφαλέστερον καὶ iba= ion:
ARG νίσαι καὶ ᾿ἐκρόψαι καὶ ie esta Oowmep *
Rvyrt ἧττον TO ἀδίκημα πολλῶν οὐσῶν ἔμελλε Siege ἔσεσθαι. νῦν δ᾽ οὕτως αὐτὰς περὶ πολλοῦ ποιοῦ- 25
Biro: ὥσπερ καὶ τὴ πατρίδᾳ. καὶ τὴν ἀλληπὶ οὐσίαν, Α Cg 1 “ἡγούμενος Pept ἀμφοτέρών" τούτων εἶναί pot τὸν 4 rede. κίγδυνον. , αὐτοὺς τοίνυν ὑμᾶς τούτων μάρτυρας _ LAP WAAL VV WMA th
παρέξομαι, ἐπίρελομμένόνο μὲν ἑκάστου μηνός, Ἵ τὰκ ἀνέρος ἜΣ cael 9 καθ᾽ cane ἀρ τ τες
ὧν οὐδεὶς πώποτ᾽ ἐζημίωσεν ὡς ἐ ὑγμζόμενον τὰ
περὶ τὰς popias capi: KaiTOL οὐ δήπου τὰς με 26 μικράν ζημίας οὕτω περὶ πολλοῦ ποιουμᾷς, τοὺς
δὲ wep TOU ἐν ἑπλων κινδύνους [οὕτω] περὶ οὐδε-
νὸς ἡγοῦμαι {καὶ τὰς τὰς μὲν πολλὰς ἐλαίας, εἰς ἃς
ἐξῆν μᾶλλον ἐξαμαρτάνείν, οὕτω θεραπεύων φαί- pf Ῥομᾷν τὴν δὲ μορίαν, ἣν οὔχ- 4 fy τς ἦν, λαθεῖν ἐξσρύξᾳ he ὡς ἀφανίζων νυνὶ pivopa ; vga ὧΣ por δέ oe ἐς ig ἐὼ ἦν, ὦ βουλή, δημοκρατίας ᾽ οὔσης παρανομεῖν ἢ ἢ ἐ ἐπὶ τῶν τριάκοντα; καὶ οὐ
λέγω ὡς τότε Sibdpevor ἢ ὡς νῦν διαβεβλημένος,
“Vv
Ὑ νυνί. ἐγὰ τοίνυν οὐδ᾽ ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ χρόνῳ οὔτε τοιοῦτο οὔτε ἄλλο οὐδὲν κακὸν ποιήσας φανήσο" ie Healt, Has ὁ ᾿ ἂν, εἰ μὴ πάντων ἀνθρώπων ἐμαντῷ .28 y, 4. Rakovovoraros ἦν, ὑμῶν οὕτως ἐπιμελουμένων Ὁ ;
ἐκ τούτου τὴν μορίαν ἀφανίζειν ἐπεχείρησα τοῦ
74
29
30
31
32
VII. HEPI TOY SHKOY. to Oe χωρίου, ἐν ᾧ δένδρον μὲν οὐδὲ ἕν ἐστι, μιᾶς
ε ἐλαίας σηκός, ὡς οὗτός φησιν͵ εἶναμ,. ᾿κυκλόθεν, ἃς
ion b+
{κι rt HhAargye σιν, AENPKTOV δὲ fect πανταχόθεν κάτοπτον: ἐστιν if
ὁδὸς ΤῊΝ ἀμφοτέρωθεν. δὲ γείτονε, περίοικοῦ- ὥστε τίς ἂν ἀπετόλμησε, τούτων οὕτως ἐχόντων, ἐπιχειρῆσαι τοιούτῳ πράγματι; Δεινὸν δέ μοι ἴων lal e wn δοκεῖ εἶναι ὑμᾶς μέν, ols ὑπὸ τῆς πόλεως TOV ἅπαντα χρόνον προστέτακται τῶν μοριῶν ἐλαιῶν 9 A sno ie > , ᾽ὕ ἐπιμελεῖσθαι, μήθ᾽ ὡς ἐπεργαζόμενον πώποτε Ly- μιῶσαι μήθ᾽ ὡς ἀφανίσαντα εἰς κίνδυνον κατα- a “ »* “A - ’ στῆσαι, τοῦτον δ᾽, ὃς οὔτε γεωργῶν ἐγγὺς τυγχά- : ¥-> ὁ N ε ΄ Ἦν χδιΣ ὦ ΄, » νει οὔτ᾽ ἐπιμελητὴς ἡρημένος οὔθ᾽ ἡλικίαν ἔχων εἰδέναι περὶ τῶν τοιούτων, ἀπογράψαι με μορίαν > / ἀφανίζειν. 3 Ν rd dé ε A ἈΝ ‘ ¥ , Ἐγὼ τοίνυν δέομαι ὑμῶν μὴ τοὺς τοιούτους λό- γους πιστοτέρους ἡγήσασθαι τῶν ἔργων, μηδὲ περὶ ὧν αὐτοὶ σύνιστε, ταῦτ᾽ seme aie TOV _— ἐχύρων cs cuba ἐνθυμουμένους καὶ ἐκ TOV παν μέρων καὶ ἐκ τῆς ἄλλης πολιτείας. Ve ἐγὼ yap τὰ ἐμοὶ προστεταγμένα ἅπαντα προθυμότερον πε- Ν A / Tonka, ὡς ὑπὸ τῆς πόλεως ἠναγκαζόμην, Kal τρι- ηραρχῶν καὶ εἰσφορὰς εἰσφέρων καὶ χορηγῶν καὶ Lol - ἴω ἴω τἄλλα λειτουργῶν οὐδενὸς ἧττον πολυτελῶς τῶν πολιτῶν. καίτοι ταῦτα μὲν μετρίως ποιῶν ἀλλὰ rt , ῳ. 5 ἃ \ A » 5 ee μὴ προθύμως ovr ἂν περὶ φυγῆς οὔτ᾽ ἂν περὶ τῆς Ἂ 5» 4 > ’ “f > 4 > 4 ἄλλης οὐσίας ἠγωνιζόμην, πλείω δ᾽ ἂν ἐκεκτήμην, Exe! > A ἀν ὦ , ‘ > A , οὐδὲν ἀδικῶν οὐδ᾽ ἐπικίνδυνον ἐμαυτῷ καταστή- ‘ , a \ , a ,“, σας τὸν βίον: ταῦτα δὲ πράξας, ἃ οὗτός μου
L011
VII. CONCERNING THE SACRED OLIVE-TREE. 75
~ 5 ’ A > ’ 3 x δ᾽ » κατηγορεῖ, ἐκέρδαινον μὲν οὐδέν, ἐμαυτὸν δ᾽ εἰς ε κίνδυνον καθίστην. καίτοι πάντες ἂν ὁμολογή- 33 σαιτε “δικαιότερον εἶναι τοῖς μεγάλοις χρῆσθαι τεκμηρίοις περὶ τῶν μεγάλων, καὶ πιστότερα ἡγεῖ: \ @ 9 ε ’ὔ -“ a a σθαι περὶ Gv ἅπασα ἡ πόλις μαρτυρεῖ, μᾶλλον ἢ περὶ ὧν μόνος οὗτος κατηγορεῖ. “Ἔστι τοίνυν, ὦ βουλή, ἐκ τῶν ἄλλων σκέψασθε. 34 AAG VOW Ἀ ¥ » αὖ Τα ΄ 9 aptupas yap ἔχων αὐτῷ προσῆλθον, λέγων ὅτι βάρτυρας yap ἔχων αὐτῷ ροαῆλθον, λέγων, ὅτι, μοι πάντες εἰσὶν οἱ θεράποντες, obs ἐκεκτήμην ἐπειδὴ παρέλαβον. τὸ χωρίον, καὶ ἕτ i εἰμι, £b 2 . a fu 7.» owt, ᾿ 2 Ἀ τινα βούλοιτο, παραδοῦναι, βασανίζειν, ἡγούμενος σ΄ d τς ὦ Ὁ ΑΝ eae ar ΄ a οὕτως ἂν τὸν ἔλεγχον υρῤτερον γενέσθαι τῶν
’; ’ 4 A “~ 3, “ > “~ e > τούτῳυ λόγων καὶ TOV. ἔργων τῶν ἐμῶν. οὗτος ὃ γ Vehicle ΠΡ, 22: 35
iy f οὐκ ἤθελεν, οὐδὲν Oe a SEE εἶναι τοῖς θερά- +) τὸ \ 3 ee ἃ > \ eo“ movow. ἐμοὶ δὲ δοκεῖ δεινὸν εἶναι, εἰ περὶ αὑτῶν ν ε , BARA, > sgt μὲν οἱ ΟΜΝ κατηγοροῦσιν, εὖ εἰδότες 3 “: CAA > S ὅτι ἀπόθανοῦνται, περὶ δὲ τῶν δεσποτῶν, οἷς TE, ( z Ahaiipyar ( τῇ yee δ υΐολ.- φύκασι κακονόύστατοι, μᾶλλον ἂν ἐίλοντο ἀνέχε- Wes, p (eae σθαι βασανιζόμενοι ἢ | EE ESESS ἀπηλλάχθαι ~ A Ss table ied 2: ἢ τῶν. παρόντων κακῶν. Veal μὲν δή, ὦ ουλή, φα- 36 βἢ. x > > 7 > , OKRA A σαν νερὸν οἶμαι εἶναι ὅτι, εἰ 'Νικομάχου͵ ἐξαιτοῦντος
Ἀ > , κ ΄ > inane? > τους ἀνθρώπους μη παρεδίδουν, ἐδόκουν αν εμαυ-
a an > ¥ , of \ ΄ οὗτος παραλαβεῖν οὐκ ἤθελε, δίκαιον καὶ περὶ τού-
hort, »
TOV τὴν αὐτὴν γνώμην εἰν, ἄλλως τε καὶ τοῦ Y
a ΄ > \ ΄ > oA ΄ Τῳ ξυνειδέναι - ἐπειδὴ FOG LU, παραδιδόντος
ὃ 4 > ¥ > 4” Ν 3 “~
κινδύνου οὐκ ἴσου ἀμφοτέροις ὄντος. περὶ ἐμοῦ 37 BH Oban
μὲν yap εἴ τι ἔλεγον, οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἀπριοχύσασθαι μοι oy
> id 4 > > ‘ ε an a es ἐξεγένετο " τουτῳ ὃ ει μὴ ὡὠμο ουν GQ OUTOS
76 VII. ΠΕΡῚ TOY SHKOY. 5 panghly LrothL ἐβούλετο, οὐδεμιᾷ ζημίᾳ ἔνοχος ἦν. ὥστε πολὺ μᾶλλον τοῦτον παραλαμβάνειν ἐχρὴν ἢ ἐμὲ παρα- Ἐπ ~ Ἂν : Ving ΔΑ, δοῦναι προσῆκεν: ἐγὼ τοίνυν εἰς τοῦτο προϑυμίας aonb, Shak cM es Sa i Δ. , ἀφικόμην, ἡγούμενος pet ἐμοῦ εἶναι καὶ ἐκ βασά- νων καὶ ex. μαρτύρων. καὶ ἐκ TeK; Σ ἴων, ὑμᾶς περὶ -: apie th ἢ ae lie tS 38 τοῦ mpaypatos τἀληθῆ πυθέσθαι. ἐνθυμεῖσθαι δὲ χρή, ὦ βουλή, «ποτέροις χρὴ πίστεύειν μᾶλλον, @ . ᾿ Agr eA ar uae Ἶ «Ἐκ ο ον 4 οἷς πολλοὶ ERCP OR AES yD μηδεὶς Terohwiniess io oe κΑ a alt Kal πότερον εἰκὸς μᾶλλον τοῦτον ἀκινδύνως ψεύ- ΄.
δεσθαι ἢ μετὰ τοσούτου κινδύνου τοιοῦτον ἐμὲ " - γυναι. \ , x > εἰ τὸν : ἔργον ἐῤγάσασθαι, καὶ πότερον οἴεσθε αὐτὸν ὑπ ᾿ be 7 AAA a ty ~ 5 , OVAL τῆς πόλεως βοηθεῖν ἢ συκοφαντοῦντα αἰτιάσα “ ᾿ 5 ‘ Ἁ 5 4 ε na ε nw ν 39 σθαι; ἐγὼ μὲν [ἐγν κέναι] ὑμᾶς ἡγοῦμαι ὅτι ,ὔ εν vad A bg 4 PrAAALE a » κα Νικόμαχος ὑπ ν ἐχθρῶν “εισθεὶς τῶν ἐμῶν ς 4. 1G > ε > Oo Lo} ava ἀγωνίζεται, οὐχ ὡς ἀδικοῦντα
τοῦτον τὸν » 3 3 ε 5 ’ 3. .ἃ ἴω € Fone ἀποδείξειν, GAN ὡς ἀργύριον Tap ἐμοῦ
΄ Ὶ χὼ [ \ ε Pu ον λήψεσ αι προσδοκῶν. σῷ γὰρ οἱ τοιοῦτοί εἰσὶν
ἐπαιτιώτατοι καὶ ἀπορῴτατοι τῶν κινδύνων, τοσού- a , > Is φ aN > A δ > 40 τῳ πάντες αὐτοὺς φεύγουσι μάλιστα. ἐγὼ δέ, ὦ
βουλή, οὐκ ἠξίουν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπειδήπερ με ἠτιάσατο, + Py ein a ἡ παρέσχον ἐμαντὸν ὅ τι Wide χρῆσθαι, καὶ
τούτου ἕνεκα τοῦ κινδύνου οὐδενὶ ἐγὼ τῶν ἐχθρῶν,
διηλλάγην, οἱ ἐμὲ ἥδιον κακῶς λέγουσιν ἢ σφᾶς Ἴ
Ἵ ‘ γ1 μας ἐν εὐ vy Ge 204 i 2 αὐτοὺς ἐπαινοῦσι, καὶ φανερῶς μὲν οὐδεὶς πώποτε
ἐμὲ αὐτῶν ἐπεχείρησε ποιῆσαι κακὸν οὐδέν, Tor ούτους δὲ ἐπίπέμπουσί μοι, οἷς ὑμεῖς οὐκ, ἂν Se, FAWN Ζ , . ἐσ οἱ Δ 41 καιως πϊῖστεύοιτε. Κ' πάντων γὰρ ἀθλιώτατος ἂν
, > ‘ 207 Bn , » yYevolpypy, ει φυγὰς ἀδίκως κ αστΉήσομαι, ατραιῖς
͵
Kano τᾷ. Mar
VII. CONCERNING THE SACRED OLIVE-TREE, 77 ον δ’ οὖ v
“μὲν ὧν καὶ μόνος, ἐρήμουῃ δὲ τοῦ οὔκ ου γεομένοι
la ὡς, δὲ πάντ ἐμδεοῦς, πατρίδος δὲ τοιάυτηξ: be
ἐπ᾽ gh Maras στίρηθεὶς αἰτίαις, πολλὰς μὲν ναυ-
μαχίας ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς IS PEDALS, πολλὰς δὲ μά-
χας μεμαχημένος, κόσμιον δ᾽ “ἐμαυτὸν καὶ ἐν ei τ ΟΝ
tyre wey
κρατίᾳ Kat ἐν ὀλιγαρχίῳ παρασχών. ᾿Αλλὰ γάρ, ὦ βουλή, ταῦτα μὲν babe: οὐκ, οἶδ: 8:
ὅ τι δεῖ λέγειν. ἀπέδειξα δ᾽ δ᾽, ὑμῖν. ὡς ὡς οὐκ ἐνῆν, σή HOS Use X χωρίῳ, καὶ μάρτυρας παρεσ όμην καὶ τεκμήρια. ἃ χρὴ μ ιεμγημέμονς βιϑγιγνόσκεα, co = τοῦ Ἐράγματος, καὶ ἀξιοῦν παρὰ τούτου πυθέσθαι ὅτου ἕνεκα, ἐξὸν ἐπ᾿ αὐτοφώρῳ ἐλέγξαι, τοσούτῳ Χρόνῳ ὕστερον εἰς τοσοῦτόν με κατέστησεν ἀγῶνα,
ett a οὐδένα παράσχόμενος ἐκ τῶν λόγων 43 ζητεῖ πιστὸ γενέσθαι ἐξὸν αὐτοῖς τοῖς ἔργοις ἀδι- κοῦντα ἀποδεῖξαι, καὶ ἐμοῦ ἅπαντας διδόντος τοὺς θεράποντας, ovs φησι παραγενέσθαι, παραλαβεῖν οὐκ ἤθελεν.
INTRODUCTION
TO THE
ORATION AGAINST THE GRAIN- DEALERS.
ee
You are doubtless aware that we of all people con- sume the most imported grain.” ‘This remark of Demos- thenes, in the Oration Against Lepiines, suggests a character- istic feature of the Athenian political economy. The territory of Attica embraced about goo square miles. The soil was better suited to the fig and the olive than to wheat, and the product of breadstuffs fell far short of the wants of its popula- tion, — about half a million, as it is estimated, in the time of Lysias.
In the following speech a member of the Senate of Five Hundred, induced by circumstances occurring in one of their sessions, which he clearly and satisfactorily explains, appears against certain merchants, — who are perhaps in partnership as a firm or company, — and prosecutes them for violation of the existing grain-laws. ‘The grain-trade, both wholesale and retail, was jealously watched by the government in order to prevent extortion on the part of dealers, and to guard against seasons of scarcity arising from unchecked speculation. Rig- orous laws regulated the traffic, and special officers were appointed to see to their execution. Besides the ἀγορανόμοι, market-masters, charged with the general supervision of the markets, there were the σιτοφύλακες, grain-inspectors, intrusted
XXII. AGAINST THE GRAIN-DEALERS. 79
with the oversight of the grain-trade alone. According to Boeeckh (Public Economy of the Athenians, p. 116) there were fif- teen of the latter, five of them being stationed in the Pirzeus.
The importers were called ἔμποροι, the retail-dealers σιτο- πῶλαι, Or contemptuously, κάπηλοι, hucksters. A large majority both of the wholesale and retail dealers appear, as in the present instance, to have been metics. Of the statutes then in force, one, as appears from the oration, provided that no σιτοπώλης should buy more than fifty μέδιμνοι (nearly seventy-
five bushels) at a time. Another statute restricted the dealer’s profit to one obol on the medimnus. The penalty was death.
Of course such legislation was as futile as it was unjust and unwise. ‘The severest penalties failed to check speculation. Gain could no more be controlled by law in ancient Athens, the great wheat-market of the Eastern Mediterranean, than in modern Chicago the great wheat-market of the Western Con- tinent. The Athenian courts, accordingly, were constantly occupied with prosecutions of the grain-dealers. Often, no doubt, the charges brought against them were false. They were particularly liable to be preyed upon by’ the “syco- phants,” as they were styled, —a class of men who became informers from base and mercenary motives ; often they were instigated by personal enmity, oftener still by the hope that they would be privately bribed to withdraw the complaint ; in case the prosecution succeeded, they had in prospect a share of the fees.
This is one of the judicial processes technically called eicayyehia. After a preliminary investigation before the Senate, the case was brought before a Dicastery, or court of Heliasts. The date of the oration is unknown ; judging from ὃ 14, it belongs after 387 B.c. In arrangement and style it is one of the best extant productions of Lysias. It is also one of the shortest. If delivered as written, it could scarcely have occupied more than twenty minutes, exclusive of the intervals spent in the examination of witnesses.
NS
3
XXII.
KATA TON ΣΙΤΟΠΩΛΩΝ.
[Πολλοὶ μοι προσεληλύθασιν, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, θαυμάζοντες ὅτι ἐγὼ τῶν “σιτοπωλῶν > lal biel / Ν td ν ε al ἐν τῇ βουλῇ κατηγόρουν, καὶ λέγοντες ὅτι ὑμεῖς, 5 ε ’, 39 Ν > ~ ε ~ > Ν Ou εἰ ὡς μάλιστα αὐτοὺς ἀδικεῖν ἡγεῖσθε, οὐδὲν Fr- τον καὶ τοὺς περὶ τούτων ποιουμένους λόγους συκοφαντεῖν νομίζετε. ὅθεν οὖν ἠνάγκασμαι κατηγορεῖν αὐτῶν, περὶ τούτων πρῶτον εἰπεῖν βούλομαι.
3 Ν Ν ε , > » 3 Ἀ
Ἐπειδὴ γὰρ οἱ πρυτάνεις ἀπέδοσαν εἰς τὴν βουλὴν περὶ αὐτῶν, οὕτως ὠργίσθησαν αὐτοῖς, ὥστε ἔλεγόν τινες τῶν ῥητόρων ὡς ἀκρίτους αὐὖ- τοὺς χρὴ τοῖς ἕνδεκα παραδοῦναι θανάτῳ ζημι- ὥσαι. ἡγούμενος δὲ ἐγὼ δεινὸν εἶναι τοιαῦτα "527 a τ , > N > Ψ ἐθίζεσθαι ποιεῖν τὴν βουλήν, ἀναστὰς εἶπον ὅτι μοι δοκοίη κρίνειν τοὺς σιτοπώλας κατὰ τὸν νό-
’, > 4 > » ’ > pov, νομίζων, εἰ μέν εἰσιν ἄξια θανάτου εἰργα- σμένοι, ὑμᾶς οὐδὲν ἧττον ἡμῶν γνώσεσθαι τὰ
’ > \ Ν > Le > “ > Ν 5 ’ δίκαια, εἰ δὲ μηδὲν ἀδικοῦσιν, οὐ δεῖν αὐτοὺς ἀκρί- τους ἀπολωλέναι. πεισθείσης δὲ τῆς βουλῆς
XXII. AGAINST. THE GRAIN-DEALERS. 81
ταῦτα, διαβάλλειν ἐπεχείρουν με λέγοντες ὡς ἐγὼ σωτηρίας ἕνεκα τῆς τῶν σιτοπωλῶν τοὺς λόγους τούτους ἐποιούμην. πρὸς μὲν οὖν τὴν βουλήν, ὅτ᾽ ἣν αὐτοῖς ἡ κρίσις, ἔργῳ ἀπελογησάμην: τῶν γὰρ ἄλλων ἡσυχίαν ἀγόντων ἀναστὰς αὐτῶν κατηγό- ρουν, καὶ πᾶσι φανερὸν ἐποίησα ὅτι οὐχ ὑπὲρ τούτων ἔλεγον, ἀλλὰ τοῖς νόμοις τοῖς κειμένοις ἐβοήθουν. ἠρξάμην μὲν οὖν τούτων ἕνεκα, δεδιὼς 4 τὰς αἰτίας" αἰσχρὸν δ᾽ ἡγοῦμαι πρότερον παύσα- σθαι, πρὶν ἂν ὑμεῖς περὶ αὐτῶν ὅ τι ἂν βούλησθε ψηφίσησθε.
Καὶ πρῶτον μὲν ἀνάβηθι καὶ εἰπὲ σὺ ἐμοί, μέ- 5 τοικος εἶ; Ναί, Μετοικεῖς δὲ πότερον ὡς πεισό- μενος τοῖς νόμοις τοῖς τῆς πόλεως, ἢἣ ὡς ποιήσων ὅ τι ἂν βούλῃ; Ὡς πεισόμενος, “Ado τι οὖν ἀξιοῖς ἢ ἀποθανεῖν, εἴ τι πεποίηκας παρὰ τοὺς νόμους, ἐφ᾽ οἷς θάνατος ἡ ζημία; “Eywye, ᾿Από- κριναι δή μοι, εἰ ὁμολογεῖς πλείω σῖτον συμπρί- ασθαι πεντήκοντα φορμῶν, ὧν ὁ νόμος ἐξεῖναι κελεύει. ᾿Εγὼ τῶν ἀρχόντων κελευόντων συνεπριυ- άμην.
ἣΑΔν μὲν τοίνυν ἀποδείξῃ, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, ὡς 6 ἔστι νόμος ὃς κελεύει τοὺς σιτοπώλας συνωνεῖς- σθαι τὸν σῖτον, ἂν οἱ ἄρχοντες κελεύωσιν, ἀπο- ψηφίσασθε: εἰ δὲ μή, δίκαιον ὑμᾶς καταψηφίσα- σθαι. ἡμεῖς γὰρ ὑμῖν παρεσχόμεθα τὸν νόμον, ὃς ἀπαγορεύει μηδένα τῶν ἐν τῇ πόλει πλείω σῖτον πεντήκοντα φορμῶν συνωνεῖσθαι.
6
Ὁ» 82 XXII. KATA TON BITOMOAON.
7
10
Χρῆν μὲν τοίνυν, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, ἱκανὴν e εἶναι ταύτην THY κατηγορίαν, ἐπειδὴ οὗτος μὲν ὁμολογεῖ συμπρίασθαι, ὃ δὲ νόμος ἀπαγορεύων φαίνεται, ὑμεῖς δὲ κατὰ τοὺς νόμους ὀμωμόκατε 4 9 ea a σ A Ν ψηφιεῖσθαι: ὅμως δ᾽ ἵνα πεισθῆτε ὅτι καὶ κατὰ lal \ , τῶν ἀρχόντων ψεύδονται, ἀνάγκη Kal μακρότερον
3 a Ν 3 “A > Ν Ν 8 ‘ “Δ ὰ εἰπειν πέρι AVTWV. ἐπειδὴ γὰρ OUTOL Τὴν ALTLAV
> > , > 4 4 . » εἰς ἐκείνους ἀνέφερον, παρακαλέσαντες τοὺς ap- χοντας ἠρωτῶμεν. καὶ οἱ μὲν τέσσαρες οὐδὲν », 5 4 » 4, » δ᾽ »¥ ἔφασαν εἰδέναι τοῦ πράγματος, “Avutos δ᾽ ἔλεγεν An an Os ὡς τοῦ προτέρου χειμῶνος, ἐπειδὴ τίμιος ἦν ὁ “ , ε , 5 4 A A σιτος, τούτων ὑπερβαλλόντων ἀλλήλους καὶ πρὸς σφᾶς αὐτοὺς μαχομένων συμβουλεύσειεν αὐτοῖς παύσασθαι φιλονεικοῦσιν, ἡγούμενος συμφέρειν ὑμῖν τοῖς “παρὰ τούτων ὠνουμένοις ὡς ἀξιώτατον τούτους πρίασθαι: δεῖν γὰρ αὐτοὺς ὀβολῷ μόνον ρ γὰρ Dp Mb πωλεῖν τιμιώτερον. ὡς τοίνυν οὐ συμπριαμένους καταθέσθαι ἐκέλευεν αὐτούς, ἀλλὰ μὴ ἀλλήλοις > “A , - aR | A ae » ἀντωνεῖσθαι συνεβούλευεν, αὐτὸν ὑμῖν ἤΑνυτον ’ aA μάρτυρα παρέξομαι, καὶ ὡς οὗτος μὲν ἐπὶ τῆς προ- ,ὕ, lal , > Ν , & 5 τέρας βουλῆς τούτους εἶπε τοὺς λόγους, οὗτοι ὃ ἐπὶ τῆσδε συνωνούμενοι φαίνονται.
ΜΑΡΤΎΡΙΑ.
9 Ν ’ > ε ‘ “ 5» / Ori μὲν τοίνυν οὐχ ὑπὸ τῶν ἀρχόντων κελευ- σθέντες συνεπρίαντο τὸν σῖτον, ἀκηκόατε: ἡγοῦ- 5 «ε , ἈΝ , > Lal par δ᾽, ἂν ὡς μάλιστα περὶ τούτων ἀληθῆ
~
XXII. SOR aaa GRAIN-DEALERS. 83
’, > ε Ἁ ε Led > Ἂν > / λέγωσιν, οὐχ ὑπὲρ αὑτῶν αὐτοὺς ἀπολογήσεσθαι, ἀλλὰ τούτων κατηγορήσειν: περὶ γὰρ ὧν εἰσι νόμοι διαρρήδην γεγραμμένοι, πῶς οὐ χρὴ διδόναι δίκην καὶ τοὺς μὴ πειθομένους καὶ τοὺς κελεύοντας τούτοις τἀναντία πράττειν ;
᾿Αλλὰ γάρ, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, οἴομαι αὐτοὺς > aN. Ν a“ Ν ’ 3 5 ’ ὟΝ» ἐπὶ μὲν τοῦτον τὸν λόγον οὐκ ἐλεύσεσθαι: ἴσως
> 3 “ 9 Ἁ 5» Ὁ ΄“ ε 9.33 > 4 2 ὃ ἐρουσιν, ὡσπερ καὶ ἐν TH βουλῇ, ὡς ἐπ εὐνοίᾳ
THS πόλεως συνεωνοῦντο τὸν σῖτον, ἵν ὡς ἀξιώ- τατον ἡμῖν πωλοῖεν. μέγιστον δ᾽ ὑμῖν ἐρῶ καὶ περιφανέστατον τεκμήριον ὅτι ψεύδονται. ἐχρὴν γὰρ αὐτούς, εἴπερ ὑμῶν ἕνεκα ἔπραττον ταῦτα, φαίνεσθαι τῆς αὐτῆς τιμῆς πολλὰς ἡμέρας πωλοῦν- τας, ἕως ὁ ἐξερ ροῦυ εἰμ αὐτοὺς ἐπέλιπε" νυνὶ δ᾽ ἐνίοτε τῆς αὐτῆς ἡμέρας ἐπώλουν δραχμῇ τιμιώ- τερον, ὥσπερ κατὰ μέδιμνον συνωνούμενοι. καὶ τούτων ὑμῖν μάρτυρας παρέξομαι.
ΜΑΡΤΥΡΕΣ. *> 5 Ν Δεινὸν δέ μοι δοκεῖ εἶναι, εἰ ὅταν μὲν εἰσφορὰν 3 lal ,ὕ ἃ ’, » ,ὔ εἰσενεγκεῖν δέῃ, ἣν πάντες εἴσεσθαι μέλλουσιν, ἃ, ὧν οὐκ ἐθέλουσιν, ἀλλὰ πενίαν προφασίζονται, ἐφ᾽ οἷς Ἂς, ’, ’ > ε ’ Ν “Ὁ > 2 ’ δὲ θάνατός ἐστιν ἡ ζημία καὶ λαθεῖν αὐτοῖς συνέ. A dF > , Ν ΚΆΣΙΟΝ ΄ φερε, ταῦτα ἐπ᾽ εὐνοίᾳ φασὶ TH ὑμετέρᾳ παρανο- μῆσαι. καίτοι πάντες ἐπίστασθε ὅτι τούτοις Ψ A ἥκιστα προσήκει τοιούτους ποιεῖσθαι λόγους. 3 , Ν 3 A Ν “ ¥ / τἀναντία yap αὐτοῖς καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις συμφέρει"
12
13
84
15
τό
XXII. KATA ΤῺΝ ΣΙΤΟΠΩΛΩΝ.
τότε γὰρ πλεῖστα κερδαίνουσιν, ὅταν κακοῦ τινος ἀπαγγελθέντος τῇ πόλει τίμιον τὸν σῖτον πωλῶ- σιν. οὕτω δ᾽ ἄσμενοι τὰς συμφορὰς τὰς ὑμε- τέρας ὁρῶσιν, ὥστε τὰς μὲν πρότεροι τῶν ἄλλων , \ 2 > \ A a N πυνθάνονται, τὰς δ᾽ αὐτοὶ λογοποιοῦσιν, ἢ Tas ναῦς διεφθάρθαι τὰς ἐν τῷ Πόντῳ, ἢ ὑπὸ Λακε- ’ὔ > 4 “ “ἡ Ν. 5 ’ὔ δαιμονίων ἐκπλεούσας συνειλῆφθαι, ἢ τὰ ἐμπόρια κ᾿ a \ Ἀ , > , κεκλεῖσθαι, ἢ τὰς σπονδὰς μέλλειν ἀπορρηθήσε- Ἀ > ‘tJ ¥ 5 ’ὔ σ 3 » σθαι, καὶ εἰς τοῦτ᾽ ἔχθρας ἐληλύθασιν, ὥστ᾽ ἐν τούτοις τοῖς καιροῖς ἐπιβουλεύουσιν ἡμῖν, ἐν οἷσπερ οἱ πολέμιοι. ὅταν γὰρ μάλιστα σίτου τυγχάνητε δεόμενοι, ἀναρπάζουσιν οὗτοι καὶ οὐκ 527 “A 7 Ἀ A ~ a , ἐθέλουσι πωλεῖν, ἵνα μὴ περὶ τῆς τιμὴης διαφερώ- μεθα, GAN ἀγαπῶμεν ἂν ὁποσουτινοσοῦν πριά- > 5» “ 5 4 9 > > , 5 4 μενοι Tap αὐτῶν ἀπέλθωμεν'" ὥστ᾽ ἐνίοτε εἰρήνης »” ε Ν , 4 9 QA , οὔσης ὑπὸ τούτων πολιορκούμεθα. οὕτω δὲ πά- λαι περὶ τῆς τούτων πανουργίας καὶ κακονοίας ἡ ’ὔ ᾿ 4 » » Ν A “a » 5 ’ πόλις ἔγνωκεν, WOT ἐπὶ μὲν τοῖς ἄλλοις ὠνίοις ἅπασι τοὺς ἀγορανόμους φύλακας κατεστήσατε, » Ca de 4 ld “ , Ν φύλ ἐπὶ δὲ ταύτῃ μόνῃ τῇ τέχνῃ χωρὶς σιτοφύλακας 5 nw A ’ »” > > 4, ἀποκληροῦτε: καὶ πολλάκις ἤδη παρ᾽ ἐκείνων nw »” ’ Ἀ ’ 5 ’ὔ 9 πολιτῶν ὄντων δίκην τὴν μεγίστην ἐλάβετε, ὅτι οὐχ οἷοί τ᾽ ἦσαν τῆς τούτων πονηρίας ἐπικρα- τῆσαι. καίτοι τί χρὴ αὐτοὺς τοὺς ἀδικοῦντας ε > ε » , c ’ A Ν 5 ,’ ὑφ᾽ ὑμῶν πάσχειν, ὁπότε καὶ τοὺς οὐ δυναμένους
’ » , φυλάττειν ἀποκτείνετε ;
17 ᾿Ἐνθυμεῖσθαι δὲ χρὴ ὅτι ἀδύνατον ὑμῖν ἐστιν ἀπο-
ψηφίσασθαι. εἰ γὰρ ἀπογνώσεσθε ὁμολογούντων
XXII. AGAINST “THE GRAIN-DEALERS. 85
f > αὐτῶν ἐπὶ τοὺς ἐμπόρους συνίστασθαι, δόξεθ ε ~~ > 4 “ > , > Ν ες ὑμεῖς ἐπιβουλεύειν τοῖς εἰσπλέουσιν. εἰ μὲν yap
ἂν Δ > ἄλλην τινὰ ἀπολογίαν ἐποιοῦντο, οὐδεὶς ἂν εἶχε a“ > 4 > “~ 55 ε “A Ν τοῖς ἀποψηφισαμένοις ἐπιτιμᾶν: ἐφ᾽ ὑμῖν γὰρ ε ΄, ΄ ΄ κι δὲ A > ὁποτέροις βούλεσθε πιστεύειν: νυν δὲ πῶς οὐ
ae? , a > N ε a δεινὰ ἂν δόξαιτε ποιεῖν, εἰ τοὺς ὁμολογοῦντας Ὁ“ > 4 > la > 4 , παρανομεῖν ἀζημίους ἀφήσετε; ἀναμνήσθητε δέ, > Ὑ 5 ἤρα τ la 3» ae , ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, ὅτι πολλῶν ἤδη ἐχόντων Tav- ἈΝ 27 ld Ν ’
την τὴν αἰτίαν [λαμβάνειν] καὶ μάρτυρας παρεχο- μένων θάνατον κατέγνωτε, πιστοτέρους ἡγησά-
μενοι τοὺς τῶν κατηγόρων λόγους. καίτοι πῶς
ΕΣ > δ ¥ > an > ne ἂν ov θαυμαστὸν εἴη, εἰ περὶ τῶν αὐτῶν ἁμαρτη- ’ὔ ὃ ’ὔ lal > θ a Q ~~ μάτων δικάζοντες μᾶλλον ἐπεθυμεῖτε Tapa τῶν ἀρνουμένων δίκην λαμβάνειν; Καὶ μὲν δή, ὦ av- Spes δικασταί, πᾶσιν ἡγοῦμαι φανερὸν εἶναι ὅτι οἱ περὶ τῶν τοιούτων ἀγῶνες κοινότατοι τυγχά- νουσιν ὄντες τοῖς ἐν τῇ πόλει, ὥστε πεύσονται ἥντινα γνώμην περὶ αὐτῶν ἔχετε, ἡγούμενοι, ἂν μὲν θάνατον αὐτῶν καταγνῶτε, κοσμιωτέρους ἔσε- σθαι τοὺς λοιπούς - ἂν δ᾽ ἀζημίους ἀφῆτε, πολλὴν » > m3 , ¥ a 9 Δ ἄδειαν αὐτοῖς ἐψηφισμένοι ἔσεσθε ποιεῖν ὅ τι ἂν ΄ κ᾿ "νῷ , \ ΄ βούλωνται. χρὴ δέ, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, μὴ μόνον τῶν παρεληλυθότων ἕνεκα αὐτοὺς κολάζειν, ἀλλὰ
κ , 9 A , ¥ Kal παραδείγματος ἕνεκα TOV μελλόντων ἔσεσθαι" ν Ν » / > / > a Ν οὕτω γὰρ ἔσονται μόγις ἀνεκτοί. ἐνθυμεῖσθε δὲ ν “A “ A ὅτι ἐκ ταύτης τῆς τέχνης πλεῖστοι περὶ TOD σώμα- / “-“ τός εἰσιν ἠγωνισμένοι" καὶ οὕτω μεγάλα ἐξ αὐτῆς
20
86 XXII. KATA TON SITOMNQAQN.
21
22
9 A ΟΣ aA ε a a eg ὠφελοῦνται, ὥστε μᾶλλον αἱροῦνται καθ᾽ ἑκάστην ἡμέραν περὶ τῆς ψυχῆς κινδυνεύειν ἣ παύεσθαι 3 ε “~ > ’ Ἀ Ν ‘ 3 » Tap ὑμῶν ἀδίκως κερδαίνοντες. καὶ μὲν δὴ οὐδ a ΕἸ a cn Pore ’ 7 » ἂν ἀντιβολῶσιν ὑμᾶς Kal ἱκετεύωσι, δικαίως ἂν αὐτοὺς ἐλεήσαιτε, ἀλλὰ πολὺ μᾶλλον τῶν τε πολι- τῶν οἱ διὰ τὴν τούτων πονηρίαν ἀπέθνησκον, καὶ τοὺς ἐμπόρους ἐφ᾽ ovs οὗτοι συνέστησαν οἷς ὑμεῖς χαριεῖσθε καὶ προθυμοτέρους ποιήσετε, δί- > > A 4 > Ν ’, 7.2 Knv παρ᾽ αὐτῶν λαμβάνοντες. εἰ δὲ μή, τίν 3 Ν » ’ ν > Ν 4 αὐτοὺς οἴεσθε γνώμην ἕξειν, ἐπειδὰν πύθωνται 9 na , A “ 5 4 ε Υ̓ ὅτι τών καπήλων, οἵ τοῖς εἰσπλέουσιν ὡμολόγησαν ἐπιβουλεύειν, ἀπεψηφίσασθε; Οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ὅ τι δεῖ πλείω λέγειν: περὶ μὲν γὰρ » » tal > ΄ 9 , a τῶν ἄλλων τῶν ἀδικούντων, ὅτε δικάζονται, Set παρὰ τῶν κατηγόρων πυθέσθαι, τὴν δὲ τούτων πονηρίαν ἅπαντες ἐπίστασθε. ἂν οὖν τούτων ΄ , , 4, 1 es. 4 καταψηφίσησθε, τά τε δίκαια ποιήσετε καὶ ἀξιώ- τερον τὸν σῖτον ὠνήσεσθε" εἰ δὲ μή, τιμιώτερον.
INTRODUCTION
TO
THE FUNERAL ORATION.
6s
Ir was appointed by law in Athens,.that the obsequies of the citizens who fell in battle should be performed at the public expense, and in the most honorable manner. Their bones were carefully gathered up from the funeral pyre where their bodies were consumed, and brought home to the city. There, for three days before the interment, they lay in state beneath tents of honor, to receive the votive offerings of friends and relatives,— flowers, weapons, precious ornaments, painted vases (wonders of art, which after two thousand years adorn the museums of modern Europe), — the last tribute of surviving affection. ‘Ten coffins of funereal cypress received the honorable deposit, one for each of the tribes of the city ; and an eleventh in memory of the unrecognized, but not therefore unhonored, dead, and of those whose remains could not be recovered. On the fourth day the mournful procession was formed: mothers, wives, sisters, daughters, led the way, and to them it was permitted by the simplicity of ancient manners to utter aloud their lamentations for the beloved and the lost ; the male relatives and friends of the deceased fol- lowed ; citizens and strangers closed the train. Thus mar- shalled, they moved to the place of interment in that famous Ceramicus, the most beautiful suburb of Athens, which had
88 II. FUNERAL ORATION.
been adorned by Cimon, the son of Miltiades, with walks and fountains and columns,— whose groves were filled with altars, shrines, and temples,— whose gardens were kept forever green by the streams from the neighboring hills, and shaded with the trees sacred to Minerva and coeval with the founda- tion of the city, — whose circuit enclosed
**the olive-grove of Academe, Plato’s retirement, where the Attic bird Trilied his thick-warbled note the summer long,”
— whose pathways gleamed with the monuments of the illus- trious dead, the work of the most consummate masters that ever gave life to marble. There, beneath the overarching plane-trees, upon a lofty stage erected for the purpose, it was ordained that a funeral oration should be pronounced by some citizen of Athens in the presence of the assembled multitude.”
This eloquent description by Edward Everett, in the “Address at the Consecration of the National Cemetery at Gettysburg,” fitly introduces the Funeral Oration ascribed by the ancients to Lysias. There are four others remaining: the celebrated oration of Pericles over the first slain of the Pelo- ponnesian War, preserved, though only in substance, in the history of Thucydides ; the second, in the Platonic dialogue Menexenus, Socrates being made to rehearse it as a discourse he had learned from Aspasia ; a third, bearing the name of Demosthenes, but unquestionably spurious and altogether unworthy of such authorship; the fourth, that delivered by Hyperides over the Athenians who had fallen in the Lamian War.
Besides the Forensic and the Deliberative, the ancient writers made a third class, the Epideictic or “ Panegyric ” orations, embracing those that were designed not so much to secure any immediate practical result, as to furnish a
Il. ΕὔΝΕΒΑΙ, ORATION. 89
display of eloquence for public ceremonies and festivals, In this class belonged the funeral oration, and the one before us was early celebrated as a masterpiece of its kind.
It purports to have been composed for one of the funeral ceremonies referred to above, during or soon after the Corin- thian War (B. c. 394-387). The most decisive engagements of the war were naval. On land, Corinth was the base of operations against Sparta; it was held by the anti-Spartan party of its citizens, aided by the allied Beeotian, Argive, and Athenian forces, against the Lacedamonians and their allies collected from the Peloponnesus. On the part of the Athe- nians, Iphicrates and his peltasts distinguished themselves in several minor engagements.* The title below is supposed to refer to those who fell in some of the earlier skirmishes (perhaps B. c. 392); but the allusions, in ὃ 59, to the con- dition to which Greece was reduced by the Peace of An- talcidas (387), if indeed they formed a part of the original discourse, would require us to assign a date as late as the close of the war.
It is aside from the purpose of this Introduction to enter into the critical controversy concerning its authorship, or its merits in point of style. “ Pulcherrima et ornatissima oratio,” says Muretus; Blass, on the other hand, pronounces it a “Schaustiick sophistischer Beredsamkeit,’ decorated “mit dem eitelsten Flitter.” The reader will at once perceive the difference between this and the other compositions of Lysias. Its merits and its defects, however, are to a great extent those of this species of oratory. The festival and the oration in honor of the dead had become an annual celebration in the time of Plato and Lysias. ‘These annual discourses appear to have been cast in a common mould, mainly following the same order of topics, and abounding in elaborately turned
* Grote, History of Greece, Vol. IX. p. 335 seg.
90 II. FUNERAL ORATION.
phrases that in the lapse of time became the commonplaces of the rhetoricians. In view of the conformity to a fixed type, and the reluctance of all Greek art to disregard traditionary limitations, it would be idle to seek in the funeral oration of that period marked originality either of thought or of style ; it is to be remembered, too, both of this and of the Menexenus, that they are eulogies, not histories; hence they are not documents of historical accuracy. As to the authorship of this, not a few critics refuse to include it in the productions of Lysias. But Grote believes it to be genuine, and that the Menexenus was written in competition with it. “Though the name of Lysias,” he says, “is not mentioned in the AZenexe- nus, yet the rivalry between him and Plato is clearly pro- claimed in the Platonic /Predrus, and the two funeral harangues go so completely over the same ground, that intentional competition on the part of the latest is the most natural of all hypotheses.”* Aristotle (/¢/e/., III. 15) quotes from ὃ 60, referring to it as “the funeral oration” (τῷ ἐπιτα- giv), but without naming the author.
Whoever the author, and whenever written or delivered, it illustrates admirably the patriotic eloquence of the time. The recent dead and the surviving mourners form the theme of the closing portion only ($$ 67 -- 81) of the discourse. In the main it is an exultant review of the glorious part taken by Athens in Hellenic history. Beginning with the mythical age of the Amazons, glancing at the autochthonous origin of the Attic people, and lingering longest on the Persian wars, the speaker tells again the oft-told deeds of old heroic days, rehearsing the achievements of the dead as an example and an inspiration to the living.
* Grote’s Plato, Vol. 111. p. 8.
If.
ENITA®IOS
ΤΟΙ͂Σ KOPINOIOQN BOHOOIS.
Η Ν ε ’ es > > ’ 2% I μὲν ἡγούμην οἷόν τε εἶναι, ὦ παρόντες ἐπὶ “ ΄Ὸ ΄ ΄ “ \ τῶ 3 , τῷδε τῷ τάφῳ, λόγῳ δηλῶσαι THY τών ἐνθάδε κει- μένων ἀρετήν, ἐμεμψάμην ἂν τοῖς ἐπαγγείλασιν > 5 > ey > 2\7 ε μῆς ΄ > δὴ δὲ ἐπ᾿ αὐτοῖς ἐξ ὀλίγων ἡμερῶν λέγειν " ἐπειδὴ δὲ πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις 6 πᾶς χρόνος οὐχ ἱκανὸς λόγον ἴσον παρασκευάσαι τοῖς τούτων ἔργοις, διὰ τοῦτο > ε ’ ~ 4 A“ 5 ’ καὶ ἡ πόλις μοι δοκεῖ, προνοουμένη τῶν ἐνθάδε λεγόντων, ἐξ ὀλίγου τὴν πρόσταξιν ποιεῖσθαι, Ἅ ἡγουμένη οὕτως ἂν μάλιστα συγγνώμης αὐτοὺς παρὰ τῶν ἀκουσάντων τυγχάνειν. ὅμως δὲ ὁ μὲν λόγος μοι περὶ τούτων, ὁ δ᾽ ἀγὼν οὐ πρὸς τὰ ’ » 3 Ν ‘ Ἁ / 39. » > “a τούτων ἔργα ἀλλὰ πρὸς τοὺς πρότερον ET αὐτοῖς > εἰρηκότας. τοσαύτην yap ἀφθονίαν παρεσκεύ- ασεν ἡ τούτων ἀρετὴ καὶ τοῖς ποιεῖν δυναμένοις Ν “Ὁ al A καὶ τοῖς εἰπεῖν βουληθεῖσιν, ὥστε Kaha μὲν πολλὰ Wty 4 Ν > “ > A Ν Ν ‘ τοῖς προτέροις περὶ αὐτῶν εἰρῆσθαι, πολλὰ δὲ καὶ δ al ε s \ \ “ > ἐκείνοις παραλελεῖφθαι, ἱκανὰ δὲ καὶ τοῖς ἐπι- γιγνομένοις ἐξεῖναι εἰπεῖν: οὔτε γὰρ γῆς ἄπειροι
92 Il. ἘΠΙΤΑΦΙΟΣ.
3, ’ὔ > ral “ Ν A Ν) οὔτε θαλάττης οὐδεμιᾶς, πανταχῇ δὲ καὶ παρὰ “~ > ’ἅ “ nw πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις ot τὰ αὑτῶν πενθοῦντες κακὰ τὰς τούτων ἀρετὰς ὑμνοῦσι. “Ὁ Ν > Ν Ν , “ 3 Πρῶτον μὲν οὖν τοὺς παλαιοὺς κινδύνους τῶν ’ δί ,ὔ Ν an , , προγόνων δίειμι, μνήμην Tapa τῆς φήμης λαβών: ἄξιον γὰρ πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις κἀκείνων μεμνῆσθαι, ὑμνοῦντας μὲν ἐν ταῖς @dats, λέγοντας δ᾽ ἐν ταῖς τῶν ἀγαθῶν γνώμαις, τιμῶντας δ᾽ ἐν τοῖς καιροῖς τοῖς τοιούτοις, παιδεύοντας δ᾽ ἐν τοῖς τῶν τεθνεώ- των ἔργοις τοὺς ζῶντας. ¥ 4 ᾿Αμαζόνες yap “Apews μὲν τὸ παλαιὸν ἦσαν θυγατέρες, οἰκοῦσαι δὲ παρὰ τὸν Θερμώδοντα , , A ε vi , Lal A ποταμόν, μόναι μὲν ὡπλισμέναι σιδήρῳ τῶν περὶ 5 , “~ A “ ’; 5 > ¢ 5» Lal αὐτάς, πρῶται δὲ τῶν πάντων ἐφ᾽ ἵππους avaBa- a > , 35 ΄ cal > , σαι, οἷς ἀνελπίστως Sb ἀπειρίαν τῶν ἐναντίων ν Ἀ Ν 4 > / δὲ ἈΝ ἥρουν μὲν τοὺς φεύγοντας, ἀπέλειπον δὲ τοὺς διώκοντας ἐνομίζοντο δὲ διὰ τὴν εὐψυχίαν μᾶλλον » a Ν κ ΄ a , ‘ ἄνδρες ἢ Sia τὴν φύσιν γυναῖκες" πλέον yap 5» ,ὕ » ΕῚ al »" Lal ὃ ͵ “Ὁ nw ἐδόκουν τῶν ἀνδρῶν ταῖς ψυχαῖς διαφέρειν ἢ ταῖς 5 ἰδέαις ἐλλείπειν. ἄρχουσαι δὲ πολλῶν ἐθνῶν, καὶ »ἬΆ A Ν A > Ἀ ὃ ὃ λ 4 , ἔργῳ μὲν τοὺς περὶ αὐτὰς καταδεδουλωμέναι, λόγῳ δὲ περὶ τῆσδε τῆς χώρας ἀκούουσαι κλέος μέγα, πολλῆς δόξης καὶ μεγάλης ἐλπίδος χάριν παρα- λαβοῦσαι τὰ μαχιμώτατα τῶν ἐθνῶν ἐστράτευσαν » Ἁ ’ὔὕ 4 , “ δ᾽ 5 θῶ » ὃ Lal ἐπὶ τήνδε THY πόλιν. τυχοῦσαι δ᾽ ἀγαθῶν ἀνδρῶν ε ,’ > 4 4 Ν “ ’ A > ὁμοίας ἐκτήσαντο τὰς ψυχὰς TH φύσει, καὶ ἐναν- τίαν τὴν δόξαν τῆς προτέρας λαβοῦσαι μᾶλλον > a ΄ a > A , ¥ > ἐκ τῶν κινδύνων ἢ ἐκ τῶν σωμάτων ἔδοξαν εἶναι
II. FUNERAL ORATION. 93
A ’ > > “ > > 4 > a: γυναῖκες. μόναις δ᾽ αὐταῖς οὐκ ἐξεγένετο ἐκ τῶν 6 an “ »¥ ἡμαρτημένων μαθούσαις περὶ τῶν λοιπῶν ἄμεινον 4 > > ¥ > 4 > lal βουλεύσασθαι, οὐδ᾽ οἴκαδε ἀπελθούσαις ἀπαγγεῖ- λαι τήν τε σφετέραν αὐτῶν δυστυχίαν καὶ τὴν τῶν ἡμετέρων προγόνων ἀρετήν: αὐτοῦ γὰρ ἀποθα- νοῦσαι, καὶ δοῦσαι δίκην τῆς ἀνοίας, τῆσδε μὲν »-" ld Ν Ἀ > Ἀ > ’ ’, τῆς πόλεως διὰ τὴν ἀρετὴν ἀθάνατον μνήμην > ΄ Ν δὲ ε a (ὃ ὃ Ν Ν > 0 (ὃ ἐποίησαν, τὴν δὲ ἑαυτῶν πατρίδα διὰ τὴν ἐνθάδε συμφορὰν ἀνώνυμον κατέστησαν. ἐκεῖναι μὲν > cy ΄ Cay eee ΄ \ ε οὖν τῆς ἀλλοτρίας ἀδίκως ἐπιθυμήσασαι THY ἕαυ- τῶν δικαίως ἀπώλεσαν. ᾿Αδράστου δὲ καὶ Πολυνείκους ἐπὶ Θήβας στρα- 7 τευσάντων καὶ ἡττηθέντων μάχῃ, οὐκ ἐώντων Καδμείων θάπτειν τοὺς νεκρούς, ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἡγη- σάμενοι ἐκείνους μέν, εἴ τι ἠδίκουν, ἀποθανόντας δίκην ἔχειν τὴν μεγίστην, τοὺς δὲ κάτω τὰ αὑτῶν οὐ κομίζεσθαι, ἱερῶν δὲ μιαινομένων τοὺς ἄνω Ν > “~ Ν A “~ ’ 4 θεοὺς ἀσεβεῖσθαι, τὸ μὲν πρῶτον πέμψαντες κή- ρυκας ἐδέοντο αὐτῶν δοῦναι τῶν νεκρῶν ἀναίρε- ’ὔὕ 5 Lal A 5» wn > “~ σιν, νομίζοντες ἀνδρῶν μὲν ἀγαθῶν εἶναι ζῶντας 8 Ἁ 5 Ν 4 > 4 Ν ’ τοὺς ἐχθροὺς τιμωρήσασθαι, ἀπιστούντων δὲ σφί- ~ -“ “ σιν αὐτοῖς ἐν τοῖς τῶν τεθνεώτων σώμασι τὴν > ’ > 4 > , Ν 4 εὐψυχίαν ἐπιδείκνυσθαι, ov δυνάμενοι δὲ τούτων τυχεῖν ἐστράτευσαν ἐπ᾽ αὐτούς, οὐδεμιᾶς διαφορᾶς πρότερον πρὸς Καδμείους ὑπαρχούσης, οὐδὲ τοῖς “ > ’ ’ > Ν. Ν aes ζῶσιν ᾿Αργείων χαριζόμενοι, ἀλλὰ τοὺς τεθνεῶτας 9 ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ ἀξιοῦντες τῶν νομιζομένων τυγχάνειν πρὸς τοὺς ἑτέρους ὑπὲρ ἀμφοτέρων ἐκινδύνευσαν,
94 Il. ἘΠΙΤΑΦΙΟΣ.
Io
11
12
ε Ν A -“ ν 5 Ν νος 3 ὑπὲρ μὲν τῶν, ἵνα μηκέτι εἰς τοὺς τεθνεῶτας ἐξα- , ’ὔ Ν Ν ‘ > ’ μαρτάνοντες πλείω περὶ τοὺς θεοὺς ἐξυβρίσωσιν, ὑπὲρ δὲ τῶν ἑτέρων, ἵνα μὴ πρότερον εἰς τὴν αὑτῶν ἀπέλθωσι πατρίου τιμῆς ἀτυχήσαντες καὶ
ε “ lal Ἑλληνικοῦ νόμου στερηθέντες καὶ κοινῆς ἐλπίδος ἡμαρτηκότες. ταῦτα διανοηθέντες, καὶ τὰς ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ τύχας κοινὰς ἁπάντων ἀνθρώπων νομί- Ν Ν ’ 4 Ν A ζοντες, πολλοὺς μὲν πολεμίους κτώμενοι, TO δὲ δίκαιον ἔχοντες σύμμαχον ἐνίκων μαχόμενοι. καὶ οὐχ ὑπὸ τῆς τύχης ἐπαρθέντες μείζονος παρὰ Καδμείων τιμωρίας ἐπεθύμησαν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐκείνοις μὲν > \ ~ > 4 Ν ε A > \ > ὃ , ἀντὶ τῆς ἀσεβείας THY ἑαυτῶν ἀρετὴν ἐπεδείξαντο, αὐτοὶ δὲ λαβόντες τὰ ἄθλα ὧνπερ ἕνεκα ἀφίκοντο, ‘\ > ’ ’ » > “Ὁ ε “A > τοὺς ᾿Αργείων νεκρούς, ἔθαψαν ἐν τῇ αὑτῶν ᾿Ελευ- σῖνι. περὶ μὲν οὖν τοὺς ἀποθανόντας τῶν ἑπτὰ -" κ 4 ral , ἐπὶ Θήβας τοιοῦτοι γεγόνασιν. «ε ’ Ν Υ͂ > be “ Ν > > Ὑστέρῳ δὲ χρόνῳ, ἐπειδὴ Ἡρακλῆς μὲν ἐξ av- ’ » ’ ε A Lal > nw » θρώπων ἠφανίσθη, οἱ δὲ παῖδες αὐτοῦ ἔφευγον Ν > 4 > ’ δὲ ε Ν ’, ων μὲν Εὐρυσθέα, ἐξηλαύνοντο δὲ ὑπὸ πάντων τῶν al » Ἑλλήνων, αἰσχυνομένων μὲν τοῖς ἔργοις, φοβου- ’ Ν Ἀ > ld , > / > μένων δὲ τὴν Εὐρυσθέως δύναμιν, ἀφικόμενοι eis 4, ἈΝ 4 ε ’ δι Ν A “Ὁ > 4 τήνδε τὴν πόλιν ἱκέται ἐπὶ τῶν βωμῶν ἐκαθέζοντο" > -“ ἐξαιτουμένου δὲ αὐτοὺς Εὐρυσθέως ᾿Αθηναῖοι οὐκ ἠθέλησαν ἐκδοῦναι, ἀλλὰ τὴν Ἡ ρακλέους ἀρετὴν A > ω Δ ‘ , \ 5 A > μᾶλλον ἠδοῦντο ἢ τὸν κίνδυνον τὸν ἑαυτῶν ἐφο- al “ Ν βοῦντο, καὶ ἠξίουν ὑπὲρ τῶν ἀσθενεστέρων μετὰ τοῦ δικαίου διαμάχεσθαι μᾶλλον ἢ τοῖς δυναμέ- νοις χαριζόμενοι τοὺς ὑπ᾽ ἐκείνων - ἀδικουμένους
Il. FUNERAL ORATION. 95
> Lal > 4, > > ,’ Ν. ἐκδοῦναι. ἐπιστρατεύσαντος: δ᾽ Εὐρυσθέως μετὰ τῶν ἐκείνῳ τῷ χρόνῳ Πελοπόννησον ἐχόντων, οὐκ ἐγγὺς τῶν δεινῶν γενόμενοι μετέγνωσαν, > Ν \ > Ν > 4 4 / ἀλλὰ τὴν αὐτὴν εἶχον γνώμην ἤνπερ πρότερον, 3 Ν Ν 3 Ν > ’, ε Ν “ Ν 5 “A ἀγαθὸν μὲν οὐδὲν idia ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτῶν πεπονθότες, ἐκείνους T οὐκ εἰδότες ὁποῖοί τινες ΕἾ » , ’ Ν ’ ἄνδρες ἔσονται γενόμενοι" δίκαιον δὲ νομίζοντες εἶναι, οὐ προτέρας ἔχθρας ὑπαρχούσης πρὸς Εὐρυ- θέ. ὑδὲ / ὃ ΄ Ν ὃ , 3 σθέα, οὐδὲ κέρδους προκειμένου πλὴν δόξης ἀγα- an A ~ » Ons, τοσοῦτον κίνδυνον ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν ἤραντο, τοὺς Ν LO / > A ‘ δ᾽ ε ’ μὲν ἀδικουμένους ἐλεοῦντες, τοὺς ὑβρίζοντας μισοῦντες, καὶ τοὺς μὲν κωλύειν ἐπιχειροῦντες, αν 232 “Ὁ 3 ΄““ ε ’ > ’ τοῖς δ᾽ ἐπικουρεῖν ἀξιοῦντες, ἡγούμενοι ἐλευθερίας μὲν σημεῖον εἶναι μηδὲν ποιεῖν ἄκοντας, δικαιοσύ- vns δὲ τοῖς ἀδικουμένοις βοηθεῖν, εὐψυχίας δ᾽ ὑπὲρ τούτων ἀμφοτέρων, εἰ δέοι, μαχομένους ἀπο- ’ Le 22 ’ 5 id A > θνήσκειν. τοσοῦτον δ᾽ ἐφρόνουν ἀμφότεροι, ὥσθ ε Ν » > ’ > Ν ϑι κα ’ὔ 5 Y ot μὲν μετ᾽ Εὐρυσθέως οὐδὲν παρ᾽ ἑκόντων ἐζήτουν εὑρίσκεσθαι, ᾿Αθηναῖοι δὲ οὐκ ἠξίουν Εὐρυσθέα αὐτὸν ἱκετεύοντα τοὺς ἱκέτας αὐτῶν ἐξελεῖν. πα- ραταξάμενοι δ᾽ ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει τὴν ἐξ ἁπάσης Πελο- ποννήσου στρατιὰν ἐλθοῦσαν ἐνίκων μαχόμενοι, Ν a ε ’ὔὕ , Ν A 4 > καὶ Tov “Hpaxdéovs παίδων τὰ μὲν σώματα εἰς Ἂν 7 3 ’ Ν A , ἄδειαν κατέστησαν, ἀπαλλάξαντες δὲ τοῦ δέους Χ Ν Ν 5 ’ὔ ‘ \ Ν ~ Kal Tas ψυχὰς ἠλευθέρωσαν, διὰ δὲ τὴν τοῦ πα- τρὸς ἀρετὴν ἐκείνους τοῖς αὑτῶν κινδύνοις ἐστε- φάνωσαν. τοσοῦτον δὲ εὐτυχέστεροι παῖδες ὄν- τες ἐγένοντο τοῦ πατρός: ὁ μὲν γάρ, καίπερ ὧν
13
15
17
18
19
20
Il. ἘΠΙΤΑΦΙΟΣ.
3 an la »¥ A > 4 δε, Φ' ἀγαθῶν πολλῶν αἴτιος ἅπασιν ἀνθρώποις, ἐπί- . Ἷ , A / ε »“. πονον καὶ φιλόνεικον καὶ φιλότιμον αὑτῷ κατα- ’ὔ wt 4, A A 3, 5 nw στήσας τὸν βίον τοὺς μὲν addous ἀδικοῦντας » ’ 5 4 A Ν 5 Ν » A > ἐκόλασεν, Εὐρυσθέα δὲ καὶ ἐχθρὸν ὄντα καὶ εἰς αὐτὸν ἐξαμαρτάνοντα οὐχ οἷός τε ἦν τιμωρήσα- σθαι: οἱ δὲ παῖδες αὐτοῦ διὰ τήνδε τὴν πόλιν A >A “Ξ aioe ΄ 3 ὦ a , \ τῇ αὐτῇ εἶδον ἡμέρᾳ τήν θ᾽ ἑαυτῶν σωτηρίαν καὶ τὴν τῶν ἐχθρῶν τιμωρίαν. Πολλὰ μὲν οὖν ὑπῆρχε τοῖς ἡμετέροις προγό- νοις μιᾷ γνώμῃ χρωμένοις περὶ τοῦ δικαίου δια- ’ ν A 5 Ν ΄“ ’ ,’ » μάχεσθαι. ἥ τε γὰρ ἀρχὴ τοῦ βίου δικαία: οὐ γάρ, ὥσπερ οἱ πολλοί, πανταχόθεν συνειλεγμένοι καὶ ἑτέρους ἐκβαλόντες τὴν ἀλλοτρίαν ᾧ ρους ς τὴ ρίαν ᾧκησαν, » 5 3 ’ὔὕ 2 Ν » ἈΝ 5 ᾽ὔὕ A ἀλλ᾽ αὐτόχθονες ὄντες τὴν αὐτὴν ἐκέκτηντο Kal μητέρα καὶ πατρίδα. πρῶτοι δὲ καὶ μόνοι ἐν ΕῚ , ΄-“ ΄ > B X , Ἂ, Ν φί ἐκείνῳ τῷ χρόνῳ ἐκβαλόντες τὰς παρὰ σφίσιν αὐτοῖς δυναστείας δημοκρατίαν κατεστήσαντο, ἡγούμενοι τὴν πάντων ἐλευθερίαν ὁμόνοιαν εἶναι ’ A > > , A 5 Lal ὃ ’ μεγίστην, κοινὰς ὃ ἀλλήλοις τὰς ἐκ τῶν κινδύνων 5 / , > , aA cal ᾿ ἐλπίδας ποιήσαντες ἐλευθέραις ταῖς ψυχαῖς ἐπολι- τεύοντο, νόμῳ τοὺς ἀγαθοὺς τιμῶντες καὶ τοὺς κακοὺς κολάζοντες, ἡγησάμενοι θηρίων μὲν ἔργον εἶναι ὑπ’ ἀλλήλων βίᾳ κρατεῖσθαι, ἀνθρώποις δὲ ,ὕ ’ὔ A ε ,’ ἈΝ 4 ’ A προσήκειν νόμῳ μὲν ὁρίσαι TO δίκαιον, λόγῳ δὲ πεῖσαι, ἔργῳ δὲ τούτοις ὑπηρετεῖν, ὑπὸ νόμου μὲν ͵ὔ ε Ν ’ὔ A / βασιλευομένους, ὑπὸ λόγου δὲ διδασκομένους. . 4 4 4 “ . ’ὔ Καὶ γάρ τοι καὶ φύντες καλως καὶ γνόντες - Ν . A A Ν ε , ὅμοια, πολλὰ μὲν καλὰ καὶ θαυμαστὰ οἱ πρόγονοι
II. FUNERAL ORATION. 97
τῶν ἐνθάδε κειμένων εἰργάσαντο, ἀείμνηστα δὲ καὶ μεγάλα καὶ πανταχοῦ ot ἐξ ἐκείνων γεγονότες τρόπαια διὰ τὴν αὑτῶν ἀρετὴν κατέλιπον. μόνοι Ν ε Ν ε ’ aA ε 4 Ν A yap ὑπὲρ ἁπάσης τῆς Ἑλλάδος πρὸς πολλὰς μυρι- ’ “~ 4 ’ ε Ν Lal ddas τῶν βαρβάρων διεκινδύνευσαν. ὁ yap τῆς 3 / Ἁ > > “ <> e ’ Ασίας βασιλεὺς οὐκ ἀγαπῶν τοῖς ὑπάρχουσιν ἀγαθοῖς, ἀλλ᾽ ἐλπίζων καὶ τὴν Εὐρώπην δουλώσε- σθαι, ἔστειλε πεντήκοντα μυριάδας στρατιάν. ε , , > , N ΄, Rite aA ἡγησάμενοι δέ, εἰ τήνδε THY πόλιν ἢ ἑκοῦσαν φίλην ποιήσαιντο ἢ ἄκουσαν καταστρέψαιντο, ῥᾳδίως τῶν ἄλλων Ἑλλήνων ἄρξειν, ἀπέβησαν εἰς Μαραθῶνα, νομίσαντες οὕτως ἂν ἐρημοτάτους εἶναι
21
συμμάχων ἔτόνς Navas], εἰ ἔτι στασιαζούσης.
τῆς Ἑλλάδος ᾧ τινι χρὴ di TOUS ἐπιόντας ἀμύ- νασθαι, τὸν gto iste nian ἔτι δ᾽ αὐτοῖς ἐκ τῶν aoe ἔργων σερὶ τῆς πόλεως τοιαύτῃ δόξα παρεισνῆκες ὡς εἰ μὲν πρότερον ἐπ᾽ ἄλλην πόλιν ἴασιν, ἐκείνοις καὶ ᾿Αθηναίοις πολεμήσουσι" 4 Ν “Ὁ > 4 μ᾿ ’ προθύμως γὰρ τοῖς ἀδικουμένοις ἥξουσι βοηθή- σοντες εἰ δ᾽ ἐνθάδε πρῶτον ἀφίξονται, οὐδένας ἄλλους τῶν Ἑλλήνων τολμήσειν ἑτέρους σώζοντας φανερὰν ἔχθραν πρὸς ἐκείνους ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν κατα- θέσθαι. οἱ μὲν τοίνυν ταῦτα διενοοῦντο" οἱ δ᾽ ἡμέτεροι πρόγονοι οὐ λογισμῷ .... εἰδότες τοὺς > a“ 4 ’ > Ν ’ Ν > ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ κινδύνους, ἀλλὰ νομίζοντες τὸν εὐ- “ ’ > /, ‘\ “A > A ’ κλεᾶ θάνατον ἀθάνατον περὶ τῶν ἀγαθῶν καταλεί- πειν λόγον, οὐκ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸ πλῆθος τῶν ἐναν- ’ 5 Ν a Θ᾽... σὲ > “A a es τίων, ἀλλὰ TH avT@v ἀρετῇ μᾶλλον ἐπίστευσαν. 7
22
93
24
25
26
Il. ἘΠΙΤΑΦΙΟΣ.
eee , Y > ε , . A 9 καὶ αἰσχυνόμενοι ὅτι ἦσαν οἱ βάρβαροι αὐτῶν ἐν “ 4 > > 4 4 > A “~ τῇ χώρᾳ, οὐκ ἀνέμειναν πυθέσθαι οὐδὲ βοηθῆσαι τοὺς συμμάχους, οὐδ᾽ ὠφήθησαν δεῖν ἑτέροις τῆς 7 4 5 4 5 Ν / > = Ἁ σωτηρίας χάριν εἰδέναι, ἀλλὰ σφίσιν αὐτοῖς τοὺς ἄλλους Ἕλλ U L γνώ Ἵ ς ἡνας. ταῦτα μιᾷ γνώμῃ πάντες γνόντες > ‘3 5 ’ Ν. , > , Ν 3 ἀπήντων ὀλίγοι πρὸς πολλούς - ἐνόμιζον yap ἀπο- θανεῖν μὲν αὐτοῖς μετὰ πάντων προσήκειν, ἀγα- Ν 5 > > 5 ’ \ Ν A Ν θοὺς δ᾽ εἶναι per ὀλίγων, καὶ τὰς μὲν ψυχὰς ἀλλοτρίας διὰ τὸν θάνατον κεκτῆσθαι, τὴν δ᾽ ἐκ “ , 7 3 ‘A 4 5 ’ὔ τῶν κινδύνων μνήμην ἰδίαν καταλείψειν. ἠξίουν δ᾽, obs μὴ μόνοι νικῷεν, οὐδ᾽ ἂν μετὰ συμμάχων ’ Ν ε 4 \ >\ 7 ea ᾿Ξ δύνασθαι: καὶ ἡττηθέντες μὲν ὀλίγῳ τῶν ἄλλων “ ,ὕ Ν Ν Ν Ν» προαπολεῖσθαι, νικήσαντες δὲ καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους > a ὃ 3 5 ‘\ ld Ν ἐλευθερώσειν. ἄνδρες δ᾽ ἀγαθοὶ γενόμενοι, καὶ “ Ν 4, > ’, ε A ἈΝ a 5 τῶν μὲν σωμάτων ἀφειδήσαντες, ὑπὲρ δὲ τῆς ἀρε- nw > 4 Ν Lan Ν ᾽ τῆς οὐ φιλοψυχήσαντες, καὶ μᾶλλον τοὺς παρ αὑτοῖς νόμους αἰσχυνόμενοι ἢ τὸν πρὸς τοὺς πολε- μίους κίνδυνον φοβούμενοι, ἔστησαν μὲν τρόπαια ὑπὲρ τῆς Ἑλλάδος τῶν βαρβάρων ἐν τῇ αὑτῶν, ε Ν ’ > Ν 3 ’, 3 , ὑπὲρ χρημάτων eis τὴν ἀλλοτρίαν ἐμβαλόντων, παρὰ τοὺς ὅρους τῆς χώρας, οὕτω δὲ διὰ ταχέων Ν ’, > , ν ε > Ν “ » τὸν κίνδυνον ἐποιήσαντο, ὥστε οἱ αὐτοὶ τοῖς ἀλ- λοις ἀπήγγειλαν τήν τ᾽ ἐνθάδε ἄφιξιν τῶν βαρ- βάρων καὶ τὴν τῶν προγόνων νίκην. καὶ γάρ τοι > ἈΝ “ » »» ε \ lel , οὐδεὶς τῶν ἄλλων ἔδεισεν ὑπὲρ τοῦ μέλλοντος κιν- ΄ 3 S49 4 ε Ν al cm > ’ δύνου, ἀλλ᾽ ἀκούσαντες ὑπὲρ τῆς αὑτῶν ἐλευθερίας wa - 3 Ν ’ ud nw ἥσθησαν. ὥστε οὐδὲν θαυμαστόν, πάλαι τῶν ἔργων γεγενημένων, ὥσπερ καινῶν ὄντων ἔτι καὶ
II. FUNERAL ORATION. 99
» A 5 Ἁ > ~ ec Ἀ ’ 5 ’ὔ νῦν τὴν ἀρετὴν αὐτῶν ὑπὸ πάντων ἀνθρώπων ζηλοῦσθαι.
Μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα Ξέρξης ὁ τῆς ᾿Ασίας βασιλεύς, 27 καταφρονήσας μὲν τῆς Ἑλλάδος, ἐψευσμένος δὲ τῆς ἐλπίδος, ἀτιμαζόμενος δὲ τῷ γεγενημένῳ, > , A - “Ὁ 5 ’ὔ δὲ σὰ ἀχθόμενος δὲ τῇ συμφορᾷ, ὀργιζόμενος δὲ τοῖς
> > \ se th an , » > ὃ a αἰτίοις, ἀπαθὴς δ᾽ ὧν κακῶν καὶ ἄπειρος ἀνδρῶν
- ’ ἀγαθῶν, δεκάτῳ ἔτει παρασκευασάμενος χιλίαις
Ἀ Ἀ ,’ A > 4 nw δὲ nw μὲν καὶ διακοσίαις ναυσὶν ἀφίκετο, τῆς δὲ πεζῆς
7 nw > 9 ‘ στρατιᾶς οὕτως ἄπειρον TO πλῆθος ἦγεν, ὥστε Kat
Ν » A > 5» “ >] ’ A a τὰ ἔθνη τὰ per αὐτοῦ ἀκολουθήσαντα πολὺ ἂν » ¥ , Ν Ν id -~” “A ἔργον εἴη καταλέξαι: τὸ δὲ μέγιστον σημεῖον τοῦ 28 πλήθους - ἐξὸν γὰρ αὐτῷ χιλίαις ναυσὶ διαβιβά- σαι κατὰ τὸ στενώτατον τοῦ Ἑλλησπόντου τὴν
ἈΝ Ν > nw > ’ » A > 4 πεζὴν στρατιὰν ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ασίας εἰς THY Εὐρώπην, οὐκ ἠἡθέλ ε ’ A ὃ βὴ ε -“ ἠθέλησεν, ἡγούμενος τὴν διατριβὴν αὑτῷ πολλὴν ἔσεσθαι: ἀλλ᾽ ὑπεριδὼν καὶ τὰ φύσει 29 , A Ν ~ ’ A x > πεφυκότα καὶ τὰ θεῖα πράγματα Kat Tas ἀνθρω-
’ ,’΄ ε Ν A A nw ’ 5 ’ πίνας διανοίας ὁδὸν μὲν διὰ τῆς θαλάσσης ἐποιή- σατο, πλοῦν δὲ διὰ τῆς γῆς ἠνάγκασε γενέσθαι, ζεύξας μὲν τὸν Ἑλλήσποντον, διορύξας δὲ τὸν ἴἼΛθω- ὑφισταμένου οὐδενός, ἀλλὰ τῶν μὲν ἀκόν- των ὑπακουόντων, τῶν δὲ ἑκόντων προδιδόντων.
ε A Ν » 4 | > > 4 ε » ι- A οἱ μὲν yap οὐχ ἱκανοὶ ἦσαν ἀμύνασθαι, ot δ᾽ ὑπὸ χρημάτων διεφθαρμένοι. ἀμφότερα δ᾽ ἣν αὐτοὺς τὰ πείθοντα, κέρδος καὶ δέος. ᾿Αθηναῖοι δ᾽ οὕτω 30
’ ~ ες ’ἅ » Ἀ Ἁ > A “~ > διακειμένης τῆς Ελλάδος αὐτοὶ μὲν εἰς τὰς ναῦς ἐμ-
, re -D 4 > 4 , βάντες ἐπ᾽ ᾿Αρτεμίσιον ἐβοήθησαν, Λακεδαιμόνιοι
100 Il. EMITA®IO“.
δὲ Ν sad , » > uA 39 ca € Kal τῶν συμμάχων ἔνιοι εἰς Θερμοπύλας ἀπήν- τησαν, ἡγούμενοι διὰ τὴν στενότητα τῶν χωρίων 31 τὴν πάροδον οἷοί τ᾽ ἔσεσθαι διαφυλάξαι. γενο- μένου δὲ τοῦ κινδύνου κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν χρόνον ᾿Αθηναῖοι μὲν evi. τῇ ναυμαχίᾳ, Λακεδαιμό ηναῖοι μὲν ἐνίκων τῇ ναυμαχίᾳ, Λακεδαιμόνιοι δέ, οὐ ταῖς ψυχαῖς ἐνδεεῖς γενόμενοι, ἀλλὰ τοῦ πλήθους ψευσθέντες καὶ ods φυλάξειν ᾧοντο καὶ Ν ἃ ὃ 7 ἅν" 3 ε ’ πρὸς οὗς κινδυνεύσειν ἔμελλον, .... οὐχ ἡττηθέν- ΄““ > 4 > > > , es > ’ τες τῶν ἐναντίων, ἀλλ᾽ ἀποθανόντες οὗπερ ἐτάχθη- 32 σὰν μάχεσθαι, τούτῳ δὲ τῷ τρόπῳ τῶν μὲν δυστυ- χησάντων, τῶν δὲ τῆς παρόδου κρατησάντων, οἱ Ν 3 4 βίος ἢ 4 Ν , e 2 =¢ ’ὔ μὲν ἐπορεύοντο ἐπὶ τήνδε τὴν πόλιν, οἱ δ᾽ ἡμέτεροι πρόγονοι πυθόμενοι μὲν τὴν γεγενημένην Λακεδαι- μονίοις συμφοράν, ἀποροῦντες δὲ τοῖς περιεστη- κόσι πράγμασιν, εἰδότες δ᾽ ὅτι, εἰ μὲν κατὰ γὴν Lal ἊΣ > , > ’ ’ τοῖς βαρβάροις ἀπαντήσονται, ἐπιπλεύσαντες χιλί Ἀ 5 ’ ‘ / 4 > Ν 5 ais ναυσὶν ἐρήμην τὴν πόλιν λήψονται, εἰ δὲ εἰς τὰς τριήρεις ἐμβήσονται, ὑπὸ τῆς πεζῆς στρατιᾶς ε , > , δὲ 3 ὃ ΄ 3 ΄ ἁλώσονται, ἀμφότερα O€ οὐ δυνήσονται, ἀμύνα- 33 σθαΐ τε καὶ φυλακὴν ἱκανὴν καταλιπεῖν, δυοῖν δὲ προκειμένοιν, πότερον χρὴ τὴν πατρίδα ἐκλιπεῖν Ἅ Ν ων , , , ἢ μετὰ τῶν βαρβάρων γενομένους καταδουλώ- \ 7 ε ’ a σασθαι τοὺς Ἕλληνας, ἡγησάμενοι κρεῖττον εἶναι ἘΣ. Penns \ ΄ ν a > , x per ἀρετῆς καὶ πενίας καὶ φυγῆς ἐλευθερίαν 7 ot SS (ὃ Ἀ , ὃ , Lal (ὃ μετ᾽ ὀνείδους καὶ πλούτου δουλείαν τῆς πατρίδος, ἐξέλιπον ὑπὲρ τῆς “Ἑλλάδος τὴν πόλιν, ἵν᾿ ἐν μέρει Ν ε ’ὔ > ‘ A Ν > 4 9 4 πρὸς ἑκατέραν ἀλλὰ μὴ πρὸς ἀμφοτέρας ἅμα Tas 34 δυνάμεις κινδυνεύσωσιν, ὑπεκθέμενοι δὲ παῖδας
II. FUNERAL ORATION. ΙΟΙ
ΟΝ A ‘\ , 3 a ΄ καὶ γυναῖκας καὶ μητέρας εἰς Σαλαμῖνα, συνή-.
θροιζον καὶ τὸ τῶν ἄλλων συμμάχων ναυτικόν. οὐ πολλαῖς δ᾽ ὕστερον ἡμέραις ἦλθε καὶ ἡ πεζὴ Ν Ν ‘ Ν) Ν. A ’ ἃ ’ στρατιὰ καὶ τὸ ναυτικὸν τὸ τῶν βαρβάρων, ὃ τίς οὐκ ἂν ἰδὼν ἐφοβήθη, ὡς μέγας καὶ δεινὸς τῇδε τῇ πόλει κίνδυνος ὑπὲρ τῆς τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἐλευθερίας » ’ ’ Ν ’ » x» ε 4 ἠγωνίσθη ; ποίαν δὲ γνώμην εἶχον ἢ ot θεώμενοι τοὺς ἐν ταῖς ναυσὶν ἐκείναις, οὔσης καὶ τῆς αὑτῶν σωτηρίας ἀπίστου καὶ τοῦ προσιόντος κινδύνου, x» ε 4 ’ ε ἈΝ A , ἢ οἱ μέλλοντες ναυμαχήσειν ὑπὲρ τῆς φιλότητος, τς A ¥ A > A a A ὑπὲρ τῶν ἄθλων τῶν ἐν Σαλαμῖνι; οἷς τοσοῦτον πανταχόθεν περιειστήκει πλῆθος πολεμίων, ὥστε ἐλάχιστον μὲν αὐτοῖς εἶναι τῶν παρόντων κακῶν ‘ Δ Ν ε “ 4 4 τὸ θάνατον τὸν αὑτῶν προειδέναι, μεγίστην δὲ , aA ε Ν Ὁ 4, > ’ συμφοράν, ἃ ὑπὸ τῶν βαρβάρων εὐτυχησάντων ‘ ε ’ ᾿», ’, > \ τοὺς ὑπεκτεθέντας ἤλπιζον πείσεσθαι. ἢ που διὰ ἣς ε ’ὔ > ’ ’ Ν. 5 7 τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν ἀπορίαν πολλάκις μὲν ἐδεξιώ- σαντο ἀλλήλους, εἰκότως δὲ σφᾶς αὐτοὺς ὠλοφύ- > / Ν Ν ’ὔ ~ > / pavto, εἰδότες μὲν tas σφετέρας vais ὀλίγας ¥ ε κα \ \ \ a , 4 οὔσας, ὁρῶντες δὲ πολλὰς Tas τῶν πολεμίων, ἐπι- ’ Ν Ν Ν 7 > 4 Ἀ Ν στάμενοι δὲ τὴν μὲν πόλιν ἠρημωμένην, τὴν δὲ χώραν πορθουμένην καὶ μεστὴν τῶν βαρβάρων, ἱερῶν δὲ καιομένων, ἁπάντων δ᾽ ἐγγὺς ὄντων τῶν al > 4 > > > ~ ’ δεινῶν, ἀκούοντες δ᾽ ἐν ταὐτῷ συμμεμιγμένου ε Ὁ“ Ὁ“ ἴω, Ἑλληνικοῦ καὶ βαρβαρικοῦ παιᾶνος, παρακελευ- “ » > 4 Ν -“ ~ σμοῦ δ᾽ ἀμφοτέρων καὶ κραυγῆς τῶν διαφθειρο- μένων, καὶ τῆς θαλάττης μεστῆς τῶν νεκρῶν, καὶ ΑΝ Ν ’ Ν ’, Ν ’ πολλῶν μὲν συμπιπτόντων καὶ φιλίων καὶ πολεμίων
35
36
37
38
102 Il. EMITA®IOS.
39
40
41
42
, 5 ’ὔ’ A A ’ὔἅ ¥ »". ναυαγίων, ἀντιπάλου δὲ πολὺν χρόνον οὔσης τῆς ναυμαχίας δοκοῦντες τοτὲ μὲν νενικηκέναι καὶ
cal A > e ~ Ν 5 4 σεσῶσθαι, τοτὲ δ᾽ ἡττῆσθαι καὶ ἀπολωλέναι. ἢ που διὰ τὸν παρόντα φόβον πολλὰ μὲν wHAOn- σαν ἰδεῖν ὧν οὐκ εἶδον, πολλὰ δ᾽ ἀκοῦσαι ὧν
> » » > > ε a a ΕΣ. οὐκ ἤκουσαν. ποῖαι δ᾽ οὐχ ἱκετεῖαι θεῶν ἐγέ-
“Δ la 5 la » ld , ν vovto ἢ θυσιῶν ἀναμνήσεις, ἔλεός τε παίδων καὶ γυναικῶν πόθος οἶκτός τε πατέρων καὶ μητέρων, λογισμὸς δ᾽, εἰ δυστυχήσειαν, τῶν μελλόντων » Lon ’ 5 xX “ 5 4 5 A ἔσεσθαι κακῶν ; τίς οὐκ ἂν θεῶν ἠλέησεν αὐτοὺς ε x al , lal , a» , > , ὑπὲρ Tov μεγέθους τοῦ κινδύνου; ἢ τίς ἀνθρώ-
3 ΕΝ δα. aK , a / 3 Q πων οὐκ ἂν ἐδάκρυσεν ; ἢ Tis τῆς τόλμης αὐτοὺς
> “Δ > , > A ~ > ω Ν οὐκ ἂν ἠγάσθη; ἢ πολὺ πλεῖστον ἐκεῖνοι κατὰ A 5» A ε ’ » 7 ’ A > τὴν ἀρετὴν ἁπάντων ἀνθρώπων διήνεγκαν καὶ ἐν nw , A 5 ” [ων 4 a τοῖς βουλεύμασι καὶ ἐν τοῖς τοῦ πολέμου κινδύ-
5» ’ὔ A A ’ » A Qn > νοις, ἐκλιπόντες μὲν τὴν πόλιν, εἰς τὰς ναῦς ὃ 5» , A > ε ΄“ Ἀ 5» ’ » 5 ἐμβάντες, τὰς δ᾽ αὑτῶν ψυχὰς ὀλίγας οὔσας ἀντι- τάξαντες τῷ πλήθει τῷ τῆς ᾿Ασίας. ἐπέδειξαν δὲ πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις, νικήσαντες τῇ ναυμαχίᾳ, ὅτι
~ » ΕῚ , 4 ε ἈΝ nw κρεῖττον μετ᾽ ὀλίγων [πολιτευομένων] ὑπὲρ τῆς ἐλευθερίας κινδυνεύειν ἢ μετὰ πολλῶν βασιλευο-
4 ε A wn ε “a 4 nw A Ἀ μένων ὑπὲρ τῆς αὑτῶν δουλείας. πλεῖστα δὲ καὶ κάλλιστα ἐκεῖνοι ὑπὲρ τῆς τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἐλευθε-
’ , Ν A La ρίας συνεβάλοντο, στρατηγὸν μὲν Θεμιστοκλέα, ἱκανώτατον εἰπεῖν καὶ γνῶναι καὶ πρᾶξαι, ναῦς
A / “ »” 4 » > > δὲ πλείους τῶν ἄλλων συμμάχων, ἄνδρας ὃ ἐμ- πειροτάτους. καίτοι τίνες ἂν τούτοις τῶν ἄλλων
Ἑλλήνων ἤρισαν γνώμῃ καὶ πλήθει καὶ ἀρετῇ ;
II. FUNERAL ORATION. 103
΄ , Ν > 7’ 5 -“ nw ὥστε δικαίως μὲν ἀναμφισβήτητα τἀριστεῖα τῆς ναυμαχίας ἔλαβον παρὰ τῆς “Ἑλλάδος, εἰκότως δὲ τὴν εὐτυχίαν ὁμονοοῦσαν τοῖς κινδύνοις ἐκτή- σαντο, γνησίαν δὲ καὶ αὐτόχθονα τοῖς ἐκ τῆς 5 ,ὕ 4 A ε ΄" 5» Ν 5 ’ὕ Ασίας βαρβάροις τὴν αὑτῶν ἀρετὴν ἐπεδείξαντο. ΕῚ Ν > “Ὁ , , ε Ν Ἐν μὲν οὖν τῇ ναυμαχίᾳ τοιούτους αὑτοὺς παρασχόντες καὶ πολὺ πλεῖστον τῶν κινδύνων ’ὕ “ > 4 > “ A Ἀ 5 4 μετασχόντες TH ἰδίᾳ ἀρετῇ κοινὴν τὴν ἐλευθερίαν Ἀ -“ ΕἿΣ > 4 y Ν καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ἐκτήσαντο" ὕστερον δὲ Πελοπον- νησίων τειχιζόντων τὸν Ἰσθμόν, καὶ ἀγαπώντων A “Ὁ , , 5 5 4 nw μὲν TH σωτηρίᾳ, νομιζόντων δ᾽ ἀπηλλάχθαι τοῦ Ν ’ἢ 4 A ’ A Kata θάλατταν κινδύνου, καὶ διανοουμένων τοὺς ἄλλους Ἕλληνας περιιδεῖν ὑπὸ τοῖς βαρβάροις 4 > 4 > Lal 4 γενομένους, ὀργισθέντες ᾿Αθηναῖοι συνεβούλευον αὐτοῖς, εἰ ταύτην τὴν γνώμην ἕξουσι, περὶ ἅπα- A ’ ~ ~ > Ἀ σαν τὴν ἸΤελοπόννησον τεῖχος περιβαλεῖν " εἰ γὰρ 5 Ἀ ε A Ὁ» ε ’ , A a“ αὐτοὶ ὑπὸ τῶν Ἑλλήνων προδιδόμενοι μετὰ τῶν , »Ἤ ν 55 5 , , , : βαρβάρων ἔσονται, οὔτ᾽ ἐκείνοις δεήσειν χιλίων -" Ε2 ’ὕ 3 , Ν 5 3 “ nw νεῶν οὔτε τούτους ὠφελήσειν TO ἐν ᾿Ισθμῷ τεῖχος ' > 4 » » A nn ’ 5 A ἀκινδύνως yap ἔσεσθαι τὴν τῆς θαλάσσης ἀρχὴν 4 ys : οἷ A ’ὕ > A βασιλέως. διδασκόμενοι δὲ καὶ νομίζοντες αὐτοὶ μὲν ἀδικά τε ποιεῖν καὶ κακῶς βουλεύεσθαι, ᾿Αθη- ’ A ’ ’ὔ ’ A Ν ’ὕ » ~ vaious δὲ δίκαιά τε λέγειν καὶ τὰ βέλτιστα αὐτοῖς “Ὁ > ’ 5 4 5» ’ὕ παραινεῖν, ἐβοήθησαν εἰς Πλαταιάς - ἀποδράντων δὲ ὑπὸ νύκτα τῶν πλείστων συμμάχων ἐκ τῶν τάξεων διὰ τὸ πλῆθος τῶν πολεμίων, Λακεδαιμό- Ν ἈΝ lal A ’ > ,ὕ νιοι μὲν καὶ Τεγεᾶται τοὺς βαρβάρους ἐτρέψαντο, ᾿Αθηναῖοι δὲ καὶ Πλαταιεῖς πάντας τοὺς Ἕλληνας
43
44
45
46
104 II. ἘΠΙΤΑΦΙΟΣ.
ἐνίκων μαχόμενοι τοὺς ἀπογνόντας τῆς ἐλευθερίας ἈΝ ε ’ Ἁ ’ὔ > > 4 A ΄“ 47 καὶ ὑπομείναντας τὴν δουλείαν. ἐν ἐκείνῃ δὲ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ καλλίστην τελευτὴν τοῖς προτέροις κινδύ- 3 ’ 4 Ν Ν 5 ’ “ νοις ἐπιθέντες, βέβαιον μὲν τὴν ἐλευθερίαν τῇ Εὐρώπῃ κατειργάσαντο, ἐν ἅπασι δὲ τοῖς κινδύ- νοις δόντες ἔλεγχον τῆς ἑαυτῶν ἀρετῆς, καὶ μόνοι καὶ μεθ᾽ ἑτέρων, καὶ πεζομαχοῦντες καὶ ναυμα- χοῦντες, καὶ πρὸς τοὺς βαρβάρους καὶ πρὸς τοὺς Ἕλληνας, ὑπὸ πάντων ἠξιώθησαν, καὶ μεθ᾽ ὧν ἐκινδύνευον καὶ πρὸς ods ἐπολέμουν, ἡγεμόνες γενέσθαι τῆς Ἑλλάδος. 4 ᾽Ὑστέρῳ δὲ χρόνῳ Ἑλληνικοῦ πολέμου κατα- 4 Ν “ a id \ U στάντος διὰ ζῆλον τῶν γεγενημένων καὶ φθόνον τῶν πεπραγμένων, μέγα μὲν ἅπαντες φρονοῦντες, μικρῶν δ᾽ ἐγκλημάτων ἕκαστοι δεόμενοι, ναυμα- ’ 3 ’ Ν > , Ν Ν 5 ’ χίας ᾿Αθηναίοις πρὸς Αἰγινήτας καὶ τοὺς ἐκείνων συμμάχους γενομένης ἑβδομήκοντα τριήρεις αὐὖὐ- “ > ee 4 Ν Ν Ν > 49 Tov ἐλάμβανον. πολιορκούντων δὲ κατὰ τὸν ad- Ν ’ 4 ld Ν » Ἀ »Ὁ» τὸν χρόνον Αἴγυπτόν τε καὶ Αἴγιναν, καὶ τῆς ἡλικίας ἀπούσης ἔν τε ταῖς ναυσὶ καὶ ἐν τῷ πεζῷ 7) Ἢ é f στρατεύματι, Κορίνθιοι καὶ οἱ ἐκείνων σύμμαχοι, ε , a > ¥ Ν ’ 3 “ a 3 ἡγούμενοι ἢ εἰς ἔρημον τὴν χώραν ἐμβαλεῖν H ἐξ Αἰγίνης ἄξειν τὸ στρατόπεδον, ἐξελθόντες πανδη- 50 μεὶ Γεράνειαν κατέλαβον" ᾿Αθηναῖοι δὲ τῶν μὲν 3 ’ “- δ᾽ > ‘ ») ὑδέ Δ ΕΣ ἀπόντων, τῶν δ᾽ ἐγγὺς ὄντων, οὐδένα ἐτόλμησαν ,ὔὕ Lal 5 ε “ ΄“ ,ὕὔ μεταπέμψασθαι: ταῖς δ᾽ αὑτῶν ψυχαῖς πιστεύ- σαντες καὶ τῶν ἐπιόντων καταφρονήσαντες οἱ γεραίτεροι καὶ ot τῆς ἡλικίας ἐντὸς γεγονότες
II. FUNERAL ORATION. 105
> fd > Ν , ‘ ¢ ὃ ld 0 ε ἠξίουν αὐτοὶ μόνοι τὸν κίνδυνον ποιήσασθαι, οἱ A > , Ν 5 ’ ε Ν ’ὔ ’ μὲν ἐμπειρίᾳ τὴν ἀρετήν, οἱ δὲ φύσει κεκτημένοι " καὶ οἱ μὲν αὐτοὶ πολλαχοῦ ἀγαθοὶ γεγενημένοι, οἱ δ᾽ ἐκείνους μιμούμενοι, τῶν μὲν πρεσβυτέρων ἄρχειν ἐπισταμένων, τῶν δὲ νεωτέρων τὸ ἐπιτατ- τόμενον ποιεῖν δυναμένων, Μυρωνίδου στρατη- γοῦντος ἀπαντήσαντες αὐτοὶ εἰς τὴν Μεγαρικὴν ἐνίκων μαχόμενοι ἅπασαν τὴν δύναμιν τὴν ἐκείνων A a » τοῖς ἤδη ἀπειρηκόσι Kal Tots οὔπω δυναμένοις, Ἀ 3 ‘ , > a > 4 > (τοὺς εἰς τὴν σφετέραν ἐμβαλεῖν ἀξιώσαντας εἰς 4 > ’ 3 la / Ν ’ τὴν ἀλλοτρίαν ἀπαντήσαντες) τρόπαιον δὲ στή- σαντες καλλίστου μὲν αὐτοῖς ἔργου, αἰσχίστου δὲ τοῖς πολεμίοις, οἱ μὲν οὐκέτι τοῖς σώμασιν, οἱ δ᾽ 3» ’, »Ὁ»Ἤ Ν A 3 / 4 οὔπω δυνάμενοι, ταῖς δὲ ψυχαῖς ἀμφότεροι κρείτ- ’ὔ Ν ’ E > Ν ε τους γενόμενοι, μετὰ καλλίστης δόξης εἰς τὴν αὖ- ἴω > , ε Ν ΄ 5 7 ε Ν τῶν ἀπελθόντες οἱ μὲν πάλιν ἐπαιδεύοντο, οἱ δὲ Ἀ “ “ > £ περὶ τῶν λοιπῶν ἐβουλεύοντο. Kal” ἕκαστον μὲν οὐ ῥάδιον τὰ ὑπὸ πολλῶν κιν- rd ε 3. δἰ Ν ε “ > Ν Ν 5 bid ~ δυνευθέντα ὑφ᾽ ἑνὸς ῥηθῆναι, οὐδὲ τὰ ἐν ἅπαντι TO ’, , > ”~ ε / a ee χρόνῳ πραχθέντα ἐν μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ δηλωθῆναι. τίς s Ἃ x , x , MOTs ε Ν ΄, γὰρ ἂν ἢ λόγος ἢ χρόνος ἢ ῥήτωρ ἱκανὸς γένοιτο μηνῦσαι τὴν τῶν ἐνθάδε κειμένων ἀνδρῶν ἀρετήν ; μετὰ πλείστων γὰρ πόνων καὶ φανερωτάτων ἀγώ- ἈΝ / 4 > , A > / νων καὶ καλλίστων κινδύνων ἐλευθέραν μὲν ἐποίη- σαν τὴν Ἑλλάδα, μεγίστην δ᾽ ἀπέδειξαν τὴν ε ~ ’ὔ ε ’ Ν »» lal ἑαυτῶν πατρίδα, ἑβδομήκοντα μὲν ἔτη τῆς Oa- ¥” λάττης ἄρξαντες, ἀστασιάστους δὲ παρασχόντες τοὺς συμμάχους, οὐ τοῖς ὀλίγοις τοὺς πολλοὺς
51
52
55
56
106 Il. EMITA®IOS“.
, > , > ἈΝ , » » . δουλεύειν ἀξιώσαντες, ἀλλὰ τὸ ἴσον ἔχειν ἅπαντας ἀναγκάσαντες, οὐδὲ τοὺς συμμάχους ἀσθενεῖς ποιοῦντες, ἀλλὰ κἀκείνους ἰσχυροὺς καθιστάντες, καὶ τὴν αὑτῶν δύναμιν τοσαύτην ἐπιδείξαντες, - 2 ε 4 Ν > / A > / ὥσθ᾽ ὁ μέγας βασιλεὺς οὐκέτι τῶν ἀλλοτρίων > , > > > , a“ e “~ Ν x A ἐπεθύμει, add’ ἐδίδου τῶν ἑαυτοῦ καὶ περὶ τῶν d ἮΝ 9 β A \ »¥ , > 2% a
57 λοιπῶν ἐφοβεῖτο, καὶ οὔτε τριήρεις ἐν ἐκείνῳ TO ’ὔ 5 “ 3 ’ὔ »Ά + 4 > χρόνῳ ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ασίας ἔπλευσαν, οὔτε τύραννος ἐν τοῖς Ἕλλησι κατέστη, οὔτε Ἑλληνὶς πόλις ὑπὸ τῶν βαρβάρων ἠνδραποδίσθη: τοσαύτην σωφρο- σύνην καὶ δέος ἡ τούτων ἀρετὴ πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις παρεῖχεν. ὧν ἕνεκα δεῖ μόνους καὶ προστάτας “ ε la Ν ε / ΄“ / , tov Ἑλλήνων καὶ ἡγεμόνας τῶν πόλεων γίγνε- σθαι. 58 ᾿Επέδειξαν δὲ καὶ ἐν ταῖς δυστυχίαις τὴν ἑαυ- ~ 5 ’ὔ 3 ’, Ν a“ “A > «ε τῶν ἀρετήν. ἀπολομένων γὰρ τῶν vewv ἐν Ἐλλη- σπόντῳ εἴτε ἡγεμόνος κακίᾳ εἴτε θεῶν διανοίᾳ, καὶ la ἈΝ ε -“ συμφορᾶς ἐκείνης μεγίστης γενομένης καὶ ἡμῖν a A » 2 τοῖς δυστυχήσασι καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις Ἕλλησιν, ἐδή- lal 9 “ / λωσαν od πολλῷ χρόνῳ ὕστερον ὅτι ἡ τῆς πόλεως , A ε , > , ae \ 59 δύναμις τῆς Ἑλλάδος ἦν σωτηρία. ἑτέρων yap ἡγεμόνων γενομένων ἐνίκησαν μὲν ναυμαχοῦντες ‘ 7 ε ’ὔ > Ἀ ’ὔ » τοὺς Ἕλληνας οἱ πρότερον εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν οὐκ ἐμβαίνοντες, ἔπλευσαν δ᾽ εἰς τὴν Εὐρώπην, δου- λεύουσι δὲ πόλεις τῶν “Ἑλλήνων, τύραννοι δ᾽ ἐγκα- θεστᾶσιν, οἱ μὲν μετὰ τὴν ἡμετέραν συμφορᾶν, οἱ 60 δὲ μετὰ τὴν νίκην τῶν βαρβάρων. ὥστ᾽ ἄξιον ἣν ἐπὶ τῷδε τῷ τάφῳ τότε κείρασθαι τῇ Ἑλλάδι καὶ
II. FUNERAL ORATION. 107
“ Ἀ > 4, / ε πενθῆσαι τοὺς ἐνθάδε κειμένους, ὡς συγκαταθα- πτομένης τῆς αὑτῶν ἐλευθερίας τῇ τούτων ἀρετῇ " ε Ν Ν δ᾽. 4 Ν 4 > ὃ “ 5 ὡς δυστυχὴς μὲν ἡ Ἑλλας τοιούτων ἀνὸρῶν op- Ν ’, 5 ἈΝ αι “A > ’ Ν φανὴ γενομένη, εὐτυχὴς δ᾽ ὁ τῆς ᾿Ασίας βασιλεὺς ἑτέρων ἡγεμόνων λαβόμενος - τῇ μὲν γὰρ τούτων , / Y ihe. ee > »¥ > στερηθείσῃ δουλεία περιέστηκε, τῷ δ᾽ ἄλλων ἀρ- ἕάντων ζῆλος ἐγγίνεται τῆς τῶν προγόνων δια- νοίας. ᾿Αλλὰ ταῦτα μὲν ἐξήχθην ὑπὲρ πάσης ὀλο- ὅτ φύρασθαι τῆς Ἑλλάδος - ἐκείνων δὲ τῶν ἀνδρῶν LE i ἰδί i ὃ ia μεμνῆσθαι, ot φεύ- ἄξιον καὶ ἰδίᾳ καὶ δημοσίᾳ μεμνῆσθαι, ot φεύ γοντες τὴν δουλείαν καὶ περὶ τοῦ δικαίου μαχό- μενοι καὶ ὑπὲρ τῆς δημοκρατίας στασιάσαντες, πάντας πολεμίους κεκτημένοι εἰς τὸν Πειραιᾶ κα- a 5 ε Ν ’ > 4 > > ε Ν τῆλθον, οὐχ ὑπὸ νόμου ἀναγκασθέντες, ἀλλ᾽ ὑπὸ τῆς φύσεως πεισθέντες, καινοῖς κινδύνοις τὴν πα- λαιὰν ἀρετὴν τῶν προγόνων μιμησάμενοι, ταῖς 62 ε “a - \ ‘ ’ὔ Ν Lal >” αὑτῶν ψυχαῖς κοινὴν τὴν πόλιν καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις κτησάμενοι, θάνατον μετ᾽ ἐλευθερίας αἱρούμενοι a ’ Ν ’ὔ 5» X29 lal -“ ἢ βίον μετὰ δουλείας, οὐχ ἧττον ταῖς συμφοραῖς αἰσχυνόμενοι ἢ τοῖς ἐχθροῖς ὀργιζόμενοι, μᾶλλον βουληθέντες ἐν τῇ αὑτῶν ἀποθνήσκειν ἢ ζῆν τὴν η ἢ νήσκειν ἢ ζῆν τὴ ἀλλοτρίαν οἰκοῦντες, συμμάχους μὲν ὅρκους καὶ συνθήκας ἔχοντες, πολεμίους δὲ τοὺς πρότερον ε la Ν ‘ ’ Ν ε “A > > ὑπάρχοντας Kal τοὺς πολίτας τοὺς ἑαυτῶν. ahd 63 ὅμως οὐ τὸ πλῆθος τῶν ἐναντίων φοβηθέντες, ἀλλ᾽ ἐν τοῖς σώμασι τοῖς ἑαυτῶν κινδυνεύσαντες, τρό- παιον μὲν τῶν πολεμίων ἔστησαν, μάρτυρας δὲ
108 Il. ἘΠΙΤΑΦΙΟΣ.
τῆς αὑτῶν ἀρετῆς ἐγγὺς ὄντας τοῦδε TOD μνήματος
τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίων τάφους παρέχονται. καὶ γάρ , A > Ν ΄“ 5 / Ν ,
TOL μεγάλην μὲν ἀντὶ μικρᾶς ἀπέδειξαν τὴν πόλιν,
ὁμονοοῦσαν δὲ ἀντὶ στασιαζούσης ἀπέφηναν, τεί-
ἈΝ 3 Ν ~ 4 > ” ε Ἀ
64 χη δὲ ἀντὶ τῶν καθηρημένων ἀνέστησαν. οἱ δὲ κατελθόντες αὐτῶν, ἀδελφὰ τὰ βουλεύματα τοῖς » “A > 4, 4 > , > > 4 ἔργοις τῶν ἐνθάδε κειμένων ἐπιδεικνύντες, οὐκ ἐπὶ
’ A“ > “Ὁ 3 > SN ’ A ’ τιμωρίαν τῶν ἐχθρῶν ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ σωτηρίαν τῆς πό- > ’ Ν » 5» > la) ¢ ews ἐτράποντο, καὶ οὔτ᾽ ἐλαττοῦσθαι δυνάμενοι ¥ 3 > Ν ’ ¥ , A Ν ε “Ὁ οὔτ᾽ αὐτοὶ πλέον ἔχειν δεόμενοι τῆς μὲν αὑτῶν ἐλευθερίας καὶ τοῖς βουλομένοις δουλεύειν μετέ-
“ $9 / / > Ν / > δοσαν, τῆς δ᾽ ἐκείνων δουλείας αὐτοὶ μετέχειν οὐκ > ’ » Ν ’ ‘\ ’,
65 ἠξίωσαν. ἔργοις δὲ μεγίστοις καὶ καλλίστοις ἀπελογήσαντο, ὅτι οὐ κακίᾳ τῇ αὑτῶν οὐδ᾽ ἀρετῇ τῶν πολεμίων πρότερον ἐδυστύχησεν ἡ TOUS? εἰ
Ν ’ Ν > ’ὔ ’ ’ὔ γὰρ στασιάσαντες πρὸς ἀλλήλους βίᾳ παρόντων wn ΕἾ a Ν Πελοποννησίων καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ἐχθρῶν εἰς τὴν e δὲ 24.»ὕ ΤΟΥ λθ “ δὴλ 9 ε δί αὑτῶν οἷοί τε ἐγίνοντο κατελθεῖν, δῆλον ὅτι ῥᾳδίως ἂν ὁμονοοῦντες πολεμεῖν αὐτοῖς ἐδύναντο.
6 Ἐκεῖνοι μὲν οὖν διὰ τοὺς ἐν Πειραιεῖ κινδύνους ε Ν ’ > 4 nw » de \ ὑπὸ πάντων ἀνθρώπων ζηλοῦνται: ἄξιον δὲ καὶ
‘4 , Ν > / 4 > 4, aA τοὺς ξένους τοὺς ἐνθάδε κειμένους ἐπαινέσαι, ot a 4 ’ Ἀ Ν Lal ε , τῷ πλήθει βοηθήσαντες καὶ περὶ τῆς ἡμετέρας
Ἁ ε , σωτηρίας μαχόμενοι, πατρίδα THY ἀρετὴν ἡγησά- μενοι, τοιαύτην τοῦ βίου τελευτὴν ἐποιήσαντο"
» ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ἡ πόλις αὐτοὺς καὶ ἐπένθησε καὶ ἔθαψε A σ΄
δημοσίᾳ, καὶ ἔδωκεν ἔχειν αὐτοῖς τὸν ἅπαντα χρόνον τὰς αὐτὰς τιμὰς τοῖς ἀστοῖς.
II. FUNERAL ORATION. 109
Οἱ δὲ viv θαπτόμενοι, βοηθήσαντες Κορινθίοις eek” A , LO 4 \ ΄ ὑπὸ παλαιῶν φίλων ἀδικουμένοις καινοὶ σύμμαχοι γενόμενοι, οὐ τὴν αὐτὴν γνώμην Λακεδαιμονίοις » ε Ν Ν “ > A > a > ’ ἔχοντες (οἱ μὲν γὰρ τῶν ἀγαθῶν αὐτοῖς ἐφθόνουν, ε ἈΝ 5 ia > Ν 5 ’, > “ ’ οἱ δὲ ἀδικουμένους αὐτοὺς ἠλέουν, οὐ τῆς προτέ- » ’ > Ν ᾿ A“ pas ἔχθρας μεμνημένοι, ἀλλὰ τὴν παροῦσαν φι- λίαν περὶ πολλοῦ ποιούμενοι) πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις Ν Ν ea 3 \ > 8 ΄ > of φανερὰν τὴν αὑτῶν ἀρετὴν ἐπεδείξαντο. ἐτόλμη- A ΄ La ‘ ε (ὃ > , σαν yap μεγάλην ποιοῦντες τὴν Ελλάδα ov μόνον ε Ν an δι ἊἱΝ 4 ὃ ’ 3 Ν Ν ὑπὲρ τῆς αὑτῶν σωτηρίας κινὸυνεύειν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ε A ἴω “ ’ 5 θ 4 > 0 , ὑπὲρ τῆς τῶν πολεμίων ἐλευθερίας ἀποθνήσκειν " τοῖς γὰρ Λακεδαιμονίων συμμάχοις περὶ τῆς ἐκεί- νων ἐλευθερίας ἐμάχοντο. νικήσαντες μὲν γὰρ 5 ’ ΄“- > A > ’ ὃ ’ Ν ’ ἐκείνους τῶν αὐτῶν ἠξίουν, δυστυχήσαντες δὲ βέ Δ \ ΄ A > a ΄ βαιον ἂν τὴν δουλείαν τοῖς ἐν τῇ Πελοποννήσῳ κατέλιπον. > 4 Ν > 4 ὃ ’ ε ’ Exéivois μὲν οὖν οὕτω διακειμένοις ὁ Bios > ‘ ἣν Ὁ 4 > ’ δὲ \ “ οἰκτρὸς καὶ ὁ θάνατος εὐκτός: οὗτοι δὲ καὶ ζῶν- ΣΝ , ΄ ὃ , \ > Tes καὶ ἀποθανόντες ζηλωτοί, παιδευθέντες μὲν ἐν τοῖς τῶν προγόνων ἀγαθοῖς, ἄνδρες δὲ γενόμενοι τήν τε ἐκείνων δόξαν διασώσαντες καὶ τὴν αὑτῶν > Ν > ὃ ’ lal Ν Ν Ν Aa ἀρετὴν ἐπιδείξαντες. πολλῶν μὲν yap καὶ καλῶν αἴτιοι γεγένηνται τῇ ἑαυτῶν πατρίδι, ἐπηνώρθω- δὲ Ν Δὲ δὲ ὃ θέ 4 8” σαν δὲ Ta ὑφ᾽ ἑτέρων δυστυχηθέντα, πόρρω ἀπὸ τῆς αὑτῶν τὸν πόλεμον κατέστησαν. ἐτελεύ- δὲ Ν ’ 9 - ‘ Ν > ‘ τησαν δὲ τὸν βίον, ὥσπερ χρὴ τοὺς ἀγαθοὺς ἀποθνήσκειν, τῇ μὲν γὰρ πατρίδι τὰ τροφεῖα 3 ὃ ΄ Vag de / ΄ ΄ ἀποδόντες, τοῖς δὲ θρέψασι λύπας καταλιπόντες.
67
69
7°
11O Il. EMITA®IOS.
71
72
73
74
7 ¥ A a , aA Ἀ A ὥστε ἄξιον τοῖς ζῶσι τούτους ποθεῖν καὶ σφᾶς > Ν 5 4 A Ν ’ > “~ αὐτοὺς ὀλοφύρεσθαι καὶ τοὺς προσήκοντας αὐτῶν > La) “A > ’ ld ’ Ν 5 “ » ἐλεεῖν τοῦ ἐπιλοίπου βίου. τίς γὰρ αὐτοῖς ἔτι ἡδονὴ καταλείπεται τοιούτων ἀνδρῶν θαπτομένων, ot πάντα περὶ ἐλάττονος τῆς ἀρετῆς ἡγούμενοι αὑτοὺς μὲν ἀπεστέρησαν βίου, χήρας δὲ γυναῖκας > ’ > Ν A Ν ε “ Ὁ“ 3 ’ ἐποίησαν, ὀρφανοὺς δὲ τοὺς αὑτῶν παῖδας ἀπέλι- » ’ > > Ν. \ 4 A 4 Tov, ἐρήμους δ᾽ ἀδελφοὺς καὶ πατέρας καὶ μητέ- 4 ΄“ Ἀ ἈΝ “ ε ρας κατέστησαν; Πολλῶν δὲ καὶ δεινῶν ὑπαρ- χόντων τοὺς μὲν παῖδας αὐτῶν ζηλῶ, ὅτι νεώτεροί
> x» ν 5 i ν , 5 ’, “ELOW Ἢ WOTE εἰδέναι οἰῶν TATEPWV EOTEPHVTAL,
> e 3 a , > , 9 , ἐξ ὧν δ᾽ οὗτοι γεγόνασιν, οἰκτείρω, ὅτι πρεσβύ- εὐ ὦ > , a , A Tepo. ἣ ὥστε ἐπιλαθέσθαι τῆς δυστυχίας τῆς ἑαυτῶν. τί γὰρ ἂν τούτων ἀνιαρότερον γένοιτο, ἢ τεκεῖν μὲν καὶ θρέψαι [καὶ θάψαι] τοὺς αὑτῶν, ἐν δὲ τῷ γήρᾳ ἀδυνάτους μὲν εἶναι τῷ σώματι, “ἢ > > 7 ~ > 4 » ’ πασῶν δ᾽ ἀπεστερημένους τῶν ἐλπίδων ἀφίλους καὶ ἀπόρους γεγονέναι, ὑπὸ δὲ τῶν αὐτῶν πρό- ΄“ A lal > al , τερον ζηλοῦσθαι καὶ νῦν ἐλεεῖσθαι, ποθεινότερον ᾽ > «A > Q , A , 9 ν δ᾽ αὐτοῖς εἶναι τὸν θάνατον τοῦ βίου; ὅσῳ γὰρ ἄνδρες ἀμείνους ἦσαν, τοσούτῳ τοῖς καταλειπομέ. \ , A A > > κ᾿ κ A ‘ vous TO πένθος μεῖζον. πῶς δ᾽ αὐτοὺς χρὴ λῆξαι τῆς λύπης ; πότερον ἐν ταῖς τῆς πόλεως συμφο- n > Ν , > A : ‘\ Ν » pais; ἀλλὰ τότε αὑτῶν εἰκὸς καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους ~ > > > ~ 5» ,ὔ A A μεμνῆσθαι. ἀλλ᾽ ἐν ταῖς εὐτυχίαις ταῖς κοιναῖς ; » > ε A Lal La! A ta 4 ἀλλ᾽ ἱκανὸν λυπῆσαι, τῶν μὲν σφετέρων τέκνων τετελευτηκότων, τῶν δὲ ζώντων ἀπολαυόντων τῆς , >. A 5 ᾽ » “ > ’ ’ὔ 9 τούτων ἀρετῆς. ἀλλ᾽ ἐν τοῖς ἰδίοις κινδύνοις, ὅταν
Il. FUNERAL ORATION. 111
ε aA \ Ν ’ 3, ’ , ὁρῶσι τοὺς μὲν πρότερον ὄντας φίλους φεύγοντας A ε a > ’ Ν > > Ν ’, τὴν αὑτῶν ἀπορίαν, τοὺς δ᾽ ἐχθροὺς μέγα φρο- νοῦντας ἐπὶ ταῖς δυστυχίαις ταῖς τούτων; Μόνην δ᾽ ἄν μοι δοκοῦμεν ταύτην τοῖς ἐνθάδε κειμένοις ἀποδοῦναι χάριν, εἰ τοὺς μὲν τοκέας αὐτῶν ὁμοίως Y a ‘ A ΄ θ \ δὲ ὥσπερ ἐκεῖνοι περὶ πολλοῦ ποιοίμεθα, τοὺς δὲ lal 7 3 ’ ν > Ν ’ παῖδας οὕτως ἀσπαζοίμεθα ὥσπερ αὐτοὶ πατέρες ΕἾ » A ἈΝ > ’ Ν ε “ ὄντες, ταῖς δὲ γυναιξὶν εἰ τοιούτους βοηθοὺς ἡμᾶς ~ Lal > αὐτοὺς παρέχοιμεν, οἷοίπερ ἐκεῖνοι ζῶντες ἦσαν. ΄, N x SoZ epee a a 9 θ ἊΝ τίνας γὰρ ἂν εἰκότως μᾶλλον τιμῷμεν τῶν ἐνθάδε κειμένων ; τίνας δ᾽ ἂν τῶν ζώντων δικαιότερον περὶ πολλοῦ ποιοίμεθα ἢ τοὺς τούτοις προσήκον- ἃ A Ν 4, 5 lal δ Ψ - » Tas, Ol τῆς μὲν τούτων ἀρετῆς TO ἴσον τοὶς ἄλλοις 4 ~ - ἀπέλαυσαν, ἀποθανόντων δὲ μόνοι γνησίως τῆς δυστυχίας μετέχουσιν. ᾿Αλλὰ γὰρ οὐκ οἶδ᾽ 6 τι δεῖ τοιαῦτα ὀλοφύρε- > Ν > 4, ε A > Ν 3», σθαι: οὐ γὰρ ἐλανθάνομεν ἡμᾶς αὐτοὺς ὄντες ’ὔ WA ’ “A A ’ “~ ’ θνητοί: ὥστε τί δεῖ, ἃ πάλαι προσεδοκῶμεν πεί- ey ΄ A ¥ x , Ψ σεσθαι, ὑπὲρ τούτων νῦν ἄχθεσθαι, ἢ λίαν οὕτω / / ὍΡΑ, “A A 4 A“ βαρέως φέρειν ἐπὶ ταῖς τῆς φύσεως συμφοραῖς, ἐπισταμένους ὅτι ὁ θάνατος κοινὸς καὶ τοῖς χειρί- στοις καὶ τοῖς βελτίστοις ; οὔτε γὰρ τοὺς πονη- Ν ε Led + » ἈΝ 3 ΥῪς ’ὔ 3 > povs ὑπερορᾷ οὔτε τοὺς ἀγαθοὺς θαυμάζει, ἀλλ ¥ Ν an ἴσον ἑαυτὸν παρέχει πᾶσιν. εἰ μὲν yap οἷόν τε > a Ν 5 A , , a Hv τοῖς τοὺς ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ κινδύνους διαφυγοῦσιν 10 ’ὔ > A ἈΝ , ΕἿΣ -“ ἀθανάτους εἶναι τὸν λοιπὸν χρόνον, ἄξιον τοῖς nw 9 nw “~ ζῶσι τὸν ἅπαντα χρόνον πενθεῖν τοὺς τεθνεῶτας "
“A δὲ 9 ’ Ἀ ld 4 Ν ΄ νῦν δὲ ἢ τε φύσις καὶ νόσων ἥττων καὶ γήρως,
75
76
78
712 Il. EMITA®PIOS.
79
80
81
9 4 ε Ἂς αν τ ’ “ὦ 3 Ἀ 3 ὅ τε δαίμων ὁ τὴν ἡμετέραν μοῖραν εἰληχὼς ἀπα- 9 ραίτητος. ὥστε προσήκει τούτους εὐδαιμονεστά- τους ἡγεῖσθαι, οἵτινες ὑπὲρ τῶν μεγίστων καὶ 4 , 9 Ν ’ > ” καλλίστων κινδυνεύσαντες οὕτω τὸν βίον ἐτελεύ- nw ~ τησαν, οὐκ ἐπιτρέψαντες περὶ αὑτῶν TH τύχῃ, > > > 4 Ν 5 ’ὔ ’ > > οὐδ᾽ ἀναμείναντες τὸν αὐτόματον θάνατον, ἀλλ 5 ’ Ν ’ Ν Ud > ’ ἐκλεξάμενοι τὸν κάλλιστον. καὶ γάρ τοι ἀγή- Ν > “~ ε A Ν Ν ε Ἃ ’ ρατοι μὲν αὐτῶν αἱ μνῆμαι, ζηλωταὶ δὲ ὑπὸ πάν- 3 ’ ε 4 ἃ lal Ν Ν των ἀνθρώπων ai τιμαί: ot πενθοῦνται μὲν διὰ Ἀ ’ ε ’, ε A Ν ε > , τὴν φύσιν ws θνητοί, ὑμνοῦνται δὲ ws ἀθάνατοι διὰ ΤΥ > 4 Ν ’ὔ θ ’ δὴ ’ nv ἀρετήν. καὶ γάρ τοι θάπτονται δημοσίᾳ, Ν 3 “Ὁ / δι. > “A \ Ae of \ ’ καὶ ἀγῶνες τίθενται ἐπ᾿ αὐτοῖς ῥώμης καὶ σοφίας Ν ’ ε 3 ’ὔ κέ Ν 5 “~ / Kal πλούτου, ws ἀξίους ὄντας τοὺς ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ ΄“ nw “ ‘ ‘ τετελευτηκότας ταῖς αὐταῖς τιμαῖς καὶ τοὺς ἀθα- νάτους τιμᾶσθαι. ἐγὼ μὲν οὖν αὐτοὺς καὶ μακα- 7 “A ’ Ν ~*~ Ν ’ ’ ρίζω τοῦ θανάτου καὶ ζηλώ, καὶ μόνοις τούτοις > a > 9 ἀνθρώπων οἶμαι κρεῖττον εἶναι γενέσθαι, οἵτινες, A 4, ἐπειδὴ θνητῶν σωμάτων ἔτυχον, ἀθάνατον μνήμην ἴω -ν Be ΄ διὰ τὴν ἀρετὴν αὑτῶν κατέλιπον " ὅμως δ᾽ ἀνάγκη a “Ὁ Ν τοῖς ἀρχαίοις ἔθεσι χρῆσθαι, καὶ θεραπεύοντας Ν 4 , ? ’ \ ’, τὸν πάτριον νόμον ὀλοφύρεσθαι τοὺς θαπτομέ. νους.
NOTES.
ABBREVIATIONS.
BAW ancien adverb, adverbial, etc.
Ua Opa ee agree, agreeing, etc.
ChE Ts ae τε νον CLAUSE.
Class. Dict... .. Anthon’s Classical Dictionary.
πα ΡΑΕ ΤΕ ἘΡῚ ἊἋ depend, dependent, etc.
Dict. Ant. ..,. Smith’s Dictionary of Greek and Roman Antiquities, 3d Amer. Ed. Dict. Geog.. ... Smith’s Dictionary of Greek and Roman Geography.
BAS σα, τος Ὁ ς editor, edition, and the plural,
CAIV Ss οτος equivalent.
ROU iecieer sn: follow, following, etc.
Frohb....-.. , ἡ Frohberger.
G. or Goodw, .. Goodwin’s Greek Grammar; Rev. Ed. 1892. Gr. Moods .... Goodwin’s Greek Moods and Tenses, H. ....+..+... Hadley and Allen’s Greek Grammar.
ind. disc....... indirect discourse.
ANGLO τον ss introduce, introducing, etc.; also, Introduction.
PGND, το τους Kiihner’s Greek Grammar; Edwards and Taylor’s translation.
ROD aaah hale Liddell and Scott’s Greek Lexicon; the 6th Ed., when referred to, e is expressly named.
ee eae literal, literally.
part., partt..... participle, participles.
Pear feiss i’ predicate.
Publ. Econ. ... Boeckh’s Public Economy of the Athenians; Lamb’s translation. TRAM ΚἈΝ ΨΚ ΔΝ Rauchenstein.
AE ICE refer, referring, etc.
Rete se aks 85-4 relative.
AS ae sentence,
ee synonym, synonymous, etc. Ae re tS
a Westermann.
NOTES ON ORATION XIL.
In connection with Orations XII. and XIII. the student should read, if possible, Chap. LXV. in Grote’s History of Greece, “ From the Battle of Arginusz to the Restoration of the Democracy of Athens after the Expulsion of the Thirty”; also Chap. 1. Book V. of Curtius’s History of Greece, “ Athens under the Thirty.” The articles “ Dicasterion” and “ Dicastes,” in Dict. Ant., explain briefly the constitu- tion of the Athenian Heliastic courts; see also Grote, Vol. IV., p. 140 seg., and Vol. V., p. 378 seg. In the title ὅν has λόγος understood for its anteced.
1. ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, judges; Eng. gentlemen of the jury; H. 625, a. As tothe use of ἄνδρες, see the faulty rendering in the Eng. version of Acts vii. 2; κατηγ.: H. 738; 6. 1099. — mauve. λέγοντι, Zo leave off speaking, H. 981; G. 1580. The part. agr. with μοί instead of the subj. of mavo., H. 941; Goodw. 928, 1. — αὐτοῖς: H. 769; 6. 1186; péye- Qos, πλῆθος: accus. of specif.; elpy. (ἐργάζομαι) : passive, as also in § 37. — ὥστε!. κατ., so that not even if one should utter falsehood would he be able to bring more terrible accusations than the existing ones; ἄν belongs with δύνασθαι. On yevd., see H. 969, ἃ; G. 1563, 5, — εἰπεῖν has rad. for its obj. and is understood with ἅπαντα. --- ἀνάγκη : subj. of (ἐστί), and having the foll. infinitives dep. on it; tr. oz the contrary, either the accuser must fail from exhaustion, or the time run short.
2. πεισ. (πάσχω), to be about to experience the opposite of (what we have experienced in) “mes past; évavr. has a compar. force, hence foll. by %, than; πρὸ τοῦ, before this, former, here used as adj.; cf. H. 655, d; G. 984. The contrast referred to is explained in what follows, i. e. there is on this occasion no need for the accuser to explain the motive of the prosecution, ¢he occasion of enmity (ἔχθραν). In τὴν ἔχθ., notice the pro- lepsis, H. 878. The terms usually applied to parties in a trial are :
ὁ διώκων, the prosecutor, the complainant ; cf. in Scotch law “ pursuer.” ὁ κατηγορῶν, the accuser, he who makes the accusing speech. ὁ φεύγων, the accused, the defendant.
— εἴη : opt. of ind. disc., H. 932,2; G. 1481, 2. ἥτις... €., what ground of enmity they had towards the state. — ἀνθ᾽ ὅτον.. .. ἔτολ,, that they dared ;
116 NOTES ON ORATION XII.
_a causal clause, this rel. phrase being freq. used as a causal conj. — τοὺς i. ποιοῦμαι, 7 make my plea, speak what I have to say ; ποιοῦμαι, mid., is thus freq. used in the Attic orators as syn. with λέγω ; see XXII. 1, 3, 13 e¢ αἰ. ὡς is used with the part. to denote an assigned or supposed cause: 7102, however, that I argue as one who ts without private grievances and in- jwies, H. 978; Goodw. 1574. —épy{. dep. on ἀφθον.; freely, as if all had abundant reason to be indignant.
3. otre...mpdtas, having never conducted a case either for myself or an- other ; πράγματα, business, here, as often in judicial orations, has specific ref. to business in court, hence @ cause, a case. ‘The fact here stated is for us the special point of interest in the introduction. The rest is in the routine style common to the judicial oratory of the time. — κατέστην, being used with πολλάκις, is better rendered by our perfect, H. 837. — ph... ποιήσωμαι : H. 887; G. 1378. --- ds... &ax., as briefly as Tecan; an adv. cl. dep. on δίδαξαι, H. 916; G. 1434.— διδάξαι, Zo znform you (of the facts); the latter object of the verb is easily supplied from the con- text, and thus omitted in the Greek.
4. οὑμός: H. 76,aandb; G. 43 and 45; cf. τοὐναντίον, above. — οὐδενί, after ἐδικ. as indir. obj., esther bring suit against any one or sustain α suit, This was much to say in the Athens of that time. Notice the current judicial phrases: δίκην τινὶ δικάζεσθαι, to bring any one to trial; δίκην φεύγειν, to be brought to trial. —8ypoxp., temporal, while the democ- racy continued, that is, up to the time of the overthrow of the democratic constitution by the Thirty.
5. κατέστησαν, 2d aor., were placed in office ; μέν and δέ serve to con- trast the two participial phrases, both used attributively. — καθαρὰν, x. τ. Δ.» to purify the state, a fair phrase to gloss foul work ; doubtless well worn in the mouths of the revolutionists. Their’ method of purification is but too well known to the student of this period of Athenian history. Revolutions in other Greek states were attended with even greater cruelties. Observe the pres. tense of the part., denoting its repetition. — πολύτας : subj. of τραπέσθαι. --- λέγοντες resumes the preceding with an adversative force, although they said ; οὐ.. «ποιεῖν ἐτόλμων, they were not the men to do; Tod- μᾶν and τλῆναι foll. by an infin. have a variety of meanings similar to this, depending on the connection in which they are used: το have the spirit to, to bring one’s self to, etc. See L. ἃ S. — ἀναμνῆσαι : (ἀναμιμνήσκω).
6. Theognis,mentioned by Xenophon as one of the Thirty, was also a tragic poet. We know him mainly by what Lysias here recounts, and by Aristophanes’s ridicule of his frigid and dreary iambics. Of Piso little is known save his membership in the Thirty and the events here related. γάρ : epexegetic, generally to be omitted in Eng. — ἐν rots τριάκοντα, 77 the sessions of the Thirty. — dev: H. 932, 2. G. 1487. --- τῇ πολιτείᾳ, “he
AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 117
administration, i. e. the existing form of government. — καλλίστην... πρό- φασιν, that there was, therefore, a most excellent pretext ; Soxeiv and xpnp. depend on πρόφασιν, H. 952; G. 1521. — πάντως δέ, but at any rate.
7. περὶ οὐδενὸς ἡγοῦντο, they considered of no consequence ; wept...iyet- σθαι and περὶ... ποιεῖσθαι are syn. expressions, see Lex. περί ; περί is used thus with certain genitives to denote estimated worth, e. g. πολλοῦ, πλείονος, πλείστου, ἐλάττονος ; cf. Jelf, 632, 2, g. — ἔδοξεν οὖν αὐτοῖς, they resolved therefore. —avrois, poss. dat., tr. that they might have, etc.; for ἦ in subj. see H. 881,a; G. 1369. --- πέπρακται, γεγένηται : render by the Eng. pluperf. Why? — ὥσπερ... πεποιηκότες : the part. agrees with the logical subj. implied in αὐτοῖς 7 = ἔχωσι, H. 1063; cf. Kriiger, 56, 9, 4; tr. as if they had done anything else justifiably ; εὐλόγως, justifiably, with any good reason to show for tt.
8. διαλαβόντες, simply Aeving assigned, or, allotted, that is, those to which they should go; no special ref. to the appropriation to their own use, as if it were an indir. mid. — ἐβάδιζον, they went their way. —éorr- ὥντα: H. 982; G. 1582. καταλαμβάνω is often used in the sense of to come upon, meet, find ; cf. §§ 13 and 31. --- τὸ -ἐργαστ., the factory, i.e. ours; H. 658; Goodw. 949. This was the shield manufactory, and con- nected with Lysias’s dwelling in the Pirezus. Not less than 120 slaves were employed in it at the time, as will be observed in the narrative far- ther on.— βούλοιτο: indir. qu, H. 932, 2; G. 1487. What would the direct form be?—e πολλὰ εἴη, (that he would) if there were much ; changed from the direct form ἐὰν... ἢ, because after a verb of past time.
9,10. ἠπιττάμην μὲν οὖν, ow 7 knew, etc. — νομίζει, that he regarded ; H. 932, 1;G. 1487.—AaPety: subj. of εἶναι ; H. 945; G.1517.— ἐπαρώμενος (ἐπαράομαι) : imprecating; used adv. to state a circumstance additional to ὥμοσεν, H. 968: G. 1563, 3-— λαβών may be taken as used conditionally, if he should receive, or, on condition of receiving. — τάλαντον : τό de- fines τάλαντον as something previously referred to; cf. H. 657, a. The student should notice carefully the various uses of the article in this section. — κιβωτός, chest; the Eng. word ark, e. g. Noah’s ark, the ark of the covenant, is κιβωτός in the Greek of the Septuagint and the NV. Ζ:
II. οὐκ... ὠὠμολογ. : notice the position of the neg.; it belongs to the rel. cl. and is to be tr. #o¢ only, as the foll. ἀλλά shows. — κυζικηνούς, Cys:- cenes, staters of Cyzicus, a gold currency named from the place where minted. Give the deriv. of δαρεικούς. Estimating the silver drachma as = about 20 cents, we may reckon the Attic talent roundly as = $1200. The Cyzicene gold piece = 28 drachmas; the Daric, a little more. The entire sum seized amounted therefore to more than $6400. How large a sum this was at that time may be understood by a comparison of prices as given in Boeckh’s Pudi. Econ., Ch. X. seg. Prices were higher in Athens
118 NOTES ON ORATION XII.
than anywhere else in Greece, but even there it is estimated that $ 25 would meet the year’s outlay for an economical citizen for food, clothes, and house- rent. An ox could be bought for from $10 to $20; wheat in Lysias’s time probably averaged over two drachme per bushel. For convenience is sub- joined the following
TABLE OF ATTIC MONEY.
1Chalcis = less than ἃ cent. 8 Chalci = 1 Obolus, about 34 cents. 6 Oboli = 1 Drachma, a 20. too Drachmze = 1 Mina, τ $20. 60 Mine = 1 Talent, fe $1200.
Cf. Dict. Ant., “ Aes,” ‘‘ Drachma,” ‘ Talent.” — φιάλας, godleds ; hence our ‘‘vial,” a differently shaped vessel. The Greek φιάλη was a broad- mouthed drinking-vessel. — ἀγαπήσειν.. σώσω : in the direct form both verbs would be indic. fut.; as if: you will get off well, if you save, etc.
12. πρὸς... θύραις, just at the gate; this was the main entrance to both the house and factory. Melobios and Mnesithides, leaving the factory, met them as they were coming from Lysias’s dwelling. These two were also members of the Thirty. — ὅπῃ B., where we are going. What would the direct form be in Greek? — εἰς. ἐμοῦ, τὺ my brother's; H. 730, a; cf. G. 953. The idiom in Eng. is the same as in Greek ; cf. εἰς Δαμνίπ- mov, below. Frohb. has εἰς τὰ τοῦ, x. τ. X., to my brother's place. — oné- Ψψηται; H. 881,a; G. 1369. Coming to plunder, they called it “‘search.” — βαδίζειν : as in ὃ 8.
13.. προσελθὼν... μοι maper., came to me and exhorted me. In many such cases the Greek part. is equiv. to a co-ordinate verb in Eng. It is the circumstantial part. denoting a preliminary or attendant action. In tr. it should be observed how often our language replaces the Greek part. by a finite verb or clause. — ὡς... ἐκεῖσε, since he was to come there; the part. is causal, and ws represents the exhortation as founded on what was in the mind of the speaker. — @...@xovro, 20 whom they delivered me and were off again; H. 827 ; Goodw. 1256. —év τοιούτῳ, ix such (peril); κινδυ- νεύειν, fo risk something, to run some risk; it has an indef. object. — 03... ἤδη, considering that death certainly was already at hand; the infin. is used as subst. with the art. in gen, abs.; the part. denotes cause; ὡς is used as above.
14. τάδε, as follows ; notice the succession of abrupt clauses spoken in haste and terror. — τὴν ofv: H. 675; cf. τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ τοῦ ἐμοῦ, above. —ratra πάσχοντί μοι, mow that 7 am suffering these things ; πρόθυμον usually is an adj. applied to persons, here agrees with duv.; render freely : zealously do what is in your power. — μνησθῆναι, 20 mention ; this aor., it
AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 119
will be remembered, has a mid. meaning. — διδοίη : indir. form for the subj. with ἐάν, H. 932, 2, a; G.1497; ἅπαν, everything, anything, in a dis- tributive sense, as πᾶν in ὃ 84. The reader will perhaps recall little Paul’s question in Dombey and Son: ‘* Money, Paul, can do anything.” “ Any- thing means everything, doesn’t it, Papa?”
15. οἰκίας : after ἔμπειρος, H.753,d; G. 1140; γάρ here does not introduce a reason for what goes before, but a parenthetical explanation of what follows : now J happened, etc.; &ppl0.: witha rear as well as a front entrance. — ταύτῃ, iz this way, i.e. availing himself of this result of his own observation, rather than of the intervention of Damnippus. — ἐὰν... σω- θήσομαι : this cond. sent. retains jts direct form ; then a new constr. begins with the infinitives ἀφεθησ. and ἀποθαν. dep. on ἡγούμην. The analysis of it may be represented as follows :
, ι a i μὲν.. «λαβεῖν, οὐδὲν ἧττον ἀφεθήσεσθαι 0 δέ, ἐὰν And sale Ayotway δέ, POH, a δὲ μή, ὁμοίως ἀποθανεῖσθαι.
--- ἀφεθήσεσθαι (ἀφίημι), that I should none the less be released.
16. τὴν >. ποιουμ., keeping guard, The αὔλειος θύρα is the front en- trance to the house, usually a folding door, opening into the vestibule or covered way leading to the court. See Dict. Ant., ‘House (Greek),” and the diagram there given. Of the three doors mentioned in the next sen- tence, two were inside and one a rear door communicating with the street. -- οὐσῶν : the circumst. part., equiv. to a parenthetic cl. of preliminary explanation ; ἂς...διελθεῖν, wich 7 had to pass through ; ἀνεῳγ. (ἀνοίγνυμι) : H. 984; G. 1586.— εἰς "Apx.: cf. εἰς Δαμνίππου, ὃ 12; ἄστυ: art. omitted; H. 661. Ref. to the upper city, it has the force of a proper name, as e.g. “ The City,” now only a part of London. — ἀπαγάγοι, has led.
17. Μεγαράϑδε: H. 217; G.293. — τὸ... παράγγελμα, their customary notice ; ὑπ᾽ ἐκείνων, lit. by them, is after an implied pass. (παραγγέλεσθαι) dep. on the part. Some edd. have it ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνων. The cup of hemlock- juice was in Athens the usual means of inflicting capital punishment upon citizens; it is implied here that when a warrant was served by thé Thirty it was usually a death-warrant. Cf. note on §96.— πρὶν... εἰπεῖν : dep. on παρήγγειλαν : H. 955, Ὁ; G.1470.— οὕτω... ἀπολογ., so much did he lack, or, more freely, so far was he from being tried, etc. The infinitives after ἐδέησε take the place of an obj. acc.
18. οἰκῶν : H. 971, c; G. 1563, 6; 1568. How much stress was laid on funeral ceremonies in Athens may be seen from Becker’s Charicles, Ex- cursus on ‘‘ Burials.’’ The corpse, arrayed in white, usually lay for one day before burial in the front part of the house. The terms designating the laying-out (πρόθεσις) and the funeral procession (ἐκφορά) correspond to the
120 NOTES ON ORATION XII.
verbs here used. —atrotow : not the same as τοῖς αἰτοῦσιν, but agr. with αὐὖ- τοῖς understood, referring to the friends mentioned afterwards, δ his friends who requested them. — ὃ δὲ.. ἔτυχεν : sc. δούς governing ὅτι : may be ren- dered and each of the others contributed as it happened ; the last obj. of ἔδωκεν is the clause.
19. τῶν ἡμετέρων, probably neut., of our property ; H.621,b; G.932, 1. - χαλκόν : for use in the shield factory. — ὅσα... κτήσασθαι, more than they ever thought of getting ; notice the Greek idiom as many as never, for more than ever ; it is found in Demos. Olynth., I. 9 and 19, and frequently elsewhere ; κτήσασθαι is a timeless infin., neither the time nor the duration of the action being thought of; cf. Gr. Moods, ὃ 96; H. 851. —éls ro- σαύτην.. ἀφίκοντο, weit so ,ar in their greed, etc.; it is foll. by καὶ... ἐποιή- σαντο, that they made, etc., which is equiv. to a cl. of conseq., though grammatically co-ordinate ; γάρ then introduces an explanatory instance, justifying the assertion. Frohb. takes a different view of this constr., as also of XIII. 80, making the cl. of conseq. implied by τοσαύτην to be introd. afterwards by yap. — ὅτε τὸ πρῶτον, as soon as; cf. Lat. guum pri- mum; does this clause limit the preceding or the following verb ?— ὦτων : H. 181; 116, 15; Goodw. 291, 27; 128. --- The outrage by Melobius, if we may trust Lysias’s statement, does indeed illustrate the way things were done under the Thirty, and the personal traits of at least one of these καλοὶ κἀγαθοί. Still more worth attention is the hurried inventory here given of the personal property found on the estate of a wealthy Athenian resident. A large part of it consisted of slave workmen. Thus also the father of Demosthenes owned fifty slaves, mostly employed in the sword factory. The institutions and social life of the Athenian state can be but imperfectly comprehended by one who does not bear in mind that it was mainly a com- munity of slaves. According to the census of the population of Attica taken about three centuries B. C., there were 21,000 free citizens, 10,000 resident foreigners, and 400,000 slaves. Concerning the price and treatment of slaves, interesting details will be found in Becker’s Charicles, Excursus VII. Closely connected with this state of things was the growing contempt of manual labor and trade by the Athenians and Greeks generally, as unworthy of a freeman, —a contempt which in the time of the Roman dominion set them to living by their wits, and made them the sharpers and adventurers of the ancient world. ;
20, 21. κατά, in respect to; ἐλέου: H. 739; G. 1099.— οὐκ ἄν be- long with an ind. understood, as others would not have done; ἔχοντες con- tains the condition implied by ἄν, and the’phrase may be rendered, had they been indignant at, or, on account of indignation at.—ob...8vTas, who certainly did not deserve this ; a falling circumflex on deserve will show the kind of emphasis intended by γέ. --- πόλει : after ἄξιος ; H. 771; G. 1172. The
AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 121
foll. partt. are attrib., like ὄντας. Notice the appropriate difference of their tenses. The services here mentioned were the chief civil functions devolving upon a wealthy Athenian in private life; they are often referred to in orations. As to what the choregy, ‘he maintenance of a chorus, was, see Dict. Ant., *‘ Choragus.” — κεκτημένους : H. 849; Goodw. 1263. — Then follows the abrupt exclamation, — notice the absence of a connective, — such treatment did they deem us worthy of; pero. agr. with ἡμᾶς under- stood atter ἠξ., lit. 20¢ being metics in like manner as, etc.; the thought is, we served the state better as resident-foreigners, than ¢#ey did as citizens. — ἀτάφους ἐποίησαν : why was it considered one of the greatest of crimes among the Greeks to leave the dead unburied? See Dict, Anz, ‘‘ Funus.” —<dripous...xatert., deprived of the rights of citizenship, disfranchised ; πόλεως : H. 753, c; G. 1140.
22. τόλμης : H. 730, e; G.1088.— ἥκουσιν ἀπ., they are here to defend themselves; that is, in the person of Eratosthenes and his advocates. — ἐβουλόμην dv: H. 903; Gr. Moods, 246; compare also 425. And 7 would that they were speaking the truth; éy is emphatic ; ἐβουλόμην ἄν (often with ἄν omitted), almost exactly corresponds to the Eng. wozdd, pret. of wz//, that is used to express a present wish for that which is not or can- not be. — μέρος : subj. of μετῆν, which is not impers. here; 207 (in that case) the largest share...would fall, etc.; no one would have been benefited more than myself, had they refrained from the crimes charged against them. See Jelf’s Greek Grammar, 535, Obs. 1, for a fuller explanation of the con- struction here employed.
23. νῦν δέ, dut as it is; cf. ὃ 29; so νυνί, XIII. 22. — αὐτοῖς... ὑπ᾿, neither...do such things belong to them as regards the city, etc., i. 6. they are not entitled to any such plea. — ἀπέκτεινεν, £2//ed, was the means of his death ; the word as used in the Attic courts allowed this latitude. — προθύ- pos ἐξ., willingly acting in obedience to his own lawlessness.
24. ἀναβιβ... ἐρέσθαι, to have him mount the witness-stand and to inter- rogate him. Either party in a suit had the right to interrogate the opposing party, or his witnesses. They were obliged to answer. How effectually, by means of the cross-examination, Socrates disposed of the charge brought by one of his accusers may be seen in Plato’s Afol., Ch. 12; cf. Orat. XXII. 5; also XIII. 30, 32, where the record of the questions and — answers is omitted. The witness-stand (πόδιον) stood off on one side from the speaker’s platform (βῆμα). --- τοιαύτην γάρ : rhetorically introducing the justification of his holding any converse with his brother’s murderer, allud- ing to the custom by which the surviving relative religiously abstained even from mentioning the murderer’s name in conversation. — τούτου : i. 6. Era- tosthenes ; mpds...8tadey., even to converse with another concerning him ; diadey. subj. of εἶναι, of which ἀσεβές is pred. — kal... τοῦτον, even (to
122 ΝΟΤΕΒ ON ORATION XII.
converse) with this one himself; ὅσιον and εὐσεβές agr. with the inf. understood.
25. δεδιώς, out of fear ; H. 969,b; Greek Moods, 838. — συνηγόρενες, did you concur. — ἀποθάνωμεν : H. 881,2; G. 1369. — τοῖς κελεύουσιν : Theognis, Piso, and others referred to in ὃ 6. — ἡγούμενος, πάσχειν : what time denoted? force of the pres. tense? H. 851; Gr. Afoods, 117 and 139.
26. εἶτα, 4 orator’s word, appropriately begins the indignant questions ; used twice in this section. τὸ πλῆθος, cre majority; used differently in ὃ 42; σωτηρίας : after κύριον, H. 753,5; G. 1140. --- ἐπὶ ool...éyev., 77 depended upon you; L. ἃ S., IV. 2. --- καὶ σῶσαι.. καὶ μὴ (σῶσαρ) : since these are alternatives, it accords better with Eng. usage to say whether...or. — ἀξιοῖς, do you claim? χρηστός, here specifically, zzsocent, more freq. with the larger signif., good, worthy. — ἀντειπών, συλλαβών, denote means partly; H. 969, a; G. 1563. The thought: Do you claim merit on account of an ineffectual remonstrance, and at the same time evade responsi- bility for the arrest which procured his death? — δοῦναι : cf. κτήσασθαι, ὃ 19. τουτοισί; H. 274; G. 412.
27. τοῦτο: obj. of mior., ref. to ws...mpocerdxOn. Observe the differ- ence of the Greek idiom, delieve this to him, from the Eng. believe him in this. — οὐ... ἐλάμβανον : an obscure sentence. As Rauch. and Frohb, understand it : for not in the case of the metics, surely, were they going to take a guaranty from him. The Thirty took pains to implicate in their crimes as many prominent citizens as possible, thus making them interested as a matter of personal safety in the continuance of the oligarchy. They ordered Socrates, for instance, to take part in the arrest of Leon. The speaker, then (according to the interpretation mentioned above), means to assert that this proceeding against the metics was evidently not one in which the Thirty would force Eratosthenes to guarantee his fidelity. On the impf., cf. H. 832; Greek Moods, 56. --- ἣ.. ἐτύγχανε, than just (γέ) the one who chanced to have opposed ; τῷ : interrog. pron.; προσταχ. is subj.
28. τῶν yeyev., of what has been done; ἱκανὴ... πρόφασις... ἀναφέρειν, α sufficient excuse for throwing the blame upon, etc., H. 952; G. 1521 ; cf. § 6. — σφᾶς αὐτούς : Eratosthenes would have said, and rightly : They do not inculpate ¢hemselves, but one another, ἀλλήλους. The orator uses the fallacy of division and composition, so called ; it should be said, how- ever, that the reflexive may be used in a reciprocal sense ; cf. H. 686, Ὁ ; G. 996.
29. εἰ.. ἣν, if there had been; H. 895,a; Greek Moods, 410; ‘* The context must decide to which time the imperf. refers,” whether past or present. — αὐτῆς, “han ilse/f, i. e. the ἀρχή of the Thirty. Is αὐτός ever properly a demonstrative equiv. to éiis or that? cf. Goodw. 1007, Observe that αὐτῆς is not the antec. of ἧς. --- viv δέ, but as it is; cf. § 23; whom
AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 123
pray WILL you punish? the intensive force of καί, which belongs on Any., is best reproduced in Eng. by emphasizing the auxiliary. Cf. XXIV. 12, τί γὰρ av καὶ ἔλεγεν, for what WOULD ke say? Also Thuc., I. 15, 2.
30. καὶ μὲν δή, furthermore ; joining a new argument to those already adduced in the preceding three sections ; μέν in this phrase = μήν. The phrases καὶ μήν, καὶ μὲν δή, and καὶ μὲν δὴ καί are of freq. occurrence in the orators ; μήν and δή are both confirmative ; δή has the force of 2 particu- lar, especially, and singles out for special attention what is thus introduced. - παρόν: H.973,a; Greek Moods, 851; σώζειν is used in a double sense : both to save him and to keep, etc. So Plato, σώζειν τοὺς νόμους, to keep the Jaws. Keeping to the letter of the decree, — this seems the meaning, — he was not required to arrest him anywhere except in his house. — ὅσοι : its antec. the obj. of ὀργεΐ.
31. τοῖς.. ἀπολέσασι, those who destroy; cf. κτήσασθαι, ὃ 19, and the note ; ἐκείνοις : Athenians ref. to in ὃ 28, who engaged in these outrages under constraint of the Thirty. — κίνδυνος, k. τ. A., for ἐέ was dangerous to them when sent, etc.; apv. as pred. adj. agrees with the dat. understood after ἣν ; ἐξ, γεν. = to deny. —€wara, in the next place (to say). — ὥστε introduces εἶναι ; οἷός τε: see L. ἃ S., III. 2. — βουλομένων, wishing it, or, wish tt as they might; ταῦτα refers to εἶδεν. Eratosthenes, had he so desired, might have avoided meeting the victim; or, had he met him, no one could have proved that he had seen him.
32. χρῆν...σέ, you ought ; on this and similar verbs, as used in the apo- dosis without ἄν, see Gr. Moods, 415, and especially p. 410, where the constr. here an in ὃ 48 are compared. This seems to me, however, to be a case of the first class, and thus different from the sentence in § 48. You say you were a good man; granted; it was your duty, then, to forewarn innocent men who were in danger of death. In § 48 the truth of the claim is not thus (for the sake of the argument) admitted. — μηνυτήν : here, as in ὃ 48, used in its good sense. — av. γεγένηται, have become manifest ; more freely, are manifestly not those of one displeased, etc. — τοῖς γιγνομένοις : cf. τῶν γεγενημένων, § 28, and explain the time denoted in each case.
33. Wajdov: observe the connection of this word with ψήφισμα, decree. λαμβάνοντας agrees with τούσδε, and its obj. is ταῦτα understood antec. of &; taking as proofs of what was said at that time (τῶν τότε dey.) that which . they know to have been αἴογεδ. ---- τεκμήρια is the word rendered in our ver- sion of Acts i. 3, ‘‘infallible proofs.” — παρεῖναι, Zo de present ; i. 6. at the sessions of the Thirty. παρ᾽ αὑτοῖς, αΖ home, i.e. in our country; H. 686; Goodw. 995. — ἐπί, in the power of; cf. ἐπὶ σοί, ὃ 26. eipyac., after having wrought ; notice that this is not an attrib. part.; why not?
34. οὐ φεύγω, 7 do not evade. The asserted remonstrance shall have due weight given it, though, as I have shown, the Thirty took effectual
124 NOTES ON ORATION XII.
precautions against the possibility of any counter-testimony. — συνειπών, if you had concurred ; condit.; ἀντειπεῖν φάσκων : equiv. to a concess. cl., as if to say, despite your asserted remonstrance. — φέρε δὴ, τί ἂν (ἐποιήσατε), come now, what would you do, addressed to the judges. καὶ... καί are not co-ordinate, but each gives emphasis to the word following it. — ἀπεψηφ. (sc. ἄν), would you acquit him? The question being what they would do now, on a certain supposition, we should perhaps expect the imperf. instead of the aor.; but the action seems in this case merely conceived of by the speaker as such, without special regard either to its time or continuance ; H. 895, a; likewise in regard to ἐποίησας, above. — θάτερον : H. 77, ἃ, and 82; G. 46; and 93. — ὁμολόγηκεν : in ὃ 25.
35. καὶ μὲν δή: cf. § 30. --- εἰσόμενοι, in order to ascertain; τούτων includes the others of the Thirty. — oi... ὄντες, those who are, is the subj.; ἀπίασιν: H.828,a; Goodw. 1257. μαθόντες is not temporal, but de- notes a condition or circumstance of the subj., or the occasion of the action; H. 967; Gr. Moods, 836 and 843.— ὧν ἂν ἐξαμ., whatever offences they com- mit ; strictly, shall have committed ; ὧν for τούτων &; H. 996, a; G. 1031, and 1032.— πράξαντες. .. ἐφίενται, if they succeed in what they aimat; dv: H. 739; G. ἡ 1099 ; ὑμῖν: after ἴσον, H. 773; G.1175. Lysias insists that the trial is to teach a political lesson, — whether an unsuccessful attempt to overthrow the government is to be held in Athens as ἃ failure merely, or also as a crime. —8o0t... ἐπιδ., the strangers who are staying here, i.e. Greeks from other cities. — éxxnp., ave excluding by proclamation, The remnant of the Thirty and such of their adherents as still followed their fortunes were at this time standing at bay in Eleusis ; but some of the number had, it would seem, sought refuge in other Grecian cities. — λαβόντες, having had them in custody. — σφᾶς αὐτοὺς... περιέργους, that they take needless pains.
36. ϑεινόν agrees with the remainder of the sentence, in which, however, there is a break in the construction, beginning with οὐκ dpa, so that τούτους, which begins the second number of the conditional cl., has no verb. The clause εἰ.. ἀποκτιννύναι is really subst., — condit. only in form; εἰ fre- quently introduces such clauses after words expressive of wonder, surprise, etc., and thus is equiv. to “that”; Gr. Moods, 494; Kiihner, 329, R. 7. — οἷοί te: agr. with subj. of εἶναι, H. 940; Goodw. οΟ27. --- τοὺς ἐκ τ΄ θ..- the survivors, and the bodies of the dead left on the disabled Athenian vessels after the battle of Arginusz, B. Cc. 406. Six of the ten generals were put to death. Cf. Smith’s Hist. of Greece, Ch. XXXII. —dperq: dat. of adv. after λαβεῖν ; for other exx. of the dat. thus used to express out of respect to, in honor to, the gods, for instance, see Kiihner’s Ausf. Gr., 11. Ρ. 366. — érolnoay...vavpay., caused (you) to be defeated in a naval battle ; the battle of ASgospotami, — a disaster very generally attributed at the time to the corrupt connivance of some of the generals belonging to the oligarchic
AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 125
party. — ἀποκτιννύναι : the time denoted is given in the clause ἐπειδὴ ...kat., which depends on this infin.; wet on putting to death. —ov« ἄρα, ought not, then, they and their children? ‘The sentence is closed with a new question, leaving the former construction unfinished. How extensively the criminal jurisprudence of the Greeks was moulded by the patriarchal conception, that the unit of society was the family, is a question too large to be more than suggested here. By ancient law, the penalty of great crimes was often shared by the children and family of the criminal; and the justice of the law was unchallenged, even when not actually carried into effect. Cf. Maine’s Ancient Law, Ch. IV. The argument in support of the indictment ends here. The court, however, was to decide not merely on the guilt or innocence of the prisoner, but also whether he should be punished, and what the penalty should be. The defendant in such cases was wont to dwell on past services and every mitigating circumstance. Lysias accordingly takes a review of the political history of the prisoner and his associates, — especially Theramenes. Technically the remaining argu- ment is called λόγος ἔξω τῆς γραφῆς.
37. τοίνυν, 7, then ; the particle is retrospective and inferential, implying in view of all these things. — μέχρι, x. τ. X., freely, for this is as far as 7 think one ought to continue the accusation ; θανάτον.. ἄξια, crimes worthy of death ; δόξῃ : H. 921 and Rem.; Gr. M7, 613,5; τῷ φεύγοντι: H. 769; G. 1186. — δίκην : pred. accus., H. 726; Goodw. 1080. Eng., this is the extreme penalty which, εἴς. -- ὅτι, why; H.719, c; G. to6oand 1061.— οὐδὲ... δὶς ἀποθ., ot even by suffering two deaths ; the part. has a condit. force, as the foll. verb indicates.
38. γάρ refers back to the first statement in § 37, giving a further reason; τοῦτο refers to what follows ἐστί ; ὅπερ introd. a parenthetic, not a restric- tive rel. clause. — ἐξαπατῶσιν : we should expect an infin., to make the antithesis exact ; it will be convenient in rendering to make the first verb correspond to the others ; they make no defence, etc. — tpinpapx.: one of the responsible and expensive duties that devolved upon an Athenian citizen of wealth. Cf. Dict. Ant., ‘‘Trierarchia,” I., 11. --- πολεμ. οὔσας, which had been hostile ; one adj. is pred. after the partic., the other after the verb.
39. ἐπεί: syn. with γάρ, for; it introd. the imperat. κελεύετε as the means of confirming the assertion made above, οὐδὲ τοῦτο προσήκει. --- πολιτῶν : partit. gen. after ὅσους. --- οἵαν... κατεδ., as yours which they enslaved ; untranslatable literally. τὴν tuer. is in definitive appos. with οἵαν. The reader should pause to notice in this sentence the meaning of οἷος and ὅσος, for which we have no proper equivalents in English, and are, therefore, compelled to render by as.
40. ἀλλὰ γάρ : ““ἀλλά is often used to break off the previous discourse, and introduce a question or demand” (H. 1046,2,b. Cf. also XXIV. 21.)
126 NOTES ON ORATION XII.
As to γάρ (here to be omitted in translation), see L. ἃ S., IV. 1. The next ἀλλά is a repetition (the figure called ‘‘anaphora”’) of the initial word, frequent in animated discourse. In Eng. tr. we simply substitute ‘ o7.”? — τοσαῦτα ὅσαπερ., just as many as. On the disarming of the citizens by order of the Thirty, see Grote, VIII. p. 247. — πατρίδος : limiting ofa. It is substantially the same construction as τὴν ὑμετέραν, above ; φρούρια : it is not certain to what extent this demolition of the fortifications of Attica was carried by the oligarchs in order to put the country more completely into the power of the Lacedzemonians. Taking this passage as his authority, Curtius (Hist. of Greece, IV. p. 45) says: The Thirty had in the interest of Sparta not only deprived Athens of its strong walls, but also pulled down or dismantled its frontier fortresses. The whole district of Attica was to be a defenceless country, which was precisely what the Spartans had demanded after the Persian wars.” Ina note: ‘But Phyle had remained a χωρίον ἰσχυρόν, Eleusis likewise.” — προσταττόντων : causal, as the foll. cl. shows: even the Pireus they dismantled, not because the L. required it, but, etc. The aristocratic party in Athens always looked with a jealous eye on its commercial and maritime interests, viewing them as the sources of strength to the democracy. — τὴν ἀρχήν, their supremacy in the government.
41. πολλάκις... ἐθαυ., 7 have often wondered, or, I often wonder, equally frequent in Eng. Essentially this is the same as the so-called gnomic aor., simply naming the action as taking place; its time is defined only by the adv. elements of the sentence ; τόλμης: H. 742; G. 1102. --- τῶν αὐτῶν : H. 732; G. 1094, 1. — τοὺς τοιούτους, such as do them; made more definite by the art.; G. 947. αὐτούς is emphatic, agr. with the subj. of épyag., not merely used as a personal pronoun.
42. yap: explaining πολλάκις ἐθαύμασα. The previous record of Era- tosthenes and his colleagues made the effrontery of their advocates and apologists more surprising. — τῷ dper. πλήθει, fo you the people ; a current phrase for the democracy, used in addressing the people, and especially frequent in Lysias. So § 43, and XIII. 16; cf. the diff. phrase in ὃ 26, and note. — ἐπί, in the time of; B.C. 411. — ἔφευγεν : give καθιστάς its proper force as a pres. ρατί. --- τριήραρχος : appos. with subj.; freely, having abandoned the ship of which he was trierarch. — ἔπραττε, κ. τ΄ i., was acting in opposition to those who wished, etc,
43. The testimony of the witnesses having been delivered, and written down by the clerks (γραμματεῖς), the speaker proceeds. . Ordinarily in an Athenian court no oath was administered to a witness, unless when brought forward he denied any knowledge of the case. τοίνυν. παρήσω, now 7 will pass over ; the particle is transitional, —in Eng. ordinarily there would be none. — ἧ vavpax. Kal ἡ συμφορά : a comprehensive and well-under- stood phrase for Aigospotami and its consequences. — οὔσης : the partic.
AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 127
here is equiv. to a parenthetic clause ; it is of the nature of an adv. element, and thrown in to call attention to the revolutionary nature of the transaction. — ὅθεν, whence, has its proper antec. in what follows ; we may render: five men (and with this they began the sedition) were appointed, etc.; κατέστη- σαν : here intrans., in the next section trans. Observe that ἔστησαν is the only form of the verb common to both aorists. — ἄρχοντες, directors. — συνωμοτῶν : so called because of their oaths to maintain mutual fidelity and inviolable secrecy. They styled themselves ἑταΐροι. --- ἔφοροι, ἑταίρων : ** As soon as the city surrendered, and while the work of demolition was yet going on, the oligarchical party began to organize itself. The members of the political Clubs again came together, and named a managing Committee of Five, called Ephors in compliment to the Lacedzemonians, to direct the general proceedings of the party.” So Grote, VIII. p. 235, taking this passage as his chief authority. The career and character of Critias, the leading spirit of this revolution, are ably set forth in Curtius’s Ast. of Greece, 111. pp. 573 - 578.
44. φυλάρχους, phylarchs, commanders of cavalry. There were ten of them in the Athenian service, one for the cavalry of each φυλή. --- παρήγ- γέλλον, issued orders, characterizing, as does κύριοι, below, this systematic completeness of the conspiracy ; εἴ τι ἄλλο, whatever else ; εἴ τι being equiv. to ὅ τι ; for δέοι and the foll. eae: see H. 917; G. 1431, 2. — ἔσεσθε : a change from opt. to fut. indic., H. 911 ; G. 1372.— ἐπεβουλεύεσθε : by the measures already detailed, the ee form of government was made the instrument of its own overthrow.
45, 46. ἄλλως : i. 6. unless brought into this condition of destitution and suffering (πολλῶν ἐνδεεῖς). --- κακῶς πραττόντων, if you should suffer mis- Sortune ; notice that δυνήσονται takes the place of the equiv. οἷοί re ἔσονται. — τῶν.. κακῶν : after ἀπαλλαγῆναι. ---- οὐκ évOup., would be unmindful of. - ἐφόρων : pred. gen., partitive. — μάρτυρας : defined by the foll. subst. partt. used appositively. — οὐ.. δυναίμην : on account of the oaths by which they were bound ; see § 47.
47. karen. ἂν αὐτῶν, ciey (i. e. their fellow-conspirators) would testify against them. — τοὺς ὅρκους... πιστοὺς ἐνόμιζον, consider their oaths bind- ing ; observe that οὐκ qualifies both predicates together (i. e. ἐνόμιζον, παρέ- Bawov), not each separately; as if to say: those who withhold their testimony consider binding the oaths which they took on becoming ‘*Com- panions,” but are violating those they took on becoming citizens, — which they would not do, if they were wise; cf. the note on ἃ 80; ἐπί has the same meaning as in § 26; it gives the sense well to render it freely, where it concerns, or, with a view ἕο. ---- κάλει : addressed to the herald (κῆρυξ) of the court ; κάλεσον is the word in Orat. XXI. 10. — ἀνάβητε : cf. ἀνάβηθι, § 24. Possibly the decree of Demophantus (Grote, VIII. p. 80) was still in
128 NOTES ON ORATION XII.
force (cf. Grote, VIII. p. 298); if so, such oaths as are alluded to in the first cl. of this section were not by law binding. The oaths which they had shown themselves ready to violate were their oaths of allegiance, and those taken in any official service to the state. On being enrolled in his eighteenth year, every citizen took a prescribed oath of citizenship.
48. τὸ τελ.: H. 719,b; G. 1060. —els τὴν ἀρχὴν κατ᾿: as in §§ 5 and 29. — ἄλλων : i. e. κακῶν ; Attic, or rather Greek euphemism. — ἐχρῆν ἂν οοὐμὴ παρανόμως ἄρχειν, Le must needs have ruled according to the laws; χρή : used here in its first, not its second meaning ; cf. L. ἃ S. — ἔπειτα, in the next place ; δέ is usually omitted with this ady., whether it denotes succession of time or of thought. μηνυτὴν y.: also in ὃ 32; 0 disclose, to give information, —émacreav: the force of its emphatic position may be given by rendering it with the next clause: that they were αὐ false. — ἀλλὰ... εἰσαγγέλλουσι, dut were bringing in charges fabricated by the Thirty ; also to be joined with ὅτι, and belonging to the time of ἐχρῆν, which the context shows refers to the past.— In Orat. VIL., Against Andoc- ides, the speaker pronounces Batrachus ‘‘the basest of all the informers during the administration of the Thirty,” except Andocides. Of Aischy- lides nothing further is known.
49. καὶ μὲν δή: as in §§ 30, 35, 89. See note to § 30. — οὐδὲν... σιω- πῶντες, were none the worse off for being silent; notice that ἔλαττον is not obj., but used as an adv. accus.; cf. ἔχειν κακῶς, to be badly off; with an adv. ἔχω = 20 be. —trepor ἦσαν ot λέγοντες, there were others who said; the constr. is: ér. subject, of Aey. in appos. So Anad., 11, 4. 5, ὁ ἡγησό- μενος οὐδεὶς ἔσται, there will be no one to act as guide, Without the art. the part. would stand in simple adj. agreement with the subj.; the art. added makes the action of the verb apply to some case definitely understood or referred to. For further illustration of this distinction, see Kriiger’s Grzech- ische Sprachlehre, 50, 4; A. 3, and A. 4.— dv: gen. after the compar.; its antec. is obj. of the part. —ma@s...@afav, why did they not show it then? The foll. partt. denote manner. The argument of this section is : Silent acquiescence was no proof of good-will to the people ; under the circum- stances, it was the easiest thing to do; the only way in which such good- will could be shown was by openly advocating better counsels, and endeavoring to restrain the evil-doers. The obvious reply, that to do this at that time was dangerous, is met in what follows.
50. ὅπως: H. 886; Goodw. 1352. — ἐν τῷ λόγῳ, in the course of the discussion, —é δὲ ph, otherwise ; σκοπείτω is to be understood ; ἐνταυθοῖ = ἐνταῦθα, herein ; ὅτι...τε.. καί, not only that...but also that. — xpiv δ᾽ avrov...éxayv, dul he ought to have had; cf. § 32; ἀλλὰ ph, instead of. The argument : Let him beware of saying that he opposed the Thirty (see § 25), when the matter was under advisement ; otherwise, the history of the
AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 129
transaction will make it appear not only that he was satisfied with the measures finally adopted, but also that he was sufficiently influential in the body to be quite free from any reason to fear.
«BI. ὡς ἀμφ. ταῦτα, doth which things, lit. as both these; ταῦτα is direct obj.; the Eng. does not allow the repetition of the previous obj. after ‘‘ as.” — καὶ τὰς.. διαφορὰς... γιγνομένας, azd (shall show) that their repeated dis- putes...arose; for the part., see H. 981: G. 1588; its tense shows the continued, or repeated action. — ὁπότεροι, which of the two, i. e. the two factions of the oligarchic party, one headed by Critias, the other by Theramenes; it introd. an indir. question in appos. with διαφοράς. See Gr. Moods; 669, τ end.
52. wod...qv, when would it have been nobler ? H. 895, Note a. Φυλῇ: see note XIII. 63. Thrasybulus, the leader in the return of the exiles, who afterwards usually bore the name οἱ ἐκ Φυλῆς, or of ἀπὸ Φυλῆς: here it is of ἐπὶ Φυλῇ, the men on Phyle. —’Edevoivdde: cf. Μέγαράδε, § 17. — μιᾷ ψήφῳ: “ There was a rule in Attic judicial procedure, called the psephism of Kannonus, — originally adopted, we do not know when, on the proposition of a citizen of that name, as a psephism or decree for some particular case, but since generalized into common practice, and grown into great prescriptive reverence, — which peremptorily forbade any such collective trial or sentence, and directed that a separate judicial vote should in all cases be taken for or against each accused party.” Grote, VIII. p. 196. On the -proceedings at Eleusis and Salamis, read Grote, VIIL. p.,266 seg.; or Smith, Ch. XXXIIL., ὃ 15.
53. ἤλθομεν : identifying himself with those who joined Thrasybulus ; see Introd., ‘‘On the Life and Writings of Lysias.””—at tapaxat, the tumudlts ; gently said, rather than remind those before him how a few months before Athenians had fought Athenians in the very streets of the Pirzeus. Xenophon gives a full account of the battle in /ed//., II. 4; see Grote, VIII. p. 268 seg. — ot λόγοι, “he conferences. — ἔσεσθαι : after ἐλπιδ.; H.952; G. 1521; that we should be towards one another as we both showed (ourselves to be afterwards). ὡς denotes manner, corresp. to the ady. expression πρὸς ἀλλ. The phraseology is certainly unusual ; Frohb. has emended the text. — of...é« Tlapatas : = οἱ ἐκ Φυλῆς, a current phrase to distinguish them from the oligarchic faction, who were called oi ἐν ἄστει, οἱ ἐξ ἄστεος. --- γάρ : our allowing them (the men of the city) to depart unmolested after the skirmish was a proof of our confidence in a speedy reconciliation.
54. ἀρχ.... εἵλοντο, chose as archons; ἐκείνοις : i.e. the Thirty. — ἄν belongs with the inf.; τῶν αὐτῶν ; Lysias recurs in § 57 to the fact that the Thirty were so avowedly and thoroughly hostile to the democracy, — now prominently represented by the returned exiles, the ‘‘ Pirzeus-men,” — that the same person could hardly be friendly to both sides.
130 NOTES ON ORATION XII.
55. The following passage, to § 61, gives some facts not elsewhere stated concerning the δεκαδοῦχοι, the Board of Ten, who succeeded the Thirty in the government of the city after the expulsion of the latter. Eratosthenes seems not to have been a member of it, as stated by Grote ; but Phidon, with whom he stood in close political affiliation, represented the spirit and aims of both, and showed the intense hostility felt toward the democracy by even the Moderates. — τούτων : i.e. the Ten. ‘‘ The members of the new government were selected from the Thirty, from the oligarchic Senate, and from the number of those who generally shared their political views. Of the Thirty, Phidon was chosen, who, next to Theramenes, was known to have most vigorously opposed Critias and Charicles. Hippocles, Epichares, and Rhinon were of the same shade of party. These men were the moderate oligarchs, who had been driven into the back-ground by the death of Thera- menes, and whom it was now intended to place at the helm of the state.” (Curtius, IV. p. 52.) — τῇ ἐκ. ἑταιρείᾳ, their club; cf. note on ὃ 43 ; Char- icles, next to Critias, was the leader of the Thirty. — τοῖς ἐξ ἄστεος, fo the party of the city ; dat. after ἐποίησαν. The party hatred and hostility were augmented, not allayed, under the Ten.
56. ols, dy which, i. e. proceedings; Frohb. and Rauch. have @ — τῶν ...@OAX., those who were perishing, i. e. under the rule of the Thirty. — οἱ τεθν,, of μέλλοντες : ref. to those who had fallen or were to fall in the civil war, now openly begun. — καὶ πλουτοῦντες, and who were getting rich faster.
57, 58. λαβόντες... τὰς ἀρχάς, Laving gained possession of the offices. — tois...elpy. καὶ... πεπονθόσι : in appos, with ἀμφοτέροις. --- ἐκεῖνοι, i. 6. the Thirty. — ἑτέρων ἔργων : the emphatic position of these words entitles them to emphasis in translation: for surely it was not for having been guilty of other deeds that, etc, — τῶν avrav...perctxe, Zook part in the same deeds as Eratosthenes ; ’Epat.: H. 773; G. 1175; γνώμῃ: H.776; G. 1181; it is dat. of manner; αὑτῶν, than themselves; 8vd, through, = by the aid, or agency, of; often thus used with accus. of a person. — ἔπειθεν, was endeav- oring to persuade them, i. e. the Lacedeemonians. — διαβάλλων, maliciously asserting; Bowrt.: pred. gen. The Boeotians gave assistance to Thrasy- bulus and the exiles, and this would be enough to arouse jealousy at Sparta. The remnant of the Thirty, after taking refuge in Eleusis, had also sent to Sparta for aid against the constitutional party, the democracy.
59. τούτων, his, i. 6. that the Lacedzemonians should take the field. — εἴτε Kal...Bovd., or because they were not inclined. —®aveloaro : the Lace- dzmonian government was now in funds. Lysander, the year before, had returned from the Asiatic campaign, bringing back not less than 470 talents in addition to the other trophies and spoils of war. See Grote, VIII. p. 238. This loan was afterward repaid from the state treasury, though with
AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 121
opposition. — ἄρχοντα, as commander, i. 6. of the military force, which would also put him in command of the city. Lysander was a genuine Spartan in his dislike of Athens and popular government, as well as in his personal incorruptibility.
60. πάντας av0., αὐ men, men from every quarter ; the absence of the art. shows the vagueness of the phrase ; Frohb., ‘‘ ad/e Welt.” — érayovres, calling in the aid of ; τέλευτ. : H. 968, a; G. 1563, 1; cf. τὸ τελευταῖον, § 48. — οὐ διαλλάξαι : cf. αἱρεθεὶς ὑμᾶς διαλ., § 55. — εἰ μή, κ, τ᾿ λ., had it not been for true men; the omission before εἰ μή suggests itself at once : and they would have destroyed it. — ois... ϑηλώσατε : H. 999, a; Gr. Moods, 519; imperative ina rel. cl.; we may render: whom ἐξ is yours to show by inflicting, etc. In Eng. an imperat. is allowed in a rel. cl. only when the latter is really equiv. to a demonstrative.
61. καὶ αὐτοί, yourselves. —bpws δέ, sc. παρέξομαι. --- ἀναπαύσασθαι : if the speech is written as delivered, Lysias could not have been speaking much more than half an hour; he may, however, have been on his feet a much longer time, and perhaps engaged during a part of it in cross- examining the witnesses who had been previously called up. The time ‘to rest himself” would be welcome to a speaker unaccustomed to address so large an audience as was doubtless gathered at this trial, and would perhaps, as Lysias intimates, afford an agreeable change to the listeners. All the evidence cited, it will be borne in mind, was produced by each party during his own speech, and the time thus occupied was not to be reckoned in the time legally allowed the speaker. Hence his direction to have the time- piece stopped when witnesses were called ; see XXIII. 11; καί μοι ἐπίλαβε τὸ ὕδωρ. See Dict. Ant. ‘‘Martyria,” and cf. also note on § 24. — ὡς πλείστων : Η. 742,c; G. 1103.
62. In this passage (62-78), the course of Theramenes is sketched with an unsparing hand ; it is the sketch not of an historian, but of an adversary ; yet all the facts stated accord, so far as known, with other received authori- ties. He had the talents of a demagogue with the temper of an aristocrat. His virtue as a politician was moderation, and it is this that must have commended him to Aristotle, who pronounced him one of the best of Athens’ citizens, — a verdict that subsequent history has been far from rati- fying. His polished, persuasive eloquence commended him to the people, and undoubtedly in foresight and other intellectual qualities he stood among the foremost men of the latter half of the Peloponnesian War. But he was destitute of fixed principles ; he seems to have been wholly controlled by personal vanity and ambition. His political instability won for him, acc. to Xenophon, the nickname of Cothurnus, the stage-shoe that fitted either foot. His moderation, indeed, seems hardly to deserve the name of a virtue ; he was not like Halifax, as described by Macaulay, a ‘ Trimmer”
132 NOTES ON ORATION: XII.
on principle, but by policy ; nor does he deserve, either as a statesman or as a patriot, to be ranked with the English nobleman. Unless history has much distorted the facts of his conduct in the trial of the six generals after the battle of Arginusze, and during the siege of Athens after ASgospotami, he richly deserved the fate that befell him. That very death, however, par- tially redeemed his reputation. He had fallen a victim to a more vindic- tive, if not a wilier foe of the people, — the insatiably ambitious and the relentless Critias. With this temporary halo of martyrdom around him, brightened by the memory of his eloquence and his gallant bearing when taken to be executed, his name was put forward by the Moderates of the oligarchy as a mediator with the now triumphant democracy. Lest the guilty actors in the tragedy now over should thus be screened from jus- tice, the orator aims to set Theramenes in a true light before his country- men.
φέρε δή : cf. ὃ 34. — ds...818.: cf. § 3, where we have ἐλαχίστων instead of βραχυτάτων. --- καὶ... παραστῇ, and let this suggest itself to no one, let no one think ; κινδυνεύοντος : gen. absol. with Epar., concessive ; while it is Lratosthenes who is on trial. — ταῦτα ἀπολ,, that he will make this defence ; H. 716, Ὁ; Goodw. 1054. — ἐκείνῳ, i. 6. Theramenes,
63. καίτοι, κ. τ. X., yet without doubt, 7 suppose, if he had taken part in public affairs with Themistocles, he would claim that he took measures, etc.; σφόδρα emphasizes the sneering irony ; it is a modal adv., I think ; not an adv. of manner with προσπ. --- ὁπότε: the words to fill out this cl. are to be supplied from the preceding. — od...-yeyevfjr@ar: a good specimen of the rhetorical figure litotes, in which the form of expression suggests more than is said. The remark is significant ; just at this time many were dis- posed to look upon Theramenes as a martyr to liberty and the state. The γάρ gives the reason for taunting Eratosthenes with his avowed adherence to Theramenes ; as if to say: he does not seem to me to be a second Themis- tocles. — Aak. ἀκόντων, against the will of the Lacedemonians; con- cessive.
64. τοὐναντίον ἤ : see note on § 2. — ἄξιον : sc. ἂν ἣν, it were fitting ; ᾿ Greek Moods, 415; Kiihn., 260, Rem. 3. — προσαπολωλέναι, fo perish too, to perish with him; observe the force of the prep. — πλὴν εἴ τις ἐτύγχα- γεν, unless there chanced to be one. — εἰς.. ἀναφερομένας, appealing to; an indication of the reaction in public opinion in favor of Theramenes ; the supporters of the overthrown oligarchy who still remained in the city were now claiming to have adhered to him. — ἀλλ᾽ od: cf. ἀλλὰ μή, § 50.
65. προτέρας dAry., i. 6. the Four Hundred; H. 753, e; G. 1140. — πολιτείαν : for the main features of the scheme of government thus intro- duced, see Grote, VIII. p. 36; πείσας : the power of insinuating persuasive speech, Theramenes seems to have had in a high degree. — ταῦτ᾽ ἔπραττεν,
AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 133
was engaged in these proceedings. The Probuli, a provisional committee of ten, appointed at the close of the Sicilian expedition, to take measures for the public safety ; see Dict. Ant. Theramenes’s adopted father, Hagnon, son of Nicias, is here referred to. He was active and prominent in public affairs during the earlier years of the Peloponnesian War. — τοῖς πράγμασι, to the measures then in progress, the cause, the revolution, favored and pro- moted by the Probuli, who were of oligarchic proclivities. Frohb. renders : **der Ordnung der Dinge, der Verfassung,” Zo the order of things, the con- stitution, but wrongly, I think ; cf. the use of πράγματα in XIII. 60.
66. Pisander had been from the beginning the leader in the movement. See Grote, VIII. p. 19, and also p. 58, where he says: ‘‘ The representa- tion of the character and motives of Theramenes, as given by Lysias,” in Orations XII. and XIIL., ‘‘is quite in harmony with that of Thucydides.” Calleeschrus, the father of Critias, and one of the leaders of the ultra wing of the Four Hundred. — προτέρους αὑτοῦ, more influential than himself, that is, in the counsels of the party ; as stated in the next clause, they were losing their ascendency over the democracy. — τότ᾽ ἤδη, αὐ /ast. — τῶν ᾽Ἄριστ. ἔργων : Aristocrates is mentioned by Thucydides as along with Theramenes heading this opposition to the Ultras of the Four Hundred. — 7d...8€0s : the fear inspired by you; observe the precision of this and the preceding phrase.
67, 68. ἀπέκτεινεν, caused the death of; cf. § 23. Of this transaction Grote gives an interesting account ; Vol. VIII. pp. 83-87. — ἅμα μὲν...δέ, not only...but also; the accessible facts concerning Theramenes seem to justify the taunt of Lysias concerning his double-edged ‘‘ good faith.” — αὐτὸς éray., having promised of his own accord; αὐτός emphatically re- peated. The speaker passes over the intervening six years ; we know that he was repeatedly elected general. — πρᾶγμα, «. τ᾿ X., @ great and impor- tant thing ; a vague and mysteriously uttered phrase, which helped Theram- enes once more to gain the confidence of the people. — μήτε.. δοὺς μήτε, without either giving pledges, or; H. 1027.
69. πραττούσης : this and the foll. partt. are concessive. That the Senate of the Areopagus were already taking measures for the safety of the city, was a reason for not committing them entirely into the hands of one man. — ot ἄλλοι ἀνθ., the rest of men, i.e. men generally. — εἰδότες δέ : Gr. Moods, 876. ---τὰ ἀπόρρητα : i.e. secrets of state; οὐκ ἠθέλησεν, refused, would not; yet he could hardly have been required to tell his plans in the open assembly, — that would have been communicating them to the enemy. — πατρίδα, x.t.A.: H.660,a. “In vain many thoughtful citizens urged their objections; they guessed his traitorous intentions, and warned the assembly against intrusting their all to the hands of a The- ramenes. In vain the Areopagus offered to take the negotiations for peace
134 NOTES ON ORATION XII.
into its own hands. The large majority of the citizens, whose only anxiety was for peace, were captivated by his speech and would not relinquish the hopes aroused by it ; the conspirators exerted their influence to foster this feeling ; and Theramenes received the desired powers.” Curtius, III. Ρ. 568.
70. av: H. 996 and a; G. 1031 and 1032.— οὕτως : the consequent is ὥστε; he had so firmly made up his mind that it was requisite, etc., that. — wept ὧν : after ἐμνήσθη ; its antec. is ταῦτα ; render, which no one either of the enemy mentioned, or of the citizens expected, — αὐτὸς... ἔπαγγ. : cf. § 68. — εὖ εἰδώς : causal, = for he well knew. — ταχεῖαν : pred. position ; render emphatically, speedy would be the vengeance which, etc.
71. οὐ πρότερον εἴασε.. ἕως, he did not permit,...until ; πρότερον is not essential to the meaning, and is sometimes omitted ; the foll. verbs are co- ordinate after ἕως. --- tm’ ἐκείνων : the Lacedzemonians. — στρατόπεδον : troops from the army of occupation at Decelea. The assembly referred to here, and mentioned in the foll. section, was ‘‘the assembly concerning a change in the constitution,” — the assembly which passed the motion of Dracontides, establishing the Thirty in power, and virtually abrogating the constitution. It seems to have been held shortly after the surrender of Athens to Lysander, which took place (acc. to Scheibe) March 29, 404 B. Cc. The assembly (or assemblies, — there seem to have been several subsequent sessions) ‘* concerning the Peace,” which was held the day after the return of Theramenes from his final mission, is not referred to here. Its delibera- tions are referred to in Oration XIII., § 15 seg. On the order of the suc- cessive sessions, see Curtius, Vol. III., App., Note XII.
72. τότε... ὕπαρχ., this being the condition of affairs at that time, — ἐποίουν, convened ; Philochares and Miltiades are not elsewhere mentioned in the extant accounts of this period. — μήτε. .. τέ: H. 1044, a. Notice also that μήτε... μηδείς make one negative in translation; H. 1030; G. τόιρ. --- τἀκείνοις δοκοῦντα, what pleased them.
73. It will be seen, by consulting the histories, that the present oration is the chief authority concerning the deliberations of this assembly. The narrative of Diodorus Siculus is considered to have little weight, where it differs from the account here given. τῇ πολ. χρῆσθαι, Zo adopt the form of government, — ἀπέφαινεν, announced, not proposed ; the word is significant of the forced revolutionary character of the proceeding ; ὅμως... διακ,, a/- though thus situated ; ὅμως, yet, belongs with the principal verb, but is often brought in earlier in the sentence; it shows that the part. is concessive ; H. 979.— ἐθορυβεῖτε : in all the Athenian meetings, in courts as well as in the political assemblies, free expression was given to approval or dis- approval ; this word is used of both, meaning ¢o applaud, and to murmur dissent, not exactly 40 make an uproar, which is too rude a definition ;
AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 135
though often enough in the gatherings of the intractable Demos the rising murmurs made uproar enough to drown the tones of a Stentor. — δουλείας καὶ ἐλευθ. : it was a question of slavery ov freedom, as we should say.
74. ὅτι... μέλοι, that he cared nothing for your noise; οὐδέν: adv. accus. - τοὺς... πράττοντας : used substantively as pred. accusative after εἰδείη : H. 726; G.1077. The direct obj. may often be distinguished from the pred. accus. by the art. with the former; in constr. like thé present, the contrary may be the case; the principle is the same as that given in the note on ὃ 49. Frohb. is surely mistaken in considering πολλούς pred., and that ᾿Αθηναίων limits robs... πράτ. ---- αὑτῷ : after ὅμοια : H. 773 andb;G. 1175 and 1178. — δοκοῦντα : though without the art., probably used substan- tively; Gr. Moods, 827 (a); λέγοι is also to be connected with ἐπειδή ; for the mood of εἰδείη and λέγοι, see H. 932, 2, a; G.1497-— Kal... ἔχοι, but also that he considered you to have violated the treaty. “He told them in a menacing and contemptuous tone that Athens was now at his mercy, since the walls had not been demolished before the day specified, and consequently the conditions of the promised peace had been violated.” (Grote, VIII. p. 235.) — ὅτι... ἔσται, κελεύει : forms of direct discourse ; H. 932; G. 1497 and 1498.
75, 76. γνόντες, x. τ. X., recognizing the plot; ἄνδρες ἀγαθοί, true men, or brave men, as ὃ 97, in simple contrast with the assumed distinctive name of the aristocrats ; cf. § 86 and note. In § 94, Lysias claims for the former the title ἄριστοι. --- ᾧχοντο ἀπιόντες, hastily departed; H. 985; Goodw. 1587. — σφίσιν αὐτοῖς : H. 775; G.1179. Notice the force of the prep. in συν-είδησις, Lat. con-scientia, from which our ‘‘consciousness” and ‘‘con- science,” each with new and deeper meaning. It may be questioned whether those who remained and kept silent, or those who quit the assem- bly, adopted the better policy as patriotic citizens, —as ἄνδρες ἀγαθοί. --- καὶ.. κακῶς ; i. 6. some of them ‘‘bad” men, and others ‘‘ ill-advised”; the connectives καὶ... καί assign the attributes divisively ; so also ὃ 26. — τὰ προσταχθέντα : cf. ἀπέφαινεν, ὃ 73, and παρηγγέλλετο, below ; it was the vote of a deliberative assembly only in pretence. — κελεύοιεν ; H. 916, 934, 937; G. 1434; 1484; 1502, 1. “Ephors,”’—a word which gives the new committee of managers a quasi-official recognition ; cf. ὃ 43. The method of nomination is known to us only from this account. — oft... ἑώρων, so well did they see. — ὥστε... ἤδεσαν, that they knew beforehand.
77. οὐκ ἐμοί, not on my testimony ; cf. note on ὃ 27. --- ἐν τῇ βουλῇ : to be taken with ἀπολογ. The defence made by Theramenes just before his ’ seizure and execution is referred to. — φεύγουσιν : the tense has no special meaning ; this is one of the participles which came to be used with a subst. force of its own; here, the recent exiles. — ov8tv...Aax., the Lacedemo- nians being nowise solicitous for it, — rois...petéxovow : his colleagues of
126 NOTES ON ORATION XII.
the Thirty. — ὅτι., τοιούτων τυγχάνοι, that he was meeting with such a requital; the part. before is concessive: although he had been the chief agent in, etc.; on the position of ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦ, cf. H. 667, a. Frohb. remarks that this is the only instance in Lysias where a limiting phrase is thus sep- arated from its part. by an interposed subst.
78. καὶ... καὶ... καὶ, καὶ.. καὶ, καὶ...καί : the polysyndeton (as the Greek grammarians termed it), the multiplication of connectives, serves here to give greater weight to the sentence ; the pair at the end may be rendered both...and, — ὑπὲρ.. «πονηρίας, for his own villany ; ὑπέρ here = because of, in the preceding clause, iz behalf of ; we may render by for in both, and preserve the antithesis. — κατέλυσε: H. 837. — δικαίως δ᾽ ἄν : δίκην δόντος is understood, H. 987 and b; G. 1299, 1, and 1308; render: and would justly have suffered punishment. — δίς : first in the tyranny of the Four Hundred, and the second time in that of the Thirty. — τῶν... καταφ., Tov... ἔπιθ. : broadly but significantly characterizing his restless ambition. These sonorous antitheses abound in the speeches and rhetorical productions of Lysias’s time. ‘‘ Be content with the present,” orépye τὰ παρόντα, was an oft-quoted maxim among the Greeks, in substance or in form; cf. in Heb. xiii. 5: ἀρκούμενοι τοῖς παροῦσιν. — ὀνόματι : “Ὁ Liberty! what crimes are committed in thy name!” said Mme. Roland. What this fairest of phrases was that cloaked most dreadful deeds, we are left to infer.
79. ἐν ᾧ.. εἶναι, on which it needs not that there be pardon and pity. — τονυτουΐ, Ais, pointing at him; H. 274; Goodw. 412, — μηδὲ.. ἐχθρῶν, and not by fighting be victorious over your enemies in the field, and yet by your verdict be subject to your personal foes. It is the object here to shut off compassion, by reminding the auditors that the Thirty and their adherents not only were now in arms against them (at Eleusis), but had also been their bitterest personal enemies.
80. μηδὲ... πλείω χάριν... ἴστε, and do not be more grateful; “to be grateful for anything” is usually expressed in Greek by ἔχειν χάριν τινός, or εἰδέναι χάριν τινός ; ὧν = τούτων ἅ, the gen. depending on χάριν. --- ὀργί- ἵεσθε : prob. imperat.; cf. § 60. — μηδὲ.. ἀφῆτε : the neg. belongs to both cl.; cf. ὃ 47. In such cases the thought is often better set forth in Eng. by making the first cl. subordinate: and do not, while you are devising measures against, etc. For mode of ἀφῆτε, see H. 874, a; G. 1346. So βοηθήσητε, below. — τυχῆς : after κακίον, ---- τούτους : as before observed, Phidon, as well as Eratosthenes, is supposed to have been in Athens at this time; others deeply implicated in the crimes of the conspiracy are also doubtless meant.
81, 82. κατηγόρηται δή, “ie accusation is now complete ; δή, besides its original temporal force (from ἤδη), marks the transition in a spirited way. — ols...dvoloa, to whom he will appeal in defence ; espec. ref. to Theramenes,
AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 137
Observe that the clause is parenthetic, not restrictive. — ἐξ ἴσου, on equal terms ; comparing the present trial with the pretended judicial proceedings under the Thirty. — καθέσταμεν, we stand, we are placed, i. e. in accordance with the forms of law. — ἀκρίτους : pred. adj.; one of these trials that were not trials is described in XIII. 36 seg.; those after the restoration were κατὰ τὸν νόμον. --- οὐδὲ.. λαμβάνειν, rot even if you should wish to inflict punish- ment illegally ; ἄν belongs with the foll. opt.; ὧν : by attr. for the cogn. ace. &. — τί παθόντες : H. 969,b; G. 1563, 3; dy what suffering. — τὴν ἀξίαν : the adj. emphasized by the art.; H. 668; G. 959, 2 and 953; “he punishment deserved by their deeds ; for the periphrastic form of the verb, see G. 733.
83. αὐτοὺς kal τοὺς παῖδας : see note on ὃ 36; πότερον : sign of alterna- tive question, but not to be tr. — ὧν ; antec. in λάβοιμεν. --- ἀλλὰ γάρ : instead of the expected 4, ov, after πότερον. As to its freq. use in intro- ducing a question, see note on § 40. — τὰ φανερά : not merely a fine, but confiscation of their entire property ; φανερὰ οὐσία is the term for lands, buildings, furniture, slaves, etc., as opposed to cash assets ; the latter were called οὐσία ἀφανής, or simply ἀργύριον ; see ΒΎΟΒΌ. --- καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι; would it be well; i. 6, fair, satisfactory. — Hs: limits πολλά,
84. πῶς οὐκ: = Lat. nonne; πῶς is prefixed to the negative for the sake of rhetorical emphasis, and not merely in its proper sense of how or why, as, for instance, in § 49; in XXII. 17, on the other hand, it is used as here. It is a distinct use of πῶς, and should be separately noted in our lexi- cons. — kal ἡντινοῦν : an emphasized indef. demonstrative, as the form in -owv always is ; H. 285 and 1002, a. — πᾶν... ἂν... τολμῆσαι, that one would dare anything ; ὅστις.. ἥκει, who has come; τούτου, simply is ; ὅστις and its antec., though indef., ref. with sufficient distinctness to Eratosthenes. — ἑτέροις : the adherents of the oligarchic party ; many of these were still in the city, and of these not a few sitting as jurors in the present case, as appears from the speech. ,
85. ὧν ἀμφοτ.: neut. gen. after émmed.; lit. both which, i. 6. his con- tempt of you and his reliance upon the other party ; render: in either case it is worth your concern ; in the first case (καταπεφρόνηκεν ὑμῶν), the men- tion of the fact is enough ; in the second (ἑτέροις πεπίστ.), he goes on to show why the subject demands their indignant attention. — μὴ ἑτέρων oupt., 2f (these) others had not co-operated. — οὐ τούτοις... βοηθ., xot in order to succor these, that is, mot merely; οὐ often thus before ἀλλά ; cf. § 11. The pl. here, τούτοις, though Eratosthenes was the only one on trial, shows that it was looked upon as a test case. Other indictments were doubtless hanging over the heads of the prominent supporters of the Thirty. — ἄδειαν is foll. by the limiting gen. and by ποιεῖν; H. 952; G. 15213 ample security for the past and the future.
138 NOTES ON ORATION XII.
86. καὶ τῶν ξυνερούντων : H. 733; ref. is made in this and the following section to two classes of the οἵ... βοηθήσοντες, above mentioned ; first, the influential friends who by presence or by speech were to appear in his favor ; and second, those who were summoned as witnesses for the defence. It was common in the Athenian courts for parties less skilled in public speaking to speak but briefly themselves, and leave the pleading mainly to be done by professional advocates (oi συνδικεῖν ἐπιστάμενοι, as they are called in Xen., AMemorad. I. 2. 51). Notice that συνηγόρευες, ὃ 25; συν- εἰπών, ὃ 34; and ξυνερούντων, here, were to the Greek ear one word in three tenses. — καλοὶ κἀγαθοί : the favorite party-name of the aristocracy ; ‘‘ the good and honorable men, the elegant men, the well-known, the temperate, the honest and moderate men, etc., — to employ that complimentary phrase- ology by which wealthy and anti-popular politicians have chosen to designate — each other in ancient as well as in modern times.” Grote, VIII. 16. — πλείονος ἀξίαν, as outweighing the villany of these. — ἐβουλόμην dv: cf. § 22; 7 would, though, that they were as zealous. — ἢ.. ἀπολογήσονται, or whether as powerful ‘speakers they will plead for the defendant. Itis difficult to reproduce the slur contained in Lysias’s time in the words δεινὸς λέγειν, when used to warn a court against the persuasive power of an op- ponent. The sophists and rhetoricians of the time were proverbially δεινοὶ λέγειν, and apt to make the worse appear the better reason. See the opening of Socrates’s defence, as given by Plato.
8). εὐήθεις, good-natured, in the sarcastic tone that pervades the whole passage. — el... ἡγοῦνται : dep. on νομίζοντες. τοῦ ὑμετέρου πλήθους - Scheibe has the accus., but I follow Frohb. in preferring the gen. of the MSS.; the first διά is through ; the second, because of; the two clauses con- nected by μέν and δέ are both co-ordinately dep. on ἡγοῦνται, but it will be seen that the sense is better preserved in Eng. by making the latter sub- ordinate with adthough ; the principle is the same as noticed in ὃ 47. — ἐπ᾿ ἐκφορὰν ἐλθεῖν : Frohb. appropriately quotes from Afsch. IIT. 235: ‘The Thirty did not allow the relatives of the deceased even to come to the funeral ceremonies and burial of the dead.”
88. σωθέντες, if they should be released ; H.969, ἃ; cf.900; G, 1413; 1563, 5; cf. 1408.—éxetvor δέ : there is plainly no antithesis here, as the sen- tence is completed. Possibly the emotion of the speaker has diverted his thought, and the sentence should read: but they whom these destroyed, hav- ing ended life, are beyond the vengeance of their foes. Cf. τὸ...δέος, in § 66. — δεινὸν εἰ: cf. § 36; αὐτοὶς : intens. with τοῖς ἀπολ., which is dat. of ad- vantage. —6émdre, since, now that. The defendant’s funeral (to take place on the execution of the anticipated sentence) was likely to be a large one; this is sarcastic and harsh, but in keeping with the increasing bitter ness of the speaker as he recalls the past.
AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 139
89. καὶ μὲν δή, and of atruth; cf. § 30. The line of thought is a continuation of the preceding : And in thus undertaking the defence (βοη- θεῖν) of Eratosthenes they certainly have a heavier task than it would have been to remonstrate with the Thirty and prove your innocence (ἀντειπεῖν). “τι ῥᾷον : the MSS. have ῥάδιον, but the emendation here given is that adopted by most edd. — καίτοι λέγουσιν, dicey say, though ; *"Epar.: dat. of the agent after the perf. pass.; ἐλάχ. τῶν τρι,, Zeast of the Thirty; ἐλάχ. is prob. adverbial. —rav...mwdetora, more than any other of the Greeks ; this superl, with the gen. of distinction is a favorite usage in Greek ; H. 755, b.
90. δῆλοι ἔσεσθε ὡς dpy., you will show yourselves to be indignant ; H. 981; Goodw. 1589; for ὡς, see H. 978; the above translation would _ be correct, were ὡς omitted ; its use, however, marks what is manifest not “* as an absolute fact, but zz the view, or judgment, of the persons referred to. — ὀφθήσεσθε : syn. with δῆλοι ἔσεσθε. --- οὐχ ἕξετε : in allusion to the cur- rent plea ; cf. §§ 27 and 29.
QI. τούτων ἀποψηφ., dy acguitting these ; the plur. pron., as in § 85. — κρύβδην : not that each one’s ballot was cast so as to be publicly known, — the Athenian law guaranteed the secrecy of the ballot. But it would be known, in case of acquittal, that it was due to the votes of the city-party among the judges, and they would be held responsible in the judgment of the community. In the next oration, § 36 seg., it is described how the judicial proceedings under the Thirty disregarded the provision above named of the constitution. Another instance is that of the celebrated trial of the six generals after the battle of Arginusze. 5
92. ἑκατέρους, cach party of you, explained by the foll. appos. phrases ; for the double accus., see H. 724 ; Goodw. 1106; 1069. The tone adopted toward the sympathizers with the oligarchy who sat among the judges, is quite different from that toward such as were appearing among the witnesses or advocates for the defence. — παραδείγματα, as warning examples. Note the order of the words in the preceding partic. phrase, and cf. with two similar phrases in § 77; this is the preferable order; see H. 667, a; Κύμη. 245, Rem. 8. — σφ. ἤρχεσθε, were under so violent a rule; from ἄρχομαι. --- Tovodrov...év @, such that in it, a rel. cl. of consequence; ἡττηθέντες... νικήσαντες, wow that you have been defeated,...if you had been victorious ; τὸ ἴσον : cf. ὃ 35.
93. οὗτοι: still ref. to the Thirty; οἴκους, estates, property; Xen. defines it in his @ceonomicus, κτῆσις ἡ σύμπασα. --- μεγάλους : pred. adj., after ἐκτήσαντο, rendered; so πιστούς, below. — συνωφελεῖσθαι, Zo share the benefit ; it is pass. — πιστοὺς... ἐκτῶντο, were attempting to gain your fidelity ; Ἡ. 832 ; Goodw, 1255. — ζοντο εἶναι, were expecting you to be; the pres. inf., rather than the fut., after οἴομαι in this sense, is similar to the constr, in § 19.
ἀπ ν το NOTES ON ORATION XII.
94. ἀνθ᾽ ὧν: ἀντί, in return for, gives ἀνθ᾽ ὧν and ἀνθ᾽ ὅτου the causal meaning of wherefore. — καθ᾽ ὅσον : i. 6. so far as you have them in your power. — τιμωρήσασθε: a freq. word in Lysias, both in act. and mid.; /o avenge, to take vengeance ; if foll. by a word denoting the injury for which vengeance is taken, this is put in the gen., alone or with ἀντί, ὑπέρ, or περί. Usually, however, ὑπέρ is used with persons, = 7 behalf of, as here and in § 35. --- νῦν : hyperbaton ; cf, XXIV. 21. — τοῖς πολεμίοις : now in Eleusis. —wepl τῆς πόλεως : the state was still in peril. — τῶν ἐπικούρων : the treason of the conspirators reached its climax when the Spartan Cal- libius with his garrison of 700 men was stationed in the Acropolis.
95. εἰπεῖν : after πολλῶν, H. 952, a; ἃ. 1526; τοσαῦτα from the context implies a negative, ¢his only, only so much, ref. to what has been said in §§ 92-94. --- εἰρήνης οὔσης, 172 a time of peace ; τὰ ὅπλα is emphatically repeated. — ἐξεκηρύχθητε : the number of fugitives and exiles is estimated by Isocrates at 5000, by Diodorus at a much larger number, more than half of the citizens ; so Frohb. — ὑμᾶς... ἐξητοῦντο, demanded your rendition.
96. The appeal to revenge and party animosity continues with increased vehemence ; ὀργίσθητε, εξ your indignation be kindled ; note the tense. — ot...dméxteway, k. τ. X.: this is not a restrictive, but an explanatory relative clause ; its antec. αὐτῶν is simply the unemphatic pers. pron.; see Goodw. 1007. The better punctuation therefore, as preventing a misapprehension of the true construction, is a colon after αὐτῶν, rather than a comma, as most edd. have it. — φονέας αὑτῶν : by drinking the cup of hemlock-juice, cf § 17. The mode of execution is not mentioned as in itself one of the items of tyranny, for it was that which the law gave to capital offenders who were of free birth; but that the victims were by arbitrary force made to take their own lives. It heightened the outrage against the dead that the burial rites, sanctioned by social custom and by religion, were denied them ; adding arrogance and impiety to oppression. — τῆς.. τιμωρίας : after the compar.; a similar phrase in § 88.
97. διέφυγον : the antec. of ὅσοι is in second pers. (see ἤλθετε, below) ; H. 1063. — wavr. ἐκκηρυττόμενοι : the same verb in §§ 35 and 95. The sufferings of the banished population must have been very great, especially as the most of the cities of Greece refused to harbor them, being either in alliance with Sparta or overawed by her ; it was in the winter time, more- over, that the stress was felt, the three months following October, 404 B. 6. — ἐν πατρίδι, in your native land, (then) hostile. — dOere...Tlap.: cf. εἰς τὸν II. κατῆλθον, 11. 61; this section is similar to séveral passages in the oration cited ; cf. II. 69, 72.
98. Kal...qpaprnre, and had failed in this; H. 748; G. 1099.— ἂν δείσαντες &., would have become terrified, and would (now) be in exile ; ders. is incep, aor., H. 841; Goolw. 1260; μὴ πάθητε : dep. on ἐφ, ---
AGAINST ERATOSTHENES. 141
a: the antec. are ἱερά, βωμοί; καί = even ; τρόπους, conduct, proceedings. — ὅσοι..-ἦσαν : a condit. relat. clause, equiv. to ef τινες ἦσαν ; H. 914; G. 1430, 1440; Gr. Moods, 525 — ἐπὶ ξένης : cf. ἐν ξένῃ γῇ, above ; συμ- βολαίων, debts ; the word denotes both the evidence of indebtedness (note its etymological meaning) and the indebtedness itself. — ἂν.. ἐδούλευον : by “ the old harsh law of debtor and creditor, once prevalent in Greece, Italy, Asia, and a large portion of the world.” See further, Grote, III. Ρ. 94 Seq.
99. ἀλλὰ γάρ: see VII. 9.— τὰ μέλλοντα ἔσεσθαι, lit. those things which would have been about to be ; as is evident from the context, the part. is used as an imperf. (Gr. Moods, 140) and ἄν is omitted with it, as often with ἔμελλεν ; Gr. Moods, 428 (a); Kiihn. 260, Rem. 3. — τῆς.. ἐλλέ- λειπται, there has been no lack of seal on my part; the verb I take to be impers. (H. 819, a) and foll. by the gen. of want, and οὐδέν as accus. of specif. — ἃ... ἀπέδοντο : the selling of temple properties is not definitely attested, but was by no means uncommon in revolutions, on one pretext or another. — ἐμίαινον : because perjured and polluted by judicial murder. — τῶν νεωρίων, the ship-yards, including the docks, ship-houses, and the arsenal. Isocrates (Areopfag. 67) mentions that these had been erected by the city at the cost of 1000 talents, and that the Thirty sold them for demolition for three talents. — ἀποθανοῦσι, now that they are dead ; βοηθή- ware: imperat. as pred. of a relat. clause, as in § 60 and § 80.
100. tpav...pépovras, are both listening to us, and will recognize you as you cast your votes ; an opinion in harmony with the popular belief, but to which a widely current scepticism at this period refused acceptance. This is one of the very few passages in Lysias that give the slightest clew to his religious beliefs. On θεός, cf. note on XIII. 63. — αὐτῶν... καταψηφ., τοῖν be condemning them to death; its subj. is τοσούτους ὑμῶν, antec. of ὅσοι; vividly and powerfully transferring those past issues of life and death to the present ; the case is still pending; there is a new hearing before a new tribunal. The force of the appeal rests on the truth indicated in the significant words of Matt. xxiii. 25. — πεποιημένους ἔσεσθαι : a periphrastic fut. perf.; Greek Moods, 80. — Aristotle, at the close of his treatise on Rhetoric, commends a conclusion similar to this for its omission of con- nectives.
NOTES ON ORATION ΧΗ].
In the MSS. ἐνδείξεως is added to the title; it is probably a mistake of the ancient editors who confounded the two very similar legal processes ἔνδειξις and ἀπαγωγή. See Introduction.
I. τιμωρεῖν : see XII. 94; τῷ πλήθει, τῷ dper.: on this phrase, which occurs repeatedly in this oration, see note on XII. 42; ὄντες : merely an attrib, part. — κηδεστής, in general ὦ relation by marriage, here a brother- in-law.— ἐμοί, πλήθει : dat. of poss. after brdpx. Noticeable is the avowed recognition in the judicial orations of a personal feud or hostility (ἔχθρα), if based on actual injury received, as the rightful motive of prosecution ; cf. XII. 2. — δι’ &, that on account of them ; ὅς, inst. of the regular correl. οἷος (cf. § 36), following τοιοῦτος, as in § 13; XII. 92, e¢ ad. —7é: used asa single connective chiefly in poetry, but also in Thucydides and Plato ; cf. § 82; ἂν θεὸς θέλῃ: cf. Lat. dis volentidus, and later, in Christian writers, Deo volente. The use of θεός in the sing. in this current phrase of the Greeks is worthy of note.
2. ὧν δή, whose names indeed ; to be read in the document mentioned in ὃ 38; δή is used after a relative in a great variety of finely shaded meanings ; here it seems mainly intended to give greater prominence to the clause, which is a so-called explanatory or parenthetic one. — dv8pas...a-ya8ovs : see XII. 75; γενόμενος, dy becoming; part. of manner, H. 969, b; G. 1563, 3. — ἰδίᾳ, individually, as dist. from κοινῇ. --- οὐ μικρά, not a little ; an ex. of the emphasis gained by litotes ; cf. with μεγάλα, just before, and see οὐχ ἥκιστα, above.
3. δίκαιον καὶ ὅσιον : distinguished as the Lat. jus and fas, law human and law divine. — ποιοῦσι : condit., as shown by the foll. infin. with ἄν (taking the place of a pot. optat., H. 964; G.1308);. ἄμ.... γίγνεσθαι, chat we should fare better, lit. it would become better to us; παρά, from.
4. The division indicated extends to § 42, as follows:
πρῶτον μέν, including 88 5-17: the overthrow of the democracy ; ἔπειτα, including §§ 18-38: the crime of Agoratus ; καὶ δή, including §§ 39-42: the last injunctions of the deceased.
AGAINST AGORATUS. 143
— μαθόντες, on learning; it has the force of a condit., as ποιοῦσι in ὃ 3; ἄν belongs with the opt. The more the details of history should be known, the greater would be the pleasure and the plainer the duty of pronouncing the prisoner guilty. — rovrovt: H. 274; Goodw. 412. This inseparable demonstrative affix belongs to the familiar rather than to the elevated style ; its frequent use by the speaker, as he points to Agoratus (cf. §§ 1, 33, 41, 56), accords with the contemptuous freedom with which he treats him throughout, as one of slave origin and base associations. — ἐντεῦθεν, ὅθεν : thence, whence ; we may render them together: were. A Greek would say : Begin thence, i. e. from that point, where we should say: Begin shere, i. e. at that point,
5, 6. γάρ, not for ; it gives no reason ; it refers to the previous mention or promise; technically called γάρ epexegetic, and usually omitted in Eng. ; in XII, it is found at the beginning of ὃ 6, but omitted in ὃ 4. The battle of A2gospotami forms the starting-point of the narrative. —ov...torepov, not long afterwards, added to ἐπειδή, making it more definite. —Kal ἅμα... ἐγίγνοντο, and at the same time conferences were taking place; imperf. joined with aguxv., an historical present; H. 828. — τῆς εἰρήνης : restrict. art., the peace which terminated the war-—vedrepa πράγματα, a revolu- tion , Lat. nove res. — εἰληφέναι, that they had found; its subj. the same as of νομίς --- καταστήσασθαι : after καιρόν ; H. 952; G. 1521.
7. σφίσιν: after ἐμποδών, G.1174; cf. H. 765, under which adverbs should be included. — προεστηκότας, /eaders ; a word syn. with δημαγωγοί, but without its bad flavor; the orators, the so-called demagogues, not neces- sarily like those next named holding any official position. — ἀμωσγέπως : some edd. give the Attic form with the rough breathing; somehow or other ; the word is literally somehow at least.— βούλοιντο: cf. κελεύοιεν in XII. 76.— ἐπέθεντο, se¢ upon. Cleophon, ‘‘the most influential demagogue,” as Dio- dorus says, during the closing period of the Peloponnesian War, has had scant justice done him by many of the historians. Frohb. says: “ἃ thorn in the eye of the oligarchic conspirators, he was, notwithstanding his reck- lessness and terrorizing, at bottom an honest and disinterested patriot, though not over-conscientious in the choice of his political methods.”
8. ἐγίγνετο, was in session. This assembly was held about the beginning of the year B. Ὁ. 404, acc. to Xenophon ; thus some 4 or 5 months after the battle of AEgospotami. — ἐφ᾽ ots, 0” what terms ; H. to11, and a; G. 1600; the simple relative used in an indirect question, where we oftener have ὅστις ; cf. § 4, ᾧ τρόπῳ. --- εἰ κατασκ.;: a subst. cl. in appos. with οἷς, εἰ to be ren- dered that. —émi δέκα στάδια, as much as ten stadia; the phrase is used substant. and is subj. of the verb ; H. 600, b.—-rére: correl. of ὅτε, above. — οὐκ ἠνέσχεσθε, did not endure, foll. by supplem. part.; explain the form of the verb; H. 361; Goodw. 544.— εἴη: for ἐστί of the direct form.
144 NOTES ON ORATION XIil.
The proceedings here narrated, beginning with this section, were glanced at in Orat. XII. 68. See the story as told by Grote, VIII. p. 226 seg., and in a more intelligible form by Curtius, III. p. 566 seg.
9. αὐτοκράτορα, with full power, plenipotentiary ; ὅτι is not followed by its appropriate verb, but by ποιήσειν instead (an allowable anacoluthon). — ὥστε... διελεῖν, so as neither to tear down any part of the walls. — ἄλλο οὐ μηδέν, in any other respect ; διελεῖν and ἐλαττῶσαι refer to Theramenes as their subj., acc. to Frohb., who compares this constr. with XII. 68; it seems better to consider the subj. general, referring to the government or citizens of Athens. — οἴοιτο : continuation of the indir. disc. after λέγει ὅτι, above.
10. ἐκεῖνον, that one, him; more emphatic than αὐτόν. The rejection of Theramenes, here mentioned, must have been within a year after the battle of Arginusze and the unjust condemnation of the six generals ; the disapprobation of the people may have been in consequence of the part he had taken in that trial. The strategi were not among the officers chosen by lot (for others see Dict. Ant. ‘* Archairesiai”); after election they were liable to the trial of qualifications, before the Senate or a dicastery, and might then be rejected. See Dict. Ant., “" Docimasia.”
11. εἰς Λακεδαίμονα : in this account Lysias briefly blends together the ‘two missions of Theramenes, — one to the camp of Lysander, and the other to Sparta. It was in the former that he remained three months. — ἐλθών : temporal ; καταλιπών : descriptive (G. 1563, 7); εἰδώς : concessive ; vopt- tev: causal. We may render: went to Sparta and remained,...leaving you besieged, though he was aware, Frohb. considers καταλιπών to be causal after εἰδώς. The partt. in this and ὃ 9 deserve special attention. — τοὺς πολλούς, the mass of the people, with ὄντας, in the same constr. as τὸ... πλῆθος υὐνἐχόμενον. --- εἰ... ἀπόρως, if he should bring you into extremity, as he actually did, —movavrwoitv, of any sort whatever; H. 285; see Lex., ὁποῖος.
12. δέ: connects with ἐκεῖνος μέν, above. — πρόφασιν : adv. accus., so also τὸ δ᾽ ἀληθές. The same occurs in Thucyd., VI. 33; dévam., iz order to rest; the phrase ἦλθεν εἰς τὰ ὅπλα is general, and may refer to an evasion of hoplite service, or of military duty in any branch, — ἐκείνῳ, for Aim ; for the trial of his individual case a court was made up, — a jury packed ; παρασκευάσαντες is significant of the illegality; καθίσαντες is the usual term. This section closes the narrative concerning Cleophon, beginning at § 7 with πρῶτον μέν ; ὃ 13 goes on with δέ,
13. Strombichides, a commander whose name frequently occurs in the history of the Peloponnesian War, of strong democratic sympathies, as the customary phrase εὐνοοῦντες ὑμῖν indicates. — προσιόντες, visiting, having an interview with, —v, as; after τοιαύτην, where we usually find οἵαν ;
AGAINST AGORATUS. ee 4 Κ
cf, note on § 1. --- ἔργῳ, by deed, i. 6. by actual experience. — ἀπτωλέσαμεν, we lost.
14. γάρ: cf. ὃ 5; fv: subj. κατασκάψαι : i¢ was (in the treaty) 20 demolish the long walls entirely. With ἐπὶ δέκα, cf. § 8. --- ὅλα : evidently emphatic, though not necessarily so from its pred. position. — τὲ, παρα- δοῦναι,... καὶ τὸ.. περιελεῖν : both are co-ord. with κατασκάψαι. Observe the diff. bet. περιελεῖν and διελεῖν, and cf. note on ὃ 9. In XII. 40, καθεῖ- λον, demolished, occurs as a syn. of κατέσκαψαν.
15, 16. ὀνόματι : the full antithesis would require the article, as in XX. 17, τῷ μὲν ὀνόματι. ---- τῷ δ᾽ ἔργῳ : observe the force of the pres. in καταλ. --- οὐκ ἔφασαν, refused ; the foll. tense is not to be explained by the rules for indir. disc.; cf. the infin. in XII. 19, after govro. It is not what they said, but the act, the determination that is thought of ; οὔ φημι is often thus used. — τείχη : by prolepsis placed before the clause where it logically belongs; H. 873; we may render: mot because they were sorry that the walls were to fall. The clause εἰ.. παραδοθ. is also in its nature a subst. cl., εἰ being whether. —atroits: H. 764, 2; Goodw. 1161. — τούτων: H. 734; G. 1097, 2. Let the student remember that a so-called Literal translation of a sentence-like this is not a translation into English. — τὸ dp. πλῆθος : the syn., observe, of τὴν δημοκρατίαν, above. — οὐδ᾽... οὐκ ἐπιθυ- μοῦντες, or (was it) because they did not desire, still explaining οὐκ ἔφασαν, above. An eloquent vindication of the motives of the democratic leaders. --- τῷ 8. τῶν ᾿Αθ.: observe the partit. force of the gen. in this position ; H. 730, d.
17. ταῦτα anticipates the cl. ὅτι εἰσέ, which is in appos. with it. — εἰσί, κωλύσουσι : H. 932,1; G. 1497.— τὴν περὶ τῆς εἰρήνης : the assembly held after Theramenes’s return. Frohb. brackets these words as spurious, con- sidering them inconsistent with § 15 ; but the inconsistency is only imagi- nary. — πρὶν τὴν éxk....yev., defore the assembly concerning the peace was held, A word here on an alleged inaccuracy of Lysias. Grote has placed these proceedings, related in §§ 18-38, after the surrender of the city and the entrance of Lysander (VIII. 235), referring especially to Xenophon, fell. 11. 2, 22, in proof that Lysias has misdated the occurrences in order to strengthen his plea. But the two accounts are not in conflict. Xenophon condenses into less than a dozen lines the announcement of the conditions of peace, their acceptance and ratification, the triumphant entrance of Lysan- der into the city, and the beginning of the demolition of the walls in accord- ance with the terms of the treaty. It is fair to interpret his statement in the light of Lysias’s circumstantial narrative, instead of assuming that the announcement of Theramenes and the final vote on the acceptance of the peace both took place on one day in one session of the assembly. Had the advocates for the prosecution presumed on the poor memories of the entire
146 NOTES ON ORATION XIII.
body of judges concerning events so recent and well known, the documents brought into court must of themselves have made such a distortion of facts ineffectual. The narrative given by Plutarch in the life of Lysander also implies that some days intervened between the assembly mentioned by Xenophon and the entrance of Lysander. It is an assumption on the part of Blass that they took place on the same day ; a statement that Xenophon is by no means responsible for. — εἰς διαβολάς : καθιστάναι τινὰ εἰς δ. = fo bring one into ill-repute; καθεστηκὼς ἐν ταῖς δ. = to be in ill-repute. — τοιαύτην : followed by γάρ, as in ὃ 7.
18. ov ξυνειδ. ἐκείνοις, mot that he was privy to their plans, i.e. the plans of the generals and the taxiarchs ; instead of a corresponding causal part., afterwards we find ἐδόκει ; οὐδέν is adv. accus., in any respect; its position makes it emphatic. — qwep\...mparrovtes, engaged in ; the phrase is rare ; πιστόν, ¢rustworthy. — Sothov καὶ ἐκ δούλων : a frequent missile of invective in the courts, and, unless accompanied by proof, often to be taken with deductions. The ancient as well as the modern bar allowed consider- able freedom in using the vocabulary of assault. Cf. § 64.—avrots: i. 6. Theramenes and his confederates.
19. ἄκοντα, ἑκόντα : pred. adj. agree with αὐτόν ; they wished him, there- Sore, to seem to make his disclosures reluctantly, and not willingly. —8mras πιστότερα ὑμῖν ὑποφαίνοιτο : thus the MSS. Frohb. suggests ὅπως πιστο- τέρα ἡ μήνυσις φαίνοιτο. As it stands in the text, the subj. is τὰ μηνυ- θέντα understood ; ὑποῴ. is difficult to explain; Rauch. ‘‘ might gradually appear”; L. ἃ S. ‘‘ might just appear”; might appear somewhat more credible to you, is perhaps nearly the meaning. Kayser emends the text so as to read οὕτω φαίνοιτο. --- Kal ὑμᾶς, that you also, — τὸν tod’ EX. xan, known as the son of Elaphostictus ; the name (ἔλαφος and orixros, Spotted Deer) probably of some slave or freedman.
20. διέφθαρτο : it had become the tool of the oligarchic conspirators ; one of their first steps was to get control of the Senate. — τεκμήριον : H. 626 and a.—oi...moddol, the majority ; ἐπί, during the administra- tion of. —- ἐβούλευον : render, were members of; βουλὴν βουλεύειν usually means 20 give counsel. In the sense 20 be a Senator it is not often foll. by a cogn. acc., as here; ὑστέραν, i. 6. of the succeeding year. — er εὐνοίᾳ τῇ tper., out of good-will to you; H. 694; Goodw. 999.— τοῦ δήμου τοῦ ὑμ.: evidently syn. with τοῦ ὑμ. πλήθους ; but Lysias only uses it, says Frohb., in one other place; cf. § 51. — ἐλέγετο, were adopted; strictly, were pro- posed. — αὐτοῖς : ref. to τὰ ψηφίσματα. --- καὶ... προσέχητε, and that you may regard them as such.
21, 22. ἐν ἀπορρήτῳ, sc. οὖσαν, when in secret session; ordinarily the sessions were public. — τότε καθ., ‘hen in progress; observe the force of the pres. — μὲν οὖν : marking the transition to a special point ; now their
AGAINST AGORATUS. 147
names, etc. One expects an adversative particle. —ré... «al: connect dup. and εἶναι (in ind. disc. after ἔφη), which give the two assigned rea- sons; the subj. of dup. refers to Theocritus; ἐκείνοις ; H. 773; G. 1175.— ἐμηνύετο denotes past time, as shown by the foll. aor.; H. 895, N. a; G. 1397; by what tense to be rendered? — ἀνώνυμον, without furnishing names ; the reader will note that azonymous in Eng. has usually a more restricted sense than the Greek word. — νυνὶ δέ: cf. XII. 23, note.
23. ἐπί, “ for, after, in quest of” (L.& S.); ἄγειν, to bring, the context implying ἕο αγγεσέ. --- παραγενόμενος : H. 616; Goodw. 924 (b); cf. γνούς, § 17. Who the Nicias and Nicomenes mentioned were, is not known. They and their companions were of the popular party, while Agoratus (so the foll. argument seeks to prove) was acting ἐκ παρασκευῆς with the oligarchy. - οἷα βέλτ.: strengthened superl.; H. 651. Observe the litotes ; the con- dition of things in the city was anything but satisfactory to the popular party. — οὐκ.. -προήσεσϑαι, declared that they would not allow ; the subj. of ἄγειν is understood ; μέν contrasts not ἄγειν, but the whole clause, with what follows.
24, 25. τῶν éy....KwAvévtev: pres. of continued action; they took down the names in the midst of the proceedings; ἀπιόντες ox.: H. 985; Goodw. 1587-— Movv : H. 220; Goodw. 296; cf. ᾿Αθήνηθεν, below. This altar was in the temple of Artemis, a famous asylum in those times. — παρορμίσαντες : παρά = alongside, i. e. of the shore; παντὶ τρόπῳ, dy all means ; dat. of manner, equiv. to a modal adv. limiting the infin.; αὐτοῦ: δέομαι, fo entreat, is generally foll. by the gen., as in its original sense. — ἕως.. κάταστ.: dep. probably on an implied verb ; they promised to remain with him until the affairs of the city were restored to a better condition; αὐτοί: agrees with the subj. of συνεκπλευσ., i.e. the sureties; H. 940, b; ‘Goodw. 927.— εἰ κομισθείη ; ind disc. after a past tense for ἐὰν κομισθῇ5. A similar constr. in XII. 14, last sentence; H. 932, 2; G.1497; ὑποβάλω- σιν : the form of the hypoth. relat. cl. is unchanged from dir. disc.; see Gr. Moods, 690.
26. ταῦτα : cogn. acc. The foll. partt. are plainly concessive. — αὐτῶν: intens.; to accompany him ¢hemselves. —tt wor...wapeox., there had been something concerted by you; see ἐκ παρασκευῆς, ὃ 22. — πῶς.. -ᾧχου, would you not have gone ?
27, 28. ἀλλὰ μέν δή strongly emphasize the negative: may more, you and they were not in like condition ; γέ belongs with ὅμοια somewhat as γέ with ἀξίους, XII. 20. On the exemption of Atl enian citizens from tor- ture, see Dict. Ant., “ Basanos.” — oder. αὐτῶν : H. 691; Goodw. toor; ταῦτα p. λυσιτ., that this was better, more advantageous. — τῶν.. ἀγαθούς, many good citizens; ὑπό after ἀπολέσθαι, owing to the implied passive force
of the verb. —BacaveOivar: dep. on κίνδυνος, subj. of ἦν ; μᾶλλον...
ἘΣ
148 NOTES ON ORATION XIII.
συνέφερεν, 11] was more advantageous ; observe the omiss. of ἄν; H. 895, Note ; Goodw. 1402. --- ἄκων: agr. with σύ, the implied subj. of the inf. which is to be supplied from the foll. ἀπέκτεινας, ‘hat (you did it) unwillingly. —
een after xarayapr. A marked instance of hyperbaton for the sake of
asis ; emphasis is, s/evidently laid on the second pers. pron. throughout this passage.
29, 30. οἱ ἐκ τῆς B., the committee from the Senate; doubtless mentioned in the decree just read ; perhaps composed of the same persons as before, and sent back to Munychia with the necessary instructions ; Movvux(ate : see reff. on Μουνυχίασιν in § 24, and H. 219,a.— ἀπογράφει, deposes to; in this oration generally fo inform against, denounce ; the clerk recording the names given in. — ἡ... ἀρχή: pred. after éyévero. All the subsequent calamities followed, so the orator views it, because of the murder of the patriotic leaders, and this murder is laid to Agoratus; see ὃ 33. — ἐπ᾿ αὐτοφώρῳ : see Introd.; used here loosely, dy incontestable facts. For an example of the ἐρώτησις, see XII. 25.
31. οὕτω.. ἔρρωτο, so strongly determined was the Senate; καὶ... ἐδόκει, besides, he himself did not seem ; two reasons are parenthetically given by the speaker ; their own persistency and the demeanor of Agoratus himself both led them to seek for further disclosures; as to its being “he truth, that is the speaker’s irony. There was evidently more that he might be induced to tell. — rovrovs...émravras, αὐ these therefore ; i. e. those referred to in ὃ 30; the antithesis indicated by μέν is not given. The point made by the speaker is that up to a certain limit no reluctance had been shown by Agoratus in making his disclosures. Frohb..and Rauch. omit the words in brackets. In both these sections the MS. readings are unsatisfactory.
32. θεάτρῳ: the Dionysiacum, the theatre situated on the western slope of the hill of Munychia; an unusual and irregular place of meeting. — καὶ ἐν τῷ δήμῳ, also in the popular assembly ; as well as in the Senate, — in order to give more nearly the semblance of legality to their proceeding, especially in the case of these officers who were elected by popular vote. — ἀπέχρη: not impersonal, as usually employed ; its subj. is 7...yey. — ἔξαρνον... γενέ- σϑαι, fo deny; see XII. 31. Some gesture or word of reluctance on the part of Agoratus may explain the ἀλλά.
33, 34. The decrees read at this point in the trial, — decrees passed by this assembly in Munychia, — were of course concerning the arrest and examination of the persons denounced. — καὶ τὰ... δήμῳ : sc. ἀπογραφέντα. - σχεδόν τι.. ἐπίστ., pretty well understand ; σχεδόν is freq. used with otda and like verbs; cf. Demosth., OZ IIL. 9: σχηδὸν ἴσμεν ἅπαντες δήπου. --- οὐδ᾽ ὑφ᾽ ἑνός, not even by one ; the two separate words more emphatic than οὐδενός, The cl. ὡς... ἐγένετο... προσήκει is obj. of ἀποδείξειν.
AGAINST AGORATUS. 149
35. τότε: then and not till then could the disgrace of the surrender and
the oligarchic revolution be consummated ; λιμένας : a good map of Athens will show how the Pirzeus peninsula was indented with harbors. — tf...éyé- vero: this abrupt, indignant question closes the sentence with great force. — κατεστάθησαν: cf. XIL. 5: εἰς τὴν ἀρχὴν κατέστησαν, this latter form being more commonly employed. — κρίσιν... ἐποίουν, they instituted a trial; δέ, but, or, while on the contrary. — ἐν τῷ....δισχιλίοις ; Frohb. supposes these words to be cited from the decree ; ἐν δισχ., before two thousand ; ἐν freq. = Lat. coram ; see Lex.; κρίσιν ποιεῖν completes the construction ; ἐψηφίσατο, had decreed; H. 837; Greek Moods, 58. As Frohb. re- marks, the number of judges named in the decree of the assembly shows the great importance attached to this trial ; only two cases are known in which this number was exceeded. — ἀνάγνωθι : to the clerk of the court, 6 ypayu- ματεύς. ., 26. éexply., ἐσώζ., instead of the aor., though ref. to past time, perhaps because of the number of persons referred to; making it, as it were, a case of repeated action. Cf. Plato, Gorg. 516, E., as quoted in Gr. Moods, 410. — ἅπαντες γάρ, k.t.d., for all of you were at length convinced in what evil plight the city was ; κακοῦ: gen. after adv., H. 757; G. 1148; ἐν ᾧ, when. — νῦν δέ, but as it was ; ref. to the supposition above. The same use of νῦν as in XII. 23.
37. βάθρων: scats by the bema, either in front or on each side. It is worth while to picture this proceeding clearly to one’s self, and to under- stand in what respects it differs from a lawful trial. On the usual method of voting in the Athenian courts, see a good account given in Dict. Ant., “* Psephos.” — τραπέζας : the ballots were deposited on the tables, rather than as usual in urns (καδίσκοι), in order to make the vote as public as possible. Each Senator, it will be observed, deposited only one ballot, — if he voted to acquit, on the table farther forward, and nearer to the seats of the Thirty. The usual method of having two ballots cast by each dicast,- as well as the use of urns, contributed to insure the privacy of the vote ; the dicasts having one ballot of each kind, — for acquittal and condemnation, the former white, and the latter black, say, —could prevent any one’s knowing which had been placed in the judgment urn ; and the more easily, because the second urn enabled them to dispose of the unused ballot in an equally unobserved manner.
38, 39. οὐδενὸς... πλὴν ᾿Αγοράτου : for this fact we have only the state- ment of the speaker ; if there were other instances of acquittal, they were doubtless sufficiently rare. On the escape of Menestratus, see ὃ 55. — ἀφεῖ- σαν: (ἀφίημυ. --- ὡς πολλοί : also in ὃ 44. It fixes attention upon the number, and thus is not precisely the same as ὅσοι, which is often rendered how many, without emphasizing upon the number. — The prison-scene here
150 NOTES ON ORATION XIII.
described must have been of frequent occurrence during these times; μεταπέμπ....ὃ μὲν ἀδελφήν, one sends for a sister to come to the prison. — ὃ δ᾽ ἥ τις... προσήκουσα, and others for whatever female relative each of them had. A similar clause in XII. 18, ---τὰ ὕστατα: H. 725 ; G. 1054, N. 2; τούς before αὑτῶν disregards the gender of the nouns to which it refers, the thought being of the kindred in general.
40. καὶ δὴ καί, likewise Dionysodorus also; καὶ δή = and truly, and especially, even so; cf. ὃ 4; μέλαν τε: τέ here would seem to require καί with another part. (perhaps ἀποκειραμένη, shorn in token of grief) after it. Black was the mourning color among the Greeks generally ; in Argos white also was worn. — ἐπὶ τῷ ἀνδρὶ... κεχρημένῳ, on account of her husband’s having experienced, etc.; the prep. belongs not to the noun alone, but to the part. with its subject-noun. There is a similar example in Demosth., Phil, 1. 51; for a fuller discussion of such constructions, see an article by the editor in the Zransactions of the American Philological Association for 1872.
41, 42. διέθετο, disposed of, bequeathed. Notice the full weighty form τῆς ἀδελφῆς THs ἐμῆς, as above ; the full and careful use of the pronouns in this passage brings the various persons concerned into more distinct view ; τιμωρεῖν : see note on XII. 94. — ἐὰν γένηται, if a child should be born; rendered by should because of the ind. disc. — φράζειν τῷ γενομένῳ, fo ex- plain to the child; part. neut., according to Frohb., but it may be taken as masc.; notice the use of this aor. part. having the force of a fut. perf. We see how revenge was transmitted from generation to generation in ancient times, and wrought into the very system of law.
The statement of facts, which properly ends with § 42, is continued to § 48, giving another glance at the calamities drawn upon the state and the citizens of Athens.
43, 44. ἀπογραφέντες : see note on ὃ 30; ὑπό may be taken with both verbs. — ἀπ. αὐτούς, by having caused their death, — ἀνιῶμαι... ὑπομ.γ now’ Zam sorry to be recalling. ‘This is the resumplive use of οὖν ; see L. ἃ S., IL.; on the use of the part. here instead of the infin., see H. 986; more fully, Κύμη. 311. — ὡς σφόδρα... προσήκει, how exceedingly you ought to pity ; some of the earlier editors, Docti viri ! used to emend by inserting οὐ, being unable or unwilling to see the irony. —tév πολιτῶν : partit. gen. after τοὺς... κομισθέντας, H. 966, a; an exceptional arrangement (H. 730, d), and in Lysias, according to Frohb., only found once. On the arrest and wholesale execution of citizens resident in Eleusis and Salamis, cf. XII. 52. The execution of Leon of Salamis attracted special attention ; see Grote, VIII. p. 244. These two cities were at this time Attic demes, and not cities in the full Greek sense. — ἰδίας ἔχθρας : a time of settling up long standing feuds and grudges.
AGAINST AGORATUS. I51r
45, 46. αἰσχίστῳ... ἀπόλλυσθαι, 20 perish by a most disgraceful and in- glorious death. —atrév: H. 691; G. 1001; αὐτῶν, just below, has the same const. — καταλείποντες : the progress. pres. accords with the imperf. ἠναγκάζοντο, ref. to the repeated instances ; οἱ μέν is correlative with of δὲ ...08 δέ, below. — τελευτήσειαν : opt. of ind. disc., instead of the subj. with ἄν; H. 932, 2, a; G. 1502, and 3.— ταφήσεσθαι (θάπτω) ; the classical stu- dent needs hardly to be reminded of the weight and solemnity attached to the obligation of children and surviving friends to bury the dead with due ceremony and honors. — θεραπείας : gen. after a verb of need. — ots: a question is begun with a rel. much oftener in Greek than would be allow- able in Engl.; for ποίαν τινά, what sort of a, see H. 702. — τῶν ἡδίστων, of the dearest possessions ; probably neut. — ds κατεσκάφη : to be connected with tore and μέμνησθε, in ὃ 44; so that ὃ 45 and ὃ 46, down to ἔτι, are parenthetical ; νεώρια: cf. XII. 99. --- ἡ ϑύναμις.... παρελύθη, the whole power of the city was broken, strictly, relaxed, or, to use the Greek word, paralyzed.
47, 48. τὸ τελευταῖον, finally ; adv. accus.; ἀπωλέσατε : cf. ἀπωλέσα- μεν, ὃ 13. — ovAANPSyy...€nAGOnTE, you were driven forth in a body; the number of those forced into exile, Isocrates says, was about 5,000; accord- ing to Diodorus, more than half of the citizens, which would be more than 10,000 ; this must be intended to include the large class who took up their residence in the Pirzeus, or else it is an exaggerated estimate. — οὐκ ἔφασαν ἐπιτρέψαι : see § 15, and note. — οὗς... βουλομένους, k. τ. X., and these, who wished to secure some advantage to the state. —atrws εἶ, art the cause of, art responsible for ; as in § 43. — καὶ τῶν ἰδίων...καί, zot only cach one his ows misfortunes, but also; note the mid. τιμωρεῖσθε, and cf. XITZ 94.
49, 50. ὅ τί wore, ix what possible way. — ὅπερ, precisely which ; the clause more freely, which is just what he would never be able to prove ; with Frohb., I retain the second ἀποδεῖξαι. ---- τοῦ δήμου, of the people, i. e. τῆς ἐκκλησίας, as in ὃ 32; αὐτοῦ follows the compound xaray.; as to its position, cf. σοῦ, § 28. — ἣν ἐκρίθη, which was pronounced upon him, lit. as to which he was sentenced; H. 725, 6; Goodw. 1076; 1239. — καὶ ἀφείθη, and was acquitted; appended to the rel. cl., not a part of it. — φησίν, saith it; the conversational repetition of λέγει ; εἰσαγγέλλω is syn. with μηνύω ; see §§ 19, 48, etc.; cf. ἀπογράφω.
The omitted documents are called: DECREES, SENTENCE, INDICT- MENTS. The γνῶσις is mentioned above as 7 κρίσις, the sentence or verdict. Properly it denotes the judicial investigation itself ; here, its result or record. Frohb. omits the third title, γραφαί, as their reading is not called for by the orator.
51, 52. ὡς Sux... ταῦτα, that he brought these charges justly, i. e. that they were well founded ; ὁρῶν, decause he saw. — τῷ δήμῳ : see § 20, and
152 NOTES ON ORATION XIII.
note. — τὶ κακόν : first obj..of εἰργ.; δεδιότες, x. τ. A. (δείδω), for fear that the democracy would be overthrown ; on ἄν, see Greek Moods, 368; the part. is causal, as ὁρῶν, above; ἂν.. ἀπέκτειναν : qualified by οὐ at the be- ginning of the sentence. — πολὺ τοὐναντίον τούτου, (that they would have done) guzte the opposite of this. — οὐκ οἶμαι : this sentence is noticeable for its negatives ; οὐκ οἶμαι οὐδέ form one negative expression, acc. to H. 1030; G. 1619; οὐ before τούτου is a usual repetition of the negative on account of the interposed clauses ; οὐ before δεῖν belongs to the last phrase alone. — οὐδ᾽ ἐάν τις... ὡς μάλιστα, even if one ever so undesignedly ; for the latter phrase, see note XXII. 1. — ὦν; gen. after ὑπερβολήν ; in this instance, the limiting gen, seems to denote distinction ; render, which cannot be exceeded. The more distinctly these scenes of outrage and blood come into view, the more we wonder at the restraint rather than at the exaggeration of the con- temporary orators ; οὐ δεῖν ὑμᾶς ἀμύνεσθαι, shat you ought not to punish him. ---- ἐκείνων, this; ref. to what follows; H. 696,b. As to the fact mentioned, cf. § 24.
53, 54. καίτοι, and yet; adversative to an implied: ‘‘ You did not do this.” — εἰ.. ἐπίθον, 7f you had yielded; H. 895; G. 1307. --- viv δέ: cf. note on § 36. — εἰ.. εἴποις depends upon διαπράξασθαι ; it may be regarded as the indirect form for ἐὰν.. εἴπω, like εἰ... κομισθείης in ὃ 25; see note. On @ov (fr. οἴομαι) with aor. inf., cf. XII. 19; μέγα te: easy vernacular for some great reward. — οὔκουν τούτου ἕνεκα δεῖ σε, you ought not, therefore, on that account. —6 ἹΚαριδεύς, of the Phrygian city Caris (not mentioned in Dict. Geog.).— τῇ αὐτῇ αἰτίᾳ τούτῳ, on the same charge as he ; H.773 and a; 6. 1175 and 1178. — 6 μὲν... Ξενοφῶν : Zev. in apposition with 5 μεν. —otrw: in some edd, (the MSS. vary) there is no lacuna after οὕτω, and it is interpreted as a colloquial so or merely so, i. 6. in the usual manner. — τὰ ἥδιστα : here is the bitterness of tone that is constantly reappearing in the orations subsequent to the war. The horrible scenes of the tyranny were to the Thirty τὰ ἥδιστα.
55. εἰς Μενέστρατον, x. τ. X., chrows some of the blame concerning the depositions upon Menestratus; πὶ : obj. of ἀναφέρειν, to charge blame or responsibility upon. —8ypdtns τοῦ Mev., of the same deme as M.; the pred. is ἣν, and there was, etc, — ἡ ἐκκλησία : referred to in § 32. — ἅμα μὲν.. ἅμα δέ, αὐ he same time.. and; ἄπογ. ἀπολέσθαι, should be informed against and put to death; cf. § 43.
56, 57. καὶ προσαπογράφει, and in addition (to those informed against by Agoratus) denounces. — δόξαντα... εἰσαγγ.: causal ; decause he seemed, etc.; possibly quoted from the decree or record, — λαβόντες ἐν δικαστηρίῳ, having gotten him into court; cf. XII. 35; πολλῷ χρόνῳ ὕστερον, a long time afterward, is particularly stated by way of answer to an objection about to be mentioned in § 83. --- τῷ 8Syplw: the executioner is oftener called
AGAINST AGORATUS. 153
ὁ δημόσιος. Beating to death with a club was a frequent punishment for murderers, kidnappers, and like criminals. — εἰ... ἀπέθανεν : H. 893; G. 1390. — ἧπου ᾿Αγόρατός ye, surely Agoratus; an emphatic falling circumflex on the name best reproduces γέ. --- ὅς ye, K. T. A., since at least he, having informed against Men., is the cause. —tls αἰτιώτερος, who is more responsible ; τοῦ θανάτου is understood ; a sudden change in the sentence to the livelier interrogative form.
58, 59. καὶ τό ye ἐπ᾽ ἐκεῖνον εἶναι, and at least as far as it depended upon him ; én’ ἐκείνῳ is more common, but both the dat. and accus. are in use; the infin. is uséd as a kind of adv. accus.; H.956; G. 1534 and 1535.— οὔτ᾽ ἂν αὐτὸς ov..xatréorys, or would you yourself have been brought ; the protasis is to be supplied : “ If you had followed his advice.” —viv δέ, but as it is, — οὐ καθαρῶς ᾿Αθηναῖον ὄντα: for one to be καθαρῶς ᾿Αθηναῖος, both his father and mother had to be Athenians. The decree of the assem- bly here read seems to have instituted a process depriving Agoratus of his rights of fafizenship:
60, 61. οἱ πράττοντες, K. τ. A., those who hed the administration of affairs at that time ; i. 6. those who were active in the revolution ; κατειπεῖν, to disclose. — ἀγωνισάμενον τῆς ξενίας, being tried for usurping the rights of citizenship; H. 745; Goodw. 1121. An alien found guilty of having usurped Athenian citizenship was liable to confiscation of property, and to be sold into slavery. Aristophanes was in danger of this, and also of being tortured for disclosures concerning the so-called treasonable plots. See Dict. Ant., “ ξενίας γραφή." — περὶ τοὺς δεδεμένους, with respect to, or
toward, those who had been imprisoned; his fellow-prisoners.” — καὶ ὑπὸ σοῦ ἀπολλύμενος, even when suffering death from you; τοιουτοσί : note the deictic force: ‘*‘ Look on this picture, and then on that!” — ov8év...
συνειδώς : cf. note, § 18. — πεισθεὶς δὲ.. μεθέξεις, yet being persuaded that you would share ; τότε qualifies καθισταμένης, which, contrary to the usual order in such cases, is placed after the noun.
62. οὐ πολλοί, few ; οὐ belongs closely with the adj., as if the two made a compound word, and hence it is not changed to μή on account of the cl. being conditional ; H. 1028. Frohb; endeavors to explain it on the principle of ind. disc. — viv δὲ συλλήβδην, διέ now (I will speak, — or ἀκούσεσθε understood) of them in general. —ot μὲν... παρεδίδοσαν: I have adopted Rauchenstein’s punctuation, as representing the more probable construction ; for some (of them), etc., delivered over...the city increased in power (μείζω). ---- οἱ δ᾽ ἄρξαντες, while those who held other high offices. Then follows, in § 63, a brief, broken utterance, suitable to the emotions sug- gested, in honor of the living as well as the dead, — making grateful men- tion of their preservation, and of their return for the deliverance of their country.
154 NOTES ON ORATION XIII.
63. οἱ δ᾽ αὐτῶν, and some of them; this nom. remains without a verb, the constr. abruptly changing after reper. — οὗτος μὲν... ἡ δέ : boldly and strikingly put; Ze slew them, fortune and the deity saved them. — τύχη, δαίμων : a glimpse, though vague, of Lysias’s religious conceptions. Both words occur again in XXIV. 22, with no sharp distinction between them. But ὁ δαίμων is more distinctly personal, the god, the personal power con- trolling any human destiny. The words in II. 78, ‘*the god to whom our destiny is allotted,” point to the prevailing polytheistic view. According to Frohb., θεός is nowhere found in Lysias, except in the stereotyped phrase ἂν θεὸς θέλῃ. --- Φυλῆς : ‘‘On the straight foot-path from Athens to Thebes, beneath vertical walls of rock which are visible from Athens, lay the fort of Phyle, a small castle with a circumference of about 900 feet, completely shutting off the narrow mountain-path, and from its elevation (2,000 feet above the sea) offering an open view over the whole plain of Athens, and over the Saronic Gulf as far as the coasts of Peloponnesus. The castle-hill itself has a precipitous declivity, and is only on the east side accessible by a small path; further down wooded gorges descend, which in the winter render the locality still more difficult of access ; while at the base of the mountain-range is spread out the broad district of Acharnze, whose peasants were the most vigorous and liberty-loving among the inhabitants of Attica.” Curtius, History of Greece, Vol. IV. p. 45. --- κατελθόντες... τιμῶνται, δεν returned and are honored ; the latter part. is more closely connected with the pred. than the others. The first three, indeed, may be considered as causal and explanatory to κατελθ.
64. τούτους μέντοι, these men, J say; the particle has its positive, con- firmative tone here, I think ; yet as an adversative it serves to mark a sharp return to the topic in hand. —tls dv αὐτός͵ dut who was he ?— ϑοῦλος : see § 18; ἐγένετο, belonged to, was the property of; the circumstances of the case show that the foll. are genitives of possession.
65. These sections (65, 66) are regarded by Scheibe, Rauch., and others as spurious. πολλά : obj. of λέγειν ; arrange: τἄλλα κακὰ καὶ αἰσχρά, doa, — τοῖς τούτου ἀδελφοῖς : this mention of the brothers of Agoratus does not seem to come in suitably before § 67. It is one of the reasons for consider- ing this passage to be an interpolation. — περὶ δὲ συκοφαντίας, but as to the crime of sycophancy, announces the topic of the sentence in so general a way that the art. is omitted. — beas...dméypadev, freely, either how many private suits he brought as a malicious informer, or how many public prosecutions he instituted, or how many denunciatory lists he handed in. — συκοφαντίας αὐτοῦ κατέγνωτε, found him guilty of sycophancy. συκ. is gen. of cause (H. 745; G. 1121), and αὐτοῦ after the comp. verb; this verb usually has an accus. instead of the first gen.
66. ὥφλησεν (ὁφ λισκάνω) : ὧφ λεν is the usual form. — τοιοῦτος Sy...
AGAINST AGORATUS. 155
ἐπεχείρησε, though he was such (i. e. of slavish origin), he attempted ; ddev- θέρας, /ree-born women, agrees with γυναῖκας.
67, 68. ὁ πρεσβύτερος : English usage in such cases is to say, the eldest, but Lat. and Greek alike often use the compar. — rrapadpuxtwpevopevos... ληφθείς, having been caught treacherously making signals to the enemy ; the first part. is used predicatively after the second ; H.982; G. 1582. Cf. ἐλήφθη μοιχός, ὃ 66. The meaning of παρά in this compound is aside, amiss, hence the sense of falsely, treacherously. — ἀπετυμπανίσθη : cf. ὃ 56; ἕτερος, second. — ἐκεῖθεν, i. e. from Corinth; παιδίσκην ἀστῆς, α female slave of a woman who was a citizen of Corinth. An ἀνδραποδιστής, hid- napper, whether of free persons or slaves, was punished with death. — λωποδύτην, as a thief; here in its generic sense; but observe its original meaning. — ἀποτυμπανίσαι, infin. of purpose after mapédore.
69-71. ἢ wov...yé: as in ὃ 57. — τοῦ.. ἐξημαρτ. is the obj. of καταψη- φίσασθαι, but is repeated in αὐτοῦ ; it may be rendered by a clause: surely, since he has committed many offences, etc. — ὧν.. ἁμαρτήματος, of cach of which offences ; the antec. of ὧν is πολλά. --- Φρύνιχον : Phrynichus, with Antiphon, was a leader of the ultra faction among the Four Hundred, 411 B. C.; as was Critias in the second oligarchy, the Thirty. Concerning his assassination, see Curtius, III. p. 480 seg., or Grote, VIII. p. 66. The discordance between the accounts given by Thucydides and Lysias (referred to by Grote in his note, p. 85), is not material. The statement of the former evidently needs to be supplemented and corrected by that of Lysias, whose several references to this event are consistent with each other, and in part corroborated by other sources. The speaker’s rehearsal of some of the details (not elsewhere given), is necessary in order to show that Ago- ratus has not the slightest legitimate claim to citizenship, —a fact doubtless sufficient, if proven, to turn the verdict against him. In § 75 he further turns the argument into a dilemma. Suppose Agoratus did have a hand in the assassination of Phrynichus ; the latter was an oligarch whose death the present oligarchy, the Thirty, would have been only too ready to avenge upon Agoratus when he came into their power, had he not earned their favor by doing irreparable damage to the popular party. Among other _ rewards for this assassination, Apollodorus received an estate in the out- skirts of the city that had belonged to Pisander, and had been confiscated ; mentioned in Orat. VII. 4. — βαδίζοντι, as he was walking. — καταβάλλει πατάξας, γε) him with a blow; the part. is adverbial; H. 969, a ; G. 1563, 3. The speaker has in mind to show that the manner of Phrynichus’s death gave no room for the assistance of Agoratus. — ἅμα τούτῳ, thereupon. — οὔτε παρεκλήθη, was neither called in to help.
72. οὐδαμοῦ yap ἐστιν, for nowhere is it; i. 6. is it written; ἐστίν in the sense of ἔνεστιν, having εἶναι for its subj.; cf. ἦν, § 14. — ἔδει : ἄν omitted ;
156 NOTES ON ORATION XIII.
H. 895, N; G. 1400; render: his having been made an Athenian ought (to have been inscribed) om the very same pillar with Thrasybulus and Afpollodorus. Besides an infin. (γεγράφθαι), there seems to have been lost the mention of some other persons besides Agoratus, whom the speaker believes to have obtained recognition and record on the part of the assembly as public benefactors; ἵνα is adv. of place; note the force of πέρ. --- τῷ ῥήτορι: it was the orators who took the active part in the proceedings of the assembly, hence resolutions of this sort would be offered and urged by them; but by giving money to the orator they get their own names inscribed, etc. It is remarkable that within a few years, more than twenty-two centuries after the trial, the speaker’s words have found partial corroboration in the marble archives of the ancient city. Out of the ruins of the Acropolis were dug up, in 1845, some fragments recording, it would seem, the decree pro- posed by Diocles, conferring the gift of citizenship upon a certain Thrasy- bulus of Calydon and others, — the very document, doubtless, which Lysias causes to be read in evidence on this trial. The orator speaks of this record as also containing the names of those who had rendered services and were, therefore, acknowledged as benefactors (εὐεργέται), though not rewarded with citizenship. It is found that these fragments include among the latter the name of Agoratus (KAIATOPATO), with the final sigma missing.
73. οὕτω : emphatic position ; ow so much does he despise. —-ypacas... ἐγράφετο, brought all manner of indictments ; a colloquial use of the phrase ἐξ ἀνθ. Cf. Plato, Theat. 170: τὰ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων πράγματα παρέχουσί μοι, they make me no end of trouble; ἐδίκαζε and ἐξεκλησ. refer to the two prominent civic duties of an Athenian, as juror and assembly-man. — ἐπιγραφ.... εἶναι, having himself entered as an Anargyrasian ; i. e. in the making out of the said indictments. ‘ Anargyrus was a deme of the tribe Erechtheis. — δι’ 8, dy reason of which. Following most edd., I have omitted ἄν before ἀπέκτεινε. ---- γάρ (omit in translation) introduces this argu- ment (τεκμήριον), extending through § 76. — ot πολλοί, the majority ; pos- sibly exaggerated (see Thucydides, VIII. 98), yet the larger number may have temporarily withdrawn to Decelea and elsewhere on the downfall of their administration. It seems, too, that τῶν τετρακοσίων, here and below, is loosely applied so as to include the Four Hundred and their active adherents. Otherwise it would hardly be said that they afterwards com- posed the whole body of the Thirty, besides the Senate convened under them. It is to be said, however, that of the whole argument this portion, §§ 73-76, will least bear inspection. The argument implies a wholesale and violent expulsion of the oligarchs, such as did not by any means take place. Nor was the death of Phrynichus in any such degree the cause of the overthrow of their government, that it should have been a main point with the party to avenge his death, when another revolution restored them
AGAINST AGORATUS. 157
to power in the city. The Thirty, especially, were less likely to be the avengers of Phrynichus, since Critias, their leading spirit, had been his active opponent. Intent on constructing an effective dilemma, the orator misrepresents the situation, without making statements directly false. What is said in § 76 is more to the point.
74. ἡ... βουλεύουσα, which was in session under the tnihialeheciin of the Thirty. — ἀφεῖναι ἂν...τὸν.- ἀποκτείναντα, after getting possession of the slayer of P., would have released him ; ἄν also belongs with the foll. infin. — τῆς aves «ἔφυγον, the banishment which they had themselves bf: fered ; as to the rel., see H. 994; G. 1031.
75,76. μὴ ἀποκτείνας, without having slain him; supply ἀποκτεῖναι with mpoor.; ἀδικεῖ, ἐς gui/ty ; namely, of illegal assumption of the rights of citizenship. — φής, assert, insist. — μείζω... κακὰ ποιήσας, by having done greater evil. — τὴν... ἀπελύσω, you purged yourself to the Thirty of the charge concerning Phrynichus ; lit. the charge (brought) ix behalf of Phryn- ichus. —robrav μέμνησθε, remember this (H. 635), ref. to the infin. — ἐὰν δ᾽ οὐ φάσκῃ, bet if he deny it; H. 1028; see note, ὃ 62.— δέ ὅ τι, on what account; to be taken with ποιηθῆναι ; not, why he says. — τοὔνομα, his name.
77. ἀπολογεῖσθαι, to allege in defence, is frequently followed by an obj. cl., cf. ὃ 89; to have been with the men of Phyle became no slight glory in the times succeeding the Restoration. The modern poet repeats their fame : —
“ Spirit of freedom! When on Phyle’s brow Thou satst with Thrasybulus and his train.” Childe Harold, Canto 11. Stanza 74.
— ἀγώνισμα, strongest plea ; the telling stroke in his defence. — καίτοι... ὅστις, and yet how could there be a greater wretch,— one who, etc. Strictly, I suppose the antec. of ὅστις to be an indef. τινός after the compar. A diff. explan. in Frohb.
78. ἐπειδὴ.. τάχιστα, as soon as, Lat. guum primum; seldom thus separated. Frohb. places the comma before τάχιστα, and doubtless that punctuation would express the construction as it was in the earlier stages of the language, the adverb at first being intended simply to qualify the prin- cipal verb. — ovAdaB....dvrixpus, they seize and straightway lead. — οὗπερ kal, (to) che very spot where. — &...cvddaB.: H. 894, 2; G. 1387, I, (b), 2.— "Avvutos: this is the Anytus who afterwards doomed himself to an inglorious immortality by becoming prosecutor of Socrates. — οὐκ ἔφη χρῆναι, said that they must not. The context will allow us to render χρῆναι by must; its subj. is αὐτοὺς ποιεῖν. --- λέγων : foll. by the forms of ind. disc.; Svax. and τιμωρήσοιντο take the place of the indic.; for εἰ...κατέλθοιεν the direct form would be ἐὰν... κατέλθωμεν ; H. 932, 2; G. 1497.
158 NOTES ON ORATION XIII.
79. στρατ... ἀνδρός : H. 625, a. — ἀλλ᾽ ἕτερον, but again, i. 6. another point introd. by the foll. γάρ : no one will be found either to have messed with him. —raflapxos: the ten taxiarchs commanded the ten τάξεις or divisions of the Athenian infantry, corresponding to the ten tribes or phylee. Each taxiarch held the muster-roll of his tribe. Agoratus was not enrolled or assigned -to duty in any division ; εἰς τὴν ¢.: the same as els τὴν τάξιν, § 82. --- ὥσπερ ἀλιτηρίῳ, just as if he were accursed. —rov tag., i. e. of the tribe of Erechtheis, in which Agoratus claimed citizenship.
80, 81. πομπήν : “On the 12th of Boédromion, 403 (Sept. 21st), the associates of Thrasybulus celebrated the day of their return to Athens ; the well-won day of honor on which they reaped the reward of their bravery and patriotism. They halted before the great entrance-gate, the Dipyplum. Here Thrasybulus came forward for the last time in his character of general ; he held a muster, and availed himself of it to eject as impure from the ranks such as were unanimously held unworthy to enter the city in the ranks of the liberating army, — in particular Agoratus, who, as will be remembered, had served as aider and abettor in the most shameful intrigues. Thereupon the men disposed themselves as a festive procession, which was conducted by a certain AZsinus.” Curtius (IV. p. 61), following Lysias. Thereafter it was regularly observed by the Athenians as an annual festival, — the Thanksgiving-day of Freedom (Χαριστήρια édevbepias). — οὕτω.,.καί ; see note on XII. 19. --- λαβὼν τὰ ὅπλα, in hoplite armor. ἔθεντο τὰ ὅπλα, halted, i. e. in order to close up the ranks, and enter the city in marching order. — προσελθών : not co-ordinate with λαβών ; hence with no connec- tive ; it is temporal before the following predicates, while λαβών is closely joined with ἔρριψε, seized and flung down ; τᾷ is correl. with the foll. cai. — am....¢¢ κόρακας, cursed him; bade him go and be hanged, \it. go to the crows; this not infrequent imprecation being sufficiently explained when we consider the dread felt by the Greeks of being left unburied.
82. Tovrw...déxero: freely, this was the relation in which he stood to the citizens, etc. — ὑπολαμβ., fo retort (with the question), — τοῦ... μὴ ἀποθα- νεῖν, of his not being put to death ; after αἴτιος ; as to τέ, see note on § 1, — εἰ ΓΑνντος.. ἐγένετο, whether A. was not, etc.; in Eng., diff. from Greek, we insert of in a question of doubt with whether, if we mean to imply the probability of the affirmative. Socrates illustrates the uncertainty of human expectations by saying, that he who marries a lovely woman, hoping to be happy with her, does not know whether he shall not be tormented by her (el διὰ ταύτην ἀνιάσεται). Xenophon, Memorad, I. 1. 8. — ὄντων : H. 972, a. —Kal οὐκ εἴα, and did not refuse to permit; εἰς τάξιν.. κατέταξε: cf. ὃ 79.
83, 84. ταῦτα : i. 6. these pleas in his defence, especially his part in the death of Phrynichus, and in the expedition from Phyle ; after the foll. μήτε, dod. has as an object a pronoun referring to the clause ὅτι... τιμωρούμεθα.
AGAINST AGORATUS. 159
— προθεσμίαν : limit of time fixed by law within which an indictment for a given offence must be brought ; render freely : that there is any statute of limitations applying to such offences. —yxpéve, after a time ; τιμωρεῖται, is brought to punishment, — τοῦτον : ref. to tis; H. 697. — ποιοῦντας, decause they were doing ; agr. with the obj. of ἀπέκτεινε understood before δικαίως. — πάλαι δέον τιμωρεῖσθαι, when we ought to have inflicted punishment long ago; H. 973, a; G. 1569. — προσῆκον : sc. ζῆν; accus. abs. denoting time. Agoratus has been the only gainer, — having lived longer than his due, — the slain were as dead as ever. This is sarcastic enough, but hardly touches the point of law, and would alone lead us to suspect that there was something in the claim of the defendant.
85. διισχυρίζεσθαι, relies upon; perhaps, Jays stress upon; namely, upon the fact ὅτε... ἐπιγ. --- ἐπ᾿ αὐτοφώρῳ, in flagranti delicto, subj. of érvy.; ἀπαγωγῇ : applied to the writ as well as to the process. — πάντων. «εὐηθ., silliest of all, — ὡς ... ἔνοχος Sv, as if he would be subject to the process of apagogé; the part. introd. by ὡς (H. 978; Goodw. 1574) is put in the nom. by anacoluthon, as if duox. were in the indic. — ῥᾳστώνην τινά, some relief, that is, by rendering the whole process illegal. — δὲ.. οἴεται, and (as if) he thought ; δέ connects οἴεται (by anacoluthon) with ὦν. --- τοῦτο δὲ... ὁμολογεῖν, but this is just like admitting. — armep...cdter Oar, just as if he ought to be spared, provided that, though not indeed taken in the very act, he nevertheless killed him, The speaker fallaciously shifts his ground from the legal point in question to the actual guilt of the defendant.
86. A passage (§§ 86, 87) ‘‘corrupt and unintelligible,” as it stands in the MSS. Scheibe, the editor of the present text, gives the original of ὃ 86 with little change, simply supplying οὐκ before οἴομενοι. I have placed the comma before Διονύσιον. The general drift of the argument is clear. — ot ἕνδεκα : this board had preliminary jurisdiction in cases of apagogé ; see Dict. Ant., *‘ Apagogé.” — καὶ διισχ., κ- τ. A, and being very confident that they acted rightly. — τὴν ἀπ. ἀπάγειν, to bring the accusation of ap- agogé, technically said of the complainant ; in the law phrase, notice the cogn. accus, — ἐπ᾿ αὐτοφ., ἢ ὅπου ἂν ἦ : these words are quoted from the writ, it would seem ; grammatically the obj. of rpooy., which depends on dvayx., above. — ἐναντίον πεντ.: to be taken with ἀπογράψας. --- ἀποκτείνειε, chat he had slain ; opt. of ind. disc., suggesting the reason in the minds of the Eleven. But all explanations of the syntax of this section must be as con- jectural as the text.
87. οἴεται : i.e. Agoratus ; the second person would correspond with the latter clause. The condit. cl. is in appos. with τοῦτο : that this alone is IN FLAGRANTI, if, etc, — ἐπεὶ.. λόγου, since by your argument at least; to Agoratus. — οὔτ᾽ ἀπέσφαξεν, or cut their throats. Your denunciation was ᾿ the murderous blow, that compelled them to take the fatal cup of hemlock.
3)
160 NOTES ON ORATION XIII.
— οὔτος.. ἐστί, is not he (emphatic) in flagranti-? The phrase is here used adjectively in the pred.; as if: Is not he a murderer taken in the very act? Below the phrase is used adverbially. —% σὺ ἀπογράψας, than you by having informed against them. —éw αὖτ....ὃ ἀποκτείνας, their murderer IN FLAGRANTI. A persistent ignoring of the clear distinction between the : manner of the criminal’s detection and the manner of the crime.
88. ὅρκων καὶ συνθηκῶν, oaths and compacts; the current phrase applied to the articles of agreement and amnesty, with which a reconciliation of the civil discord was concluded ; it is also applied to other treaties. — παρὰ... ἀγωνίζεται, is being tried contrary to, in violation of. — οἵ ἐν τῷ IL, we of the Pireus ; οἱ ἐν Π. (without the article) is the usual phrase. — σχεδόν : with ὁμολογεῖ. --- ἐμποδὼν ... ποιεῖται, ‘interposes ; ἐπ᾿ αὐτοφώρῳ ti: con- temptuous indefiniteness. — καλῶς ἀγωνιεῖσθαι, that he will come out of the trial successfully.
89, 90. περὶ τούτων ἀποδέχεσθαι, fo accept his defence on these points ; the direct obj. omitted. — κελεύετε : imperat. — οὐδὲν προσήκειν ἡμῖν, 27: 20 wise pertains to us, are in no wise binding upon us. — εἶχον... αὐτῷ, would have some reference to him. —%v: agreeing with the nearest subject ; H. 616; Goodw. 9c1.—4#, after οὐδένα, τε: εἰ μή, except. This is, doubt- Jess, too limited an interpretation of the amnesty. It must have been meant to cover all prosecutions of this character. On one pretext and an- other, however, in spite of its guaranties, the demand for vengeance was sometimes complied with.
QI. ὅστις, kK. τ. r., any one who declares that he has been adopted by the people; to be read thus, if with Reiske we fill the lacuna with πεποιῆσθαι, perf. pass. of the mid. ποιεῖσθαι, to adopt as one’s child. — φαίνεται κακώ- σας, ἐξ found to have maltreated ; κάκωσις γονέων, maltreatment of parents, was an indictable offence ; it might be by blows or words, or by refusing them the means of subsistence. — ἐξ dv...éylyvero, (those) dy whom it was becoming, etc.; i. 6, the Athenian people, his foster-father. — ὅστις οὖν... ἔτνπτε, one, therefore, who was wont to strike his own father ; his father by nature (γόνῳ), as distinguished from his father by adoption (ὁ δῆμος), just spoken of. This hint of brutal treatment by Agoratus of his slave father is left unverified and unexplained. — ἃ.. ἀγαθά, goods which belonged to him. — πῶς ov Kal διὰ τοῦτο, is he not on this account also; his depriving the state of its best citizens is viewed as robbery of a parent.
92, 93. Cf. the opening of the oration. — ἀποθνήσκοντες : temporal. To you as well as us, his relatives, were made the last requests of the deceased. — ἔμβραχυ : used in indef. rel. clauses somewhat as ever; we may render: as far as ever each one can, — πεποιηκότες : H. 981; G. 1580. — ἐκεῖνοι, “hey, i. 6. the deceased. — 4, as; lit. which things. — ἀνεῖναι, éo release ; occasionally used as a syn. for ἀφεῖναι. Cf. ἀπολύοντες in ὃ 94. —
AGAINST AGORATUS. 161
νυνὶ δή, ow, at dast; wow is repeated below. — οὐ.. διαπράττεσθε, you are not only effecting this, i. e. his acquittal ; notice the livelier present for the future, which would properly correspond to the protasis ; H. 828, a.
94, 95. ἀπολύοντες, in acguitting. — οὐδὲν., ἤ, you are simply deter- mining, you are coming to no other conclusion than; γιγνώσκω is very frequent in Attic prose in the sense to judge, to conclude. — ἂν.. «πάθοιεν, would suffer; stated, as if the fate of the deceased still after all hung un- certain in the scale. — ὁμόψηφοι... γενήσονται, shall cast the same vote. — μηδαμῶς, x. τ. A.: a slowly spoken, impressive sentence, Notice the accumulation of long vowels ; also the negatives. — prjre...pnSepla, either by any art or contrivance, in any way or manner ; in earnest deprecation. Cf. οὔτε τέχνῃ οὔτε μηχανῇ οὐδεμίᾳ, in the oath quoted by vee XXIV. 150.
96, 97. ἐναντία.. ψηφ.: below it is τὰ ἐναντία. They are used fins inter- changeably in XII. 42 and 43. — τοίνυν : marking another step in the argument, well then, or now. — ὧν... .«ἀποψ.: i.e. to declare your belief in their innocence by reversing, as far as possible, the verdict of the Thirty. — οὐχ Op. γίγνεσθε : i. e. you free yourselves from complicity in their verdict. - αὐτῶν : H. 691; G. τοοι.
NOTES ON ORATION VIL.
The title is: “A Defence before the Areopagus concerning the Sacred Olive-Tree.” APEOII. : adj. masc.; sc. λόγος: ἈΠΟΛΟΓΊΑ : in appos. with λόγος understood, ΣΗΚΟΥ͂ : σηκός originally signified a fen or enclosure; next, a sacred enclosure or sanctuary, often, for instance, an olive-yard, or vineyard; finally it came to be ap- plied, in a still more specific sense, to the old trunk or stump of a sacred olive. This last signification, it will be observed, is distinctively Athenian, as is the use of the word μορία. See L. & S., on ἐλαία (the true Attic form was é\da) and popla,
᾿Ελαιών, an olive-yard (cf, H. 463,c), is the Greek name for the Mt. of Olives, near Jerusalem.
=
1. βουλή : the court of the Areopagus was addressed by the same title as the Senate of Five Hundred. — ἄγοντι : H. 969, d; G. 1563, κ.---πράγματα : often a difficult word to translate ; in XII. 3, it refers to Zitigation ; here, more general, difficulties. — συκοφάνταις : H. 775 ; G. 1179; see also note on XXII. 1.— εἴ πως : the clause to be completed from what follows, i. e. τοὺς ... ἔσεσθαι. --- Seiv...€8., that even unborn children must now be afraid ; humorously hitting off the Athenian φιλονεικία, that had become in Lysias’s time so serious an evil ; on μή, see H. 1025, 1026; G. 1612.— κοινοί: pred. adj. foll. by dat.; the perils are becoming common, i.e. like perils befall the innocent and guilty.
2. ὥστε: following οὕτω, as here, it should properly introduce a cl. of manner ; but the speaker omits that, and proceeds in this cl. to explain the cause of his embarrassment. Render: and the trial is made embarrassing to me in this respect, namely, that at first, etc. The sent. fully expressed would read: the trial is made so embarrassing to me, that (I am required to meet a changed indictment ; for) a¢ first, etc. — δὲ., νυνὶ... ἀφανίζειν, now, on the contrary, they assert that it was an olive-stump I removed ; the time denoted by ἀφαν. in both cl. is to be understood from the context ; cf. Greek Moods, 96; προσήεσαν : i. 6. those who conducted the prosecu- tion, — seeking from those who had formerly been contractors for the annual product evidence that there had formerly been a fruit-bearing olive-tree on this estate of the defendant; οὐδέν: cogn. acc, after ddux.; ἀπελέγξαι : H. 952; G. 1528.
ΓΙ
CONCERNING THE SACRED OLIVE-TREE. 163
3. περὶ ov: after ἀκούσαντα ; the prep. governs the implied antec., and the rel. is put in the gen. by attr. instead of the accus. after éri8. We may render freely : chough I have just heard of what he has contrived against me and brings into court, at the same time as you who are to judge concerning the case; lit. of those things which having contrived against (me) he has come, referring to the change of accusation after the appearance of the par- ties in court. After ἀκούσαντα I have added a comma to the text. Baur takes περὶ ὧν as ref. to πατρίδος and οὐσίας, Both text and rendering are uncertain.
4. Πεισάνδρου : H. 732,8 ; G. 1094,1. This is the Pisander who was prominent in the revolution of 411. See Grote, VIII. p. 13 seg.; on the confiscation here mentioned, see p. 88, 2did. — ὄντων : τὰ ὄντα is sometimes syn. with ἡ οὐσία; H. 966, a. Apollodorus was one of the two who claimed to have slain Phrynichus, and this gift seems to have been part of his reward. Cf, XIII. 71. —éwvotpyyv: the aor. ἐωνησάμην not being used in Attic, the imperf. appears to be sometimes used with an aor. meaning instead of ἐπριάμην. --- εἰρήνης : i.e. the peace after the Restoration by yi tai in the spring of 403.
. ἡγοῦμαι... ἀποδ., 7 consider it therefore my task to shown: — τοῦ.. Py Jor the previous period ; gen. after ζημιοῦσθαι, acc. to the principle stated in H. 745; G. 1121. It should be observed, however, that the grammars give no similar instance of the gen. with this verb. The meaning is: that he should not suffer the penalty for trespasses committed during the period before he came into possession of the property. — δι᾿ ἡμᾶς : see note XII. 58; oddtv...xww5., we ought by no means to be indicted as criminals for the offences of others. The conclusion of an abridged syllogism, but stated in such a form as to suggest the requisite major premise. The reason- ing is: No one ought to be held guilty of crime committed by another ; if, therefore, the offence charged was not committed by us (and it was not), we ought not to be held guilty.
6-8. τὰ μὲν πόρρω, the remote districts ; τῶν φίλων, our friends. After the occupation of Decelea, in 413, the Athenians themselves took care to leave in the outlying fields and farms near the city as little as possible that could afford plunder to the foraging parties of the Spartans. The use of the word φίλων seems to refer to the foraging parties from the Pirzeus after the civil war began, though that period does not properly belong to the προτέρου χρόνου required by the argument. —&Adws τε καί, especially since ; ὅτι or ἐπεί is to be supplied. — ἄπρακτον, uncultivated. — οὐ θαυμαστὸν δέ, and no wonder. —tv ᾧ, when, as in XIII. 36; H. 813, a; αὐτῶν: H. 691; Goodw. τοοι. --- ὅσοι : ref. to the ἐπιμέληται, see Introd. — πολλὰ... ὄντα, that there were many; χωρία understood; as to the part., see H. 982; G. 1588.—év...7& πολλά, che great fart of which ; it seems necessary to
-that of the lease of Proteas ; concerning which, no doubt, exact information
164 NOTES ON ORATION VII.
consider ὧν fem., though the constr. is unusual. — καὶ. κεκτημένων, even when the same persons have been in possession, etc. See remark on τέθηκε. § 10. — τῇ εἰρήνῃ : cf. ὃ 4.
9, 10. ἀλλὰ γάρ : here used, as frequently, to break off the previous dis- course, and introduce a new topic or division of the argument. The pre- ceding context shows the thought to be: Bw I will proceed with the main argument (cf. § 5), for. — γενέσθαι : H. 955,b; G. 1470. --- émh...dipyx.: i the archonship of Pythodorus ; i. 6. the year 404-3 B.C. His magistracy was, however, deemed illegal ; whence the name, the Year of Anarchy. — ἐνιαυ- τόν: accus. of duration ; the obj. of elpy. is understood. — τέθνηκε, Aas deen ~ dead ; ordinarily it signifies, he ἐς dead (H. 849 ; Goodw. 1263); but the Eng. expressions are rendered into Greek by the one form. On the freed- men in Athens, see Becker’s Charicles, p. 372.
11. αὐτὸς γεωργῶ, 7 have been cultivating it myself; Goodw. 1258; see also Greek Moods, 26, and H.-698. The time ref. to (ὁ χρόνος otros) is
was given in the testimony. — pyot...éxxendpOan, declares it to have been cut up from the roots ; the mention of Suniades, as archon, fixes the date as 397-6 B. C., about seven years after the purchase of the property. — μεμι- σϑθωμένοι : mid., see ἐμισθώσατο, above; the neg. with εἶναι is μή, an exception to the rule for ind. disc. Cf.. H. 1624; G. 1611.— τὸν... épyat.: subj. of the infin, — ἃ... ἣν, chose things which before were not ; H. 1021; G. 1610,
12. ἐν.. χρόνῳ, hitherto ; τοίνυν, moreover; its metabatic force, marking the transition to a new topic. The argument from circumstantial evidenc® begins at this point. — ἠγανάκτουν ἂν, ὅσοι.. φάσκοιεν, 7 was wont ἐο be indignant at any who said; H.835,914,B.2; 1296 and 1431. — δεινόν, shrewd, sharp ; characterizing a man who has too keen an eye to his own interest. With an apparent good-humored simplicity, he hints at what his neighbors think of him, and proceeds to turn it to account in the argument, — ὥς μοι προσῆκε, as was suitable to me; i.e. I preferred that what was said of me should be in accordance with my real character. — σκοπεῖν, that 1 kept in view ; ἔπεχ.: H. 893 ; G. 1300. --- τῷ ποιήσαντι, fo the perpetra- tor, lit. to him who did it; simply repeating the meaning of ἀφαν., as we use the verb do in Eng.; éyévero: a gnomic aor. Scheibe, Frohb., and Rauch. have ἐγίνετο, but there seems to be no valid objection to the reading of the MSS, —xal...Svempag., and so what I should gain, if I escaped detec- tion ; another ex. of καί = and so, used to introduce a statement repeated in another form, may be found in Demosth., O/ynth., 11. 24.
13, 14. ἐκ τούτων, from this point of view, in accordance with this, i. 6. the fact mentioned before ; it is further explained by ἀποῴ., dy showing. In § 14 he shows that he could have been actuated by no one of the supposed
CONCERNING THE SACRED OLIVE-TREE. 165
motives. — διαφθείρεται. ὄντος, was receiving injury by the olive-stump being there; σηκοῦ: gen. 805. ; κινδύνων: H.753,d; Goodw. 1140. -- ἂν «Ὑενομένας, would have resulted ; ἄν belongs also with the opt.; the con- dit. cl. dep. on γενομένας ; the part. takes the place of the hypoth. indic. ; H. 987, "Ὁ; G. 1308. In place of the incomplete sentence in Scheibe, I have adopted Frohb.’s emendation.
15, Ss...pe0” ἡμέραν, who in the daytime; a rel. cl. with causal force ; as if saying, especially should I have exposed myself to punishment; for, if the accusation is to be believed, I proceeded in the daytime to dig up, etc. — ὥσπερ.. δέον, as if it were not needful for me to avoid the notice of all, rather than that all the Athenians should know it; H. 973,a; G. 1569; εἰδέναι : sc. δέον. --- ἂν...ἠμέλησε, would have been indifferent to; speaking, as if he assumed the truth of the statement made in the indictment ; so also with νῦν δὲ... ἐκινδύνευον, dut as it is 7 was making myself liable. It ex- posed the offender, if convicted, to banishment and the confiscation of his entire property.
16. πῶς... ἣν, but should I not be; see note on XII. 84. — εἰ.. ἐξημάρ- tavov, if they committed even the greatest offences ; note the imperf.: now, or at any time; on εἰ καί, cf. H. τοξ3,11. --- καὶ... γενέσθαι, and to become Sree by informing (against me); αὐτοῖς and ἔλευθ. both agree in form with ἐκείνοις, but in sense with the subj. of the inf., the latter as pred. adj.
17. ἔτι τοίνυν, furthermore; εἰ.. παρέστη μοι, if 1) had been in my mind. — συνειδότων : also gen. abs.; and αἰ being aware, i. e. of the existence of this olive-tree. — προθεσμίας : see Dict. Ant., ““ Prothesmia.” Ὁ An action brought for injury to the sacred olives is known to have been one of those to which there was no statute of limitation ; τοῖς elpy. is dat. after προσῆκον, an accus, abs. — ἵνα.. εἶχον : H. 884; G. 1371. The thought in this sentence is closely condensed ; we might render freely: How should I have dared...... considering on the one hand that the gain was but slight ; and on the other, that, on account of there being no statutory limitation to the liability for such offences, it was for the interest of all alike who had culti- vated the ground that the olive-stock be preserved, in order that they might be able...... to shift the charge upon him to whom they had delivered the estate.
18, 19. τοίνυν, moreover; marking an advance in the argument. Here, as in § 37, the context might seem to require an adversative sense, however; but it is doubtful whether it is ever used in this sense, at least by the Attic orators ; Kal...mapeok., 7 had provided against this ; if I had arranged mat- ters with the previous lessees, so that they would not testify against me. --- ἀλλήλων : H. 733; Kiihn. 273, Rem. 20. — ἀλλὰ... εἰδέναι, but also what we conceal, and think no one to be aware of; ἐκείνων is gram. antec. of ὧν. The MSS. have ἀποκρυπτόμεθα μηδένα εἶναι, for which Scheibe and. Rauch.
166 NOTES ON ORATION VII.
have adopted the reading in the text. Perhaps it were as well to allow the original text to remain, though I know of no parallel use of ἀποκρύπτομαι.--- τοίνυν... οἱ μέν, zow some of these, i.e. neighbors; φίλοι and διάφ. are pred. adj. — ἐχρῆν τοῦτον παρασχέσθαι, καὶ μὴ... ποιεῖσθαι, Ae ought to have produced, and not merely to be making ; with the latter inf. ἐχρῆν is used acc. to H. 834. — ὅς φησιν, for he says; cf. ὃ 15. — @xero ἀπάγων, drove off with ; βοηλάτης : oxen were used in Greece for drawing loads, as well as for ploughing.
20, 21. μάρτυρας, as witnesses; χρῆν : augm. omitted. — αὐτὸς δὲ Teripwp.,, and you would have avenged YOURSELF, etc.; αὐτός is to em- phasize the implied reflexive ; H. 688. — εἰ μέν, ....εἰ δέ,... εἰ δέ : instancing the three supposable motives for the prosecution : desire for revenge, for the public. weal, and for gain; H. 895; G. 1397; render érparres by the pro- gressive pluperf., 7f you had been doing. — πεῖσαι : said persuasion to be effected, of course, by pecuniary means. — τούτων τοίνυν : the particle, as in § 18, has its looser inferential force : mow, without having done any of these things ; δυνάμεως, influence.
22. φήσας, having stated; i.e. if he had made a statement before the archons of what he had seen, and immediately brought them to the spot ; not necessarily the nine archons in a body, but particularly the King Archon, whose jurisdiction extended to crimes of impiety and sacrilege. — ἢ ἄλλους, or else; this gives the force that ἄλλος often has, a signif. grammatically ex- plained by considering it as used substantively, and having the foll. noun in appos. See H. 705, and cf. the similar use in § 25 and § 32, and the notes thereon. It is, therefore, not implied here that the archons were mem- bers of the Areopagus, though they became members of it on retiring from office. — διαγιγνώσκειν : cf. διαγνωσομένοις, ὃ 3 ; οὕτω, in that case.
23. ὃς... ἂν ἠξίου, for he would demand ; equiv. to a causal cl.; cf. § 23. - καὶ.... ζημίαν : subj. of γενέσθαι. --- τούτου : i. 6. Nicomachus ; Reiske, Baur, and West. take it as neut., but see the contrast between τούτου μέν and ὑμᾶς δέ. --- συκοφαντῶν dpa: H. 976; Goodw. 1572. --- οὐ.. ἀπορήσει, he will not be unprovided with. In lieu of arguments and witnesses, he wishes you to accept it as positive proof of my guilt that witnesses cannot be induced to testify against me; ‘‘and witnesses” is added ironically; the only witness he brings is that he has no witnesses.
24. τῷ πεδίῳ, the Plain; the Athenian Plain, in the southern part of which lay the city. See Dict. Geog., Vol. I. p. 332. The estate in ques- tion, being in the deme of Acharnz, was also in the Plain. — πυρκαϊάς : a word not elsewhere found in the sense required here ; it is generally taken to mean frees of the wild after-growth, i. e. the offshoots from a stock which had been burned away. The tenacious life of olive-trees is well known ; unless the roots are destroyed, they will send out a vigorous second growth.
CONCERNING THE SACRED OLIVE-TREE. 167
— ἔπεργάσασθαι, fo encroach upon; a technical term deseriptive of tilling the soil closer to the trees than was allowed ; see épyag. in ὃ 25. — ἔμελλε, was about to be, was likely to be ; πολλῶν : gen. abs.
25. οὕτως... ὥσπερ καί, J value them just as highly as; on the verb, cf. ° note to XII. 7. — τὴν GA. οὐσίαν, my property besides; cf. ὃ 22; ἀμφοτ. τούτων : should those trees be missing, he was liable to lose both country and possessions. — ἐπιμελομένους, who take the oversight of them. A com- mission, composed of members of the Areopagus, held sessions monthly ; all matters pertaining to the preservation and control of this portion of the religious property of the state then came under their notice ; γνώμονας, 77- spectors. — ἔζημίωσεν : sc. μέ.
26, 27. περὶ... ποιοῦμαι, περὶ... ἡγοῦμαι : see XII. 7, for the phrases used together. As to the penalty for the respective offences, see Introd. On οὐ, as denying both members of the antithesis, cf. notes on XII. 47 and 80. — οὕτω.. φαίνομαι, is 2 manifest that I take such care of; ἔζῆν μᾶλλον : cf. § 2; λαθεῖν ἐξ.: Η. «84; G. 1586. — ds... διαβεβλημένος, as one who had influence at that time (i. e. under the Thirty), ογ as now in ill-repute, lit. talked against; ἀλλ᾽ ὡς, but (1 simply say) éhat; λέγω transitive is to be supplied. For years afterwards, it is evident, the adherents of the Thirty were still exposed to public odium. The last clause indicates strikingly how truly the government of the Thirty was a misgovernment, a no-government; under it wrong-doing was made easier.
28, 29. πῶς δ᾽ ἄν.. ἔπεχ., how should I have ventured ? — ὑμῶν : gen. abs., denoting time: whd/e you were, etc.; τούτου agr. with χωρίου : H. 1062. — οὐδὲ ἕν, not even one, not a single. — εἶναι, that there was ; inf. used in ind. disc. to represent the imperf.; Gr. Moods, 119. In the absence of witnesses to the contrary, this argument (one in the series of @ friori argu- ments adduced) becomes a strong one. — μήθ᾽... καταστῆσαι, never fined me as a trespasser upon the ground, nor brought me to trial for removing a tree; cf. § 24. — ἐπιμελητής, curator. — ἡλικίαν... εἰδέναι, old enough to know ; Nicomachus, as it thus appears, being a young man.
30, 31. τῶν ἔργων, than the facts. — heyévrev: used with ἐχθρῶν as a suppl. or obj. to ἀνασχέσθαι ; H. 983; G. 1580; ταῦτα : obj. of λεγόντων. The thought is : do not allow yourselves to be informed by my enemies of what you are already fully informed of, i. 6. through your ἐπιμεληταί and γνώμονες. --- ἐνθυμουμένους, forming your judgment ; πολιτείας, my life as a citizen. — o§...hvayK., than I was compelled to do; Taylor and others have emended by inserting ἤ, thav, before ws. It must be admitted that there is no undoubted instance of ὡς alone having this meaning, though we have frequently a corresponding use of οἷος and ὅσος. --- τριηραρχών : cf. Dict. Ant., “Trierarchia”; τἄλλα λειτ., defraying the other public charges ; for an account of them, see ‘‘ Leitourgia,” 7dzd.
i68 . NOTES ON ORATION VII.
32, 33. ἀλλὰ μή, zvstead of. — οὐτ᾽ ἂν... ἠγωνιζόμην, 7 should not be in danger of banishment, or of the loss of my property either; on ἄλλην, cf. § 22. — οὐδὲν ἀδικ... οὐδέ, without being guilty of any crime, and without ; H. 969, at the end; G. 1563,7; cf. note on XXII. 1. — πράξας, dy en- gaging in, or, when I had engaged in; ἐκέρδαινον, J was gaining. In various parts of this argument, it will be observed, the defendant assumes the point of view of the accuser, — admits the accusation in order to show its absurdity. This accounts for the mood or tense of a number of verbs, which the reader might easily be led to mistranslate ; e. g. § 12, σκοπεῖν, ἐπεχεί- pow; ὃ 15, ἐξέκοπτον, γενομένας ; and others. — τοῖς pey.,...r@v pey.: the generic art.; H. 659; omit in transl. In weighty concerns the proof should be weighty. — πιστότερα, more worthy of belief, agr. with antec. of ὧν.
34. ἐκ.. σκέψασθε, judge from the other facts, i. e. from other considera-
tions still to be adduced. — ὅτι... θεράπ., that 7 had all the servants, i. e. that I still had them with me. — εἴ twa Bodn., whichever one he wished ; namely, of the slaves ; H. 932, 2, a, and b, (2) ; Goodw. 1498.— ἡγούμενος gives the reason of his procedure. A great deal of barbarism and cruelty underlay the intellectual culture of even the Greeks and Romans. The orator Lycurgus (Against Leocrates, § 29) speaks as if it were too well understood to need argu- ment, that justice and the public welfare were alike subserved by torturing the slaves of an estate or household, both men and women, in order to elicit evidence concerning the master. In the present instance, the master offers them for torture in his own defence. The worthlessness, as well as the detestable cruelty, of this method of ascertaining the truth, seems slowly to have reached men’s minds, — how slowly, the criminal codes and procedure of medizeval and even of modern Europe can show. . 35, 36. πιστόν : agr. with οὐδέν, and foll. by dat., the same as its cogn. verb; H. 765; G. 1174; freely, that there was no trusting servants. — πεφύκασι, are in the nature of things; the danger, if not the wrong, of slavery was appreciated by the ancients. With the enormous slave popula- tion of Attica, the masters lived in constant dread of slave rebellions. — καὶ μὲν δή : see note on ΧΙ]. 30; ἐμαυτῷ ξυνειδέναι, 40 de conscious of guilt, — ἐμοῦ παραδιδ,, when 7 was offering to deliver them over ; δίδωμι in the pres. and imperf. often = ἡσ be ready to give, to offer. —rhv abr. γνώμην : i.e. to take the view that Nicomachus on his part was conscious that he was wrong, since with little or nothing to lose by it he refused to call in the testimony of the slaves. The reader is tempted to hope that this may have been an instance where motives of humanity prevailed.
37, 38. εἴ τι ἔλεγον, if they had given any testimony ; meaning, adverse testimony. Scheibe has substituted ἤλεγχον for ἔλεγον of the MSS. Fol- lowing Rauch. οὐ a/., I have replaced the latter and added ri. — τούτῳ, fo him ; the examination by torture was conducted by the prosecutor, under
CONCERNING THE SACRED OLIVE-TREE. 169
the direction of the proper official, called βασανιστής, Lat. guesitor. — ἐνο- χοξ ἦν: H.895, N.; G. 1397 and 1402.— ἢ..«προσήκεν, than it belonged to me to deliver them over. — ἔγὼ τοίνυν... ἡγούμενος, 7, you see, was thus forward, because I considered ; μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ, for my advantage. — ols, for whom ; dat. of adv.; by changing to the sing. in @, the accuser is more plainly pointed out ; τετόλμηκε : SC. μαρτυρεῖν. --- καὶ.. μᾶλλον, and whether it is more likely. — βοηθεῖν : cf. ὃ 20; there were too many prosecutions of another kind to make the supposition of a patriotic motive the first to suggest itself in judging of any particular case of litigation. — συκ. αἰτιάσασθαι, or that he acted the sycophant in being the accuser. Rauch. and Frohb. have αἰτιᾶσθαι, which corresponds better with βοηθεῖν.
39. ἐγν. ὑμᾶς, that you are convinced. — οὐχ ὡς... ἀλλ᾽ ds: the first ὡς belongs with ἐλπίζων ; the constr. is similar to the one in ὃ 27, and XII. 2,— © oi τοιοῦτοι, such men ; i, 6. men threatened with prosecution ; ἀπ, τῶν κιν- δύνων, 77 the greatest embarrassment from dangers; H. 754, e; G. 1140. --τοσούτῳ.. μάλιστα, the more they all avoid them (i. 6. τῶν κινδύνων), in every possible way. Both the text and the interpretation of this sentence are doubtful.
40, 41. οὐκ ἠξίουν, did not deem it worthy, i. e. τὸν τοιοῦτον κίνδυνον φεύ- yew. — παρέσχον ἐμ.. χρῆσθαι, 7 placed myself at your disposal, lit. to use as you wish; ὅ τι in ady. accus. — οὐδενὶ... SupAAaynv: as if to say: I was not frightened into an attempt to make a compromise with my enemies. — ἥδιον, (even) more gladly ; a hatred so intense that even their own self-love was, as it were, overborne by it ; possibly a ref. here to something said in the course of the trial, — ἐπιπέμπουσι, incite ; to set on, a dog, for instance, is ἐπιπέμπειν ; φανερῶς, openly, is by μέν put in contrast with this indirect -method. — γενοίμην, εἰ... καταστ.: H. gor; G. 1421, I.— ép.... γενομένου, being made desolate, i. e. in the event of his banishment.
42, 43. ἀλλὰ γάρ : cf. § 9. — ὅτου ἕνεκα : introd. an indir. question, of which the pred. is κατέστησεν, kal... ζητεῖ, kal... ἤθελεν. — ἐξὸν.... ἐλέγξαι, when it was possible to convict me in the very act; H. 973,8; G. 1569. On the phrase ἐπ᾽ air., see XIII., Introd., and § 85, note. — εἰς τοσ-.. ἀγῶνα, into so important a judicial contest. — ἐξὸν.. ἀποδεῖξαι : used concessively, and limiting the whole of the preceding clause. — ἐμοῦ... διδόντος, when 7 offered.
NOTES ON ORATION XXII.
I. θαυμάζοντες : H. 969; G. 1563, 7; the descriptive part.; render with ὅτι, thinking it remarkable that,— συτοπωλῶν : H. 751 ; Goodw. 1123. — el... ἡγεῖσθε, if you consider them ever so guilty; for as, see H. 651; οὐδέν : H.719,b; G. 1060. — οὐδ᾽ fr... νομίζετε, delieve none the less that, etc.; ποιουμ. : mid.; see note, XII. 2; συκοφ. ; on the “sycophants,” cf. Introd. ; also L. ἃ S., sixth ed., sub voce συκοφάντης. --- περὶ τούτων : neut., ref. to the prec. clause; H. 635.
2. γάρ: see note, XIII. 5; ot Ipur., the Prytanes; see Lex., or Dict. Axnt., “ Boule,” for their specific duties. Note that the word in this mean- ing is peculiar to Athens; ἀπέδοσαν, reported; in accordance with their duty of presenting public business to the Senate. — ὠργίσθησαν : the subj. they is plainly referable to τὴν βουλήν. --- as... χρή : H. 928, 932, 951; G. 1487; ζημιῶσαι : H. 765; 6. 1532; ἕνδεκα : see Lex.; the dreaded Eleven, a board of officers often mentioned in the history of the Thirty Tyrants. — ἐθίζεσθαι : pass. with βουλήν for its subj., and itself the subj. of elva; H. 939, a; G.1517.— δοκοίη : H. 932, 2; G.1487. Observe that the clauses foll. νομίζων are also in indir. disc., and the tenses are to be rendered accordingly ; θανάτου : after ἄξια ; H. 753, ἔ; Goodw. 1135; οὐδὲν «ον 8lk., that you no less than we would decide justly ; addressed to the dicasts or judges; ἀπολ. : H. 501; its subj. is αὐτούς. The reader will recall occasional instances staining the page of Athenian history, where a sudden outburst of popular indignation denied justice to its victims, and sent them to execution without legal trial; e.g. the case of the generals who commanded at Arginuse.
3, 4. ταῦτα: H. 724, and a; Goodw. 1239.— ἐποιούμην : used as in § 1; the tense (imperf. in indir. disc, H. 936; Greek Moods, 672) im- plies that this reproach was uttered after the afore-mentioned session ; the imperf. thus used refers, with rare exceptions, to an action previously going on; here render: 7 had made, or, been making. — πρός, before, in the presence of; αὐτοῖς": i. 6. the grain-dealers; so also αὐτῶν in the next sentence ; ἔργῳ ἀπελ., 7 defended myself by deed ; render the foll. γάρ, that is to say; it explains épyy. — τοῖς vopous...éB., Aad been upholding the
AGAINST THE GRAIN-DEALERS. I7I
established laws ; κεῖμαι serves as a pass. of τέθημι, see Lex. On the tense of ἔλεγον and €8., see remark on ἐποιούμην, above. In both sentences it is possible that the imperf. may be intended to represent the pres. of direct disc. This would do no violence to the sense ; there is nothing, however, in the context to require it; see H. 936; Greek Moods, 674, 2.— τούτων ἕνεκα : i.€. on account of the slanderous accusations already re- lated; further explained by δεδ. τ. air. following. — ψηφίσ. : H. 898, c G. 1470; πρίν freq. has πρότερον (sometimes πρόσθεν, also πρίν itself) as an antec. correl.; render both, uzéi.—6 τι ἂν βούλ. : spoken deferen- tially ; util you have voted their condemnation would have been the obvious completion of the Bentence, had the speaker consulted sae’) his own wish and hope.
5. The interrogation of one of the accused. One member of the firm or company is singled out: εἰπὲ od. — μετοικεῖς : syn. with μέτοικος ef. — ὡς πεισ΄, with the intention of obeying ; H.978; Goodw. 1574; πότερον : H. 1017; G. 1606. A question fair enough in form, but one which might be put in a very insolent, browbeating way. — ἄλλο τι...ἤ: H. τοῖς, b; G. 1604. An interrog. phrase, having the sense of Gp’ οὐκ. - ἐφ᾽ ois: refers to the collective τὶ; H. 629; Goodw. roz1 (Ὁ). Rauch. supposes it to refer to τοιούτων understood after τὶ. ---- συμπρίασθαι (συν- e@véouat): aor. inf. in ind. disc.; H. 854; G. 1280; observe the force of the prep. in compos., as in the Lat. coemo ; goppav: after the compar. πλείω. — dv... κελεύει, which the law directs to be allowed ; gen. by attraction ; H. 994; G. 1031.— τῶν apx., the officers ; used throughout this oration in its general signif., and ref. to the σιτοφύλακες, as appears from § 8.
6, 7. τὸν σῖτον, the grain; restr. art.; H. 657, Ὁ; ἀποψηφ. : explain why the aor. is used, rather than the pres.; H. 851; so also καταψηφ. Cf. the pres. inf. συνωνεῖσθαι, above. — παρεσχόμεθα : as Frohb. suggests, probably in the indictment. — μηδένα : H. 1029; Goodw. 1615.— χρῆν : H. 834; Goodw. 1400.—4dmay. φαίνεται, plainly forbids it; H. 986; Kiihn. 311, 8. The causal clause introd. by ἐπειδή, since, extends to ψηφιεῖσθαι. ---- εἰπεῖν : dep. on ἀνάγκη; H. 952; G. 1521.
8. παρακαλ., having summoned ; this was in the preliminary hearing of the grain-dealers before the Senate.—ot.. τέσσαρες, four of them ; H. 664, a; the four, besides Anytus, out of the five inspectors ; probably the five ap- pointed for the Pirzeus. — ds . .. συμβουλ. : cl. of ind. disc. ; τούτων, kK. τι λ when they were outbidding and fighting against one another ; σφᾶς αὐτούς has a recip. force, and thus is syn. with ἀλλ. : H. 686, b; Goodw. 996. — παύσ. φιλονεικοῦσιν : cf note, XII. 1, on παύσ. λέγοντι. --- ἡγούμ.... .-πρί- ασϑαι, dclieving it to be advantageous to you who buy from these that they should previously buy it as cheap as possible ; note the force of the aorist (πρίασθαι), denoting a prior action as compared with ὠνουμένοις. --- δεῖν :
172 NOTES ON ORATION XXII.
ind. disc. still continued; H. 932, 2,a; G.1525; ὀβολῷ μόνον...τιμ., πιο more than an obol dearer (H. 781; G. 1184); the law being, as it appears, that the retail dealer should be allowed only one obol profit, about three cents, on the medimnus.
9. οὐ qualifies the whole clause ; H. 1023, a; cf. on the contrary μή, be- low. Each of the cl. introd. by ὡς dep. on μάρτυρα ; καταθέσθαι, Zo store τ. - ἐπὶ... βουλῆς, during the session of the previous Senate, the Senate of the previous year. The Senators were chosen annually. — συνωνούμ.: not the part. used for the imperf. (which is Frohb.’s view), but rather as the pro- gressive perf.
10. ἂν ὡς μάλ.: see note, § 1. — οὐχ.. ἀπολογ., that they will not be making out a defence for themselves, but will (only) be accusing these. — περὶ.. .ὧν.. δίκην, ought they not to be punished for (offences) concerning which, etc.; the antec. of ὧν is in the gen., limiting δίκην : the foll. partt. are the subj. of διδόναι ; τούτοις refers to νόμοι. Translate: ought they not to be punished, — those who do not obey, as well as those who direct to do what is contrary to these? Here, as in § 17, πῶς οὐ = Lat. monne ; cf. XII. 84.
11. οὐκ ἐλεύσ΄., will not resort ; this form for the fut. of Zo come is rare in Attic prose ; oftener ἥξειν, ἀφίξεσθαι. --- ὥσπερ... βουλῇ, just as they did in the Senate, In an adverbial or relative clause expressing comparison, the strengthening καί, a/so, may generally be omitted in translation, or else be transferred to the principal clause. English usage places the emphasis on the demonstrative, rather than on the relative clause of the comparison ; Greek places xai in the latter, or in both. Cf. Kriiger’s Griechische Sprach- lehre, 69, 32, 13. — ἐπ᾽ εὖν.... πόλεως, out of good-will to the city ; ἐπί here, as often, denotes the ground or occasion of an action ; hence = for, because of, out of ; for πόλεως, see H. 729, ε; G. 1085, 2.
12. γάρ, as in § 2; halveorOar...mwd.: with ἐχρῆν : they ought to have been found selling. — τιμῆς : H. 746; G. 1133; 6 συνεωνημένος : sc. σῖτος ; used here in its pass. sense ; νυνί, but as i¢ 7s. — τῆς abr. hy, on the same day ; cf. with ἡμέρας, above, denoting time during which ; ὥσπερ... συνων., as if they were buying it up by the medimnus ; the part. denotes the same time as ἐπώλουν. In selling, he maintains, they kept with the rising prices, ’ though the wheat they were selling had been bought long before at low rates,
13. δεινὸν. εἰ, strange that; εἰ after 5., as after corresponding verbs of surprise, etc., may often be rendered by “hat; see note, XII. 36. The speaker ironically expresses his surprise that their vaunted public spirit, which ran the risk of capital punishment in order to supply the city with breadstuffs, should invariably be poverty-stricken whenever the necessities of the state called for the imposition of a war-tax ; ἣν... μέλλουσιν, which all
AGAINST THE GRAIN-DEALERS. 173
will know of; i. e. the payment of a special tax of this kind would be known to the public. — ἐφ᾽ οἷς.. ταῦτα, those offences for which the penalty is death and (in which) i¢ was for their interest to escape detection ; the latter part of the clause is loosely connected with the rel. phrase ἐφ᾽ οἷς, and does not depend upon it used in precisely the same sense ; but it is not necessary to the completeness of the Greek construction to supply either another rela- tive, or a demonstrative; see H. 1005; ταῦτα is the antec. of οἷς, and cogn. accus. after wapay.; ὑμετέρᾳ: H. 694; Goodw. 999. — τοι. ποιεῖσθαι Ady., to make such a defence. — αὐτοῖς, ἄλλοις : dat. after συμφ. They and the citizens have interests precisely opposite. —mwéAe: after κακοῦ.
14. ἄσμενοι: Η. 619, Ὁ. --- τὰς τὶ... λογοπ,, and others they make up themselves ; if actual calamities are wanting, they invent reports of them. — Πόντῳ : the Tauric Chersonese was the granary of Athens, and there was shipped to the Pirzeus from the grain ports of the Black Sea more wheat than from all other quarters. See Pub. Econ., p. 109 seg. — ἐκπλεούσας : i.e. on their way out of the Pontus and the Hellespont. — τὰς σπονδάς : the treaty existing at that time; it is likely that the Peace of Antalcidas, made 387 B.C., is here referred to; so Frohb. shows by comparison of passages in Xenophon’s /Yel/enica. This is the only clew afforded in the oration for determining its date ; ἄπορ., fo be declared void ; fr. ἀπεῖπον.
15. ἔχθρας : H. 730, c; G. 1088.— ἵνα... διαφερ., that we may not dispute with them about the 2γέεξ. ---- ἂν... ἀπέλθωμεν, if we get away from them, having effected a purchase at any price whatever ; ὅποσοντ. : see Lex., ὁπόσος. Cf. H. 285, 286. ---- πολιορκ,, we are kebt in a state of siege. Some of the court might remember the winter that closed the Peloponnesian War, when the city was blockaded by the Lacedzemonians, and numbers died of starvation. There would then be a touch of pathos in the suggested associa- tions, heightening the humorous allusion to the purchaser glad to get out of the clutches of the dealer on any terms.
16. οὕτω.. ἔγνωκεν, has come to have such an opinion. —dbdaxas, as inspectors ; pred. accus.; Kareor. is prob. the aor. for our perf.; ἀποκλη- potre: this was one of the offices that were filled by lot. In Scheibe it is ἀπεκληροῦτε, but Rauch. and Frohb. rightly prefer the pres., as in the MSS. — πολ. ὄντων, although they were citizens ; H. 969, ε ; G. 1563,6; ἐκείνων refers to σιτοῴ., above. They were, of course, Athenians, while the grain- dealers were mostly foreign residents. The trade and manufactures of Athens were in those times largely in the hands of foreigners. — αὐτούς : intens. ; the criminals themselves; φυλάττειν, to restrain. An additional indication of the severity of the law.
17. ἀδύνατον, impossible ; that is, in the discharge of their sworn duty as jurors, for the reason that the accused had themselves already confessed to a
174 NOTES ON ORATION XXII.
violation of the law. — ὅμολ. αὐτῶν : agr. with the obj. of ἀπογνώσεσθε, i e. τούτων understood ; transl., when they themselves acknowledge. The time denoted by συνίστασθαι is to be ascertained from the context ; see note on ἀφανίζειν, VII. 2. Render: that they were engaged in a combination ; τοῖς εἰσπλ.: syn. with τοὺς ἐμπόρους ; the merchants who entered the Athe- nian ports. This sent. seems to be introd. by ydp not as stating the reason for what precedes, but as including it, implied in ὁμολ. αὐτῶν. --- ἂν εἶχε... ἐπιτιμᾶν, could censure. —ép’ ὑμῖν : sc. ἐστίν, (it is in such cases) at your discretion to believe, etc. —dv δόξαιτε, εἰ... ἀφήσ.: a mixed cond. sent. ; H. gor; G. 1421, 1.
18, 19. ὅτι.. κατέγνωτε, that you have already condemned many accused of this crime, etc.; ἐχ. αἰτίαν = crimen habere ; the adv. ἤδη with the verb requires it to be rendered by the Eng. perf. — μᾶλλον éed., you were more desirous ; the other member of the comparison is implied, i. e. than upon those who admit their guilt. — καὶ μὲν 84: see note, XII. 30; κοινότ., of the most general interest ; in those judicial decisions which affected the price of bread, the public would naturally feel the keenest interest ; further ex- plained by ἡγούμενοι, x. τ. d., for they will think, etc. The effect of just punishment as a preventive of future crime is still more emphatically referred to in the next sect.; cf. XII. 35. — ψηφ. ἔσεσθε: H. 850; Goodw. 706; ποιεῖν : after ἄδειαν, as in XII. 85.
20, 21. τῶν p. ἔσεσθαι : that is, what treatment the violators of these laws are to expect in the future. — οὕτω.. ἀνεκτοί, for in that case they will be only just endurable ; μόγις has here its positive, not its negative force : just, barely, not scarcely, hardly. You can perhaps manage to get along tolerably with them, if you make the present case a suitable example. οὕτω is used as in VII. 22. — πλεῖστοι, the most, i.e. more persons than from any other pursuit ; περὶ... ἤγων., Aave been tried for their lives, syn. with mept...xwd., below. —Kal...apedotvrat, and so great are their profits from it, — πολιτῶν : limits the understood antec. of of. — συνέστησαν : cf. cuvl- στασθαι, ὃ 17. — παρ᾽ αὐτῶν : ref. to the defendants, as αὐτούς, above. — ots, and these; the rel. must be understood in a diff. case with ποιήσετε ; H. 1005.
22. ὅ τι... δεῖ, why there is need; ὅ τι is adv. accus. Cf. VII. 40.— τῶν... ἀδικ., other criminals; the art. (repeated with ἄλλων) has its generic force, hence may be omitted in transl. —é§.: H. 619. This ad captandum argument has evidently been reserved by the speaker as the sharpest and surest arrow in his quiver.
NOTES ON ORATION II.
On the “Ceramicus,” see Dict. Geog., I. p. 303, “ The Outer Ceramicus and the Academy.” Interesting details concerning the tombs are given in Dyer’s Ancient Athens, p. 492 seg. The student is also recommended to read the Platonic dialogue Menexenus, in Jowett’s admirable translation. It should be said, however, that the introduction by the distinguished translator scarcely does justice either to the merits of the discourse contained in the dialogue, or to the significance of this class of orations in republican Athens. The student will find in the Menexenus many points of suggestive contrast with this oration, which, if the theory of Schleiermacher and Grote (mentioned in the Introd.) be correct, is invested with additional interest as a contemporaneous and rival production.
I. ἐμεμψ. div, 7 should blame ; the aor. with ἄν, after an imperf. in the cond., sometimes denotes present time; Gr. Moods, 49, 2, N. 5. — Tots... λέγειν, chose who summoned me to speak at few days notice; cf. ἐξ ὀλἔγου, at short notice, below ; ἐκ, in the sense of after. That the election of the orator was often left to a late day would appear from Plato: ‘‘ This time, however, I am inclined to think that the speaker who is chosen will not have much to say; for the choice has been quite sudden, and he will be compelled almost to improvise.” ((Zenex., III.) —6 πᾶς x., all time; H. 672; Goodw. 979. — οὕτως.. τυγχ-., that thus they would obtain, etc.; H. 739; G. 1099.
2. πρός, with; my discourse is not to vie with their deeds; τοὺς... εἰρηκ.: the customary eulogy on these occasions embraced the heroic deeds of all the dead whose memorials adorned the Ceramicus. Thus the theme of each speaker was to a great extent the same as that of previous orators. — ἀφθονίαν, abundance ; i.e. of themes for emulation. — ποιεῖν, 40 compose poetry ; in early Eng. make had also this signif. Taylor appositely cites Spenser : —
“ What is he for a ladde you so lament? Ys love such pinching paine to them that prove? And hath he skill 70 make so excellent, Yet hath so little skill to bridle love?”
176 NOTES ON ORATION II.
The parallel expression in Isoc., Panegyr., is: τῶν ποιεῖν δυναμένων, ἣ τῶν λέγειν ἐπισταμένων. --- καλὰ μέν : μέν is here concess.; its force may be reproduced by rendering it a/¢hough in a subord. cl.; although many excel- lent things have been said, etc.; δέ, yet; observe the similar constr. in the preceding sent. — ἐκείνοις : i. e. τοῖς προτέροις ; dat. of agent; ἱκανά : obj. of εἰπεῖν. ---- γῆς, θαλάττης : H. 753,d; Goodw. 11403 ἄπειροι, without experience of ; they had met peril on every shore. —Kaxd: placed after the part., instead of being in its normal position before it. For other instances of such misplacement of words for rhetorical effect (hyperbaton, as the an- cients called it), see XIII. 43, τῇ πόλει; XXIV. 21, ὑμῖν; ΧΙ]. 94, νῦν.
3. τῶν mpoy., our forefathers ; φήμης, tradition ; not legend, as if there were necessarily implied any want of belief in the historic truth of what he was about to relate. History for readers had in that age but just begun to be composed among the Greeks ; they had as yet scarcely attempted to dis- tinguish between legend and history. — κἀκείνων : καί = also; the ancient as well as the recent dead. — γνώμαις : West. has μνήμαις, but the weight of MS. authority is for the former. τῶν ἀγαθ. is then obj. gen., — the current sayings and anecdotes concerning the brave.
4. The Amazons hold a prominent place in Greek literature, from the fliad down. Of their invasion of Attica there is frequent mention, Plu- tarch, in his Ζ 278 of Theseus, describes the final battle, defining the position and movements of the contending armies, and giving the day of the month in which the engagement took place. Isocrates, in the Panegyricus, refers to the Amazons in language similar to that employed here. Plato, Herodo- tus, and the ancients generally, believed this nation of warrior-women to have actually existed. Consult Class, Dict.; also Grote, I. p. 208 seg., where an excellent statement is to be found of the views of the Greeks con- cerning them. The Greek chronologists made Theseus contemporary with Hercules, in the.thirteenth century B. C., and during his reign the invasion was supposed to have taken place.
γάρ : see note, XIII. 5; οἰκοῦσαι : sc. ἦσαν. The Thermodon is a small stream of Pontus, flowing into the Euxine east of the river Iris. It was in this region that the Argonauts encountered the Amazons. — τῶν περὶ αὐτάς, of those in their region ; dep. on μόναι. ---- ἥρουν, overtook ; dved., unexpectedly ; to their enemies’ surprise. — διαφέρειν, Zo surpass ; ἣ.. ἐλλεί- mew, than to be inferior in their forms; i.e. in size and strength, What is the etymology and original signif. of our word idea ?
5. ἔργῳ, λόγῳ : the funeral orations seem to have rung all possible changes on this antithesis of deeds and words. Jowett’s paraphrase of the Platonic oration in AZenex. felicitously begins : “ There is a tribute of deeds and of words.” Here the contrast between deed and report — between their own deeds and the report conveyed by others— seems somewhat forced.
FUNERAL ORATION. 177
Throughout the oration there is an excessive striving after antitheses, — see already in § 4, — a fault vigorously condemned by Reiske : ‘‘ Mirifice et ad fastidium luxuriat hac in oratione Lysias, cum antithesis molestissimis, frigus et nauseam creantibus, tum illa perpetua oppositione, seepe perquam inepta et puerili, inter μέν et dé.”
The participial construction also abounds in this oration, participles following one another in some passages instead of adverbial clauses. In many of these cases, it is preferable to translate the partt. by clauses, acc. to the logical requirements of the sentence. —rapahaPotoat...éorpar., cook with them and marched. It will be seen that the part. is connected in thought with the pred. more closely than those which precede ; πολλῆς... χάριν : Plutarch follows another legend, and says that the war arose in consequence of the carrying off of Antiope by Theseus in one of his expedi- tions. — ἐκτήσαντο, acguired, came to have their souls like their nature ; cf. φύσει with ἰδέαις, above. — τῆς mpor.: after ἐναντίαν ; H. 753, 5; Goodw. 1140; 1117; ἐναντίος may take the gen. when it denotes the opposite of, different from ; ἐκ tax κινδ., from their dangers ; meaning from their conduct when in danger.
6. μαθούσαις : H. οὔο, 4; G.1563,3; τῶν λοιπῶν : i.e. their future enterprises. — οὐδὲ.. ἀπελθ.: cf. Isocr., Panegyr., 70: τῶν μὲν ἐλθουσῶν οὐδεμία πάλιν ἀπῆλθεν. --- αὐτοῦ : adv.; πόλεως limits μνήμην ; διὰ τὴν ἀρε- τήν, on account of its valor.
7. The orator next relates the part taken by Athens in the mythical ex- pedition of the Seven against Thebes. See Grote, I. p. 272 seg. Seven chieftains led their troops against the City of Seven Gates, — Adrastus, Am- phiaraus, Capaneus, Hippomedon, Parthenopzeus, Tydeus, and Polynices. After their defeat, ‘‘ Adrastus, unable to obtain permission from the Thebans to inter the fallen chieftains, presented himself in suppliant guise, accom- panied by their disconsolate mothers, to Theseus at Eleusis. He implored the Athenian warrior to extort from the perverse Thebans that last melan- choly privilege which no decent or pious Greeks ever thought of with- holding, and thus to stand forth as the champion of Grecian public morality in one of its most essential points, not less than of the rights of the sub- terranean gods. The Thebans obstinately persisting in their refusal, Theseus undertook an expedition against their city, vanquished them in the field, and compelled them by force of arms to permit the sepulture of their fallen enemies. This chivalrous interposition, celebrated in one of the preserved dramas of Euripides, formed a subject of glorious recollection to the Athe- nians throughout the historical age ; their orators dwelt upon it in terms of animated panegyric ; and it seems to have been accepted as a real fact of the past time, with not less implicit conviction than the battle of Marathon.” (Grote, I. p. 277.)
178 NOTES ON ORATION II.
The participles in this sentence (§§ 7-9) should be closely studied. The first three are all temporal ; orpar. and ἥττηθ., however, belong to ἐώντων, which latter, denoting a continued state or action in time past, is more closely connected with ἐδέοντο, when the Thebans did not permit, etc., they sent heralds and besought; ἡγησάμ.: causal; ἀποθαν, dy their death. — τοὺς... κάτω, the gods below ; the gods of the underworld, Pluto and Perse- phone, with the deities subordinate to them; τὰ αὑτῶν, ¢heir (due honors) ; namely, the customary funeral rites. — ἱερῶν δὲ μιαιν., and holy places being polluted ; the groves and sacred enclosures outside of the city, which the presence of the dead would pollute; Pausanias mentions, for instance, temples of Zeus and of Themis, situated west of the city.
8, 9. ἀνδρῶν: H. 732,4; G. 1094,1; also understood with damier. in the next cl.; but of men who distrusted themselves. — τούτων, dep. on τυχεῖν, is either ¢#zs, referring to the request, or ¢hese, referring to τῶν νεκρῶν. --- οὐδε- plas...dmapyx., although there was previously no occasion of hostility, etc.; ovdt...xapit., and not because they were trying to please ; χαριζ. and ἀξ. are causal. — τῶν νομιζομένων, the customary rites; ὑπὲρ ἀμφοτέρων : for the real interests of both contending parties; ἑτέρους refers to the Thebans ; ὑπὲρ μὲν τῶν (for ὑπερ τῶν μέν, the particle being placed after the first word of the phrase) refers to the Thebans, and τῶν ἑτέρων to the Argives ; they are in appos. with ὑπὲρ ἀμφοτέρων. In the latter of the two phrases, ἑτέρων is unnecessary. — πλείω : cogn. accus. after ἐξυβρ.; πατρίου, ancestral ; sanc- tioned by hereditary usage.
10. κοινὰς ἀπ. dv0., common to all men; H. 754,¢; G. 1143 — érap- θέντες (€raipw): causal; οὐχ is placed at the beginning, because it qualifies the whole pred. of the clause. — Καδμείων : the name of Thebes in the mythical period was Καδμεία, a name afterwards confined to the citadel. — νεκρούς : in appos. with 40\a. —év ...’"EXevo., i their Eleusis; i. 6. Eleusis in Attica. There was an ancient town in Boeotia bearing the same name.
11. ‘‘ After the death and apotheosis of Heracles, his son Hyllos and his other children were expelled and persecuted by Eurystheus ; the fear of his vengeance deterred both the Trachinian king Keyx and the Thebans from harboring them, and the Athenians alone were generous enough to brave the risk of offering them shelter. Eurystheus invaded Attica, but perished in the attempt by the hand of Hyllos, or by that of Iolaos, the old companion and nephew of Heracles. The chivalrous courage which the Athenians had on this occasion displayed in behalf of oppressed innocence was a favorite theme for subsequent eulogy by Attic poets and orators.” (Grote, I. p. 94.)
According to the Alexandrian chronologists, Hercules belonged to the generation immediately preceding the Trojan War. They make Eurys- theus to have been slain n, Ὁ, 1207. Isocrates says, ‘‘long before the Tro- jan War” (πολὺ πρὸ τῶν Tpwikadv) ; Panegyr., § 54.
FUNERAL ORATION. 179
Εἱὐρυσθ.: king of Mycenze ; see Class. Dict. — ἠφανίσθη : by plup. in Eng.; H. 837; ἐξηλαύν., were driven forth (from one city after another); note the force of the imperf. — αἰσχ... ἔργοις, ashamed, it is true, of their act, i, 6. in refusing shelter to the sons of Hercules. — ἐπὶ τῶν βωμῶν : ‘* All altars were places of refuge. The supplicants were considered as placing themselves under the protection of the deities to whom the altars were consecrated.” (Dict. Ant., ‘* Ara.”)
12. οὐκ HOA., would not; μετὰ... διαμάχ., 40 contend on the side of jus- tice. — τὴν... ἠδοῦντο, reverenced the virtues of Hercules; ἀρετή in such a connection commonly has a broader signif. than valor, prowess, for which ἀνδρία, εὐψυχία, and other syn. are used. In the Funeral Oration attributed to Demosthenes, the speaker remarks that valor (ἀνδρία) is only one of the elements of ἀρετή. --- χαριζόμενοι : as in § 8, giving the reason.
13. μετὰ τῶν... .ἐχ., with, i. e. with the aid of, etc.; Peloponnesus, before its invasion by the Dorians, was inhabited by the Achzeans, Arcadians, and other tribes of more or less pure Hellenic blood. — οὐκ... μετέγνωσαν, they did not repent on the approach of danger; ϑεινῶν : after ἐγγύς ; H. 757; G. 1149. — ὁποῖοι... γενόμενοι, what sort of men they would become ; lit. of what sort they would be, having become men; ἄνδρες : pred. nom. with γενόμ. The preceding ἐκείνους, acc. to Greek usage, anticipates the subj. of the clause ; it may be omitted in transl. See H. 878.
14. οὐδὲ.. ἀγαθῆς, ad no gain offering itself except a good renown. — Kal τοὺς μέν͵... τοῖς δέ, azd...the latter,...the former. — μηδὲν ποιεῖν ἄκον- τας, to do nothing by compulsion; subj. of εἶναι ; ἄκοντας agr. with indeterm. subj. of ποιεῖν. --- ὑπὲρ τούτων apd., ἐγ: dchalf of both of these; i.e. inte and the oppressed.
15. τοσοῦτον.. ἐφ., were so proud. —avrov ἱκετεύοντα, cven if he should come as a suppliant himself. — ἐλθοῦσαν : for its position, see H. 667, a, and cf. XII. 77. — καὶ τ. . ἠλευθ., set free their souls also. — τοῖς... ἐστε- φάνωσαν, by their own perils crowned them with victory; i. e. secured their triumph. By a rather forced figure, the verb meaning 20 designate as victor, i. 6. by bestowing a crown, is used meaning 20 render victorious. So Reiske : ‘‘coronabant, hoc est, victores reddebant.” Baur: ‘‘bekranzten sie mit den Preisen ihrer eignen Kampfe.”
16, tocotrov...ebr., so much more fortunate than their father ; observe that roo. refers not to what precedes, but to what follows ; which, instead of a cl. of conseq., is an indep. sent. introd. by γάρ. The sense is given by rendering τοσ., much, and γάρ, as usual, for. Though the sons of Hercules had not reached manhood, they had obtained what had never been granted to their father with all his might. — érl....rdv βίον, having made life toil- some, etc.; καὶ... ὄντα, although he was. — εἶδον : see the similar hyperbaton in § 2, πενθοῦντες.
180 NOTES ON ORATION II.
The preceding passage offers many marked similarities of thought and expression to §§ 54-60 of the Panegyricus.
17. The Athenians are extolled as the natural champions of human rights, by virtue not only of their autochthonous origin, but also of their free institutions. The birth of their race from the soil on which they lived was a favorite theme with the orators in their panegyrics. It was deemed an honor peculiar to the Attic people. In the //ad, Erechtheus, the oldest name in the Attic genealogy, is said to be born of the Earth : —
ὅν ποτ᾽ ᾿Αθήνη θρέψε, Διὸς θυγάτηρ, τέκε δὲ ζείδωρος ἄρουρα. 71., Tl. 547, 548.
— πολλὰ... ὑπῆρχε, thus, accordingly, did it fall to our ancestors, etc.; the subj. is διαμάχ. ---- ἥ τε yap: the correl. of τέ is δέ at the beginning of § 18; H. 1040, b.— ᾧκησαν, became inhabitants of; incept. aor.; ot πολλοί : i. 6. most nations. — ἀλλὰ... πατρίδα, but, being autochthonous, they had the same soil as both mother and country. Isocr. says: μόνοις γὰρ ἡμῖν τῶν Ἑλλήνων τὴν αὐτὴν τροφόν καὶ πατρίδα καὶ μητέρα καλέσαι προσήκει. Panegyr., ὃ 25. And Plato: ““ὙΠΕΙΓ ancestors were not strangers, nor are these their descend- ants sojourners only, whose fathers have come from another country ; but they are the children of the soil, dwelling and living in their own land. And the country which brought them up is not like other countries, a step- mother to her children, but their own true mother; she bore them and nourished them and received them, and in her bosom they now repose.” Menexenus, VI., Jowett’s transl.
18, 19. δέ: correl. with τέ above; it introd. a second reason; ἐν... χρόνῳ : the expulsion of the dynasty of the Pisistratidz occurred B. C. 510. The constitutional changes introduced by Clisthenes followed immediately after, and with him the Athenian democracy began. — τὴν ἐλευθ..... μεγί- στην, that the freedom of all is (amounts to, results in) the greatest har- mony ; ‘‘libertatem omnium summam efficere concordiam.” Auger. — Tos...edrlSas: i. e. the hope of what would be gained by the dangers they endured; hence translate, the rewards of their dangers: in times of danger all were animated with a common hope ; kotwds.. GAX.: to be shared by one as well as another, hence common to all; ἐπολιτεύοντο, administered the government, — βίᾳ, dy force ; in distinction from νόμῳ ; an essential differ- ence between an arbitrary and a constitutional government. — ὁρίσαι, 20 define; observe the meaning of ὅρος = Lat. fimis, and of the derivatives horizon, aorist, etc. — ἔργῳ δὲ... ὑπηρ., and in their actions to yield obedi- ence to these; expl. by what follows. They acted with Law as their King, | and Discourse as their Teacher.
Only this passing glance is given to the free institutions and the charac-
FUNERAL ORATION. 181
teristic civil polity of Athens. Fora worthier eulogy based on a discrimi- nating analysis, we must turn to the orations of Pericles.
20. In the following sections (20-47) the orator extols the martial valor and the Pan-hellenic patriotism of his countrymen in repelling the Persian invasions ; the first commanded by Datis and Artaphernes, B. C. 490; the next under Xerxes, ten years later. The reader will do well to consult Grote, or, for a more compact narrative, Curtius, Vol. II., the chapter on ‘©The Wars of Liberation.”
καὶ γάρ tot: this phrase freq. introduces a conclusion, consequence, or illustration. It then = Lat. ztague, accordingly, and thus, therefore, καί having a connective, γάρ an epexegetic, and τοί a confirmative force. For other exx. of this use (distinct from the signif. in which it is more freq. used = Lat. etenim profecto), see ὃ 26; also Demosth., Phil, I. 6; De Cor., 99; De Falsa Legat., 137 and 325. — καὶ φύντες, κ. τ. A. being of noble descent and of one mind; Ὑ. ὅμοια may be understood in two ways: (1) entertaining like sentiments, i.e. the sentiments of liberty, equality, and harmony spoken of above, —an interpretation which Reiske prefers, and which accords with the context ; (2) entertaining corresponding sentiments, i, e. sentiments and aims cortesponding to their honorable descent. Thus Baur: ‘‘ ebenso gesinnt.” — πανταχοῦ : used as adj., everywhere existing.
21. βασιλεύς : Darius, the son of Hystaspes; evr. pupidd., ft ‘*myriads,” half a million ; the reader will remember that this is eulogy, not history. The number led by Datis and Artaphernes is variously estimated ; see Grote, IV. p. 345, note; Curtius, II. p. 235, note. 100,000 infantry and 10,000 cavalry is the lowest estimate. In the Platonic oration it is ‘‘ fifty myriads and three hundred ships”; Menex., X. — ἑκοῦσαν, ἄκουσαν : H. 619; they may be rendered, without force, by force. — οὕτως may be omitted in transl. ; it refers to the condition expressed in the cl. εἰ... ποιήσαιντο, if they should bring on the conflict, etc. :
22. περὶ τῆς πόλ.: limits τοι. δόξα, such an opinion, i.e. the opinion expressed in the foll.; ἴασιν, πολεμήσουσι : both retain the tense of direct disc.; the former has its future sense ; H. 828, a; Goodw. 1257; ἐκείνοις : ref. to ἄλλην πόλιν in its collect. signif. — ἥξουσι, they would come, i.e. the Athenians ; still ind. disc. after δόξα, continued also with change of mode in τολμήσειν, below. — φανερὰν... καταθέσθαι, to assume in their behalf an attitude of open hostility with them, i. e. the Persians. The verb properly denotes to make a deposit with a person, with the understanding of repay- ment. Cf. Demosth., XV. 11.
23. οἱ μὲν....διεν., they, then, reasoned thus ; οὐ doy. εἰδότες, making no account of; in most of the MSS. there is a lacuna. — ἀθάνατον : H. 1062, fine print, last sent. — δεῖν.. εἰδέναι, chat they ought to be indebted for their rescue to others ; see Lex., χάρις.
182 NOTES ON ORATION II.
24. ταῦτα.... γνόντες : cf. y. ὅμοια, ὃ 20. — μετὰ πάντων, in common with all men. — τὰς μὲν.. κεκτῆσθαι, that because of death their lives were not their own ; lit. they possessed their lives belonging to another. They held their lives as of little worth, for really they were not theirs. So Isocr., Panegyr., 86, also speaking of his countrymen at Marathon: ὥσπερ ἐν ἀλλο- τρίαις ψυχαῖς μέλλοντες κινδυνεύσειν, as if they were about to go into battle with the lives of others. Similarly, in Thucyd., I. 70, the Corinthian orator says of the Athenians: ἔτι δὲ τοῖς μὲν σώμασιν ἀλλοτριωτάτοις ὑπὲρ τῆς πό- λεως χρῶνται, further, in the cause of the state they treat their bodies as if they absolutely belonged to another. —vukgev: H. 917; Goodw. 1436; cf. 1500; supply νικᾶν after δύνασθαι, with the antec. of ots for its obj. — ὀλίγῳ ...mpoam., that they should perish (only) a little before the rest; H. 781; G. 1184.
25, 26. ὑπὲρ.. φιλοψυχ΄, ot grudging their lives in the cause of virtue and valor ; on the meaning of ἀρετή, see note on § 12, and cf. L. ἃ S., sixth ed. —tpémaa...rav βαρβ... ἐμβαλόντων, ¢rophies of (their victory over) the barbarians who had made an invasion, etc.; ἐν τῇ αὑτῶν... παρὰ... χώρας, 27 their own country, on the borders of the land ; the arrangement of the phrases in this part of the sentence cannot be commended for either elegance or perspicuity. — οὕτω... διὰ ταχέων, so guickly. —Kal γάρ τοι: see ὃ 20; ὑπέρ in each cl. has its causal signif., because of; in the latter cl. transl. over. — τὴν ἀρετὴν αὐτῶν, the glory of them ; i. e. τῶν ἔργων.
. 27. dxOdpevos...cuph., grieved at the disaster ; ἀπαθὴς... κακ., and not having suffered misfortunes. These brief touches characterize not inappro- priately the weak and passionate monarch. — Sex. ἔτει : in the spring of 480, after having spent the winter in Sardis, Xerxes and his host set out from that city. — οὕτως ἄπειρον : a diff. word from ἄπειρος, above, being derived from alpha privative and πέρας or πεῖρας, end, /imit; in order to give the pred. adj. its proper force, render : the number of the land-army he led was so vast. Werod. says: ‘* For was there a nation in all Asia which Xerxes did not bring with him against Greece? Or was there a river, except those of unusual size, which sufficed for his troops to drink ?” Rawlinson’s transl., IV. p. 19.
28, 29. σημεῖον : H. 626, b; the foll. γάρ is epexegetic. He finds an incidental evidence of the magnitude of the host in the fact that it was con- sidered a saving of time to construct such a bridge for its transportation. — τὰ πεφ., the obstacles of nature; τὰ θ, mpay., the deeds of the gods; the latter referring doubtless to the storm which destroyed the first bridge, and to the other portents mentioned by Herod, — πλοῦν... ἠνάγ. γενέσθαι, forced a voyage to be made; explained by διορύξας .. Αθω. On this latter form, see H. 161; Goodw. 199. — τῶν piv... ὑπακου., some reluctantly submit- ting ; ἀκόντων and ἑκόντων are pred. adjj.; H. 619; Goodw. 926. Herod.
FUNERAL ORATION. 183
names various tribes “ that submitted without necessity, when their affairs were in good condition,” among them the Beeotians, except the Plateeans and Thespians. —dpodtepa: defined by the foll. appositives κέρδος and δέος ; H. 624, ες.
30, 31. avrol...2uBdvres, embarking in person ; not employing merce- nary troops and substitutes, as became common at a later date ; ἐπὶ... ἐβοήθ., went with assistance to. — -ῪΛακεδαιμόνιοι in § 31 is without a pred. On Scheibe’s suggestion we may supply ἀπώλοντο, perished, in the lacuna after ἔμελλον. This unwieldy sentence extends (acc. to Scheibe’s punctuation) unbroken into § 34. — τοῦ πλήθους: H. 748; G. 1117;.supply. a partit. gen. after it as the antec. of the foll. relatives. —ovx ἥττηθ., κι τ. A: they were killed, but not conquered, — a favorite thought with the orators. So Lycurgus, of those who fell at Chzronea, in almost the same words: οὐχ ἡττηθέντες, ἀλλ᾽ ἀποθανόντες ἔνθαπερ ἐτάχθησαν. (Against Leocrates, ὃ 48.) Isocr., Panegyr., 92, of the Spartans at Thermopylz: ‘‘ Surely it is wrong to say that they were conquered, for no one of them deigned to flee.”
32, 33. τῶν μέν : the Lacedzmonians ; τῶν δέ: the Persians ; τῆς παρ- όδου : of Thermopyle ; of μέν, the latter, — τοῖς... πράγμασιν, the dangers that encompassed them ; περιέστηκα often = to encompass in a threatening manner. --- ἐρήμην... λήψ., they (i.e. the barbarians) would take the city being left defenceless. — εἰ.. ἁλώσονται, but if, etc., that they (i. e. Athens) would be captured by the land-army. — ϑυνήσονται : join with ὅτι, above. — δυοῖν : gen. abs.; fwo (questions) being before them ; more freely : being called to decide whether it was best, etc. — μετὰ... γενομ., joining the bar- barians. —«péirrov: pred. adj. agr. with ἐλευθ.; H. 617; Goodw. 925.
34, 35. παῖδας, yuv., pyt.: emphatic omission of the art.; H. 660, a. Observe the same omission in transl. — ὃ τίς... ἰδών, on seeing which, who would not? etc.— ὡς.. ἠγωνίσθη, considering how great and terrible a danger .--was encountered ; instead of a causal cl. introd. by ὅτε οὕτως, we have an exclamation expressing the thought subjectively ; H. 1001; Gr. Moods, 580. — ποί. γνώμην, what feelings. — τοῦ.. κινδύνου (sc. ὄντος ἀπίστου), the ap- proaching conflict being of doubtful issue. — ὑπὲρ τ. φιλότητος, for their loved ones ; explained in the cl. immediately following. φιλότης, affection, is poetically put for the object of the affection; cf. Plato, ἐγγυτάτου τοῦ πόθου, nearest the object of his desire ; he has also ὦ φιλότης, my dear.
36, 37. περιειστήκει : see note on περιεστ., ὃ 32. — Td...mpoedévat, the prospect of their own death ; subj. of εἶναι. --- συμφοράν, calamity, pred. nom. agr. with the antec. of 4. — εὐτυχ.: H. 969,d; G. 1563, 5; ὑπεκτεθ.: cf. ὑπεκθ., ὃ 34; ἤλπιζον, were expecting. —% που, doubtless ; ἢ confirma- tive, as also in § 40, before πολύ. --- τὴν δὲ... πορθουμένην, and that the land was suffering devastation ; note the change of tense from the preced. — ἱερῶν δὲ.. ἀκού, δέ: Gr. Moods, 876.
184 NOTES ON ORATION II.
38. ἐν ταὐτῷ, αὐ the same time. — κραυγῆς τῶν διαφ., the shricks of the perishing. — τῆς Sad. μεστῆς : the sense requires another part., say αἰσθα- νόμενοι, perceiving, instead of dxovoryres. A striking illustration of this figure, zeugma, is found in M. 7:, 1 Corwiii. 2: γάλα ὑμᾶς ἐπότισα, οὐ βρῶμα, “7 gave you milk to drink, not meat.” Farrar (Greek Syntax), quoting this ex., remarks: ‘* This figure of speech is very rare in English, and illustrates more than any other the Greek quickness of apprehension.” — οὔσης τῆς ναυμαχ.: causal, and to be joined with dox., decause of the naval baitle being undecided, thinking ; τοτὲ μέν... «τοτὲ δέ, now...and now.
39. ὧν.. εἶδον : H. 996, anda; Goodw. 1032, and 1007. — θυσιῶν avapy., lit. remindings of sacrifices, enumeration (to the gods) of sacrifices offered. Others differently, as L. ἃ S.: recollection of vows to pay sacri- fices; Reiske: gue non concipiebantur victimarum vota.— ἔλεος... παίδων, compassion for children ; all these genitives objective ; H. 729, c; G. 1085, 3. _ 40, 41. τόλμης : H. 744; Goodw. 1102, and 1108.— κατὰ τὴν ἀρετὴν «οὐδιήνεγκαν, szmpassed, were superior to; see note, § 12, on ἀρετή. --- βασιλευομένων, sabjects of a king.
42, 43. πλεῖστα... καὶ KGAA....cuveB., they made the greatest and most honorable contributions. — ixavar....mpagat: describing the ideal leader ; γνώναι, 20 form a judgment, to decide, including the power to comprehend the exigencies of a crisis, and to decide on the requisite action. — καίτοι, accordingly; ἂν... ἤρισαν (épifw), would have contended, claimed to be equal; γνώμῃ, judgment ; cf. γνῶναι, above. —avapduoB., without dispute ; pred. adj.; ὁμονοοῦσαν, corresponding to, commensurate τυΐίλ, ---- γνησίαν kal αὐτόχ., genuine and native ; the first implying that their valor was not a spurious or assumed virtue ; the second, that it was not an imported one, or borrowed from others.
44, 45. κοινὴν... ἐκτήσ., hey gained a common freedom for the rest also ; the verb foll. by a pred. adj. as in §§ 5, 43, and 24. —Io®puév: the build- ing of the wall across the Isthmus had been begun on the approach of Xerxes. It was resumed on the approach of Mardonius, who, however, after invading Attica, fell back into Boeotia, where the campaign was ended by the battle of Plateea. — ἀγαπώντων... σωτ., being content with their own safety. — διαν... περιιδεῖν, Aurposing to look on and allow; tmd...yevopé- vous: cf. wera...yevou., ὃ 33. —’A@nvatior: as Herodotus relates it, it was Chileiis, a Tegean, who reminded the Lacedzemonians of the uselessness of ἡ their plan of self-defence. (Bk. IX. 9.) — ἐκείνοις : i. 6. the Persians ; τού- τους: i.e. the Peloponnesians.—torer@Oar...Bacwd., would belong to the king; on the omission of the art., see H. 663.
46, 47. ϑιδασκ., suffering themselves to be taught; one meaning of the pass., and suitable to the tense used. — αὐτοὶ μέν : emphasizes the subj. of ποιεῖν and Bovd., in contrast with ᾿Αθηναίους, --- αὐτοῖς : after παραινεῖν ;
FUNERAL ORATION. 185
ἐβοήθ. els: cf. ἐβοήθ. ἐπί, ὃ 30. --- τοὺς ἀπογν., who had despaired of. — βέβαιον : constr. like κοινήν, ὃ 43; κατειργ., achieved, secured. — μεθ᾽ dv: with whom, on whose side. — ἡγεμόνες : the Athenian hegemony (ἡγεμονία), or leadership in Grecian affairs, is usually dated from about 477 B. C.; see Grote, Vol. V. p. 290 seg. The battle of Platzea was fought in 479.
48. In §§ 48-53, mention is made of the war against Corinth and Aégina in alliance with Sparta. It broke out 457 B. c. Little is known concerning it. Thucydides is the chief authority, and his account is almost as brief as this. See Thucyd., Bk. I. 105, 106; also Grote, Vol. V. p. 320 seg. The speaker, indeed, seems to have taken Thucydides as his authority, if we may judge from the strikingly similar phraseology.
καταστάντος... γεγ., Aaving broken out through jealousy on account of what had taken place ; τῶν wempay.: ref. to the achievements of the Athe- nians. — μικρῶν... .δεόμ., and each needing but few grievances, i. 6. pretexts for war. — vavp. ᾽Αθ....γενομένης, @ xaval battle having been fought by the Athenians, — ἐλάμβανον : ref. το ᾿Αθηναίοις for its subj. Observe the irreg- ularity of construction above, by which φρονοῦντες and δεόμενοι are in the nom. instead of the gen. absol.; H. 1063. See a similar instance, /ed/en., 11. 2. 3: ὁ ἕτερος...παραγγέλων.
49. πολιορκούντων : sc. ᾿Αθηναίων ; H. 972, ἃ. --- τῆς HA. ἀπούσης, the men capable of bearing arms being absent ; ἡλικία, in this and similar con- nections, denotes the age during which Athenians were liable to military duty. They were enrolled as citizens at 18; then, after serving two years in the home-guard, were liable to military duty abroad from 20 to 60, — in all 42 years of nominal or actual service. In a collective sense, ἡ ἡλικία (also the pl. αἱ ἡλικίαι) denotes the entire military force of the city, namely, the 42 successive enrolments or military classes which constituted the Athe- nian army. — ἔρημον : pred.; cf. ἐρήμην in ὃ 32; ἐμβαλεῖν is fut. — ἄξειν τὸ στρατ., that they would draw off the encamped army. —Tepaveav : Gera- neia, the mountain-range west of Megara.
50. τῶν μὲν ἀπ΄, some (of their troops) deing at a distance, i.e. in Egypt; τῶν δέ, others, i.e. those in Aigina; οὐδένα... μεταπέμπ., had the courage not to send for either. —ot...yeyovdéres, those who were under the military age. Cf. Thuc.: οἱ πρεσβύτατοι καὶ οἱ νεώτατοι, the oldest and the youngest. — τὸν κίνδ. ποιήσασθαι : cf. ὃ 21; αὐτοὶ μόνοι : join with the subj. of the infinitive. ἣ
51, 52. οἱ μέν, the former; αὐτοί, themselves, i.e. in their own ex- perience. They had no need to imitate others, but simply to repeat their own deeds. — Μυρωνίδου orpar., with Myronides as general; ἄπαντ. at- τοί: see αὐτός, L. ἃ S., 1. 3. — τοῖς ἤδη ἀπ΄, those now past service ; i.e. disabled by old age ; this and the foll. phrase are in the instrum. dat., where the nom, would be more natural, the ref. being to the same persons as the
186 NOTES ON ORATION II.
subj. — τοὺς.. ἀπαντήσαντες, having gone (I say) into a foreign land to meet those who had presumed to invade theirs ; 1 have added parentheses to the text of Scheibe.
53. οἱ μὲν... σώμασιν (sc. duvduevor): syn. with rois...daecpyxdcr, above. — κρείττους : their bravery superior to their physical strength. — of μὲν... ἔπαιδεύοντο, the latter went back to their teachers ; παιδεύομαι (pass.), 20 receive instruction.
54. The orator now epitomizes (§§ 54-57) the beneficial results of the policy pursued by Athens during her primacy in Greece; the contrast of succeeding events might well bring Hellas to these tombs bewailing her buried liberties (58 -- 60).
ἐν ἅπ... χρόνῳ : not the same as ὁ πᾶς χρόνος, § 1, but the whole period treated of in this discourse. — τῶν... ἀνδρῶν : including those previously buried in the Ceramicus.
55, 56. παρασχόντες, rendering ; syn. with ἀποδείκνυμι. See Lex. — τοῖς ὀλίγοις : the policy of Sparta was to establish oligarchies in her depend- encies. — τὸ ἴσον, eguality ; H.621,b; G. 933. -— κἀκείνους, them too ; the policy of the Athenians (he maintains) was to strengthen their allies as well as themselves. — 6 μ. βασιλεύς ; i. e. the Persian monarch. — ἐδίδου... éavrot, was yielding up some of his own possessions ; H. 736; G. 1097, 1.
57. καὶ οὔτε: the foll. clauses also dep. on ὥστε. --- προστάτας, ἡγεμό- vas, champions, leaders ; γίγνεσθαι : its subj. is implied ;: the living Athe- nians who stood in the places of the fallen.
58. ἀπολομένων : at Aigospotami. — εἴτε fy. κακίᾳ, whether (it was) dy a commander's treason. ‘*Of this suspicion both Konon and Philokles stand clear. Adeimantus was named as the chief traitor, and Tydeus along with him.” Grote, Vol. VIII. p. 220; see also his note. — συμφορᾶς : pred. after yevou. For ἐκείνης, see H. 632, a; agrees with its pred. -noun, — ἦν, ad been. Says Grote (Vol. VIII. p. 191): ‘* We shall be warranted in affirming that the first years of the Spartan empire, which followed upon the victory of AEgospotami, were years of all-pervading tyranny and multi- farious intestine calamity, such as Greece had never before endured.”
59. ἕτ.... ἡγεμόνων : ref. to the Lacedeemonian hegemony, or supremacy. — οἱ... ἐμβαίνοντες, those who formerly did not embark upon the sea ; i. 6. the Persians. The Persian fleet of Pharnabazus conquered the fleet of Sparta and her allies at Cnidus, B. c. 394. (Cf. Grote, IX. p. 282 ; Cur- tius, IT. p. 254 seg.) It was the Athenian Conon, however, who commanded the Persians, — εἰς τ, Εὐρώπην : Pharnabazus with his fleet sailed the fol- lowing spring to the Peloponnesian coast. ‘The appearance of a Persian satrap with a Persian fleet, as master of the Peloponnesian Sea and the Sa- ronic Gulf, was a phenomenon astounding to Grecian eyes. And if it was not equally offensive to Grecian sentiment, this was in itself a melancholy
FUNERAL ORATION. 187
proof of the degree to which Pan-hellenic patriotism had been stifled by the Peloponnesian War and the Spartan empire. No Persian tiara had been seen near the Saronic Gulf since the battle of Salamis.” (Grote, IX. p. 321.) — ϑουλεύουσι, ave in slavery; ἔγκαθ., have been placed in power. These things could hardly have been said till some time after the conclusion of the treaty of Antalcidas, B. c. 387. How great the humiliation of Greece was at that time, see depicted by Grote, IX. 385, and the foll. chapter.
60. ἄξιον qv: sc. ἄν. --- ὥστε.. ἀρετῇ : quoted by Pausanias, and sup- posed to be the passage freely quoted by Aristotle (Ret, III. 10), who instances it as a happy combination of antithesis with personifying metaphor ; ‘*had he said there was reason she should weep, her liberty having been buried with them, it would indeed have been metaphor and personification ; but the words ‘her liberty,’ ‘their valor,’ have a certain antithesis”; ὡς, κι τ΄ X., considering that her own liberty was being buried with their valor; αὑτῶν : ref. to the collective Ἑλλάδι. Lycurgus (Oraz. ag. Leocrates, 50) says of the dead at Cheronea: συνετάφη γὰρ τοῖς τούτων σώμασιν ἡ τῶν ἄλλων Ἑλλήνων ἐλευθερία. --- ἑτέρων... λαβόμενος, 27: meeting other leaders ; i. e. when the Greeks were led by others than Athenians. — τῷ δὲ.. ζῆλος ἐγγίνεται, while in the latter there is springing up a disposition to emulate, etc. :
61. An eloquent tribute (δ 61-66) to those who fell fighting under Thrasybulus for the restoration of the Athenian democracy. This could be fitly spoken by Lysias, who had shared the reverses and the triumph of the exiles.
ἐξήχθην, 7 have been led off; ταῦτα μέν : obj. of ὀλοῴ., to give utterance to these lamentations. Observe the antithetic μέν and δέ; these lamenta- tions for Greece are aside from the purpose of my discourse ; my eulogy finds a more fitting theme in those men who restored free government to Athens. — περὶ τοῦ δικαίου : as in § 17. — wavras...xext., having made all men their enemies ; rhetorical exaggeration, referring to the fact mentioned at the end of § 62, that they fought not only against the enemies of their country, but against their countrymen themselves.
62. κοινὴν... καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις, as a common possession to the rest also; ψυχαῖς, courage. — οὐχ... ὀργιζόμενοι : this contrast of blended motives, — shame and rage, —is a fine one. — πολεμίους δέ, κ. τ. ., and (having) as enemies (not only) those who were formerly (such), but also, etc.
63. σώμασι.. ἑαυτῶν : i. 6. not depending on mercenaries alone. — μάρ- Tupas : appos. with τοὺς... τάφους. Xenophon mentions that the Lacede- monians who fell in one of the engagements were buried in the Ceramicus. (Hellen., Il. 4. 33.) — kal yap τοι : see note, § 20. — ἀπέδειξαν, ἀπέφηναν : both these verbs are used in the sense 40 cause to be, to render. —relxn: it was Conon who rebuilt the walls, after the battle of Cnidus, 394.
188 NOTES ON ORATION II.
64. αὐτῶν : partit. gen.; ἀδελφὰ... τοῖς ἔργοις, kindred to the deeds, — ἐτράποντο, devoted themselves ; read the remarks of Grote (IX. p. 367) on the character of Thrasybulus. He says: ‘In him the energy of a successful leader was combined with complete absence both of vindictive antipathies for the past, and of overbearing ambition for himself. — ἐλαττοῦσθαι... πλέον ἔχειν : the ref. is to their privileges as citizens; render: metther being able to suffer encroachment upon their privileges, nor wanting to have more for themselves (i. e. more than had belonged to them under the constitution). — μετέδοσαν, gave a share of; foll. by τῆς... ἐλευθερίας.
65. ὅτι.. ἔδυσ.: obj. cl. after dwedoy., they repelled the charges against them, (showing) that, etc. — βίᾳ, in spite of. — δμονοοῦντες : conditional, as shown by the ἄν belonging with ἐδύναντο.
66. A brief mention of the allies and mercenary troops that assisted Thrasybulus. The ‘‘men of Phyle” received reinforcements from the Me- garians and Argives, and more especially from the Thebans.
τῷ πλήθει, the people; see note, XII. 42. — πατρίδα... ἡγησάμενοι, ve- garding valor as their native country ; that is, regarding as their home and country any spot where glory was to be won.
67. The eulogy (δὲ 67 — 76) of those whose remains were now receiving interment. ;
καινοὶ... γενόμενοι, entering into a new alliance ; the part. logically sub- ordinate to βοηθήσαντες, hence without a connective ; cf. a similar use of γενόμ. in ὃ 69. On the formation of this league, see Curtius’s /77s¢., Vol. IV. p- 243. — οὐ.. ἔχοντες : causal and explanatory ; for they did not cherish the same spirit, etc.; from od on through the parenthesis may better be rendered at the close of the sentence. — οἱ μέν, che latter ; ot δέ, but they; i.e. the Athenians who aided the Corinthians. — τῆς port. ἔχθρας : as a Pelopon- nesian state and an ally of Sparta, Corinth had more than once been at war with Athens. The Peloponnesian War, it will be remembered, began by the Athenians taking the part of the Corcyrseans against Corinth.
68. μεγάλην... “Ἑλλάδα, exdeavoring to render Hellas great; a use of the part. similar to χαριζύμενοι, § 8. — ἐκείνων : ref. to τῶν πολεμίων. In their contest with Sparta, they were fighting the battles of the very states that were in league with Sparta, — the tributary states of the Peloponnesus, -- νικήσαντες, when victorious; τῶν αὐτῶν : the same liberties that they themselves enjoyed.
69, 70. οὗτοι : the same as ol θαπτόμενοι, ὃ 67.— διασώσαντες, having hept untarnished.— ἐπηνώρθωσαν : double augment; H. 361; Goodw. 544; render: made good the ill-successes of others. — τὰ τροφεῖα, the filial debt ; the debt due to their country for their rearing and education ; see Lex.
71, 72, τοῦ ἐπ. βίου, because of the life still left them; H. 7443 G. 1126. — περὶ ἐλάττονος... ἡγούμενοι: see note, XII. 7. -- ἀδελφούς,
FUNERAL ORATION. 189
k. Tt X.: art. omitted; see note to § 34. — πολλῶν.... ὁπαρχόντων : gen. abs.; cf. XII. 97. Miiller: 2 ¢anta malorum multitudine et gravitate ; render : in view of the many sufferings to which they are exposed. — νεώτεροι νον ἢ ὥστε εἰδέναι, too young to know; H.954; οἵων: H. tort, a; Kiihn, 344, Rem. 1, last sentence.
73. τούτων : neut., after the comparative; it refers to the following clauses. — ἀδυνάτους... τῷ σώματι : cf. τοῖς σώμασιν.... δυνάμενοι, ὃ 53. ὑπὸ ἐλεεῖσθαι : i.e. that those same ones who formerly envied them should now be looking on them with pity, — one of the sharpest ‘‘ arrows of outrageous fortune.” — ἄνδ. ἀμείνους : pred. after ἦσαν.
; 74. πῶς... χρή, and how are they to, etc, See L. ἃ 8., χρή, 1|. --- ἀλλὰ οὐ μεμνῆσθαι, "αν, 1} ἐς reasonable at such a time that the rest (of the citizens) remember then, i.e. the bereaved ; ἀλλά thus used implies ot so! on the contrary ; it is sometimes rendered why. The next ἀλλά introd. one of the series of rhetorical questions, and may be rendered or; see note, XII. 40. — λυπῆσαι : subj. of ἐστί understood. — &AAG...KwwSbvous: the answer to this question, instead of being introd. by ἀλλά, dwt, like the preceding question, — is made a cl. dep. on the interrog. sent. itself. — μέγα φρονοῦντας, k. τ. X.,, exulting over their misfortunes ; τούτων seems to be used instead of αὐτῶν, because the persons referred to are present before the speaker.
75. χάριν: pred. accus., ταύτην being the direct obj. of dwod.; H. 726; Goodw. 1080 ; for the gender of ταύτην, which refers to the rest of the sen- tence, commencing with εἰ, see note XII. 37. Render: zt seems to me that this is the only return we can make. Observe, however, that μόνην agrees with ταύτην. --- περὶ.. «ποιοίμεθα, should highly honor. — ὥσπερ... ὄντες, as if we were ourselves their fathers.
76. τῶν ζώντων: gen. after τίνας. --- προσήκοντας: used substantively, but foll. by the same case as its verb. It is sometimes foll. (as a subst.) by a limiting gen. — τὸ ἴσον τ. ἄλλοις, equally with the rest, i. e. no more than the rest. — ἀποθανόντων : gen. abs.; supply τούτων from the preceding ; H. 972,a; Gr. Moods, 848.
77- Peroration, administering consolation to the surviving friends of the deceased. Death is the common lot of man. . These now buried are not to be lamented, but counted happy; for they chose their own destiny, and have gained immortal honors.
ἀλλὰ γάρ: cf. ΧΙΠ. 99; but. — οὐ γὰρ... θνητοί, for we were not unaware of our being mortal; H. 984; Goodw. 1586; Greek Moods, 887 and 892. The student would do well to note two points in regard to this character- istically Greek construction : first, that λανθάνω, fo escape the notice of, is an active verb, though not usually translated by such in Eng.; second, that the part. ὄντες (with θνητοί) not only agrees grammatically with the subject, but
190 NOTES ON ORATION II.
is Jogicadly an integral part of the subject. Cf. οἶδα θνητὸς dv, J know that “7 am mortal, in which the part. with the adj. logically forms a part of the object. — ἢ.. φέρειν, or to be so exceedingly sad. — ὃ θάνατος, x. τ. X.: cf. Ilorace, Odes, I. 4:
“ Pallida Mors zquo pulsat pede pauperum tabernas Regumque turres.”
“ Pale Death with impartial foot strikes at the hovels of the poor and the towers of princes.”
78. ἄξιον (jv): dv also to be supplied, as in § 60. — καὶ νόσων....γήρως, subject both to diseases and to old age ; gen. after compar. — ὃ.. εἰληχώς, who presides over, to whom ἐς allotted. ‘The orations contain no intimation more distinct than this of Lysias’s religious conceptions ; see note, XIIT. 63.
79. οἵτινες, in that they; the indef. relat. with a slight causal force; H. 910; Gr. Moods, 580. — οὐκ.. τῇ τύχῃ, not intrusting themselves (lit. concerning themselves) to fortune ; ἐπιτρέπω is usually followed by the accus. and dat., but ἐπ. τινὶ περί twos, to trust to one concerning something, is a construction found in Plato and Menander. — καὶ γάρ τοι: see note, ὃ 26. Miiller, however, renders : am profecto, which would introd. the reason for προσήκει.. ἡγεῖσθαι, above.
80. ot: for a similar emphatic use of the rel., see XII. 40; the cl. has a causal force, being explanatory of the preceding. — dyaves...papys καὶ σοφίας kal πλούτου : Pluto says (Menex., 21) of Athens: ‘*She never ceases honoring the dead every year, celebrating in public the rites which are proper to each and all; and in addition to this, holding gymnastic and equestrian festivals, and musical festivals of every sort.” (Jowett’s transl.) A parallel passage to the present section is found in the fragment remaining from the Olympic oration of Lysias, mentioning the establishment of the Olympic Games by Hercules: ‘‘ After he had put down the tyrants, and checked the insolence of the oppressors, he instituted in the fairest spot of Hellas a contest of bodies, and an ambitious display of wealth, and an ex- hibition of intellect.” XXXIIT. 2. — ds...8vras: H. 974 ; Goodw. 1570; ταῖς αὐτ.. ἀθανάτους, with the same honors as the immortals ; i.e. the gods. For καί after ὁ αὐτός, see H. 1042, a.
81. θανάτου: H. 745, b; G. τι26, --- γενέσθαι: dep. on κρεῦττον ; οἵτινες : see note, § 79.—8pws δέ, but yet; in adversative contrast with the preceding sent., introd. by μεν. --- θεραπεύοντας, honoring.
CHRONOLOGICAL TABLE
TO ILLUSTRATE
\
THE ORATIONS OF LYSIAS CONTAINED IN
B.C. 444.
431. 429. 421. 413. 4τι.
4ο6. 405.
404.
403.
THIS VOLUME.
Birth of Lysias.
Beginning of the Peloponnesian War; April 4.
Cephalus, the father of Lysias, removes with his family to Thurii.
The Peace of Nicias.
The Sicilian Expedition. ν
Lysias and his brother Polemarchus return to Athens.
The Four Hundred, — in power about four months, from March to June. Battle of Arginuse ; September.
Battle of AEgospotami; August.
Committee of Five “ Ephors”; Autumn.
Blockade of Athens. Theramenes sent as ambassador to Sparta; Autumn.
Second embassy of Theramenes ; Spring.
Surrender of Athens to Lysander, —the end of the Peloponnesian War; latter part of April.
Establishment of the Thirty Tyrants; June.
Execution of Dionysodorus and others ; Summer.
A Spartan garrison placed in the Acropolis ; about October. Reaction among the Thirty. The execution of Theramenes.
Thrasybulus takes possession of Phyle; about January.
Victory of Thrasybulus in Munychia; flight of the Thirty, and appointment of the Ten; February.
192 CHRONOLOGICAL TABLE.
Thrasybulus holds Pireeus and Munychia; Spring and Summer. Skirmish with the Spartans near the Pirzeus; June. Negotiations with Pausanias; Summer.
Return of the Exiles headed by Thrasybulus, Sept. 21, and the Restoration of the democratic constitution. Euclides chosen First Archon.
Oration against Eratosthenes. 401-400. Expedition of Cyrus, and Retreat of the Ten Thousand. 399. ‘Trial and death of Socrates. 395- Beginning of the Corinthian War. 394. Battle of Cnidus; August. 387. Peace of Antalcidas.
THE END.
EDUCATIONAL PUBLICATIONS
S, C. GRIGGS ἃ CO., CHICAGO. Gatcie emion
BOISE — FIRST LESSONS IN GREEK. A new edition. Revised by J. 6. Patrrencitt. Adapted to Goodwin’s, and to Hadley-Allen’s Grammar, and intended as an Introduction to Xenophon’s Anabasis. $1.00.
BOISE— FIRST THREE BOOKS OF HOMER’S ILIAD. With Explanatory Notes, and References to the Grammars of Goodwin, Hadley, and Hadley-Allen. By James R. Βοιβε, Ph.D., LL.D. 12mo, Cloth. $1.00.
BOISE— FIRST SIX BOOKS OF HOMER’S ILIAD. With Explanatory Notes, and References to the Grammars of Goodwin, Hadley, and Hadley Allen. Revised Edition. By J. R. Boisz, Ph.D., LL.D 12mo. Cloth. $1.50.
BOISE—EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. Being Exercises in some of the more difficult Principles of Greek Syntax; with References to the Grammars of Crosby, Curtius, Goodwin, Hadley, Hadley-Allen, and Kiihner. A Sequel to “ Jones’s Greek Prose Composition.” By J. R. Borsz, Ph.D. $1 25.
BOISE AND FREEMAN —SELECTIONS FROM VARI- OUS GREEK AUTHORS. For the First Year in College. With Explanatory Notes, and References to Goodwin’s Greek Grammar and to Hadley’s Larger and Smaller Grammars. By J. R. Boise, Ph.D., LL.D., and J. C. Freeman, M.A. 1zmo. Cloth. - $2.00.
CHITTENDEN — ELEMENTS OF ENGLISH COMPOSI- TION. A Preparation for Rhetoric. By Lucy A. CHITTENDEN. 12mo. Cloth. 60 cents.
“ Progressive. suggestive, and thoroughly practical.” — Prof Ε. E. Smith, Purdue University, Ind.
“ After thorough trial in the class I unhesitatingly commend it.” — F. S. Hotaling, Prin High School, Framingham, Mass.
** As an elementary book, I know no work equal to it.” — A. Martin, LL.D., Pres of De Pauw University, Ind.
“Tt ought to be used in every high school.” — A. V. Hewett, Supt. of Schools, Abilene, Kan.
** Between 600 and 700 copies will be required for immediate use.”” — Z. A. Paul, Prin. of High School, Washington, D.C
CROSS—ECLECTIC SHORT-HAND. Writing by Principles instead of Arbitrary Signs, for General Use and Verbatim Reporting. By J. Gso. Cross, A.M. Complete in one volume. 12mo. Cloth. $2.00.
D’OOGE — DEMOSTHENES ON THE CROWN. With Ex- tracts from the Oration of A°schines against Ctesiphon, and Explanatory Notes. By M. L. D’OocGe, Ph.D. Professor of Greek, University af Michigan. Cloth. $1-50
Educational Publications of 5. C. Griggs & Co.
JONES — EXERCISES IN GREEK PROSE COMPOSI- TION. With References to the Grammars of Hadley and Allen, Gocdwin, and Kiihner and Taylor, and a full English-Greek vocabulary. By ErtsHa Jongs, M.A., Professor in the University of Michigan. r2mo. Half leather. $1.00.
JONES — FIRST LESSONS IN LATIN. Adapted to the Latin Grammars of Allen and Greenough, Andrews and Stoddard, Bartholomew, Bullions and Morris, Chase, Gildersleeve, and Harkness. By ELIsHa Jongs, M.A. i2mo Half leather. $1. 13.
JONES — EXERCISES IN LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. With References to the Grammars of Allen and Greenough, Andrews and Stoddard, Bartholomew, Bullions and Morris, Gildersleeve, and Harkness. By Exisua JoNEs, M.A. $1.00.
MORRIS— MANUAL OF CLASSICAL LITERATURE. Comprising biographical and critical notices of principal Greek and Roman authors, illustrative extracts from their works, etc. By CHARLES Morris. 12mo. Cloth, $1.50.
PETERSON — NORWEGIAN-DANISH GRAMMAR AND READER. With a Vocabulary designed for American Students of the Norwegian- Danish language. By Rev. Ὁ. I. P. Pererson, Professor of Scandinavian Literature. r2mo. Cloth. $1.25.
STEVENS—SELECT ORATIONS OF LYSIAS. With Intro ductions and Explanatory Notes. By W. A. Stevens, A. M. 12mo, Cloth. $1.25-
WELSH— ESSENTIALS OF GEOMETRY. By A.H. WELsH,
Professor in Ohio State University. 8vo. Cloth. $1.25.
WELSH — DEVELOPMENT OF ENGLISH LITERATURE AND LANGUAGE. By Prof. A. H. Wetsu. University Edition. Complete in 1 vol., unabridged. Crown 8vo. Cloth. $3.00.
“ΤῸ is a work greatly needed. In plan and execution it seems to me all that could be asked for.” — Yohn G. Whittier.
“ Welsh’ ‘English Literature’ is unsurpassed for usefulness.” — ¥. Ernest Whit ney, Instructor in English in Yale College.
WINCHELL— GEOLOGICAL EXCURSIONS; or, The Rudi- ments of Geology for Young Learners. By ALEXANDER WINCHELL, LL. D., Profes- sor of Geology, etc., University of Michigan, Illustrated. 1zmo. Cloth. $1.25.
WINCHELL — GEOLOGICAL STUDIES; or, Elements of Ge- ology for High Schools, Colleges, Normal and other Schools. By ALEXANDER Wincuett, LL.D. One vol. 12mo. 540 pages, with 367 fine illustrations. $2.50.
“Tt abounds with most excellent points and valuable information, and seems an American book beyond any other I have seen.””— Prof. A. P. Kelsey, Hamilton College, N. Y.
“1 find it full of admirable suggestions in the way, τ conducting instruction, and of presenting the topics of geology to a class.’ —H. 5. Williams, Prof. of Nat. Sci Cornell \/niversity.
--...-. en
Descriptive Circulars sent on application. Books will be mailed, postage paid, on receipt of price.
1253 5
te
Sens
Soret ee See ere. SLE SAN aber ee ene
oe Remo
Se
eS